REESE LIBRARY
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA.
J/
Received.
Accessions No.Z-^TQ? Shelf No..
GREEK GRAMMAR,
FOR THE
USE LEARNERS.
BY E. A. SOPHOCLES, A. M.
SECOND EDITION.
HARTFORD:
H. HUNTINGTON, JUN.
NEW YORK:
F. J. HUNTINGTON AND COMPANY,
174 PEARL STREET.
1840.
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1838, by
H. HUNTINGTON, Jun. ;
in the Clerk's office of the District Court of the District of Connecticut,
CAMBRIDGE :
POLSOM, WELLS, AND THURSTON,
PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY.
fasg
PREFACE.
THE materials, of which this compendious
Grammar is composed, have been drawn from
the best sources.
The examples given in the Syntax are taken
from the following classic authors : Homer,
Hesiod, Pindar, jiEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides,
Aristophanes, Theocritus; Herodotus, Thucydides,
Xenophon, Lysias, Isocrates, ^Eschines, Demos-
thenes, Plato, Aristotle.
Those rules, which should be first read and
which should be committed to memory, are print-
ed in the largest type (as ^ 136. 1).
E. A. S.
NEW HAVEN,
October 20*A, 1839.
CONTENTS.
PART 1. LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.
Page
The Greek Alphabet -
Accent -
p, f .
Vo%vels . - 4
Enclitics
16
Diphthongs ... 5
Breathings - - - 6
Conn action -
Crasis ....
17
18
Consonants -
Elision ....
19
Euphonic Changes - - 7
Syncope, Metathesis, and Apheeresis
19
Movable Consonants 11
Punctuation ....
20
Syllables - - - - 12
Pronunciation ...
20
Quantity of Syllables - - 13
PART II. INFLECTION OF WORDS.
Parts of Speech ... 23 Augment ....
84
Noun - - - - 23
First Declension - - -
Syllabic Augment
Temporal Augment ...
84
86
Second Declension - - - 27
Third Declension
Augment of Compound Verb*
Verbal Roots and Terminations
87
83
Syncopated Nouns of the Third Declension 36
Contracts of the Third Declension - 37
Indicative Mood -
Subjunctive Mood - - '
59
92
Indeclinable Nouns -
Optative Mood -
93
Defective Nouns 45
Infinitive Mood -
95
Adjectives - - - - 45
Participle -
96
Adjectives in o? -
Perfect and Pluperfect Passive and Middle
96
Adjectives in oo? - - 48
Adjectives in vg . _ 48
Aorist Passive
Accent of Verbs -
Formation of the Tenses
99
100
101
Adjectives in ^ and s . . 49
Present Active ...
Imperfect Active
101
105
Compound Adjectives - - 54
Anomalous and Defective Adjectives 55
First and Second Perfect Active
First and Second Pluperfect Active
First and Second Future Active
106
108
108
Degrees of Comparison - -
First and Second Aorist Active
110
112
Comparison by jcov, nrrog - 58
Anomalous and Defective Comparison 59
Numerals - - . 61
Cat dinal Numbers - . - 61
Ordinal Numbers - - 63
Numeral Substantives, Adjectives, and Ad-
Pluperfect Passive
First and Second Aorist Passive
First, Second, and Third Future Passive
Present, Imperfect, Perfected Pluperfect
Middle
First and Second Future Middle
112
113
114
115
' 116
116
Article - - " - 64
First and Second Aorist Middle
Contract Verbs -
117
118
Pronoun ... 65
Personal Pronoun - - 65
Verbs in ^. ...
124
Reflexive Pronoun - - 67
Anomalous Verbs
135
Possessive Pronoun - - .68
Adverb ....
168
Interrogative Pronoun 68
Indefinite Pronoun - 69
Comparison of Adverbs
Derivation of Words
171
172
Demonstrative Pronoun 69
Relative Pronoun - - -70
Derivation of Substantives
Derivation of Adjectives -
172
175
Reciprocal Pronoun 71
Pronominal Adjectives - - 71
Derivation of Verbs -
Composition of Words
176
177
Verb - - - 73
PART III. SYNTAX.
Substantive - - - 179
Passive -
229
Adjective 180
Middle
230
Article - - - -181
Deponent Verbs ...
232
Pronoun 185
Tenses
232
Personal Pronoun - - 185
Present, Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future
232
Reflexive Pronoun - - 187
Imperfect
234
Possessive Pronoun - - - 188
Third Future ...
234
Interrogative Pronoun 188
Aorist
234
Moods ....
235
Demonstrative Pronoun - 189
Indicative ...
235
Relative Pronoun ... 190
Subjunctive ...
237
Reciprocal Pronoun 194
Optative
239
Subject and Predicate - - 194
Imperative
242
Object -..- 201
Infinitive ...
242
Accusative .... 202
Participle
248
248
Dathe - - - .221
Vocative 227
Preposition - ,
250
252
Voice* - - . -227
Interjection
255
Active ... 227
Irregular Construction
257
PART IV. VERSIFICATION.
Feet - - . 259
Dactylic Verse ...
264
Trochaic Verse 261
Anapestic Verse ...
266
Iambic Verse - . - . -262
GREEK INDEX - 267 I ABBREVIATIONS
284
KNGUSU INDEX - . 276 J
or THE
{JWI7ERSITY|
LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.
THE GREEK ALPHABET.
1. 1. The Greek alphabet consists of the
following twenty-four letters :
Figure.
Representative.
Name.
A a
Jl
a
"AX(pa, Jllpha
B j8 6
B
b
Srftot, Beta
r 7 r
G
g
rappa, Gamma
// 3
D
d
^/f'Ara Delta
E s
E
e
"EylXov Epsilon
z :
Z
z
ZrJTa, Zeta
H j?
E
e
^Hra Eta
e & e
TH
th
0fJTa Theta
i i
I
i
'Icorot, Iota
K x
K
k
Kdmta, Kappa
A A
L
I
AdfuflSa. Lambda
M ft
M
m
Mv J\lu or My
N v
JV
n
Nv J\u or J\Ty
S |
X
x
SI Xi
o .
*O pixgovOmicron
n n w
p
P
Hi Pi
P 9
R
r
'P Rho
2 a s final
S
s
2fyfia Sigma
T r 1
T
t
Tav Tau
T v
Uor Y u or y
r Ti/yAoV Upsilon
y
PH
ph
0i Phi
x x
CH
ch
XI Chi
*P y
PS
ps
Tl Psi
SI a,
1
r J2 fisya Omega
2 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 1.
2. These letters are divided into vowels and
consonants. The vowels are a, f, ??, e, o, v, o
the consonants are /J, y, 5, , #, *, A, ^, i/ 5 1, TT, p,
NOTE 1. E was originally used both as a vowel and as a breathing. It
was qualified by the adjective v/'/Xov, smooth (not aspirated), only when it was
used as a vowel. Anciently this vowel stood also for n and the diphthong u.
E. g. utSfy was written AI0EP.
H was originally equivalent to the rough breathing. E. g. %VTKP was writ-
ten HEIIAP, tep<tt 9 HE0MO2.
O stood also for u and the diphthong ot>. E. g. Koiff%u was written IIA-
2XO, g%ovirt, EXO2I. It seems, that there was a time when O and H were
distinguished from each other only by their size : hence the epithets ^/*gv,
anall, and p'tya., large.
X also was originally used both as a vowel and as a breathing. It was
called ^/iX.ev only when it was used as a vowel. As a breathing, or rather as
a consonant, it was probably equivalent to the obsolete letter digamma. The
modern Greeks still pronounce it like v orf, in the diphthongs &v and a.v.
NOTE 2. Before the introduction of <I> and X, the Greeks wrote IIH for
<, and KH for X. E. g. they wrote EKELHANTOI 'E*0v<, EnET-
KHOMENO2 lviu%op,svos. Here H is equivalent to the rough breathing.
TH was probably never used for 0.
They wrote also K2 or X2 for 3, and 3>2 for T. E. g. AEK2AI for
&*/, THEAEX2ATO for $3iiT, O2TXA2 for -v/^*.
NOTE 3. The most ancient Greek alphabet had three other letters, which
disappeared from it in later times, and then were called lar/V^a, numeral marks.
These are F or g 9 O or fa, and *^.
F or s, Easy, VaU) or A/ya^a, Digamma, (that is, double gamma, so
called on account of its form F, ) corresponds to the Latin F or V. It is still
to be seen in some ancient inscriptions.
V or ^/, Ktfircra, Jbppa, corresponds to the Latin Q. It was probably
a deep guttural.
^^ , 2av or 2a^?rr, San or Sampi, was perhaps sounded like the Eng-
lish sh.
REMARK. The mark g representing trr must not be confounded with the
digamma.
NOTE 4. We observe, that o is used only at the beginning
or middle, and g at the end of a word. E. g. afcrwa^fiVo?, not
Some editors unnecessarily put g at the end of a word com-
pounded with another. E. g. 'slsiqxopai for
for dv0TV%i)g t ogxig for
NOTE 5. The letters of the Greek alphabet are employed
also as numeral f-gures. The first eight letters denote units 9
THE GREEK ALPHABET.
the next eight, tens, and the last eight, hundreds. The obso-
lete letters $-, /^ 97^ denote 6, 90, 900, respectively.
Observe, that the letters denoting units, tens, or hundreds,
have an accent above.
Thousands commence the alphabet again, with a stroke
underneath.
Here follows a table of numerals.
a
1
M
11
A'
30
ft
2
iff
12
1*
40
/
3
I/
13
V
50
4
#
14
f
60
8
5
IS
15
r
70
g
6
19
16
71
80
t
7
17
h'
90
n
8
IT)'
18
Q
100
&
9
Off
19
200
i
10
X
20
r
T
300
Examples, t ctuA.ri = 1838, ^
/
1776,
,r
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
2000
3000
&c.
f = 1821.
NOTE 6. There is another method of writing numerals, in
which /, n, A, J2, II, ]n[, X, jf , M, respectively denote,
"loq, one t UevTs, Jive, 4exa, ten, JJevTaxtg Jwa, Jive times ten, or
fifty, 'EXGITOV (anciently IIEKATON), hundred, nevrdxig C jBxa-
TOV, Jive hundred, Xlhoi, thousand, Hwiaxig Xl).ioi,Jive thousand,
MVQIOI, ten thousand. (^ 60.)
Here follows a table.
I
1
Ann
17
MH
600
II
2
A nn i
18
IH[ IIII
700
III
3
An in i
19
'M. Him
800
mi
4
AA
20
]H[ II II II n
900
n
5
AAA
30
X
1000
ni
6
AAAA
40
XX
2000
nn
7
TK
50
XXX
3000
mil
8
J^IA
60
xxxx
4000
nun
9
I^LAA
70
M
5000
j
10
ItfAAA
80
MX
6000
AI
11
"M.AAAA 90
7*r xx
7000
An
12
//
100
JSTxxx
8000
AIII
13
HH
200
ST xxxx
9000
Ann
14
HIIPI
300
M
10000
An
15
IIIIIIII
400
MX
11000
Am
16
M
500
&c.
4 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 2.
VOWELS.
2. There are five short vowels, and five cor-
responding long ones. The short vowels are a, f,
A, o, # the long vowels are a, ??, e, w, v.
The mark (~) is placed over a short vowel, and the mark
(-), over a long one. These marks, however, are necessary
only in the case of , i, and v, since the letters 77 and w repre-
sent long E and respectively.
NOTE 1. The vowels s and o are often called the short vow-
els, V) and w, the long vowels, and a, i, v, the doubtful vowels.
REMARK. By the term, doubtful, we are not to understand
that the quantity of , i, v, is uncertain in any given syllable,
but that in some syllables these vowels are always long, and
in others always short. E. g. v in the words dvpog, nvgog wheat,
is always long; in the words nvkr], vno, always short.
There are, indeed, instances where the quantity of these let-
ters is variable, as in "Ayy?, i in (jtvywrj, and v in XOQVVT) '
but we should recollect, that the sounds E and O also are,
in certain instances, variable, as fyyog and &$6g, i'wpsv and
lo per.
NOTE 2. In strictness, the Greek alphabet has but five
vowels, A, E, I, O, T. The long vowels differ from the short
ones in quantity, but not in quality.
NOTE 3. COMMUTATION OF VOWELS. (1) When from any
cause the vowels s and o are to be lengthened, they are gen-
erally changed into the diphthongs and ov, rather than into
their corresponding long ones 77 and w. E. g. &lvog for &vog,
fiovvog for povog.
(2) In some instances o is lengthened into 01. E. g. nolct
for Tioa.
(3) The vowel often passes into ai or y. E. g. aid from
act, T^?jA from tfw'AAw.
(4) The vowels and s are frequently interchanged. E. g.
Ionic isaaegsg for TsaatxQfg, Doric 7r/w for mi^w.
(5) The syllables o and o> are often changed into w.
E. g. Attic Afw's for huog, Ionic Eyern&cw for e^pgr^wwy.
(6) The vowels a and r\ are interchanged. E. g. Doric
for ^, Ionic n^y^n for
VOWELS.
3.]
The use of for ^ is one of the leading peculiarities of the
Doric dialect. The use of 77 for d is peculiar to the Ionic.
(7) The vowels and w are sometimes interchanged. E. g.
and x>w'w.
(8) The vowels e and o are often interchanged. E. g.
rhgocpoi from T^STTW.
(9) The vowels ?? and w are, in some instances, inter-
changed. E. g. TTTJjoraw and
DIPHTHONGS.
^3. 1. There are fourteen diphthongs, of which
seven, CM, av, si, sv, 01, ov, and vi, begin with a
short vowel, and seven, ol, at>, #, qv, cp, av. and
tfc, with a long one. The former are called proper
diphthongs, and the latter, improper diphthongs.
The i is written under the long vowel, and is called iota
subscript. In capitals it is written as a regular letter. E. g.
THI *AriAI y jjj a/la' TJII 20<I>fLl, TM aoyw ' ^<Sw, add).
2. The diphthongs are represented in English as follows :
Proper diphthongs. Improper diphthongs.
at by ai ot by oi a by d w by 6
av " au ov " ou av " du ajv " ou
si " ei vi " yi y " e vi " %i
ev " eu \v " eu
NOTE 1. The diphthong wu belongs to the Ionic dialect.
It may be doubted whether the diphthong w was ever used.
NOTE 2. In the improper diphthongs, the second vowel was
nearly swallowed up by the preceding long one, which long
vowel constituted the leading element of these diphthongs.
NOTE 3. COMMUTATION OF DIPHTHONGS. (1) The lonians
often use wu for av. E. g. #wi^ua for davpa. ( 3. N. 1.)
(2) The lonians use r{i for ti E. g. ay/qiov for uyyuov,
^aadrfl'rj for fiaadtla.
(3) They use 77 for at. E. g. T^OL for ii^aiai.
(4) The Dorians use w for ou. E. g. puaa for
For ov before a they often use oi. E. g. fiolaa for
1*
LETTERS AND SYLLABLES.
BREATHINGS.
4. 1. Every Greek word beginning with a
vowel must have either the rough breathing ( c ), or
the smooth breathing ('), over that vowel. E. g.
NOTE 1, The vowel v at the beginning of a word takes the
rough breathing. E. g. vfieig, vno. Except the Epic pro-
nouns jjfipi, vpiiiv, and vfifie. ( 64. N. 2.)
2. The rough breathing is placed also over Q at the begin-
ning of a word. E. g.
3. When p is doubled in the middle of a word, the first one
takes the smooth breathing, and the other, the rough breathing.
E. g. aQ^iog.
4. The breathing, as also the accent ( 19. 5), is placed
over the second vowel of the diphthong. E. g. amd$, al'^w,
viog, ovrog.
Except the improper diphthongs , ?;, w. E. g. ada, r t dov,
w<5ij. So in capitals, ^5w, 'llidov, y jle$+
5. The rough breathing corresponds .to the English h.
E. g. I'TrTrog, oviog, ysvpot, a^r^og, in English letters hippos,
houtos y rheuma, arrhetos.
NOTE 2. The smooth breathing represents the effort, with
which a vowel, riot depending on a preceding letter, is pro-
nounced. Let, for example, the learner pronounce first the
word, act, and then, enact, and mark the difference between
the a in the first, and the a in the second word. He will per-
ceive, that the utterance of a in act, requires more effort than
that of a in enact.
CONSONANTS,
% &. 1. The consonants A, [i, v, p, are, on ac-
count of their gliding pronunciation, called liquids.
2. The consonants f, |, ^, are called double
consonants ; because ? stands for Set, | for xtf, and
\ for TIG.
6> 7.] CONSONANTS. 7
NOTE 1. The preposition & in composition never coalesces
with the following </. E. g. fxaxogmtw, not t&oQm<a.
NOTE 2. It is not exactly correct to say that stands for , since, ac-
cording to the Greek notions of euphony, a lingual is always dropped before <r
( 10. 2). In strictness is a mixture of and >, just as e is compounded
of a and i, o of a and M, and b of m and p.
With respect to its making position ( 17. 2), this was probably owing to
its strong vocal hissing.
' 3. The consonants TT, /3, <p, x, ^, # 5 T, 5, #, are
called mutes. They are divided into
smooth mutes TT, x, T,
middle mutes /3, 7, 5,
mw/es , , #.
These letters correspond to each other in the perpendicular
direction. E. g. <p is the corresponding rough of n.
4. The letter o 1 , on account of its hissing sound,
is called the sibilant letter.
NOTE 3. The consonants v, Q, c, I, y, are the only ones that
can stand at the end of a genuine Greek word.
Except K in the preposition ex and the adverb o^x.
6. According to the organs with which they
are pronounced, the consonants are divided into
labials 7t, /3, y, p,
linguals T, 8, &, f, 0, A, i>, p,
palatals x, y, %.
The labials are pronounced chiefly with the tips; the tin-
y with the tongue; and the palatals, with the palate.
NOTE. COMMUTATION OF CONSONANTS. (1) The Dorians
generally use ad for f. E. g. xo^w'odw for xw^u^w. This takes
place in the middle of a word.
(2) The Attics use TT for aa. E. g. TIQUTTO) for nQciaaw.
(3) In some instances ^ is used for ^a. E. g. ugyyv for
EUPHONIC CHANGES.
y. When a labial (n, /?, <p), or a palatal (x, /, ^), happens to
stand before a lingual (T, <5, #) ; the former is changed into its
8 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [8-10.
corresponding smooth, middle, or rough, according as the
latter is smooth, middle, or rough, ( 5. 3.) E. g.
for TSTQlfi-TOtl, \IQi(f-^V for TQlfi-&rjV
i, " ysygotcp-jai, livcp-&i]V " tivji-^v "
So sfidofiog from emu, o/doog from OXTW, tmygcc/jdrjv for 7n-
<jp<$?7J>.
So in Latin, nuptum for nubtum, actus for agtus, vectum for
NOTE. Except x in the preposition ex. E. g. cx^^w, e j x-
, not ey
8. 1. A labial (n^^cp) before ^ is always changed into ^
E.g.
ai for U'tem-iai en-ai for
2. A labial (/?, <p) before a is changed into n. According to
5. 2, the combination no is represented by y/. E. g.
T///w for TQtfi-aw yQayw for y
So in Latin, wz/psz for nubsij lapsus for labsus.
' J f O. 1. A palatal (x,^) before ^ is generally changed into
y. Kg.
nintey-iJLcu for TrgTrAsx-^uou th^vy-^ai for rerfi^ucr*.
NOTE. The preposition x remains unaltered before ^u. E. g.
X^u/-ro), exfitTQsa), not tynalrw, sypeTQsw.
/ 2. A palatal (/,^) before a is changed into x. According
to 5. 2, the combination x a is represented by |. E. g.
Af'la) for A6/-C/W . Tt|a> for ji^-aw.
So in Latin, ^ea:z for tegsi, traxi for trahsi.
1O. 1. A lingual (T, d, &, f) before ^ is often changed into
a. E. g.
fia-^iai for ffi-iiai ninuG-\ivu for
nKda-^a " 7tld&-fia (pgovTiG-fta
2. A lingual (T, 5, &, ) is always dropped before #. E. g.
ns-o(o for TUT-OW TiAa-aw for nldfr-aw
CC-OW ' (fd-OW <pQQVli-aG) " <pQOVTlC t -GW.
So in Latin, amans for amants, monens for monents, lusi for
11, 12.] CONSONANTS. 9
3. A lingual (T, d, #, ) before another lingual is often
changed into a. E. g.
changed into or. E. g.
fja-Tcn for r t d-tat ninkacs-'iGti for
I'u-ts " i'd-TS
4. A lingual (T, 8, &, ) before a palatal (x,y,%) is always
dropped. E. g. y-xa for yd-xa, ninu-y.a for ninu&-xa, ntcpoov-
Tt-Xtt for 7l(f>Q01>Tl-XCl.
NOTE 1. The omission of a lingual before tr or x does not affect the quantity
of the preceding vowel.
NOTE 2. In the Epic language the r of the preposition xxrex, is changed
into the following consonant. E. g. xuyyovv for xctry'ovu for xetrat ybvu t
xtUXXtvov for xarXtvov for xxri^t-rov.
Before two consonants the r of this preposition is dropped. E. g.
for XKr<r%&& for xaTtf^tSs.
11. The letter a cannot stand between two consonants.
12* I. Before a labial (TT, /5, (p), v is changed into p. E. g.
avp-pah'ta " avv-petivin tffripvxos " i'v-yv%og.
So in Latin, imbeliis for inbellis, impius for inpius.
2. Before a palatal (x, /,^), v is changed into y. E. g.
ovy-xctlo) for avv-xotico ovy-yfvi]g for avv-ywrjg
REMARK. The combinations ^/, /x, 7^, /^, are repre-
sented in English by ng, nc or nk, nx, nch, respectively. E. g.
a/yog angos, uyxwv ancon or ankon, w^|w anxo, ayzw ancJio.
3. Before a liquid (I, ^ o), v is changed into that liquid.
E ' g> ,i r
au/-Af/o; lor ovv-Aeyb) tfi-^usvoj lor tv-fisvat
So in Latin, colligo for conligo, commolus for conmotus, cor-
ruptus for conruptus.
4. Before a or f, y is dropped. E. g. dalpo-ai for dalpov-ai,
:for
5. In many instances, after y has been dropped before a, the
preceding short vowel is lengthened. E and o are changed
into and ov respectively ( 2. N. 3). E. g.
for pikav-g "ti&ii-ai, for n&sv-ai,
vyu-ai, " itjvcpoft-oi, TVHTOV-OI " TV7nov-ai.
10 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 13, 14.
This lengthening almost always takes place when *>r, vti, v&>
are dropped before a ( 10. 2 : 12. 4). E. g.
yQaya-q for ygayavi-g Acov-crt for keorr-at,
ivcp&u-g " rv(p&8)'T-g onsl-att)
dtixvv-g ''' detxvvi'T-g nu-aopat
NOTE 1. We must not suppose that the omission of the lingual has any
thing to do with the lengthening of the vowel before 0- ( 10. 2, N. 1).
NOTE 2. In some instances, v before a is changed into a.
E. g. ovoaojftog for a
NOTE 3. The preposition iv remains unaltered before g, o,
f. E. g. iigaTnw, cVawriw, iv&vyvvpi.
NOTE 4. In the following words v is not dropped before a
xivaai (from Ktrtfoi), nintxvatg, ntgxxraai (from qpmYw). Also in
the ending rg of the third declension ( 36. J), as &pw$. Also
in the word nuhv, in composition, as
13. At the beginning of a word Q is generally doubled,
when, in the formation of a word, it happens to stand between
two vowels. E. g.
from ntgl and yew egyevxa for t'^ffxa.
14. 1. When, in the formation of a compound word, a
smooth consonant (TT, x, T) happens to stand before a vowel hav-
ing the rough breathing, that smooth consonant and the rough
breathing form a corresponding rough consonant (g),^, #). E. g,
ucp-lriit for an-ii]i y.a&-aitaig for ttcrt
NOTE 1. In the words TZ&QITITIOV (ihTaQfg, tnnog), cpQovdog
O, odog), &Qi[jiariov (TO IIAUTIOV), tfarsgov (TOV fic-QOv), the
rough breathing affects the smooth mute, although it does not
immediately come in contact with it.
2. The same change takes place when, of two successive
words, the first ends in a smooth consonant, and the next
begins with a vowel having the rough breathing. E. g.
qp' ov for ULTI ov fietf rjfiwv for fiei ^MV
* SUVTOV " xai saviov ov% vpwv u o
NOTE 2. The Ionic dialect violates these rules. E. g. am-
for wyixtG&ou, xTtu^w for xa&tvdw, ovx olog for ov% oiog.
3. If two successive syllables would each have a rough con-
15.] CONSONANTS. 11
sonant (<p,^, #), the first rough consonant is often changed into
its corresponding smooth (n, x, t). E. g.
ne<pr}va for (ptcpyva -it&rjhot for
This change takes place in almost all reduplications.
NOTE 3. The first aorist passive deviates from this rule.
E. g. <xq)e&7)i>, fyvfryv, not a7i&&r)r,
Except eTd&yv from i/th^*, and hv^v from &vco.
NOTE 4. The termination &i of the imperative active
( 88. 1) is changed into n, if the preceding syllable has a
rough consonant. E. g. rvcptfyw for ivqptf-ifvh, ild-m for rl&s&i.
Except the imperatives yd&i from cpr^l, and ti&va&i from
NOTE 5. In the verb *EXSl, of which the future is I'lw, the
rough breathing is changed into the smooth breathing, ^w, on
account of ^ in the following syllable.
4. A rough consonant (<p,, #) is never doubled ; but instead
of this, its corresponding smooth (TT, X,T) is placed before it.
E. g. ajicpvg, ''lotxxog, 3 Ai&l$, not
MOVABLE CONSONANTS.
lt> 1 . All datives plural in i, and all fo"rc? persons in i
and , are written both with and without a final v. They are
generally written with it when the next word begins with a
vowel. E. g.
&i]Qa\v nygloig
aiiTOvg rvnTovai rovrovg
isya taieySs fiiyce.
2. Also, all adverbs of place in GI ( 121. 1). E. g.
Also, the particles vv and xs, the adverbs negvat, and voayi,,
and the numeral el'xoai.
NOTE. In some Grammars, v movable is written parentheti-
cally. E. g. &r t Q(jl (v}.
3. The words OVT<O$, &xgi?, [tfyQic, and | (that is, lxg\ and a
few others, drop the g before a consonant. E. g. omw (pqalj ex
&SOV.
"AXQig and [ifygig often drop the g even before a vowel.
4. The adverb ov becomes ov% or oi>x before a vowel. E. g.
ov (pqai, ovx tins, ov% tinsxo (^ 14. 2).
12 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 16.
SYLLABLES.
16. 1. There are as many syllables in a Greek
word as there are vowels and diphthongs in it.
2. Words of one syllable are called monosyllables ; of two,
dissyllables ; and of more than two, polysyllables.
3. The last syllable except one is called the penult ; the last
except two, the antepenult. E. g. in tv-anhay-xvoq, xvog is the
last syllable, onlay, the penult, and #, the antepenult.
NOTE 1. (1) Any single consonant may commence a Greek
word.
(2) The following combinations of consonants may com-
mence a Greek word or a syllable : /?, /5A, 0g, /A, yv, yg, dp, 8v,
dg, #A, xh>, &Q, xA, %[A, y.v, XQ, XT, fiv, ?rA, nv, TIQ, m, ofi, cr#, ax,
ax 1) ofi, on, onl, <JT, orzA, OTQ, aq>, ox, ih> ?p> fQ, q>& f 9^ <?, %& f
X*> X*> XQ-
(3) The following combinations also may commence a syl-
lable : yd, yp, & t u, TV, (pv, %[i.
(4) Further, any three consonants may begin a syllable,
provided the first and the last pair may each begin a syllable.
E - g- ?TT
NOTE 2. Greek words are divided into syllables in the fol-
lowing manner :
(1) A single consonant standing between two vowels, or a
combination of consonants capable of commencing a syllable
16. N. 1), is placed at the beginning of the syllable. E. g.
(2) When the combination cannot commence a syllable, its
first consonant belongs to the preceding syllable. E. g. !'A
(3) A compound word is resolved into its component parts,
if the first part ends with a consonant. E. g. na-ilv-og-oog.
But if the first part ends with a vowel, the compound is
divided like a simple word, even when that vowel has been cut
Off ( 135. 3). E. g. na-gi-la-pov.
4. A syllable is called pure, when its vowel or diphthong is
immediately preceded by the vowel of the preceding syllable.
E. g. the following words end in , *, ctg, og, pure : aynl-a,
O1J7U-CU, or}ni-ag t viygi-og.
$ 17.] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 13
QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES.
^ 17. In any Greek word, every syllable is
either long or short.
1. A syllable is long by nature when it has a
long vowel or diphthong. E. g. in the following
words the penult is long by nature :
oixog, oiv&QG)7iog, 11^77, naaot.
2. A syllable is said to be long by position, when
its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by two
or more consonants, or by a double consonant
(T,f,T/>). E. g. in the following words the penult is
long by position:
IOTS, ogxog, uankcty%vog, qo^afa).
3. When a short vowel is followed by a mute
and a liquid, the syllable is common. E. g. in the
following words the penult is either long or short:
tixvov,
4. But the syllable is almost always long, when its vowel,
being short by nature, is followed by the following combina-
tions : /5A, /A, yfi, yv } dp, dv. E. g. the antepenult of Zfl
NOTE 1. In the Epic language the syllable is generally long
when its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by a mute
and a liquid.
NOTE 2. In Homer and Hesiod, ax and f, at the beginning
of a word, do not always affect the preceding short vowel.
E. g. (II. 6, 402 : 2, 634.)
5. Every syllable, which cannot be proved to be
long, must be assumed to be short.
NOTE 3. The quantity of , i y v, must be learned by obser-
vation. The following remarks, however, may be of some use
to the learner :
2
14 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 18, 19.
(1) Every circumflexed , i t v, is long by nature. ( 21.)
E. g. noiv, vfuVf dgvg.
(2) Every , i, v, arising from contraction is long by nature.
23.) E. g. T^MW, noteg, ^oTQvg f from rlpae, 7roA*,
(3) Every cr, t/<j, arising from yra, WTOT, is long by nature.
12. 5.) E. g. Tv<//(j*, ^i/T'j'i'f, for TvyjccvTOi, &vyvvvrg.
(4) Derivative words generally retain the quantity of their
primitives.
18. 1. The epic and the lyric poets often shorten a long
vowel or diphthong at the end of a word when the next word
begins with a vowel. E. g. (Od. 5, 286) "Jl nonoi, 77 pdlct dy
' &eol AAw?, where w nonoi, -aav ^eot, are dactyles.
NOTE 1. This kind of shortening occurs also in the middle
of a word. E. g. difloio ( - -), joiavil (---)
2. A short syllable is often made long by the epic poets.
E. g. Ensidi] ( --- ), Aioloy ( --- ), (pile ixvgs (^ ^^ )
NOTE 2. It is supposed that the ancients generally doubled
in pronunciation the consonant following the short vowel.
E. g. they read ennstdri, AioMov.
There are instances, however, where the short vowel was
lengthened without reference to the following letter. ; E. g.
dla for dia.
ACCENT.
19. 1. The Greek has three accents, viz. the
acute ('), the grave ('), and the circumflex (").
The acute can stand only on one of the last
three syllables of a word ; the circumflex, only on
one of the last two, and the grave only on the last.
REMARK 1. The place of the accent in every word must be
learned by observation.
NOTE 1. The following monosyllables (called atona) gen-
erally appear unaccented :
u, *lg or e, & or elv, t| or x, ov or ovx or ovx, w& and the
articles o, ?}, ol, al.
20.] ACCENT. 15
REMARK 2. When the articles 0, , /, /, stand for demonstrative pronouns
( 142. 1;, they should be read as if they were accented.
REMARK 3. 'O takes the acute when it is equivalent to the relative pronoun
( 142, 2). For &$, see below ( 123. N. 1).
NOTE 2. According to the old grammarians, the grave accent is understood
on every syllable which appears unaccented. Thus uv$cu>ro*Tovo$, TIITTTIU, are,
according to them, uvS-^^oxrovos, ruyrru. It seems, then, that the grave
accent is no accent at all.
2. A word is called oxytone, when it has the acute accent
on the last syllable. E. g. Tiiaiog, tins, uyadol.
Paroxytojie, when it has the acute accent on the penult.
E. g. #/., psiieQla&ai,.
Proparoxytone, when it has the acute on the antepenult.
E. g. av&QOJTiog, tx^ioi, ncfawg.
3. A word is called perispomenon, when it has the circum-
flex on the last syllable. E. g. tm&w, diansQav, nobolv.
Properispomenon, when it has the circumflex on the penult.
E. g. TOVTOV, pziivriQ&ai, fia^ov.
4. A word is called barytone, when its last syllable has no
accent at all. ( 19. N. 2.) E. g. TVTITW, tomov, nsgifQXOfiwog.
5. When the accented syllable has a diphthong, the accent
is placed over the second vowel of that diphthong. E. g.
ca^ara, dwvfia. Except the improper diphthongs a, r/, <w.
(See also 4. 4.)
SO. 1. If the last syllable is long either by nature or by
position ( 17. 1, 2), no accent can be placed on the ante-
penult.
2. The ACUTE can stand on the antepenult only when the
last syllable is short. E. g. Vx^w7ro, diiy&ogtv, nslexvg.
NOTE 1. The endings ca and 01 are, with respect to accent,
short. E. g, teyovrai, av&Qbmoi.
Except the third person singular of the optative active.
E. g. Tipijaait Tifirjaoi.
Except also the adverb ol'xot, at home, which in reality is an
old dative.
NOTE 2. The endings w, w, tag, w?, eov, wv, of the second de-
clension, and ag, MV, of the genitive of nouns in i<?> vg, of the
third declension, permit the accent to be on the antepenult.
( 33 : 43. 3.) E. g. yw^cw, nofowg,
16 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [21,22.
NOTE 3. Also the Ionic termination w of the genitive sin-
gular of the first declension permits the accent to stand on the
antepenult. E. g. Tvdddsu. ( 31. N. 3.)
3. The penult, if accented, takes the acute when it is short
by nature, or when the last syllable is long by nature. E. g.
loyog, ftovayg.
4. When a word, which has the acute on the last syllable,
stands before other words belonging to the same sentence, this
acute becomes grave ('). E. g. Tovg novygovg xal tovg ay
not jovg novrjQOvg y.u.1 jovg aya&ovg av&gwnovg.
91. 1. The CIRCUMFLEX can be placed only on a syl-
ble
lable long by nature. E. g. i^g npyg,
2. A penult long by nature, if accented, takes the circum-
flex only when the vowel of the last syllable is short by nature.
E. g. iiiiMov, nlvs, xonouTvS. So tivai, olxot, ( 20. N. 1.)
ENCLITICS.
2xJ. 1. Enclitics are words which throw their accent
back upon the last syllable of the preceding word. The fol-
lowing words are enclitics :
(1) The personal pronouns pov, pol, (tl, aov, ool, as, ov, ol,
e, o(pw, Gcpw'i'v, (j<pe(av, ocpsctg, (jqpscc, utyioi, ocplv, ocps, acpwg. VV e
must observe, that,of those beginning with aqp, only the oblique
cases are enclitic.
(2) The indefinite pronoun rig, jl, through all the cases, as
also the words TOV, TW, for Tivog, nvl.
(3) The present indicative of si pi, am, and cprj^l, say.
Except the monosyllabic 2 pers. sing, el or tig, and cpqg.
(4) The particles no&sr, no&l, nol, ny, nov, nwg, nois, ys,
fryv, KE or XBV, vv or vvv, nig, TIOJ, re, TO/, (>, and the insepar-
able particle ds, to.
2. If the word before the enclitic has the acute on the ante-
penult, or the circumflex on the penult, the enclitic throws
back an acute on the last syllable of that word. E. g. aV#0w-
nog rig, for av&Qwnog rig ' del%6v poi, for deifrv pol.
. 3. When the word before the enclitic has the accent on the
last syllable, the accent of the enclitic disappears. In this
case the acute does not become grave ( 20. 4). E. g. /w
t, for ^w (pijfi / * noMoig iiai, for noMoi$ iial*
23.] CONTRACTION. 17
Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent also when the pre-
ceding word has the acute on the penult. E. g. toi/rou ys.
4. An enclitic of two syllables retains its accent,
(1) When the preceding word has the acute on the penult.
E. g. ardgsg tivsg.
(2) When the syllable upon which its accent would have
been thrown back has been elided ( 25). E. g. Tio'U' cW,
for Tro/ia' am.
NOTE 1. Enclitics, which stand at the beginning of a sen-
tence, retain their accent. E. g. a o v yccg xgdiog am
REMARK. The abovementioned personal pronouns retain
their accent, when they depend upon a preposition. E. g.
snl aol, not inl ooi. Except ^g in the formula ngog ps*
NOTE 2. When several enclitics succeed each other, the
preceding takes the accent of the following. E. g. ovdsnois
am ocpioiv, for ovSsnors tail acplaiv.
NOTE 3. Frequently the indefinite pronouns and the par-
ticles are not separated by a space from the attracting word.
E. g. OVTS, fi^Tig, oarig, oioTiaiVj ware.
CONTRACTION.
) 23. A pure syllable (^ 16. 4) and the one immediately
preceding it are often united into one long syllable. This is
called contraction. It takes places generally as follows :
are contracted into a, as into , as ^QVGSCX xgvaci, vyila
ftvoiot \JLVU. v/ici.
aa a, as [Avaa fiva. fa 77, as xgvasot %gvaij.
nai at, as ^.vaoa (JLV<U. ecu rj or on, as Tvmsai TVT
as a, as r/|U x/|UW. %Qvasai xgvaoTi.
au a, as Ttpdei, ripci. ss si, as (pttss opttst. Some-
atj , as T^U??T TLfiaTS. times into y, as TQL^QSS TQ
ay , as Tifiitrj? ii^iaq. SSL si, as qtdssig q>deig.
ai a, as ai'ooM aaaw. sy 77, as cpdst]TS y
ao M, as Ttfuxoptt ri^wfisv. sy ij, as (pd
aoi w, as Ttpatotfisv Tipwjisy. si si, as noJi
aov w, as ri^tdovai iip&ji. so ov, as ydsoftsv
0) - CO, aS TlflOKO TIH&. SOL - Ot, aS q)lheOl(*SV i
sa 7], as yea yq. Sometimes sov ov, as cpiUovai ydovai.
2*
18 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 24.
as (pdsw (f Jw. times into ^, as din^oy 6V
as ii^Baaa Tipyatjot- Tivli}.
as Ti^sis Ti t uys. oy 01, as dqAoi?? c^Ao^. This
as Ogyivaa Ogyaau. contraction occurs only in
as ndhe$ nottg. verbs in ow. Verbs in wp
as nolu noti. ( 117) contract 0/7 into w.
o w or #, as ^oa ^#w, oV -^ ot, as r^oi ol.
union, unla. oo ov, as dykoof
oa* at, as dinloat, dinlui. oo* ot,
oe ov, as dqAo'sTC ^^OVTC. oov ov, as
OM ov, as ^^Aoiv drjkovv. ow w, as
Verbs in ow ( 116) con- ow w, as
tract the endings oet and vc -5, as l%&wg i%
otig into 01 and otf, as 5^>lof^ vi - vi, as nhrj&w
drilot t dr^ofig $T}koHg< wi' y, as ^w'/'wv AwW.
OTJ w, as drjhorjTe o^Awrf. Some-
NOTE 1. (1) The Doric dialect contracts us and <m into
and y respectively. E. g. ogots oo^, ooat o^.
The Attic does the same in the following verbs, dupaw, Jw,
ttw, neivaa), a^waw, xgdofiai.
(2) The Ionic and the Doric contract eo into gv. E. g.
NOTE 2. The contraction is often left to pronunciation.
E. g. JiopqS-ta (^ --- ), AiyvTiT-iwv ( --- ). This kind of
contraction is called synizesis or synecphonesis.
NOTE 3. ACCENT. (1) If one of the syllables to be con-
tracted has the accent, the accent generally remains on the
contracted syllable, And if this syllable be a penult or ante-
penult, the accent is determined according to ^ 20: 21 ; if
it be a final syllable, it takes the circumflex, except when the
word uncontracted has the acute accent on the last syllable.
E. g. cpdtofit&a (pdovfis&a, niters nluis '
(2) Tf neither of the syllables to be contracted has the
accent, the accent of the word generally retains its place.
E. g. nulitg nolsig.
CRASIS.
34. Two contiguous words are, in many instances, con-
tracted into one, when the first ends and the next begins with
25, 26.] ELISION. 19
a vowel. This kind of contraction is called crasis. The
coronis ( 3 ) is generally placed over the contracted syllable. E. g.
tovvctvfLov for TO ivavilov
valrj&tg " ib uty&tg.
NOTE 1. The i is subscribed only when it stands at the
end of the last of the syllables to be contracted. E. g. ly^on
for tyu olpat, but xa^w for xeu iyw.
NOTE 2. The erasis is sometimes left to pronunciation.
E. g. (II. 2, 651) 3 E>vaUw uvdgsicpovTy, to be read 'EvvaMwvdQsi-
(fOVTTj.
ELISION.
25. When the first of two contiguous words ends with a
short vowel, and the other begins with a vowel, the former
often drops its final vowel, and the apostrophe (' ) is put over the
vacant place. This is called elision. E. g.
di* f^iov for dta ffiov
in otVTw tf en I OCVTM
eqp' yfuv (^ 14. 2) for int rjfuv.
REMARK. The prepositions ntgl and ngo never lose their
final vowel. E. g. negl uvior, nyb 'Adrjiwr.
NOTE 1. The diphthong v.i is sometimes elided by the poets,
but only in the passive terminations ^ut, aou, -ecu, and a&ai.
E.g. /SovAo^w' fyto, for /5oi'Ao/it f/w' nalilo& 3 unaylaL^7iv t for
NOTE 2. The epic poets, in some instances, reject the final
vowel even when the following word begins with a consonant.
E. g. av v&xvng, for ava vdxvag ' nag Zyvi, for naqa Zv\vi.
NOTE 3. ACCENT. (1) In prepositions and conjunctions, if
the elided vowel had the accent, this accent also is cut off with
the vowel. E. g. dpy airiw, U' dni.
(2) In all other words the accent is thrown back upon the
preceding syllable. E. g. y^ tyw, for (f^l fyw.
SYNCOPE, METATHESIS, AND APH^RESIS.
2G. 1. Syncope is an omission of a vowel from the
middle of a word. E. g. naigog, for nonsgog.
2. Metathesis is an interchange of place between two con-
tiguous letters in the same word. E. g. x<5/a, for
20 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 27, 28.
3. Apharesis is the taking of a letter from the beginning
of a word. E. g. nov 'any, for nov
NOTE. The combinations ^A, fig, VQ, arising from a syncope
or from a metathesis, are changed into ^u t $l, ^fig, vdg t respec-
tively. E. g. ya^Qog for yaptgog, uvdgog for
PUNCTUATION.
. The Greek has the following punctuation marks :
Comma,
Colon,
Period,
Interrogation,
Apostrophe ( 25),
Coronis ( 24),
Marks of quantity ( 2),
Marks of parenthesis,
Mark of diaeresis,
Mark of admiration,
and [ ~
NOTE 1. The mark of di&resis is placed over t, or v to
prevent its forming a diphthong with the preceding vowel.
E. g. yrgui, au'rif, are trissyllables, but yrigdi, uvTy, are dissyl-
lables.
NOTE 2. The mark of admiration is not much used.
PRONUNCIATION.
28. 1. It is supposed by many that the ancient pronun-
ciation, that is, the pronunciation of the ancient Athenians
and of the well educated in general, is in a great measure lost.
The best expedient, according to some, is, to observe how the
Romans expressed Greek, and the Greeks Roman names.
This would be a very good expedient, if the ancient pronun-
ciation of the Latin language was not as uncertain as that of
the Greek.
According to others, the best rule is, to observe how the
ancient Greeks expressed the sounds made by particular ani-
mals. This rule is, to say the least, very ridiculous, because
dogs and sheep are hardly teachers of articulate sounds, and
because there are as many ways of expressing the sound made
28.] PRONUNCIATION. 21
by any animal, as there are nations upon the face of the earth.
The frog, for example, in ancient Greek sings /5xxx xo,
xo|, in modern Greek, ^jra'x xa'xa, in English, croak croak.
2. Others maintain that the modern Greek language is the
only source from which any definite notions concerning the
ancient pronunciation can be derived. First, because this
language is immediately derived from the ancient ; a circum-
stance of no small importance. Secondly, because its pro-
nunciation is remarkably uniform ; and uniformity in matters
of this sort cannot be attributed to mere chance. Further,
the modern Greek method is founded on tradition, while all
other methods hang on conjecture. For the benefit of the
curious we proceed to describe it.
a and a are pronounced like a in father. After the sound /
(i, rj] Uy 01, v, vi) it is pronounced like a in peculiarity,
cu like e.
av, tv, yv, wv, before a vowel, a liquid, or a middle mute
(l#, /, d) are pronounced like av, ev, cev, ov, respectively.
In all other cases, like af, ef y eef, off.
ft like v.
y before the sounds E and I is pronounced nearly like y in yes,
York. In all other cases it is guttural, like the German g
in Tag.
yy and /x like ng in strongest.
y$ like nx.
yx like ng-h, nearly.
d like th in that,
s like 6 in fellow, nearly.
si like i.
tv, see av.
C like z.
i] and rj like t.
i}v, see u.
& like th in thin,
i like i in machine.
x like lc.
I like /. Before the sound /, like II in William,
p like m.
pn like mb, as I'pnQoa&sv pronounced embrosthen.
pip (|U7ra) like mbs.
v like n. Before the sound /, like n in oNion.
The words iov, rrjv, ev, avv, before a word beginning with
x or 5, are pronounced like TO/, T?)/, fy, av/ before x or .
(See /x, /) E. g. tbv xaigov, iv |i;Aow, pronounced TO-
LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ 28.
. Before n or y, they are pronounced TO/*,
E. g. iov novrjgov, avv yvxfi, pronounced
vi like nd } as IVr^og pronounced tndimos.
like x or ks.
like o in porter.
01 like i.
ov like oo in moon.
TT, , like p, r.
</ like 5 in so/. Before /?, ;/, 5, JM, 0, it is sounded like f.
E. g. x6a{iog t ofisaou, 2/xvQvr), pronounced xojjio?, fteaai f
ZfivQvr). So also at the end of a word, TOI> fiaaifalg Trjg y^g,
pronounced Tov^fiotaifals rftyiig*
i like in e//.
v like t.
v* like i.
<JD like |?7i ory*.
X like German c/* or Spanish^.
if/ like ps.
eo and w like o.
cot', see av.
The rougJi breathing is silent in modern Greek.
So far as quantity is concerned, all the short vowels are
equivalent to the long ones.
The written accent guides the stress of the voice.
The accent of the enclitic, however, is disregarded in pro-
nunciation. But when the attracting word has the accent on
the antepenult, its last syllable takes the secondary accent.
E. g. dsl$ov ILQI, pronounced dtlgovfioi, but A&exral /UCH has the
primary accent on the first syllable A?, and the secondary on
UNIVERSITY
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
PARTS OF SPEECH.
1. The declinable parts of speech are
the noun, the article, the pronoun, the verb, and
the participle.
2. The indeclinable parts of speech are the
adverb, the preposition, the conjunction, and the
interjection.
3. The declinable parts of speech have three
NUMBERS ; the singular, the dual, and the plural.
The dual may be used when two things are
spoken of ; but not necessarily.
NOUN.
3O. 1. Nouns are grammatically divided into
substantive and adjective. Substantives are divided
into proper and common.
2. The noun has three GENDERS ; the masculine,
the feminine, and the neuter. The masculine is, in
grammar, distinguished by the article o, the femin-
ine, by %, and the neuter, by TO. E. g. 6 avri, the
man, % yvv^, the woman, TO GVXOV, the fig.
Nouns which are either masculine or feminine are said to
be of the common gender. Such nouns are, in grammar,
distinguished by the articles o, ^. E. g. o, 77 uv&gwnosi a hu-
man being.
24 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 31.
3. The noun has three DECLENSIONS ; the first
declension, the second declension, and the third
declension.
4. The CASES are five ; the nominative, the geni-
tive, the dative, the accusative, and the vocative.
NOTE 1. All neuters have three of the cases alike, viz. the-
nominative, accusative, and vocative. In the plural these
cases end in a ' except some neuters of the second declen-
sion, which end in w ( 33).
NOTE 2. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual,
are alike. The genitive and dative dual are also alike.
In the plural, the vocative is always like the nominative.
FIRST DECLENSION.
31* 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the
first declension.
. Fern. Mas.
N. 7; a a , ijg Sg
G. ^^ ^$ or dg ag ov ov
D. 77 77 or a a
A. T?I>
V.
?? #
av wy >yv y
a a 77 or a
JD. P. 4- If.
N. a
G.
D.
A.
V.
aiv
aiv
P. F. % M.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
cat,
(OV
ctig
at
2. Nouns in r\ or a or d are feminine. E. g.
??, honor, fj ^ovaa, muse, f/ ooytd, wisdom.
Nouns in r(s or as are masculine. E. g. 6
publican, b ra^cas, steward.
S. y (honor)
N. nri
G.
D.
A.
V.
S. y (muse)
N. povaa
& uovcfng
D. povarj
A. uovaav
V.
D. (two honors)
P. (honors)
N. T/jU
N. rifial
G. TILKUV
G. T/UWV
D. T^CUJ/
D. T^wTff
A. Ti/ud
A. ttpag
V. Ttjia
V. Ti/^at
1>. (^o muses)
P. (muses)
N. f.iovon
N. ^o^a^
G. uovaaiv
G. povawv
D. ,uou(m<v
D. fiovatxtg
A. povaa
A. ftovaag
V. povaa
V. fiovaai
31.]
FIRST DECLENSION.
S. o (publican)
N. -[ihwryg
G. i&<avov
D.
A.
V.
$. o (steward)
N. TUfilag
G. T&fjilov
TJU/
ta^iav
D. (two publicans) P. (publicans)
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
D.
A.
V.
3. Nouns in a pure
TAwy
D. (two stewards)
N.
G.
D.
A. Ta/*/a
V. TC^U/CC
16. 4),
rikwrag
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
P. (stewards)
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
pa,^
and
others, retain the a throughout the singular.
coyta, aocpias, aoyia, tiotpiav
some
E. g.
S. r\ (house) D. (two houses) P. (houses)
N. otx/a N. o/x/ra N. nixtnt
G. oixlag G. oly.ntiv G. otx/wv
D. otx/tt D. olv.luiv O. oixiaig
A. olxlctv A. otx/u A. otxlotg
V. otx/a V. o/x/ V. or/.lai
4. The following classes of nouns in 17$ have in the
fa'0e singular.
(1) Nouns in T???. E. g. noUir t q t citizen, voc.
REMARK 1. In Homer, alvxgirns, unhappily brave, has voc. ex.lv a^'ir^.
(2) Nouns derived from verbs by adding ?^ to the last con-
sonant of the verb. ( 129. N. 3.) E. g. ^JW^'T^, geometer,
voc. ^W/IS'T^W.
(3) All national appellations. E. g. <Txt;t%, Scythian, voc.
(4) A few proper names. E. g. nvQulx^g, Pyrcschmes,
voc. ZTi'^aT/jUW.
NOTE 1. QUANTITY. (1) A of the nominative singular is
always short when the genitive has ^g. E. g. ^ovou, ftovaijg.
It is very often long when the genitive has ag. E. g. aoy/a,
G off Lug.
All proparoxytones and properispomena have of course the
short. E. g. aA7?'#a
3
26 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 31.
Further, oxytones and paroxytones, which have txg in the
genitive, have long in the nominative. E. g. %aQ(i t xagag '
iteTQtt, nkTQag. Except the numeral ju, and the proper names
Klgga and UVQQU.
(2) Ag is long. E. g. rocfilcig, aocplag.
(3) Av of the accusative singular always follows the quantity
of the nominative singular. E. g. fiovaix, IAOVOUV a oy/w, aoqp/ay.
(4) A of the vocative singular from nouns in ag is always
long; from nouns in ^g it is always short. E. g. -ia[iltxg, rapta
(5) A of the nominative, accusative, and vocative, dual, is
always long. E. g. uovou.
NOTE 2. ACCENT. (1) The accent remains on the same
syllable as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it : if
not, it is removed to the next syllable. ( 20. 1, 2, 3.) E. g.
REMARK 2. JeanoTyg, master, has voc. Siono-cu, not dsanorcx.
(2) The endings of the genitive and dative of all the num-
bers take the circumflex, when the nominative has the accent
on the last syllable. E. g. iipr\ t Ttfiijg, -r^fj, npoug.
(3) Jlv of the genitive plural of barytones also is circum-
flexed. E. g. povaa, [tovawv.
Except the feminine of barytone adjectives and participles in
/C ylfl t \ T? ,, >'f '}' 5 f-' ' '
og. \^ 4y. 1. j 1^. g. aziog, a&ot, w^iwv
Except also the following nouns :
alai, sTyaluv ' acpvri, cupvcav.
NOTE 3. DIALECTS. (1) The following table exhibits the
dialectic peculiarities of the first declension.
Sing. N. Old a for yg, as ITITTOTM.
G. Old o, Ionic *a>, Doric a, for ov, as 3 ATQfl3rjg, *AigsL-
dao, 'ATQsldtw, 'ATgsldti. Before a vowel *w drops c,
*B c QtUlaf, c EQftet& for 'Egptlst*.
The Attics sometimes use the Doric genitive, es-
pecially in proper names.
Plur. G. Old wv, Ionic ewv, Doric av } for cov, as ^oOff<x, pov-
fjtovostov t
D. Old aiai, Ionic yai or yg, for aig, as fiovaa,
A. Doric tig for ag, as ii%vri, r
32, 33.] SECOND DECLENSION. 27
Sing and Plur. G. D. Epic r t (pi or rj<piv for 77?, 77, cay, at?, as
V.
(2) For 77 the Dorians use , as jf/ua, , , y, a.
On the other hand the lonians use ?? for , but only in the
singular, as aofplrj, yg, ?/, rjv, rj. ( 2. N. 3.)
^ 3S. Nouns in , toe, sag, and 017, are contracted. ( 23.)
Rg.
' , mina, G. fivaas ftvag, D. ^UIT/ /uva, A. pvciav [tvav,
' ^^, Plural N. ^uvi ^u^oet, G. \ivu.tov fivwv, D.
oug, A. pvdag fAvcig, V. nv'aai uvcu.
atixict avxij, Jig-tree, G. ovxsag avxrjg, D. avxin avxy, A. crvxeav
avx?Jj>, V. avxsa avxi], Plural N. ovxzoti, avxou, G. auxwy,
CFI>XWJ', D. avxtcxig avxtxig t A. avxeag ovxag, V. avxiai avxcil.
ay/vga, of silver, G. agyvQKag agyvgag, &C.
i^g, Hermes, G/Jfyfiiov 'ityfwv, D. e
unhrj, simple, G. 7rAo^? ?rA^, &c.
NOTE 1. The vowels t are contracted into 17. But when
they are preceded by a vowel or by ^, they are contracted into
a. In the accusative plural they are always contracted into &
NOTE 2. The contracted forms of fiogsag generally double
the Q. Thus, pogcug
SECOND DECLENSION.
33. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the
second declension.
S. M. Sf F. Neut.
N. og (ag ov wv
G. OV ft) OV ft)
D. &) w
A. OV ft)V OV 0)V
V. s wg ov 6)V
D. All genders.
N. CO
G. OLV OJV
D. oiv wv
A. ft)
V. w
P. M. $ F. Neut.
N. 01 w a w
G. cay ft)i/
D. oig wg oig tag
A. ovg ft)? a CD
V. ot w w
2. Nouns in o? or as are masculine or feminine.
E. g. 6 Ao'/os, word, TJ vrjoos, island, 6 vsas, temple.
Nouns in ov or ov are neuter. E. g. TO avxov,
fig, TO dvayeav, hall.
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
[33.
8.
o (word)
D.
(two words)
P.
(words)
N.
loyog
N.
loyw
N.
loyoi
G.
Ad/ov
G.
loyow
G.
loywv
D.
Ad/w
D.
loyoiv
D.
loyoig
A.
loyov
A.
loyw
A.
loyovg
V.
Ao'/fi
V.
tiy*
V.
boy 01
8.
TO (fig)
D.
(two figs)
P.
(figs)
N.
ovxov
N.
ovxto
N.
ovxa
G.
avxov
G.
OVXOLV
G.
avxwv
D.
OVXM
D.
avxoiv
D.
avxoig
A.
avxov
A.
OVXCt)
A.
avxa
V.
avxov
V.
avxto
V.
avxa
8.
o (temple)
D.
(two temples)
P.
(temples)
N.
Vftog
N.
Vttt
N.
VSM
G.
vsw
G
vtwv
G.
vewv
D.
VIM
D.
vtwv
D.
vsMg
A.
VIWV
A.
vsw
A.
Vto)g
V.
vwg
V.
rtflf
V.
vtw
8.
TO (hall)
D.
(two halls)
P.
(halls)
N.
arwytwv
N.
3 t
otvtoytw
N.
ccrwysw
G.
etvtfytu
G.
avwyswv
G.
avuyswv
D.
i-6>/<p
D.
avwyswv
D.
t
fxvwysMg
A.
avwyswv
A.
iwpm
A.
(XV(t)V(O
V.
avwyewv
V.
uvwysw
V.
CtVtoVBtO
NOTE 1. The following neuters have o instead of ov in the
nominative, accusative, and vocative, singular : utto, amo,
exilyo, o, TO, IOVTO, from aKIog, amog, extivog, og, o, oinog, re-
spectively.
REMARK 1. Further, the termination coy of the accusative
singular often drops the v. E. g. >f A&wg, ace. *l4#w for
NOTE 2. QUANTITY. A of the neuter plural is always short.
NOTE 3. ACCENT. (1) The accent remains on the same
syllable as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it :
if not, it is removed to the next syllable. ( 20. 1,2,3.) E. g.
av&gunog, UV&QWTIOV, ar&QViroi ' av&ftiny, av&gwnwv.
(2) The endings of the genitive and dative of all the num-
bers take the circumflex, when the nominative has the accent
on the last syllable. E. g. &eog, &sov,
34.]
SECOND DECLENSION.
29
Except the genitive singular of nouns in wg. E. g.
gen. ygcJ.
REMARK 2. For the accent of proparoxy tones in us, v, see above ( 20.
N.2).
NOTE 4. DIALECTS. The following table exhibits the dia-
lectic peculiarities of the second declension.
Sing. G. Old oio, Doric w, for ov, as Ao^oc, Xo/oto, Aa
Nouns in wg have wo instead of oto, as "
Dual.G. D. Epic ouv for on/, as tWos, 'innouv.
Plur. D. Old ottft for ot, as &Qiyxog, -frQiyxoiai.
A. Doric o>? or o$ for oi', as Avxo?, Auxw^,
". fy Plur. G. D. Epic oqpt or oytv for ov, w, wv, o^, as
34* Nouns in o?, oo?, eov,
oov, are
contracted.
(23.)
Kg.
& 6 (mind)
D.
(two
minds)
P.
(minds)
N.
voog
vovg
N.
vo<u
t
N,
VOOl
yot
G.
voov
vov
G.
VOOIV
volv
G.
vowv
>-w-y
D.
root
J'O^
D.
VOOiV
voiv
D.
vooig
yo^
A.
voov
A.
v6(o
Vto
A.
voovg
yovi,
V.
voe
vov
V.
vou
vu
V.
root
vol
&
TO (bone)
D.
(two bones)
P.
(bones)
N.
OCfT&OV
OOTOVP
N.
00"T0
j
OtfTW
N.
> , 3 M
OOTSOt 00~TOt
G.
OVTSOV
OJTOV
G.
J 3 w
OdTfOtV OGTOlV
G.
oaif'cuv officSy
D.
OtfTEftl
OUT to
D.
OUT SOW
0(JTOiV
D.
ouidoig ooTolg
A.
o CFTC OP
OOIOVV
A.
C(JTS(0
OVTCO
A.
oaisa
oara
V.
V. o
oaiw V. oaida oara
NOTE 1. The vowels ta in the neuter plural are always con-
tracted into u.
NOTE 2. (1) The contracted nominative, accusative, and
vocative, dual, take the acute ACCENT, contrary to the rule
( 23. N. 3).
(2) The contracted genitive and dative of polysyllabic com-
pounds in oo?, oor, are accented contrary to the rule (ibid.).
E. g. (xvilnroog anlxrovg, G. avxinvoov avrlnvov.
(3) Some of the contracted forms of adjectives in tog take
the circumflex on the last syllable, contrary to the rule (ibid.).
3*
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
[$85.
THIRD DECLENSION.
35. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of
the third declension.
F. Neut.
S. All genders.
D. All genders.
P. ^f.
N. 9
N.
N.
G. og
G. otv
G.
D. J
D. oiv
D.
A. , v
A. 6
A.
V. g
V. *
V.
a
cov
(,)
a
2. In the third declension the gender must be determined
by observation.
& o (crow)
N. xo?a
G. xoguxxo;
D.
A.
V.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
8. o (giant)
Ni -
yiyotg
G. ylyotVToq
D.
A.
V.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
yiyaviot
ylyav
6 (weevil)
Xi/
x/v
D.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
D.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
two crows)
XOQtXXS
XOQUXOIV
two hopes)
iknlboiv
e In Id o iv
P. (croics)
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
P.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
clntdag
ylyavrsg
Z). (/wo giants) P. (giants)
N.
G.
D. yiyaai(y)
A.
V.
N. yiyavi*
G. yiydnoiv
D. yr/iivcoiv
A. ylyavTS
V. ylyctvis
D. (two weevils)
N. X/8
G. xtoTv
D. xioTv
A. X/8
V. ff/8
P. (weevils)
N. X/fff
G.
D.
A.
V.
xtwv
xfor/(i>)
35.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
31
8.
o (age)
D.
(two ages)
P.
(ages)
N.
alan'
N.
ctiwvs
N.
aiwvsg
G.
otiwvog
G.
alwvotv
G.
alwrwv
D.
atotn
D.
atiwvow
D.
otlwai(v)
A.
ctiwva
A.
cclwvs
A.
alwvag
V.
aiwv
V.
alwvs
V.
altaveg
S.
o (god)
D.
(two gods)
P.
(gods)
N.
diXlflMV
N.
8(XlflOVS
N.
dalfiovsg
G.
dixlpovog
G.
dixipovoiv
G.
daipovwv
D.
dat\uovt
D.
d(xifAOVoiv
D.
dttl[ioai(v)
A.
dixlpova
A.
dixi'^iovs
A.
dotlpovug
V.
dvilftov
V.
dutpovt
V.
dalpovtg
S.
o (lion)
D.
(two lions)
P.
(lions)
N.
Mwv
N.
Moris
N.
Moviig
G.
Movrog
G.
Moviow
G.
Moviwv
D.
Movii,
D.
MOVIOLV
D.
Movoi(v)
A.
Mona
A.
Movis
A.
Movictg
V.
Mov
V.
Movie
V.
Movisg
8.
10 (thing)
D.
(two things)
P.
(things)
N.
ngutyiict
N.
TlQOC/flCCIS
N.
iiQuy^aia
G.
7tQ<xyf.iaiog
G.
nQKynvfioiv
G.
TiQaypcxiai
D.
ngdyiwii
D.-
ngir.yfjLaiOLV
D.
nQccyfA(xai(
A.
ngU'/pa
A.
JiQaypctiG
A.
71 gay paia
V.
noayuu
V.
V.
Tiacxyuctict
NOTE 1. QUANTITY. (1) The terminations i, 01, a, ag, are
short. E. g. xo'^axr, y.6Qtt'^t f xogixxu,
(2) Nouns in tv$ ( 44) may have , ixg, in the accusative.
E. g. potaiMvg, iu y eug.
NOTE 2. ACCENT. (1) In dissyllables and polysyllables the
accent generally remains oh the same syllable as in the nomi-
native, if the last syllable permits it : if not, it is removed to
the next syllable. (20. 1,2/3.) E. g. xogccg, xogaxog, xogdxwv.
(2) Monosyllables throw the accent in the genitive and
dative of all the numbers upon the last syllable. ' In this case
the terminations oiv, wv, are circumflexed. E. g. x/$, xiog, xrwv.
Except monosyllabic participles. E. g. dovg, doviog, dovn.
Except also the dual and plural of nag' ndvioiv, naviwv,
nuai, ( 53.)
INFLECTION OP WORDS.
[36.
Except also the genitive dual and plural of the following
nouns : <5? torch, dpug, &wg, KPA2 head, ovg, nous, ays,
gxag blister, ywg light.
REMARK. For the accent of vrxr^, fiv-ni, 3-wy*rv t
a*** t won, and APHN, see below ( 40. N. 3).
NOTE 3. DIALECTS. The following table exhibits the dia-
lectic peculiarities of the third declension.
Dual. G. D. Epic ouv for oiv, as
Plur, G. Ionic ewv for wv, as xr t v,
D. Old taai or tot, as d&nug,
Sing, and Plur. G. D. Epic ocpi(v) or yi(v) for og, i, wv, at,
as o/og, oyeacpi ' vav$, vavopi.
3O. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the
NOMINATIVE and GENITIVE, SINGULAR, of the third declension.
a gen. mog, axros, neut.
aig aixog, aidoe, all genders.
av arog, arrog, mas. or neut.
ay agog, aiog, agiog, gener-
ally neuter.
aog, aroc, adog, ctvog, av-
tog, all genders.
avg wop, fern.
tig tiQog, tQog, mas. or fern.
Gig wog, svTog, tidog, mas. or
fern.
sv wog, srrog, neut.
tvg eog, mas.
r\ ??ro, neut.
ijy r^vog, fvog, mas. or fern.
*7 ^?o?> f ??i ro^s. or fern.
yg ipog, n&og, tog, mas. or
fern.
i toe, nog, neut.
w ivog, mas. or fern.
ig - iog, nog, idug, i&og, ivog,
mas. or fern.
If log.
vg v&og.
I xe>, yog, %og, XTOJ, mas.
or fern.
ov orog, orrog, neut.
OQ ogog, neut.
og . OTOC, fog, neut.
ovv odog, neut.
ov ovTog, oog, odog, mas. or
fern.
v vog, neut.
vv vvog, vvwg, mas. or neut.
VQ vQog, mas. or neut.
vg vog, vdog, v&og, vvog, vv-
Tog, mas. or fern.
y TIO?, /5oc, qpo,mas. or fern,
w oo?, fem.
(av wrog, ovog, oviog, mas. or
fem.
wo MQog, ooog, generally mas.
or fem.
ag woe, ooc, (*nog, orog, wdog,
generally mas. or fem.
. Most nouns of the third declension form their NOMINA-
36.] THIIID DECLENSION. 33
TIVE SINGULAR by dropping the termination og of the genitive,
and annexing g. E. g.
gen. xo^wxos, ( 5. 2)
" n&onog, (ibid.)
" ttTildog, ( 10. 2)
" ylyavTog, ( 12. 5.)
So qp^> ( 8. 2), <^oV $'* (^9. 2), $ay6 s - jfcjt (ibid.),
S' X<*gig ( 10. 2), xngnog* oqvig (ibid.), oQvi&og' qlg
12. 4), m)V* XT/ ( 12. 5), xT'oV rvyOelg (ibid.), TV^-
" dovg (ibid.), doviog.
(1) Most masculines and feminities lengthen tg into ^^, and
og into . E. g. TQirigrjg, jQiygeog ' Tervyxag, rsivcpoTog*
(2) Many masculines lengthen sg into evg. E. g. fiaadwg,
ftaadeog.
(3) All neuter substantives change fg into o^. E. g. itij
*u%tog. ( 2. N. 3.)
(4) Some neuters change g into ^. E. g. ar^, aiea-iog.
(5) The following nouns lengthen o? into 01;^ ftovg, fioog '
novg, nodog' %ovq, %oot;. ( 2. N. 3.)
(6) The following change $ into avg ' yguvg, ygaog' vavg,
vaog.
(7) !^7T??|, xo?, changes the radical letter s into ^ in the
nominative.
NOTE 1. >f Av(x$, 'mxro, and ri'|, rrxroV, are the only nouns
in | that have XTOC in the genitive. Originally they had gen.
Vxo, viyog. (Compare ^/mxfs, Dioscuri, and vv^iog, noctur-
nal)
"dig, AoV, is the only noun in A?.
3. Many form their nominative singular by dropping the
termination og of the genitive, with such consonants as cannot
stand at the end of a Greek word ( 5. N. 3). Masculines
and feminities lengthen c and o, in the final syllable, into r\ and
CD respectively. E. g.
alwv gen. aiMvog
" dutlpovog
So xn v t Xyvo?' At^u^V, linivog' 3iv t living' OMTJQ,
oo? ' $ v t Swiog ' <pWQ, (pMQog ' ?iro^, rjiogog
* alvrjm, oivymog ' dtixvvv,
34 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 37.
REMARK 1. In reality the nominative is formed from the root, which is
obtained by dropping es of the genitive. E. g. *o, xogu*os, root xogccx.
NOTE 2. JwAa, TO, is the only noun in a that has axrog in
the genitive.
JdpciQ, ?], the only noun in ag that has ay-tog in the genitive.
Mill, TO, .the only substantive in L that has nog in the geni-
tive.
NOTE 3. Neuters in ay are contracted when this ending is
preceded by e. E. g. MQ r]p, G. tagog yyog.
The neuters dekeng, em'wp, cpQtfyg, have gen. deksaTog dskyrog,
aiiotiog (mjToe, (fgiaiog yyyTug, contrary to the rule ( 23. N. 3).
NOTE 4. Nouns in HC, tv, gen. rroc, are contracted when
these endings are preceded by 77 or o. E. g. n^^ig Tififig,
Tipytvio$ TifjTjncg ' nhaxotig 7ilaxotv> TiAwxofrTog nhuwovviog*
REMARK 2. Proper names in wy are generally contracted.
E. g. Iloaeiduwv Iloattdur.
NOTE 5. The QUANTITY of the last syllable of the nomina-
tive, and of the penult of the genitive, must be learned by
observation. Nevertheless we remark here, that
(1) Monosyllabic nominatives are long. E. g. nav, gig,
d()v$. Except the pronouns T/S, tl, ilg^ T,
(2) The vowels , i, v, in the penult of the genitive are
short, when this case ends in og pure. E. g. yr^ag^ uog ' nofag,
tog ' duxov, vog.
Except yqavg, dog ' vavg, dog.
(3) The penult of the genitive of substantives is long, when
this case terminates in avog, wog, vvog. E. g. T*TV, avog ' JTaAa-
(Aig, Ivog ' &6f)xvg, vvog*
3T. 1. The ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR of masculine and
feminine nouns is formed by dropping og of the genitive, and
annexing . E. g.
xo, xoQCtxog ace. XOQOMM.
2. Nouns in ig, vg, rc, ovg> of which the genitive is in og
pure (^ 16. 4), form their accusative by dropping g of the
nominative and annexing v. E. g.
7io>Uc, Tiohng ace.
vg, i%dvog "
38.] THIRD DECLENSION. 35
If the genitive is not in og pure, they can have v in the
accusative only when the last syllable of the nominative is
not accented. E. g.
oQvig, oQrl&og ace. oqvi&ct or bgviv
xogvg, xoQV&og " xoyv&a or xogvv.
NOTE I. In the Epic language, the following nouns often
have in the accusative singular, contrary to the preceding
rule : (iovg, fiou * tvyvg, EVQSU ' ix&vg, tx&va ' vavg, vea.
REMARK. The accusative singular of the obsolete JI2 is
always 4lu.
NOTE 2. These three nouns, *AJi6tttav 9 Iloaeidwv, xvxewV,
have ace. 'AnoMcova and l^Tio'AAw, Jloastdwva and Hoaeidw, xu-
and
. 1. In many instances the VOCATIVE SINGULAR of
masculine and feminine nouns is like the nominative singular.
2. Nouns in ?, 1^, wv, oj^, and some others, form their
vocative singular by dropping og of the genitive, with such
consonants as cannot stand at the end of a Greek word
(5.N.3). E.g.
ylytxg, ylyavxog voc. ylyav
Vr dixlporog tf
3. Nouns in ig, vg, tvg, avg, and ovg gen. oog, and the com-
pounds of novg, drop the g of the nominative. The ending v
is always circumflexed. E. g.
llnlg voc.
f
fotadtvg
4. Nous in ijg gen. to?, shorten ^g into eg. E. g. ^
voc. 2
5. Feminines in w, wg, gen. oo?, have ol in the vocative
singular. E. g. i^w, ijjfoo?, voc. ^ol.
NOTE 1. A few proper names in ag gen. aviog, have a in
the vocative singular. E. g. sJaodupotg, avTog, voc.
NOTE 2. The following nouns shorten the final syllable in
the vocative singular: ^TroAAwy, "Anottov J7oai(5wy,
36 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 39, 40.
NOTE 3. (1) The following nouns throw the ACCENT back
on the penult in the vocative : avyg, aveg ' Swfig, dutg
(2) Polysyllabic vocatives, which end in a short syllable,
often throw the accent back on the antepenult. E. g.
NOTE 4. *Ava$ t king, when employed to invoke a god has
voc. V. Elsewhere its vocative is like the nominative.
30. 1. The DATIVE PLURAL is formed by dropping o$ of
the genitive singular, and annexing at. E. g.
xo, xogaxog dat. plur. x6ga$i, ( 5. 2)
&ni$, ftnidos " ilnlai ( 10. 2)
ylyag, ylyaviog ylyviai ( 12. 5).
2. Nouns in tvg, avg, and ovq gen. oog, form their dative
plural by dropping g of the nominative singular, and annexing
a*. E. g. ($aai)itvg, fiaadtvai' povg, (loval*
NOTE. The omission of v before ft ( 12. 4) in this case does not lengthen
the preceding short vowel. E. g.
SYNCOPATED NOUNS OF THE THIRD
DECLENSION.
4O. 1. The following nouns in ^ generally drop the c in
the genitive and dative singular. In the dative plural they
change the s into , and place it after the Q. (^ 26. 2 : 2. N. 3.)
raarijQ, ^, belly, G. ynoTtQog yaoiQog, D. yaaxigt, yuaigi,
D. Plur. yaargrxai and yaaiijgai.
drjurjiiiQ, r), Oeres y G. dyiJirjTSQog 4r) t urjTQog t D. ^Jrjfji^TfQt
4qpr)TQi. This noun is syncopated also in the accusative
singular, dyprjifQct drmrfigot.
Ovydrrjo, ^, daughter, G. dvyprsgog &vymg6g y D. -frvyaregi
&vyatgl, D. Plur. dvyargdai.
M^rrjg, r), mother, G. wcegog prjTgog, D. [tyTegi [irjTgl, D. Plur.
iQ, o, father, G. nctTsgog natgog 9 D. nonigi nongl, D. Plur.
2. l^'p, o, mw, is syncopated in all the cases except the
nominative and vocative singular, and dative plural :
41, 42.] THIRD DECLENSION.
ardgog, D. arl^i avdgl, A. ars^a V^^, V. arty,
I)ualN. A. V. avigs uVd^e, G. D. avigoiv urdgotv, Plur. N.
uviqtg avdQt$ t G. avd/ppv avdoaw. D. avdgaoi, A.
ttvdgctg, V. ayc'^g ardgtg. For the insertion of 5, see
above ( 26. N/).
3. APIIN) o, lamb, and xt;wy, o ^, (7o^, are declined as fol-
lows .
APIIN, G. ^>'oc, D. >>*, A. tt^va, Z>z// N. A. liyrs, G. D.
vtQvoiv, Plur. N. oQVtg, G. agvwv, L). ccQvdai, A. ugvaq.
Kiwi', G. xtW?, D. xf*'/, A. xi/va, V. xvov, Dual N. A. V.
xtW, G. D. xv>'oly, Plur. N. xvvfg, G. xvywy, D. xua/, A.
a?, V.
NOTE 1. The poets in some instances drop the t also in the
accusative singular, and in the nominative and genitive plural.
E. g.
NOTE 2. *AairiQ, sgog, o, 5#r, imitates TTT?^ only in the
dative plural, aa
NOTE 3. (1) The ACCENT of the full forms of av^g f APHN,
yauTTiQ, /JrjiUrjTrjg, xvwr, ntt&jfc f is regular ( 35. N. 2).
For the accent of the vocative of avyo and nairjo, see above
(38. N. 3).
The accent of the full forms of -fry/diiio and pjr?^ is ir-
regular in the cases which end in a short syllable.
(2) In the syncopated genitive and dative the accent is
placed on the last syllable. Except
CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
41. 1. Many nouns of the third declension, of which the
genitive ends in og pure ( 16. 4), are contracted.
2. The contracted accusative plural is always like the con-
tracted nominative plural.
49. Nouns in r t g, s$, og, gen. tog, nouns in Kg gen. ctog,
and nouns in w, we, gen. ooc, are contracted in those cases,
in which the termination ( 35. 1) begins with a vowel. E. g.
4
38
rgiigsct
8. <j (galley)
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
D. (tioo galleys)
N.A.V.
G. D. Tgtrjgeow TO
P. (galleys)
N.
G
D.
A.
V.
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
S. TO (wall)
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
[42.
^Su TO (prize)
N. ysgag
G. ysQctog ysgwg
D.
A.
V.
D. (two prizes)
N.A.V. ysgUS
G. D. ysgaoiv
P. (prizes)
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
yegwv
yigvi
O. (#^o walls)
N.A.V. T/#S
G. D. tei^soiv
P. (walls)
N.
G. TSL^SOJV -ll%0)V
D.
A.
V.
8. y (echo)
N. 7^ W '
G.
D.
A.
V.
D. (tivo echoes)
N.A.V. fad
G. D.
P. (echoes)
N.
G
.
D.
A.
v.
contracted xA^?, undergo a
ysgaa
ytgaa
NOTE 1. Proper names in
double contraction in the dative , singular, and sometimes in
the accusative singular. E. g.
S. o (Pericles)
N.
G.
D. Usgixleei ntgixhssi
A. Htgixlssct HfQtxkea
V. Ileglxfosg JJeglxfaig
43.] THIRD DECLENSION. 39
REMARK. Sometimes proper names in )der t g have
the genitive, and xU'i in the dative.
The noun e #ax>le'*;, Hercules, has voc. also "ifguxleg.
NOTE 2. The ending , when preceded by a vowel, is
generally contracted into . E. g. vyirjg, vyisa vyia" xhsog,
NOTE 3. Kegag and zs^rcc, gen. otTog, often drop the i
and are contracted like yegag. E. g. xtgag, xtgotTog xsQaog xW.
Kgiag, in the later Greek, has aiog in the genitive.
NOTE 4. The dual and plural of nouns in w, to?, follow the
analogy of the second declension.
The uncontracted forms of these nouns are not used.
NOTE 5. The Epic language often contracts hog inio yog
or tlog, dsl into %'i or eli, and dsa into ya or !. E. g. ^E
-xAfi'so? -xX^o?, - xAfc'f i' -xA?jt, -xAo -xA^o* ' OJitog, GTidfog
onset Gni\i or
NOTE 6. In the Ionic dialect, the accusative singular of
nouns in co, co, ends in ovv. E. g.
NOTE 7. The ACCENT of the contracted accusative singu-
lar of nouns in w is contrary to the rule ( 23. N. 3).
43. 1. Nouns in ig, vg, gen. ioc, vo?, are contracted in
the dative singular, and in the nominative, accusative, and
vocative, plural. E. g.
S. 6 (serpent) S. o (fish)
N. oyig N. fa&vg
G. ocptog G.. l%&vog
D. oqpu oqpr D. i%\}m l%&vl
A. oqcty A. i%&vv
V. fyt V. j^^iJ
X). (two serpents) D. (two fishes)
N.A.V. $q>is N.A.V. ^^s
G. D. ocpiotv G. D. IX&VQIV
P. (serpents) P. (fishes')
N. oqptc? o(jpi$ N.
G. o<jp/wv G.
D. ocjptor^y) D. jdwt(
A. oqp/a? o<pij A. ix&votg
V. o)ie$ opi V.
40 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 43.
2. The nouns o, ^ fiovg, ox, y ygavg, old woman, i] vuvg, ship,
and o, % o'ig, sheep, are declined as follows :
t?, G. fioog, D. /for*, A. POVV, V. /toil, .Dtta/ N. A. V. /36s,
G. D. /?oow>, Plur. N. ^ O 'e /Sove, G. /SowV, D. /SoiW, A.
fiovg, V.
vs, G. yg&og, D. ^' A. yaavv, V. p/^wv, Dual N. A. V.
, G. D. ygaolv, Plur. N. ygass yotvg t G. ygawv, D.
, A. ygaag ygavg, V. ^? ^wi5?.
is regularly declined like ^^{5^. The Attics decline
it as follows : G. yew's, D. r?/, A. vw, V. rav, Plur. N.
yijf^ G. vt&v, D. ravaiT'A. vaug, V. y^f^.
The lonians change into 77, as y^{l ? . They have also
G. veog, A. vya and yf'a, Dual D. ysoty, P/z/r. N. ygf^, A.
vsccg.
o'ig oig, G. 6'i'o? oiog, D. 6'iV ol/, A. o'iv oiv, Plur. N. oi'fj olfg
oig, D. osfft, A. o'iag oiag o'ig.
3. Most nouns in ig, i, vg> v, change i and v into , in all the
cases, except the nominative, accusative, and vocative, singu-
lar. Substantives in ig and vg generally change og into tog.
E.g.
S. rj (state) S. jo (mustard)
N. nohg N. Givt]ni
G. Tiofawg G. airrjnsog
D. TioAsi' TioAst D. aivTjTis'l aivrjnst
A. TToAty A. GLVl]ni
V. 710 At V. QLVY\Tll
D. (tioo states) D.
N.A.V. 7roA N.A.V.
G. D. noUoiV G. D.
P. (states) P.
N. TTo'taes nohig N. atvrinm
G. TroAswy G. Givr\niwv
D. 7ioAea(y) D.
A. TrcUetfs TioAef? A.
V. TroAees TioAets V. vivynsot
44.] THIIID DECLENSION. 41
8. o (cubit) S. TO (city)
N. nnxvg N.
G. nfoug G.
D. nrixtl Ti'W* 1 ' ^ (tarsi
A. nfjxw A. aoTV
V. nfav V.
Z>. (two cubits) D. (two cities)
N.A.V. 7k N.A.V. &w
G. D. nrixioiv G. D. aaieoiv
P. (cubits) P. (cities)
N' ' TVT
ntgttf nrix^i? J-N-
G. 7Ik*OIV G.
D. 7ir>x^Oi(v) D.
V. nrjx Sl s ^nx^ l( 9 V.
NOTE 1. In some instances the genitive of nouns in vg and
v is contracted. E. g. TIT^VS, nv\%itov HT^MV ' ypiav,
Such contractions belong to the later Greek.
NOTE 2. The genitive singular of neuters in / and v very seldom ends in us.
NOTE 3. According to the old grammarians, the Attic genitive and dative,
dual, of nouns in t$ and v; end in &v. E. g. <raA/j, yro^nyv. Such forms,
however, are not found in any Greek writer of authority.
NOTE 4. HoXis, in the Epic language, often changes i into tj. E. g. gen.
vroXvos for voXso;.
NOTE 5. For the ACCENT of the genitive of nouns in /?, t/;, see above
( 20. N. 2).
44. Nouns in wg are contracted in the dative singular,
and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative, plural. They
generally have wg in the genitive singular. E. g.
fir. o
(fcing)
P.
(kings)
N.
(juatfavg
N.
SoKfiUsg
G.
frxadswg
G.
j9ctiJl)ifO1>
D.
finviUl
fao
dg*
D.
(Jaailevot
A.
fiavilia
A.
(JtxviJieag
v. ;
fiaaikBV
V.
ftaadses
D.
, (two
kings)
N.
A.V.
/5(Ji>LS6
G.
D.
QotGikioii
i
42 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 45, 46,
NOTE 1. The genitive and accusative, singular, are some*
times contracted. E. g. IleiQouevg, neigoutwg IluQui&g' ovy-
yaoicptvg, ovyy^acpdct ovyygctcpr).
NOTE 2. The vowels so, are contracted into a, when they
are preceded by a vowel. E. g. %oEvg, #o'a %oa.
NOTE 3. The ending esg of the nominative plural is some-
times contracted into rjg. E. g. Innsvg, Imtseg Innr^g.
NOTE 4. The lonians very often change e into 77, except
when it is in the diphthong v. E. g. fitwdsvg, fiotadriog.
INDECLINABLE NOUNS.
45. Indeclinable nouns are those which have only one
form for all the genders, numbers, and cases. Such are,
1. The names of the letters of the alphabet. E. g. TO, TOV,
T<y w'ylqpa, alpha.
2. The cardinal numbers, from 5 to 100 inclusive. E. g.
01, al, T, TWV, tolg, rovg, tag nlvis, Jive.
3. All foreign names not Grecized. E. g. o, tov, TW, TOV
*A5dp, Adam.
ANOMALOUS NOUNS.
46. 1. All nouns which have, or are supposed to have,
more than one nominative, are anomalous. Such are the fol-
lowing.
7j5wV, ovog, ri, nightingale, from FONA2, yorcnog, yova-
regular. From AIIJJl, G. it, Dual yovare, yovdxoiv,
arfiovg, V. aridol. , Plur. yovaiot, yovaTWV, yo-
aidric, ov, o, the infernal re- VC/.OL.
gions, regular. From AI2, The poets have G. yovvog,
G. uidog, D. attt, A. atfa. D. yowl, Plur. N. A. V.
UTJ, yg, 77, strength, regular. yovvn, G. yovrwv.
From AAZ, D. alxl. ywr], >%, woman. The rest is
avogdnooov, ov, TO, slave, regu- from TTNAIZ (oxytone),
lar. From ANAPAUOT2, yvvawoQ, yvvtuxl, yvvcuxa,
D. Plur. avdQttnodtao-i, (Epic). yvvtxi, Dual yvrdixf, yvvcti-
yovv, TO, knee. The rest is xolv, Plur. ywcuxtg, yvv&i-
46.]
ANOMALOUS NOUNS.
43
yvvuL^i, yvvaiy.otg, yvvai-
xsg.
The genitive and dative
of all the numbers take the
accent on the last syllable,
contrary to the rule (^ 35.
N. 2).
dat'g, 'idog, %, fight, regular.
From dA2, D. da'i'.
JI2, see Zsvg.
doQV, TO, spear. The rest is
from 4OPA2, doQuiog, do-
QQITL, Dual doQMTSf duQWlOiV,
Plur. dogaict, doydiwv, do-
The poets have G.
dovQog, D. dogl, dovqi, Dual
dovoe, Plur. N. dovotx, G.
dovgwv, D. dovgeaai (Epic).
dogv&og, ov, o, spear-polisher,
regular. From AOPTZO2,
V. doQV$e.
tlxwv, ovog, ^, image, regular.
From EIKfL, G. eixovg, A.
eixw, A. Plur. sixovg.
Zevg, 6, Jupiter, V. Zsv. From
AI2, G. Jwg, D. Jtl, A. Jla.
(f 37. N. 1.)
Zip, o, G. Zijv6g t D. Zyvi, A.
Zvjvot, = preceding.
&SQ(inMv, ovrog, 6, attendant,
regular. From OEPAW, A.
&()tma, N. Plur. -frsQansg.
I%UQ, agog, ichor, regular. Ace.
Sing, also l/m.
xttJiwg, M or wo?, o, cable. From
KAAQ2, Plur. N. xa'Aot, A.
xakovg.
jtugu Ionic xaQrj, 10, head, G.
XCXQTjTOg, D. XOtQrjTl, X0, N.
Plur. *'^I. From XP^^ 7 ,
G. xgmog, D. y.Qoirl, A. TO Or
TO^ XQttTCt, Plur. G. XQ(XT(OV,
D. x^rxa/. From KPAA2,
G. xQaenog, D. x^if, Plur.
N. X^WT, A. TOU^
From KAPHA2, G. xtxgya-
iog, D. xo?JaTf, Plur.
, ov, o, bough, regular.
From KAA2, D. xi% D.
Plur. xAa'focr* (Epic).
tyajro?, ov, o, partaker, reg-
ular. From KOINJIN,
Plur. N. xo^wyf^, A. xoi-
KPAA2, KPA2, see x^.
xylrov, ov, TO, /z7y, regular.
From KPINO2, Plur. N.
xglvioc, D. XQIVSUI.
XQOMJ, rjg t y, woof, regular.
From KPOS, A. x^oxa.
A? contracted A$, o, s^owe,
G. hxaog Ao?, D. Awed' AV,
A. Ay A?>, Dual. A Aas,
Plur. N. luaeg Afc, G. ladwv
Idwv, D. Ao-(/t (Epic). From
AAA2 ( -- ), G. Aa'ov.
[uxQT.vg, o, witness, A. IIUQ-CVV,
D. Plur. [iixQivai. From
MAPTTP,
l, /o?, 77, scourge, regular.
From MA2TI2, D. ^uaair
(contracted from ^W'OTH), A.
.
veiQov, TO, dream. The rest is
from ONEIPA2, ovtiomoc,
or tiger? i, Dual ovslyme, ovei-
gnioiv, Plur. o
ovti-
, .
ovg, TO, car. The rest is from
the Doric we, wro'c, WT/, Dual
corf, wrot^, Plur. OJT, WT
Wtf/.
ngiofivg, o, old man, A. TT^-
aj5uv, V. ngsaftv. The rest is
from TrQftTfivTrjg, ov.
In Hesiod a Nom. Plur.
occurs.
44
o, ambassador, G.
Plur. N. A. V.
, D. ngsafisai. The
rest is from TTQtafevTTjg, ov.
oawnov, ov, ib, face, regular.
From IIP02JIIIA2, Plur.
N. ngoawTictTci, D. nQOGwnct-
OL.
ov, ij, ?/>er, regular.
From JIPOXOT2, D. Plur.
(like fioval from
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
From r\
2TlSy
[$46-
aiyl,
^
nvg, nvQog, nvgl, TO, fire. From
J1TPON, Plur. N. A. nvQcc,
G. TIVQOJV, D. nvQOiq.
GXWQ, TO. The rest is from
2KA2, oxaiog, axaTi, &/C.
arn/cov, ovog, r\, drop, regular.
From 2TAZ, N. Plur. OTU-
$ -
ov, o, row, regular.
og, w', o, peacock, regular.
From TAO2, N. Plur. TWO/.
i, TO, water. The rest is
from *TdA2, vdaiog, vdari,,
From vdog, D. Sing, vdei
(Epic).
6g, ov, o, son, regular. From
'TIET2, G. vlsog, &c. like
paadevg. From *TI2 come
the Epic G. vlog, D. vlt, A.
via, Dual, vis, Plur. N. i/I*?,
D. vleai and i/twat, A. via?.
pi*?], rig, i], battle , regular.
From 'T2MI2, D. vafilvi.
w, ovog, %> swallow, regu-
lar. From XEM/IJly V.
2. Nouns, which have only one nominative, but more than
one form for any of the other cases, are anomalous. Such
are the following :
, w or wog, %, threshing- ^v^g, ov or qrog, o, mushroom.
wig, I &og, o, v\, bird, regular.
' In the Plur. also N. A. 6'^-
mg or oQvzig, G. oqvioty*
WTOWC, w or 0)0?, o, paternal
uncle.
rig, sog or ^TOC, o, moth.
.iQ, %fiQog and %?g6g, ij, hand,
D. Plur. always xfyal. The
forms G. xegog, D. xtQh Dual
fciQolv, are poetic.
floor.
g, a) or WTO?, o, laughter,
g, tog or TO? or idog or
?y, justice.
Idgwg, M or wrog, b, sweat,
xktig, eidog, rj, key. Also Ace.
Sing, v&tiv, A. V. Plur.
liyTQwg, (o or wo?, o, maternal
uncle.
NOTE 1. All proper names in ^ gen. eog ( 42), have ^ or
ijv in the accusative singular. E. g.
'AQHJTOcpotvqg, eog ace. ^AQiGioyuw] and T^K
NOTE 2. Some nouns in ig have t<5o? or to? in the genitive.
E.g.
gen. ^vidog or fi^viog, resentment.
^N 47, 48.] ADJECTIVES. 45
NOTE 3. In the Ionic dialect, the accusative singular of
nouns in rjg gen. ov, often ends in c. E. g. Fvyi]g, ov, ace.
for
NOTE 4. A few proper names in ^g, ovg f and vg, are de-
clined according to the following examples :
'lavvrig, G. *Icx.vvr\, D. 'lawy, A. ^Juvvriv, V. *lavvr\.
ttovg, G. Jftoi}, D. J'Aov/A. rftow, V.
VVg, G. dlQVVy D. /llOVV, A. dlOVVV, V.
DEFECTIVE NOUNS.
4T. Defective nouns are those of which only some of the
cases are in use. Such are the following :
fryalou, ajv, oi, Etesian winds. 'OAi^wTna, wi/, T, Olympic
No singular. games. No singular.
^w, an A. Plur. used only in 6V^, TO, dream, used only in
the formula, ^ (pegeiv, to the N. and A. Sing.
show favor. O2 or O^S'OIV, TO, eye, Dual
"la&[iiUy wv, TOC, Isthmian games. N. A. oaae, Plur. G. oaacw,
No singular. D. oWotc, old oVaotat.
A%, o, 7io/, A. Aly. oydog, TO, advantage, used
6, Jfoe //new, D. Ati/, A. only in the N. Sing.
T. jQTvvha, o)?', T, Pythian games.
ri, yg, ^, armpit, used only No singular.
in the phrase ^TTO [tdHijg, TV, used only in the formula
under the arm, clandestinely. w TV, O Mow.
Ntpsa, wv, T, Nemean games. VTKXQ, TO, waking, as opposed
No singular. to 6Vo, used only in the
NIV, ri, snow, only A. y/qpa. N. and A. Sing.
ADJECTIVES.
1. In adjectives of three endings, the
feminine is always of the first declension ; the mas-
culine and the neuter are either of the second or
of the third.
2. Adjectives of two endings are either of the
second or of the third declension ; the feminine
is the same with the masculine.
46 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 49.
3. Adjectives of one ending are either of the first
or of the third declension. Such adjectives are
either masculine, feminine, or common.
ADJECTIVES IN 02.
4O. 1. Most adjectives in og have three endings, og, y, ov.
E. g. Gocpog, oocpy, aocpov.
When og is preceded by a vowel or by ^, the feminine
has a instead of 77. E. g. a&og, |/, a$tov' tiaxyog.,
S.
(wise)
y (wise)
TO (wise)
N.
Gocpog
00( py
GOCfOV
G.
D.
A.
V.
OOCpOV
oocpov
oocpd
oocpy
GOCf>1]V
GOCpOV
D.
N.A.V
G. D.
. oocpw
GOCpolv
aocpd
Gocpaiv
GOCpCO
P.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
GOCpol
aocpwv
oocpolg
ooyovg
GOCpol
Gocpal
Gocpoug
Gocpdg
Gocpa
oocpwv
oocpolg
aocpd
oocpd
So all PARTICIPLES in og. E. g. ivmopwog,
S. o (worthy)
r\ (worthy)
TO (worthy)
N. &OC|
'&'
at-iov
G. a$lov
|t?
a$lov
D. to?
a&a
|/0)
A. a$LOV
a&av
uiov
V. fee
|/
feoy
D.
N.A.V. tow
|t
|tw
G.D. fooiv
a$laiv
a$loiv
49.] ADJECTIVES.
P.
N. w'lftot aiat
G. a/oiv a$lwv a^laiv
D. allots a$laig aloig
A 3 t- r 3 i? ' " *'f?
VVf. >'. >'{.
. (Jt^LOL CH^lCtl* Ct^lM
NOTE 1. Adjectives in oog have 77 in the feminine. Except
when oo? is preceded by . E. g.
2. Many adjectives in og have only two endings, og, ov.
E. g. rjavxog, riav%ov.
Particularly, compound adjectives in og have two endings.
But compound adjectives in xog have three endings.
S. o, ri (quiet) za (quiet)
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
D.
G.'D'.
p.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
NOTE 2. In Attic writers and in the poets, many adjec-
tives in og, which commonly have three endings, are found
with only two. E g. o, y shvfrsQog, TO &SV&SQOV, free.
NOTE 3. The ending a of the feminine is long. Except
the feminine of Slog, divine, and a few others.
NOTE 4. For the ACCENT of the genitive plural of the feminine of bary-
tone adjectives and participles in o$, see above ( 31. N. 2),
48 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 50, 51.
3. Adjectives in sog, ta, eov, and oog, orj, oov, are contracted
($ 32 : 34). E. g.
a XQvaf], xgvosov XQVGOVV, G. %gvasov
jrjg, golden.
g agyvgovg, agyvgiot, agyvgoi, agyVQSOv agyvgovv y G.
)fov agyvgov, agyvysag otgyvgag, of silver,
unroot; anhovg, ankoy 7rA?5, anhoov ankovv, G. ankoov UTI
g, simple.
NOTE 5. For the ACCENT of some of the contracted forms of adjectives in
M;, oos, see above ( 34. N. 2).
ADJECTIVES IN S12.
5O. Adjectives in wg have two endings, cog, wv. They
are declined like vwg and avwyewv ($ 33). E. g.
S. o, TJ (fertile) TO (fertile)
G. Bvysw evysw
D. ivystt evyew
A. ct/yei^y svyswv
V. Bvystag evysoiv
D.
N.A.V. i
G. D.
P.
N.
G. fi/'^w' tvyeow
D. evysmg svyewg
A " *'
V. evyeco svyeo)
ADJECTIVES IN 2^.
51. Adjectives in v, gen. so^, have three endings, v^,
wa, v. E. g. y\vxvg, yhvxeia, ykvxv.
S. 6 (sweet) ^ (sweet) TO (sweet)
N. /Avxv? ylvxsla yhvxv
G. ylvxiog ylvxelag yhvxeog
D. ykvxEl ylvKti ykvxela yAWtsi y\VK*i
A. ^Avxw ^Avxetw^ yhvxv
V. yAvxv
52, 53.]
ADJECTIVES.
49
D.
N. A. V.
G. G.
P.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V. ylvxisg
ylvxelaiv
ylvxelg ytoxslcu
>) yhvxslaig
yhvxslg yivxttag
ylvxuai
ykvxds
ylvxioiv
yjivxsa
ylvxetov
ylvxda
yl.VY.ia.
NOTE 1. The Ionics make fern. ' or
or
E. g.
NOTE 2. The poets sometimes have mas. and fern, vg, neut.
v. E. g. o, ^ ydv$, 10 ydv.
ADJECTIVES IN H2 AND is.
52. 1. Adjectives in rjg, gen. sog, have two endings,
^?, sg. E. g. oJ
N.
G. ahrj&sog
D.
A.
V.
N.A.V. a
G. D.
P.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
2. Adjectives in i$, gen. to?, have two endings, ^, *. E. g.
l(5pt, G. I'J^io?, knowing.
ADJECTIVES IN AS, E12, HN, OT2, T2, JIN, J12.
03. 1. Adjectives in tig, gen. COTOC, have three endings,
, a, r. E. g. nag,
5
50
s.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
D.
N.A.I
G.D.
P.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
o (all)
nag
navrog
navtl
ndvrot
nag
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
f> (alt)
naact
ndarjg
noiarj
nuaav
naaa
[53.
TO (all)
navrog
navvl
nav
nav
naaa
ndaouv
nuvitq
navxtav
naaotig
Ttdaag
naaai
So all PARTICIPLES in . E. g.
, Tvyav, G.
REMARK 1. These two adjectives "in ag y p&ag and
have aiva in the feminine. Thus,
fii^ag, p&aiva, [t&av, G. [i&avog, black,
rdtiig, lakuwa, lukuv, G. idhavog, unfortunate
2. Adjectives in etg, gen. MO?, have three endings, <
S. o (graceful) f) (graceful) 10 (graceful)
N.
G.
A.
V.
D.
G.D.
P.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
Xotgleaact
Xctgleaant
Xotgttaacov
%agiiaaaig
Xotgisaaotg
53.] ADJECTIVES. 51
NOTE 1. The endings fag, yeaaa, fa, are contracted into
f}g, ?]e7(7tt, r^v. E. g.
Ti{tjjg 9 TiprjEaoa Tiftfjaaa, iifi^v T*//?Jj', G.
g, valuable.
The endings osig, oeaaa, oev, are contracted into ovg, ovaaa,
ovv. E. g.
nlccxovg, Tilaxoeaaa Tihaxovaaot, nlaxosv nhctxovv, G.
nhtxxovvrog, flat.
REMARK 2. The dative plural of adjectives in its forms an exception to
the general rule ( J 2. 5).
3. Participles in slg have three endings, slg, slaa, iv. E. g.
l$) Ti&tlaa, TL&SV.
S. o (placing) fj (placing') TO (placing)
N. Ti&elg Ti&tiact
G. xi&tvTog
D. ?i&ivii
A. ti&tvTa
V. ti&slg Ti&elaa
D.
G. D. TI&VTOIV
p.
N. Ti&tvTfg Ti&iiacu
G. Ti&evTWV Ti&eiawv
A. Ti&tvTag Ti&slaag
V. ii&ivTtg Ti&siaoti
4. There are but two adjectives in rjv ' o TSQIJV, fj TSQSWOI,
TO TQZV, G. TEQSvog, tender ; and o agarjv or oigQT]Vy TO MQG&V or
(XQQSV, G. ugasvog or uggsvog, male.
5. Participles in ovg have three endings, ovg t ovaa, 6v.
E. g. didovg, didovattj didov.
S. o (giving) rj (giving) TO (giving)
N. didovg didovact didov
G. didovTog didovayg didovrog
D. didovTi, didovarj didovit,
A. didovra didovaav didov
V. didovg didovaa didov
52 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$ 53.
D.
N.A.V.didorrs
didovaa
didorTS
G. D. diSovtoiv
didovaaw
didorTOiv
P.
N. didorisg
didovaat,
8i8orT(x
G. didorTWV
didovawv
didorTwr
D. dtoVuoX*)
didovaaig
didovai(r)
A. didorTag
didovaag
didorTot
V. didorTtg
didovaai
didorTot
6. Participles in i/$ have
three endings,
vg, vact, vr. E. g.
duwvg, deixrvaa, dsixrvv.
Ml
S. o (showing) \
ij (showing)
TO (showing)
N. deixrvg
deixrvaa
dsixrvr
G. deixrvrTog
dsixrvatig
dttxrvrrog
D. dnxrvvti
dsixrvarj
dfixrvrTL
A. dsixrvrToi
dsixrvaotv
dsixrvv
V. dsixrvg
deixrvaa
dsixrvv
N.A.V dtixrvrTS
detxrvaa
deixrvrTS
ij. I). SsixrvyTotv
dsixrvaaiv
dsixrvvroiv
P.
N. daxyvyTgg
deixrvaoa
dsixrvrTot
G. dsixrvrTWV
deixrvauv
deixrvrTKtv
D. (5fixvi;(rt(v)
dnxvvaaig
SfiXVVGl(v)
A. dsixrvrTag
dsixrvaag
deixrvrTa
V. 5X^VT6?
Suxrvocti
deixrvrTcc
7. Adjectives in wj>, gen. OVTO?, have three
endings, wr, ovact,
or. E. g. exwV, xoi/o"a, exov
>S^. o (zvilling) ^
(willing]
TO (willing)
N. XWV
exovaa
kxov
/^* r '
exovarjg
exorTog
D. IxO^Tt
exovay
kxOVTl
A. exovrot
exovactv
kxov
V. cxwv
sxovaa
sxov
N.A.V.xoW
txovaa
sxorTS
G. D. ix or TO iv
exovaaiv
exovToiv
53.] ADJECTIVES. 53
p.
N.
sxovisg
exovaou
SXOVTOL
G.
SXOVTWV
sxovatnv
txOVTWV
D.
sxovat(v)
exovaaig
exovai(v)
A.
sxoviotg
kxovaag
kxovict
V.
sxovTsg
kxovaai
SXOVTd
So all PARTICIPLES in ow. E. g. ivniwv, Tvmovact, TVTITOV,
G. tvmovfos ' (pdewv, ydsovaot, <pdtov, G. (pdsovTog, contracted
ptAoiiv, G.
NOTE 2. The feminine of adjectives in a?, i/?, 00$, [??, v, gen. v-rf, is
formed by dropping o$ of the genitive, and annexing tret. E. g.
5r;, vreivTos fem. rrra ( 12. 5)
T&tiS) r&ivraf " T/S-sr^a (ibid.)
^/^y;, ^/^o'vTiSj, d/Bot/tf'ne (ibid.)
^/yyj, Suxvuvros tf ^nxvvtrtt (ibid.)
tKuv, IKOVTOS (t iKovtrce (ibid.)
%*?'tts, xctitvros " xutfiffffot ( 12. N. 2).
8. Adjectives in *>, gen. ovog, have two endings, wy, ov.
E.g.
^. o, ^ (rzpe) TO (ripe)
N. nenwv ninov
G. ninovog nenovog
D. ninQVi nlnovt
A. ninovu ninov
V. ninov ninov
D.
N.A.V.TTf^ovs nenovs
G. D. 7T7royo*y nsnovow
P.
N. nsnovtg
G. TTSTToVwV
D. ninooi(v)
A. ninovag ninovct
V. nsnovsg ninovct
9. Participles in w^ have tnree endings, w^, ma, o^. E. g.
g, TSTVcpvla, TTV(pog t having struck.
54 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 54, 55.
S.
^
TO
N.
iKTV(fcag
TSjvyvla
TSTvmog
G.
TfTVCfOTOg
T8TV<pvl(xg
JSTVCpOTOg
D.
TSTVqtOTl
?TV(pvl(X
TSTVCjpOTt
A.
TSTVCfOTCt
TTV(pvlav
jSTvmog
V.
f
TSTvcpwg
Tsrvcpviot
lervyog
D.
N.A.V
. 18TV(fOT
Tsxvcpvla
ISTVtyOTS
G. D.
TSTVQpOTOlV
Tsncpvlaiv
TETVCpOJOlV
P.
N.
T8TV(f6T8$
TSTVCpvlcti
TSTVCpOTOl
G.
ISTVCpOTWV
TZTVCpVLWV
'CSTVCpOTWV
D.
TTV(p6at,(v)
TSTiHfvloug
18TVCp6at(v)
A.
ISTVfpOTUg
^eTvq>vlag
TTV<p<JTCC
V.
TTUO)OTf^
-ISTVWVICU
TetVCpOTU
ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING.
.54. The following are some of the adjectives which have
only one ending : o af&rjg, ^rog' o, ^ a/3gtag 9 WTog' o, y ayvwg,
euro.? * o, r) aftung, jjiog* o, fj aiyikiy), nog" o, r\ ai'$oyj, nog ' o
fti'iVo/i', oirog ' o ax[ir)g, fJTog ' o, i] avcdijtig, idog ' o, r\ (xmyr, i]vog '
o, r) atjy^Qy r^iog or fiog ' o, t] ^TT|, yog * o fika!;, %og ' o, r)
B^OfAixg, ddog' o e&fkoi'Ttjg, ov ' o, 17 ^^t)$, yog ' o, i] ^nr\kvq y
vdog" i] EJiirtS, Kog' o, ?y tvgiv, ivog' 6, ^ vaiy>, nog' o, y ?JAt|,
xoc * o, i] yfttshtySt yTog ' 6, r) iTiTidg, ccdog ' o {IWXMQ, agog ' o, ^
,jUxo/o)?', wvog ' o, T\ {icMQavxriv, si'og ' o, r) [iwvv$, %oq ' o, ^
VOf!(tc, udog ' o, r) Ttagafikwifj, nog ' 6, 77 nnQunkfe, yog ' o nsvrjg t
^TOC ' 6 nolvwi$, xog ' o nQofifa}g, yxog ' o, r) anogdg, ddog ' o, y
Add to these the compounds of dylS, ^w^|, nalg,
E. g. o OQ&Q&OI& TQ'%og ' o, f\ xodklnaig, cudog' o, ^
NOTE. Some of these are also used as neuters, but only in the genitive and
dative.
COMPOUND ADJECTIVES.
5o. Compound adjectives, of which the last component
part is a substantive, follow the declension of that substantive.
56.] COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 55
Such adjectives may have a neuter, when it can be formed
after the same analogy. E. g.
fv^agig, i, G. wog, graceful, from sv, /uQig, wog
svtlmg, i, G. idog, hopeful, from ev, efalg, idog
dlnovg, ovv, G. odog, two-footed, from dig, novg, nodog
adaxQvg, v, G. vog, tearless, from -, ddxgv, vog
v, ov, G. ovog, happy, from gi), dalpwv, ovog _
Q, OQ, G. ogog, magnanimous, from piyag, r^x
NOTE 1. The compounds of nohg generally have idog in the
genitive. E. g.
anohg, i y G. idog, vagabond.
NOTE 2. The compounds of ^TTJQ, naryf), and yqrp mind,
change t\ into w. E. g.
^>, G. ogog, motherless
Q f G. o^oc, fatherless
v, ov, G. orog, discreet.
NOTE 3. The compounds of ^'Acoc, laughter, and xsgag, horn,
are either of the second or third declension. E. g.
v, G. w or WTO^, fond of laughter
g, wv, G, w or uiog, having three horns.
ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES.
5G. The following list contains most of the anomalous
and defective adjectives.
evg and yvg, neut. iv and ?)#, ^ooc?, G. c^o?, A. evv and ^iV, neut.
Plur. G. o)y, of good things.
The neuter 5, contracted from ev, means, well.
wg, Nom. mas. living, alive. The rest is from the regular wog,
r\ y ov.
ufyag, ntydlrij p.iya, great, is declined in the following manner :
S. o (great) % (great) -ib (great)
N. fisyag fityalr]
G. jUf/Aot; fj,eyahi]g .
D. (Asydkw [it/city
A. fisyav fj.eydlr]V
V. psyahs
D.
N.A.V. (AsydhM
G. D. nsydiloiv peydlcuv
56 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 56.
p.
N. jusydhoi
G. fAsydhwv
D. {isydkoig
A. [isydkovg
V. fieyuhoi,
lAsydlai,
Hsyahwv
[Asyu'koug
fieydkag
fjisydkcu
Observe, that all the cases, except the nominative and
accusative singular, masculine and neuter, come from the
obsolete MEFAAO2.
The vocative singular fieydhe is very rare.
nUwg,full, borrows its feminine from nliog. Thus, nhswg,
In composition it has only two endings, w^, wv, ( 50.)
nokvg, TioUiJ, TroAv, much, is declined as follows :
S. o (much) % (much) TO (much)
N. nohvg TtoM.1] nolv
G. TroAAoi; 7roAA^? TroAAov
D. TTOA^W
A. TTO^yy
P. (many (many) (many)
N. TroAAo/
G. TroAAcSv
D. iio\\oig
A. TTOUOU?
The dual is of course wanting.
Observe, that all the cases, except the nominative and
accusative singular, masculine and neuter, come from nottog,
y t 6v, which is used by the lonians.
The epic poets decline nokvg like ylvxvg' thus, nohvg, nofalct,
noli), G. noUog.
ngnog, meek, borrows its feminine and neuter from ngavg, ngatia,
ngav, G. ngaiog.
aotg, o, ^, safe, neut, owv, A. awv, A. Plur. aug, neut. Plur. a,
the rest from the regular owog, a, ov. The feminine a is
rare.
ygovdog, 77, ov, gone, used only in the Nominative, of all genders
and numbers.
$ 57.] DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 57
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
COMPARISON BY TEP02, TAT02.
t>7. 1. Adjectives in og are compared by dropping g,
and annexing -isgog for the comparative, and xonog for the
superlative. If the penult of the positive be short, o is
changed into w. E. g.
aofpog, wise, aocpcorsgog, wiser, aocpwTaxog, wisest
ctTlpog, dishonored, anuoifgog, aTtpoTonog
asfivog, venerable, aspvoxegog, ospvoxaxog.
NOTE 1. In general, o remains unaltered when it is pre-
ceded by a mute and a liquid. ( 17. 3.) E. g. nvxvog, dense,
nvxvoxegog, nvxvoxaxog.
REMARK 1. In a few instances Homer changes o into u even when the
penult of the positive is long. E. g. xccxo%sivos, xctxo
NOTE 2. A few adjectives in og are compared according to
the following examples :
cplkog, cplfasgog,
(isaog,
GnovSoilog,
oyoqxxyog,
REMARK 2. Those in oog are always compared by
E. g.
ankosaTctTog, contracted
%. Adjectives in vg, gen. eog, are compared by dropping g, and
annexing xegog, taiog. E. g.
o|u, sharp, oSuxsgog, o$UTaiog.
3. These two adjectives, p&ug and xdhxg, drop og of the
genitive, and annex xegog, xaxog. Thus,
ctvog,
ctvog,
4. Adjectives in rjg gen. eog, and sig gen. eviog, shorten
and eig into tg, and annex rsgog, inrog. E. g.
58 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 58.
NOTE 3. "YivMf, test false, has also comparative ^evlto-rf^es.
vvs, VTOS, poor, follows the analogy of adjectives in y, gen. tog ' thus,
5. Adjectives in wt>, gen. ovog, drop og of the genitive, and
annex saie^og, eaTarog. E. g.
ovog, vw<f>Qovi<nQog, awcpgoviaraiog.
6. The adjectives a^naS, UX<*QI?> /?A, ^ua'xap, are compared
as follows:
, yog, aQTia
g, a%ot
xog,
NOTE 4. Substantives denoting an employment or character
are sometimes compared like adjectives. E. g. fiaadsvg, king,
ftaademe^og, more kingly, puadtmuTog, most kingly uU
thief, xhTiTloTaiog, very thievish.
NOTE 5. The pronouns do not admit of different degrees in their significa-
tion. Nevertheless the comedians, for the sake of exciting laughter, compare
etvros in the following manner : KVTOS, himself, a.lrort^os t himself-er, uurdwros,
himself-est, ipsissimus.
COMPARISON BY IJIN, I2T02
58. 1. Some adjectives in vg drop this ending, and annex
Tcov for the comparative, and icnog for the superlative. E. g.
rjdvg, pleasant, ydiav, rjd
2. Comparatives in wv are declined according to the follow-
ing example :
S.o,r) (pleasanter) TO ( pleasant er)
N. ydlttv ydtov
G. rjdlovog ydlovog
D. rivlovv ydlovi
A. ydlovcc ^dlca ydiov
D.
N. A. rjdlovs fjdlovs
G. D. ydiovoiv fidiovoit
P.
N. ydlovsg ydlovg ydlova
G. ydiovwv ydiowav *
D. vf8loai(v) f)dlooi(v)
A. ydlovag fjdlovg ydlova ydlto
59.] DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 59
Observe, that the accusative singular masculine and feminine,
and the nominative and accusative plural of all genders, drop
the v, and contract the two last syllables.
NOTE 1. A few adjectives in us form their comparative by dropping the last
syllable of the positive and annexing ffyuv or rruv. E. g.
<ret%v$, fat, Ktiffffuv
(>a.t>s, deep, pKo-tfuv.
NOTE 2. Kg<rw, powerful, changes into t or it in the comparative : thus,
Kg&rug, xfiaiffffuv, x^iffffeavy xgtiffffeav. ( 58. N. 1 : 2. N. 3.)
The Doric xetppeuv for xgiifftruv is formed in the following manner : xgcfrus,
xgutfffuv, xKgfeav, xacpput. ( 58. N. 1 : 26. 2 : 11 : 6. N.)
NOTE 3. These two adjectives, piyas and faiyos, form their comparative by
dropping the last syllable, and annexing gcov. Thus i^lyus, pi&v (Attic ftii&v) ;
oX'tyos, o\%av. ( 2. N. 3.)
ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISON.
59. 1. The comparison of an adjective is anomalous
when the adjective has, or is supposed to have, more than
one positive.
2. The comparison is defective, when the adjective has no
positive in use.
3. The following list contains most of the adjectives which
are anomalous or defective in their comparison.
aya&og, good otfutlv&v
flefaloov
xgelaawv or xj
inai'dv or lamv 'AwioTog or Aqlaro?
'Agsicov, the proper comparative of oigitrros, belongs to the Epic language.
For /SsXr/ajv, Xu^tuv, the epic poets have fltXregoS) Xut'rtgos.
Kgary?, the positive of xgtttrtruv, xgetrtffrcs, occurs in Homer.
For jSiXr/o-rof, the Doric dialect has fii*rt<rros.
For xotifftreuv, the Ionic has xgi<r<r<uv, and the Doric xdppeuv. ( 58. N. 2.)
The poets have xd^na-ro; for x^dri/rra;. ( 26. 2.)
The Epic language has also compar. Qigrtgog, superl. <ptgi<rros or ^t^raros*
The regular comparative and superlative, aya^rs^aj, ayaSaJraTa?, do not
occur in good writers.
aioxQog (/II2XT2), ugly, ala%lwv, ul'axunog. The comparative
aiaxQOTSQog is not much used.
atyeivog (AAFT2) t painful, ulytivoisgos or ulylav, atyewowtog
60 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 59.
or ahyiaiog. The regular forms ahysivoTsgog, utyuvotanog,
are more usual in the masculine and feminine.
v, see ayct&og.
v, vtQiaiog, see aya&og.
&TiOTog, see aya&og.
see fiixgog.
EAEFXT2, infamous, &tyxi<rtog. The plural of the positive
occurs in Homer (II. 4, 242 : 24, 239).
Kqgoio?, last, a defective superlative.
ty&gog (EXOT2), hostile, fy&QOTeQog or &*W, ex&Qo-taTos Or
*HKT2, see
xaxog, bad xuxlwv xaxiarog
The forms %<r<ruv, yxtffros, come from 'HKT2. ( 58. N. 1.)
The regular comparative xujcun^os is poetic.
For %ttuv and %<r<ruv t the lonians have %i6tuv and 1<r<ruv.
og (KAAT2), beautiful, xcdttcav, xctihvTog. The doubling
of the A seems to be an accidental peculiarity.
xctQQfor, see ayctdog.
KEP4T2, crafty, wgdlwv, xsg
XQUTVg, see aya&og.
xvdgog (KTJT2), glorious, xvdlwv, xvd
xvvveQog, more impudent, a defective comparative, derived from
xv wv, xvvog, dog".
'ioTog, see oiya&og.
og (MAKT2, MHKT2) y long, fiaxQOTSQog and ^uaajwy, fia-
og and fiyxiarog. ( 58. N. 1.)
g, great, fiel^wv (Ionic |U8?wy), [teyioTog. ( 58. N. 3.)
og, small ikaaocov
The forms IXaW<wv, \Xa.%i<rros, come from eXa^jy;. ( 58. N. 1.) The
superlative pt7ff<ros is poetic.
oUyog, little, oA/^wv, oUyidTog. (58. N. 3.)
olxTQo? (OIKTT2\ pitiable, olxTiwv, ol'xTiaiog or olxTgoroiTog.
onhoTegog, younger, onkoxaxog, youngest, Epic. It is derived
from onlov, weapon.
nenav, ripe, nsnalTSQog, nsnuliaxog.
nlwv, fat, moTSQog, TtioTciTog-
nolvg, much, nfalwv or nhiwv, nksiaiog.
nQOTSQog, former, nQwiog,Jirst, derived from the preposition ngo,
before.
gadiog (PAT2), easy, QMWV, gn<nog.
60.]
NUMERALS.
61
The lonians say fvjftus, />V*, pj'trrof.
The epic poets have friiri^os, prfretrtg .
vg (OAXT2), swift, iu%iwv commonly fidoatov,
($$ 14. 3 : 58. N. 1.)
nsQTfQog, higher, vniQianog, highest, derived from the preposi-
tion vn&o, above.
g, later, vaTcnog, latest.
, high, vifjtwv, vyiorog.
g, brighter, cpadvjctTog, brightest, derived from g>cuVw.
cpsQTCtTog, (p&yiaiog, see aya&og.
, %tl(ji(jTog, ^s^f/wy, see xaxog.
NOTE. In a few instances new comparatives and superlatives are formed from
adjectives, which are already in the comparative or superlative degree. E. g.
y^urtrros from ^^uros, xttgdrtgos from %iiuv.
NUMERALS.
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
GO, 1. The numerals tig, dvo, xgug, and teaaagsg or TCT-
ragtg, are declined as follows :
puxg
fita
filav
j&. o (one) <% (one)
N. tig ula
G. tvog
D. ivl
A. eva
D. TW, T, TW (two)
N. A. (5uo and dvm
G. ^uoTv and dvsiv
D. dvolv
P.ol,al(three)
N. Tfefc
G. JQLOJV
D.
A.
TO (owe)
P. (^o)
N. A. wanting
G.
D.
dvwv
dv
T (three)
TQIWV
P.oi,al(four)
N. Ti'aaaQsg
G.
D.
A. Tiaoagctg
TQIIX
T (/ot/r)
rtaaaga
Tsaadgwv
6
rdaoagot
62 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [ $ 60,
REMARK. Jvo is found undeclined.
2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100, inclusive, are in-
declinable {< 45. 2).
5. nivis 40.
6. IS 50.
7. iTTia 60. 6|JXOJ>T
8. oxro* 70. e^doprjxopia
9. W 80. oydorjxovra
10. #x 90. ivvivr^ovTa
11. trdtxct 100. ixaiov
12. dcudcxa 200. fadxoaioi, ai, a
13. dsxoiTQeig or iQiaxuldsxu 300. -IQIMXOGIOI, at, a
14. dexaT&aaagsg or jeoaagea- 400. TSTQCXXOVIOI, at, a
xaldixct 500. nwinxoaioi, ai, at
15. dsxttnsvTKOrnsvTexaldexct 600. g^wxoaioi, t, a
16. dwus$ or exxaidsxa 700. kniotxcHJioi, at, a
17. dexasma or eTiTaxaldfxa 800. oxTxoatot, at, a
18. foxaoxrw or oxjwxw/^exa 900. twuxoaioi, a.i y a
19. dsxasv via or eweaxotldexa 1000. %lhoi, ui, a
20. rxoffi(') 2000. dtaxttioi, at, a
21. tl'xoui ei<;, or t^ xat sl'xoai 10000. HVQIOI, at, a
30. TQi&xovTa 20000. di(}(j,VQtot t at, a
NOTE 1. The compounds ovdslg (ovde, tic) and
tig) have nom. plur. oiidtvsg, pydsveg, insignificant persons.
NOTE 2. The ACCENT of the feminine ^uta is anomalous in
the genitive and dative. ( 31. N. 2.)
NOTE 3. JexuTQeis, dsxaTsaanyec, and the first component
part of TfaaotQeaxotldsxct, are declined like ?/ and leaoagsg
respectively.
NOTE 4. Thousands are formed by prefixing the numeral
adverbs ( 62. 4) to ^/JUot.
TWis of thousands are formed by prefixing these adverbs to
[JLVQlOi.
NOTE 5. Instead of any number of tens -|- 8 or 9, a circumlocution with
3<ay (from Jew, to want) is often used. E. g. Ai/j~y feovrtj t'/xon, twenty
wanting two, simply eighteen. *Jvo; ^tovng r^tu,Kovra y thirty wanting one t
simply twenty-nine.
This principle applies also to ordinals. E. g. 'Eva* liov ilx.off<rcv srog, the
nineteenth year.
The participle liuv (from Ssw, am wanting) with its substantive is sometimes
put in the genitive absolute. E. g. TlivrvKovro, picis $tov<rs, forty-nine. So
with ordinals, ( E0? Vmros T^oucoffru trti, in the twenty-ninth year.
ORDINAL NUMBERS. 63
NOTE 6. DIALECTS. The dialectic peculiarities of the cardinal numbers are
as follows :
1. Epic lot for ftta, IM for v/.
2. Epic $ey, loio'i, declined throughout.
4. Ionic Tiffffi^s, Doric rirrogts or Tiroes, ^Eolic vt<rvgt; t poetic dat. plur.
TlT(>a,<n for TlTTOC.gO't.
5. Doric wj^cre.
12. Ionic and poetic ww5j*a and ^voxctftixet.
14. Ionic Ttffiri/itffKxi^iKot, indeclinable.
20. Doric t,'txetTi, Epic IS/MY,
30, 40, 80, 200, 300. Ionic rgwxtvret, rtfffftgwxovra, oy^axovra, ^nKontt,
VQWXOO'lOl*
9000, 100 JO. Old lvvici%l*.oi, SsxuxTlot.
ORDINAL NUMBERS.
61. The ordinal numbers are,
1st. TlQMTOg, T), OV 30th. TQlttXOOTOg, tj, 0V
2d. dsvifQog, ct, ov 40th. itoaaQuxoajo?, ^J, 6v
3d. TQITOC, rj, ov 50th. mvi^ocsiog^ y, 6v
4th. jsTMQTog, r\, ov 60th. cl^xotiroV, ^', ov
5th. ntpTiTog, y, ov 70th. s^o^xoaroV, 7j, oV
6th. Fxzoc, iy, ov 80th. oydorjxoaTog, T^, or
7th. f'fidojjioc, 77, ov 90th. evvsvyxooTog, ij, oV
8th. b'/doocj TJ, ov 100th. txttToaro's, ij, ov
9th. ivvmog, r], ov 200th. diuxooiooToc;, ?J, ov
10th. dsxu-cog, t], ov 300th. rotaxoaiooTog, y, ov
llth. '^6xroc, rj, ov 400th. TTxocnocTo' ?J, ov
12th. dwdixaiog, rj, ov 500th. 7itvTaxooiO(JT6g,rj, ov
13th. TQioxaidsxmog, ?y, ov 600th. e^owoGiooTog, r] t ov
14th. -isuoMQ'.xxmdtxixTog, 17, ov 700th. emaxoaiooTog, y, ov
15th. TitVTBxatdexuToCj rj, ov 800th. oy.Tcxxooiooicg, r\, ov
16th. xxm$f'xToc, ??, ov 900th. ivvaxooiOGT6g y t;, ov
17th. ininxvtidtxnTog, rj, ov 1000th. %dtoaTog, TJ, ov
18th. oxTwxaidexuTog, rj, ov 10000th. pVQtoaTog, r], ov
19th. ft'vfccxaeidsxmog, rj, ov 20000th. diaftVQioaiog, y, ov
20th. flxooTog, r], ov &C.
21st. elxoaiog TIQWTO?, or TIOCU-
rog xal elxoacog
NOTE 1 . Homer has rir^aros for riret^roe t i&opetros
for oy'btos, itva,t6$ for ivvctros or ivarc;. Herodotus has riffa'Efliffxaibkxeirfl for
nfffagaxctitiixeirv.
NOTE 2. A mixed number, of which the fractional part is , is expressed by
a circumlocution, when it denotes a coin or weight. E. g. Yli^rov fifupwov
64 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 62, 63.
vvarav
mince ; but HIVTE fiptfAveuet = | = 2 mince. "E
fc talents ; but 'Em yipirccXuvra. = | = 4 talents. Tireegrov
34 o&oft' / but Ti<r*
NUMERAL SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND
ADVERBS.
6S. 1. The numeral substantives end in $, gen. <5
feminine. E. g. povdg, monad, unit, dvdg, Totwc, triad, nti'iag,
e&g, efidopdg, oydodg, Ivvidg, dexoig, wvnovTag, %didg, pvguxg,
myriad.
2. The numeral adjectives in ntiog or nldaiog correspond
to those in fold, in English. E. g. anloog, simple, dinloog or
dmldaiog, double, twofold, rgmloog or Tyinlaaiog, triple, three-
fold, -rsTQUTiXoog or TtTQanhdatog, quadruple, fourfold.
3. The numeral adjectives answering to the question rco-
a-iuiog, on what day 1 end in cuog. They are formed from the
ordinals. E. g. devitQciiog, on the second day, jQnouog t on the
third day.
4. The numeral adverbs answering to the question noadxig,
kow often 1 end in dxig. E. g. TtTgoixig, four times, nevTuxig,
Jive times.
Except the first three, anaS, once, dig, twice, and T^/?, thrice.
ARTICLE.
63. The article o, the, is declined as follows :
8.
M.
F.
N.
D.
M.
P.
2T,
P.
M.
F.
N.
N.
c
^
TO
N.
TW
T
TW
N.
ol
ttl
T
G.
tov
trig
TOV
G.
ioiv
ittiv
TOiV
G,
TWJ>
rwv
TWX
D.
TJj
TOJ
D.
Tolv
T(UV
Tolv
D.
TO!?
Toilg
tolg
A.
i6v
ify
TO
A.
TW
T
TW
A.
TOl'?
lag
id
NOTE 1. For QUANTITY, ACCENT, and DIALECTS, see above ( 81. N. 1,
2. 3 : 33. N. 2, 3, 4.)
We only observe here that the Dorians have T*/, rmi, for /, /.
NOTE 2. The original form of the article was TO2, from which come the
oblique cases, the Doric forms rot, rai, and the adverb rug.
64.] PRONOUN. 65
PRONOUN.
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
64. The personal pronouns are fyu, av, 7. The nomi-
native 7 is obsolete.
8. (I)
S. (thou)
^. (Ae, sAe, iV)
N. eyw
N. au
N. 7
G. efiov, [tov
G. aou
G ov
D. cpoi, fioi
D. ool
D. ol
A. ffl, (.18
A. as
A. l f
D. (we two)
Z>. (you two)
1>. (they two)
N.A. vu'i, vw
N.A. aqpau, aqpw
N.A. aqoos
G.D. vwiv, vwv
G.D. aqpwiV, aqpwy
GT\ .f.
.JL'. ocptoiv
P. (we)
P. (ye, you)
P. (they)
N. fa*
N. fyi ff
N. (rqpa n. arqpfa
G. ^fj.wv
GC n>
. vuuv
G. o(fO)v
D. fjfilv
DC
. VUlV
D. a(plai(v)
Ac
Tjj.iag
A. l^U
A. aqpaff n. ag>a
REMARK. The dual rw and ayn are very often written with-
out the iota subscript ; thus, y
NOTE 1. The particle yi is often appended to the pronouns
of the first and second person for the sake of emphasis. E. g.
l/w/s, / indeed, for my part ; av s, thou indeed. The accent
of e/u/s is irregular ($ 22. 3
NOTE 2. DIALECTS. The dialectic peculiarities of the per-
sonal pronouns are exhibited in the following table.
Sing. N. Epic and Doric tyriv.
G. Epic tpdo, f/mo, ^'^j/, Ionic and Doric
D. Doric tyiv.
Plur. N. Ionic r)i*ss$, Epic a^^q, Doric apsg (long a).
G. Ionic ripsaw, Epic tjfteyur.
D. Epic aft fit or appiy, poetic ^/v (short t), jjptv.
A. Ionic ^ueW, Epic a^^s, Doric ^e (long ), poetic
(short a).
6*
66 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ $ 65.
Sing. N. Doric iv, Epic TVVIJ.
G. Epic ago, duo, usdsv, icolo, Ionic and Doric aev,
Doric also -ttv or ifi;?.
D. Doric TtV, rttV, Ionic and Doric TO/.
A. Doric re, T*V, TV (enclitic).
Plur. N. Ionic vplsg, Epic i^fe, Doric i^^ (long v).
G. Ionic vfitiuv, Epic vfitiwv.
D. Epic tip^u or vfjip.iv, poetic fyuV (short t), {j^/ei/.
A. Ionic fy/g'ac, Epic (f^jie, Doric t^ (long v), poetic
' (short ).
1 . G. Epic to, elo, 5er, esTo, Ionic and Doric tv.
D. Doric IV, Epic eol.
A. Epic le.
Plur. N. Ionic 0qpe p e;.
G. Ionic aopo)v, Epic cupelutv.
D. Epic and Ionic acp/ or o-qpfr.
A. Ionic aqpc, Epic and Ionic o-^s, poetic crqpaff (short
a), Doric y/g (in Theocritus).
The Attic poets use the accusative aqpc in all
genders and numbers.
NOTE 3. The accusative plv or viv, him, her, it, them, is
used in all genders and numbers.
The epic poets and the lonians use pV, the Attic poets
and the Dorians, vlv.
1. The pronoun nvroq is declined like 0-090'?
49. 1), except that its neuter has o instead of ov. Thus,
avTog, he, himself, avnf, she, herself, amo, it, itself, G. amov,
77?, ov.
2. With the article before il, amog signifies the same,
144. 3,) in which case it is often contracted with the arti-
cle. E. g. javioVy tavTWj ravrfj, for TOV ctmov, iw UVTW, ti] ctVTij.
When this contraction takes place, the neuter has o or ov '
thus, Tffvro or KXVIOV, for TO oruto.
The contracted forms lav-ty and TVT must not be con-
founded with TuvTf] and -taina from OI/TO?.
NOTE. The lonians insert an e before the endings of
ctviwv, aiiiolg* E. g. aviiriv for
66.]
PRONOUN.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUN.
67
^ GG. The reflexive pronouns are (paviov, aswuroi;, eavxov.
They are compounded of the personal pronouns and aviog.
They have no nominative.
8. M. (of myself) 8. F. (of myself)
G. ffltXVTOV G.
D. ffiavioi D.
A. ffwvTov A.
P. (of ourselves) P. (of ourselves)
ff.iavrfj
G.
D.
A.
Tj^lMV CtVTWV
T\piv ctujoig
avjovg
G.
D.
A.
8. (of thyself)
G. ofocviov or oavTov
D. tfVTci7 or aavrw
A. asaviov or aaviov
P. (of yourselves)
G. t'ftalv avitav
D. Vfilv avTolg
A. i^uas aviovg
8.
(of thyself)
G.
aUT?Jc or aavvrjg
D.
otctvcij or onvTtj
A.
fftCtVTTJV Or CFUT7jV
P.
(of yourselves)
G.
VUMV avrwv
D.
v^iv avTttig
A.
Vfiixg (xvictg
A
(of herself)
G.
iavrrjg or nvtr^g
D.
kotvrij or otvTi]
A.
kaVTl'iV Or VT7?V
P. (of themselves)
8. (of himself)
G. &X1/T0V or nt'Tov
D. eixVTw or oevrqH
A. cwurov or JioV
JP. (q/* themselves)
G. vro)j' or tttTajv G. i/ra)i
D. iavrolgor avToig D. tavuxig or ctvicug
A. IVTOVJ or aiiiovg A. vr^ or uvTag
The contracted forms of UTOV must not be confounded
with the corresponding forms of cxwr's.
NOTE 1. The third person plural also is often formed by
means of the personal pronoun and ovrog. E. g. aywv VTWV,
for eaviwv.
NOTE 2. The weuter lt/T or etvro, from Uvrv t sometimes occurs.
NOTE 3. The tfwa/ ayTo7v of the reflexive pronoun tawrov is sometimes used.
NOTE 4. In Homer these pronouns are often written separ-
ately. E. g. ffnv avifjg, for ,
68 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ < 67, 68.
NOTE 5. The lonians use suv for u. E. g. euscnvTov for
tpuvrov. ( 3. N. 3.)
POSSESSIVE PRONOUN
67. The possessive pronouns are derived from the per-
sonal pronouns. In signification they are equivalent to the
genitive of the personal pronoun.
rj, 6v, my, from
g, n, ov, of us two, i(
s, a, ov, our, "
00$, at], oor, thy, "
oybriifyog, ix, ov, of you two, "
vphtgog, vc, ov, your, t(
og, ^/', ov, his, her, its, "
OfpsTtQog, , ov, their, "
NOTE 1. DIALECTS. First Person Plur. Doric apog (long ),
Epic apog (long-**), for yp&TiQog. In the Attic poets apog is
equivalent to the singular fyog.
Second Person Sing. Ionic and Doric rsog for oog, Plur.
Doric and Epic v^6g (long u), for v^hegog.
Third Person Sing. Ionic and Doric eog for og, Plur. Epic
and Doric ocpug for oyittgog.
NOTE 2. The dual vu*ri^oe and <r<putreos are used only by the poets.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.
G. The interrogative pronoun ilq, who? which? what?
is declined in the following manner :
S. M. F. N. D. M. F.N. P. M. F. N.
N. tig il N. TIVS N. tlvfg lira
G. ilvog,Tov Tit'og, TOU G. ilvoiv . G. ilvwv rlfwv
D. TIVI, TW ili'i, IM D. jivotv D. iLoi(v) rlat(v)
A. T/V il A. rtVs A. r/ra^ ilvct
The forms TOU, TW, must not be confounded with the articles
tov, TO*.
NOTE. DIALECTS. Sing. G. Epic TS'O, Ionic and Doric -ttv,
for TOV, D. Ionic x*'w for TW, Plur. Ionic, G. jf'wy, D. TC'OIS,
69, 70.J PRONOUN. 69
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
O9. 1. The indefinite pronoun ilg (grave accent), any,
certain, some, is declined as follows :
8. M. F. N. D. M.F. N. P. M. F. N.
N. jig il N. Tfri ' N. wig wa
G. iivog, toil tivog, tov G. nvolv G. jtvwv TIVWV
D. jivl, TM nvl, TO> D. iivoiv D. jiat(v) Tial(v)
A. rivet il A. TLVS A. Tivag iiva, cioocc
NOTE 1. DIALECTS. Sing. G. Epic TS'O, Ionic and Doric TV,
for TOU, D. Ionic TS'W for TW, Plur. G. Ionic ifcwv, all enclitic.
2. The indefinite pronoun delva, such-a-one, is declined as
follows :
S. All genders. P. All genders.
N. ditva N. Siivfg
G. fon>o G. dslvwv
D. fom D.
A. dftva A.
NOTE 2. Aristophanes (Thesm. 622) has TOU $i?y, for rou hTvog.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN.
TO. The demonstrative pronouns are Sfo, OUTO?, and
exslyoj.
^0 ^ is simply the article with the inseparable particle ds.
Thus, ode, r t de, Tode, G. loi'de, jfjads.
Oviog is declined as follows :
8. M. (this) F. (this) N. (this)
IN.
ovrog
ccVTrj
10VIO
G.
TOVTOV
TctVTrjg
10VIOV
D.
TOVTOt
IdVTTJ
VOVTW
A.
toviov
taviriv
10VIO
D.
(these two)
(these two)
(these two)
N.
A. TOL'TW
javia
Tovrw
G.
D. JQVTOIV
tamouv
10VIOIV
P.
(these)
(these)
(these)
N.
OVTOt
avion,
javra
G.
JOVTMV
10VIWV
jovrcwv
D.
IQVTOig
totmofig
TOVTOig
A.
Tovjovg
ravjotg
lavia
70 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [?1.
'xetvog, he, that, is declined like ovxog. Thus, i%sivog, y, o,
G. exelvov, t}g, ov.
NOTE 1. DIALECTS. D. Plur. Epic voladsaai, Tola-deal, for
to1ade,'ftor\ ods.
The lonians insert an before the endings of IOVTOV,
TOVTW, TOVJCOV, xoviovg. E. g. TOVTSOV for TOVTOV.
For ixslrog, the Ionic dialect has xslvog, the Doric,
and the ^Eolic, xrjvog.
NOTE 2. The letter / (long) is often appended to the de-
monstrative pronouns for the sake of emphasis. E. g. omoal,
avir^i, this here ; exeivoal, that there.
The short vowel is dropped before /. E. g. odl, rfil,
TOUT/, javil, for odei' } rjde'i', vodt'i', TOVTOI,
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
71. 1. The relative pronoun og, who, which, that, is de-
clined as follows:
S. M. F. N. D. M. F. N. P. M. F. N.
N. OG % o N. co a co N. ol ai a
rv ~ ~ 7 f^ r 7 ? f^ ~ 77
\J. OV Tjg OV \J(' OiV CKiV OLV vf. C0?> (OV (OV
D. co 77 co D. olv alv olv D. olg cclg olg
A. ov r\v Q A. co co A. ovg ag a
2. The relative oang, whoever, who, is compounded of og
and the indefinite pronoun rig, which are separately declined.
Thus,
S. M. F. N.
N. ovTig %ug o ji
G. ovuvog, orov yaTivog ojuuvog, OTOV
D. MTIVI, OTW 1\1Wl MTLVl, OTCO
A. OVllVOt, JJVTIVCI O It
P.
N. (HTiveg ouuveg ajiva,
G. WVTIVWV, OTMV Wl'TLVMV WVTLVWV, OTWV
D. olvTiai(v), oioiai(v) alaTiai(v olaTiai(v), OTC ^ r
A. ovaTLvag aauvag oiTivot, TT
The neuter o ti is often written 0,11, to prevent its being
confounded with the conjunction OTI, that.
72, 73.] PRONOUN. 71
NOTE 1. DIALECTS. Sing. Epic, N. ong for Sang, G. oio,
OTV, OTTCV, for OTOV, D. crew for OTW, A. oTiva, neut. out, for
ovuva, o 11, respectively, Plur. Ionic, G. OTWJ> for ozwy, D.
oTeoioi, fem. oTeyai.
The accusative singular oWa stands also for the neuter
plural aura.
NOTE 2. The particle nig is often appended to Sg. E. g.
oantj>, %nQ, on(), G. ovTifQ f liansg, written also separately og
nsg, r\ neg, o neg.
NOTE 3. The particle ovv is often appended to the com-
pound relatives oang and oansg. E. g. OOTLGOVV, oansgovv,
whoever, written also separately, oamg ovv, oansg ovv.
RECIPROCAL PRONOUN.
. The reciprocal pronoun is aMyJitav, of one another.
The nominative case and the singular number are of course
wanting :
D. M. F. N.
G.
D.
A.
P.
G.
D. atttjloii attrilcttg
A.
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
73. 1. From the obsolete nO2, what? * 01102, who,
and TO2, this, and from the relative pronoun og, who, come
the following corresponding pronominal adjectives :
Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative.
noaog, how much ? nooog, of a xoaog or joooads oaog or
how many ? certain or voaovTog, so onoaog, as
quantity much much as
72
nolog, of what
quality 1
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
noiog, of a votog or roioads
certain
quality
[$73-
olog or
no-rsgog, which of wanting
the two ?
or-ioioviog, such ondlog t as
wanting
?, of what wanting wanting
number ?
noarouog, in how wanting wanting
many days 1
yn?>U'xoe, how old? TrqMxog, of TqMxog or TI
how large ? a certain xoads or n
^^i ^^ xovro?, so i
certain size so large
nodanog, of what wanting wanting
country 1
whichever
of the two
onoa-iog, of
what num-
ber soever
OTHMJTCUOg,
in what-
ever num-
ber of days
or
wanting
wanting
rvvvog or -ivvvov-
Tog, so little
as old as,
as large as
OTiodanog,
of what
country
soever
wanting
NOTE 1. TOGTOVTOC, Toiovrog, and x^A/xoi/ro? coincide with
oviog in respect to the diphthongs ov and av. E. g. ioaoviog,
In the neuter they have both o and ov. E. g. TOOOVTO or
voaoviov.
NOTE 2. The demonstrative forms often take / ( 70. N. 2).
E. g. TocjouToff/, as much as you see here.
Here also the short vowel is dropped before the letter /.
E. g. Toaoodl for roaoaSu.
NOTE 3. The particle ovv is often appended to the relative
forms ( 71. N. 3). E. g. oaoaovv, how much soever.
2. The following adjectives also belong here :
attodi*n6g(uX)iog),ri, ov, foreign, aficpw, both, G. D. a{i(poiv, used
n> o> t/l e r - ( 33. N. 1.) only in the dual.
), a, ov both. txaaro?, ij, ov, each t every.
74.] VERB. 73
exdrsgog, a, ov, each of two. navrodctTiog (nag), y, 6v t of all
trsQog, (x, ov, other, another. kinds.
ypsdanog (ypelg), ?J, 6v t our v^8anog (vfielg), y, ov, your
countryman. countryman.
I'd tog, a, ov, proper, peculiar,
his own.
VERB
74. 1. The Greek verb has three VOICES;
the active voice, the passive voice, and the middle
voice.
2. There are five MOODS; the indicative, the
subjunctive, the optative, the imperative, and the
infinitive.
3. There are six TENSES, the present, the imper-
fect, the perfect, the pluperfect, the future, and the
aorist.
The primary or leading tenses are the present,
the perfect, and the future.
The secondary or historical tenses are the im-
perfect, the pluperfect, and the aorist.
4. The indicative is the only mood in which the
imperfect and pluperfect are found. The subjunc-
tive and imperative want also the future.
5. There are three PERSONS ; the first person,
the second person, and the third person.
74
INFLECTION OP WORDS.
[74.
Present.
Imperfect.
Perfect 1.
Perfect 2.
Pluperfect 1.
Pluperfect 2.
Future 1.
Future 2.
Aorist 1.
Aorist 2.
Present.
Imperfect.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
Future 1.
Future 2.
Future 3.
Aorist 1.
Aorist 2.
Present.
Imperfect.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
Future 1.
Future 2.
Aorist 1.
Aorist 2.
INDICATIVE.
TVTtTO)
ZTVTCTOV
TSTVTtO,
TVTteO
ervifja
ZTVTtQV
TSTVflfiai
TTVl]JOfiat
hvnnv
TVTtTOftai
Synopti-
ACTIVE
SUBJUNCTIVE.
TVTtTG)
TTV(pO
rTV7tCD
TVIJJG)
TVTCG)
TVTtCO
MIDDLE
rvjirapai
74.]
cal Table.
VERB.
75
VOICE.
OPTATIVE. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
TVTITOlfll TVTtTS TVTtTUV TVTlTOV
TTV(pOl[tl TTV(f TTV(pVO,l
TTVTZOl[Jll TTVTt TBTVTtivai TTVTtds
VOICE.
TVIfJOV
TVTt
TVTtTOV
VOICE.
TVTZTOlftrjV TVTtTOV
TVTtOV
TVTtlV
TVlfjai
TVTIZW
Tvnov
TVTZ&V
TVTZTO[tVOS
VO$
-[yos
Tvcp&fjvai
TVTtyvai Tvneis
TVTtTG&(U TVTtTO[AVOS
TTV(p&OU
TVTltf&ai TVTt0[JlVOS
Tv\paa&ai
76 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [ 74.
ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present. / strike, I am striking.
8. tVTITd) D. TVTfXOfiSV P. 1VUTOU.IV
TVTITSig 1V71TETOV TV7I1STS
TV71T81 TV71TSTOV VVmOVai(v)
Imperfect. I struck, I was striking.
8. sTvmov D. eTvmofiEv P. ervmofiEV
STVTlTtTOV CTVTITSTS
Perfect 1. I have struck.
D. reTVcp(xfj.Ev P.
Tsrvcparov
Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1.
tixvnu, inflected like Perfect 1.
Pluperfect 1. J had struck.
8. TSTVq)ElV I}. T8TV<f)Slp8V JP.
fTSTV(p8l, fTETVQpflTTjV
Pluperfect 2. Synonymous with Pluperfect 1.
, inflected like Pluperfect 1.
Future 1. I shall or will strike.
D. Tvyjoitv P.
TVlfJtb
Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1.
TVJTf'w contracted TVTIDJ, inflected like ydsw ( 116).
Aorist 1. I struck.
S. Ixvy/a D. ttvyxxjtev P. eTvi^oc^ev
Irvyug STV^HXTOV ejvyjaxs
tiv^cxT^v sivyav
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
v, inflected like the Imperfect.
74.] ACTIVE VOICE. 77
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present. I strike, I may or can strike.
S. ivniw D. TUTHWuev P.
TV71TT]TOV IVTITTJIS
tvnT&ai(v)
Perfect 1. I have, or may have, struck.
, inflected like the Present.
Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1.
, inflected like the Present.
Aorist 1. I strike, I may or can strike.
IVl/JO) D. TVIfJWflEV P.
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
TVTICO, inflected like Aorist 1.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
Present. / might, could, would, or should strike.
S. TVTlTOlpl, D' TVmOL^V P. IVniOl^JLlV
Tvmoig TVTnonov TVTITOITS
rvncot ivmolT/riv TVTITOISV
Perfect 1 . / might, could, would, or should have struck.
i, inflected like the Present.
Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1.
f inflected like the Present.
Future 1. I would or should strike.
, inflected like the Present.
Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1.
, contracted TVTIO\UI, like qtdeoifii, ( 116).
Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should strike.
Tl'l^Ctlflt D. IVtyVLllllV P.
TVlJJCtt,
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
i, inflected like the Present.
7*
78 INFLECTION QP WORDS. [ 74.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present. Strike thou, be thou striking,
TV71TST&
TVTtThwaav or -
Perfect 1. Have struck.
, inflected like the Present.
Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1.
ihvne, inflected like the Present.
Aorist 1. Strike tliou.
8. - - Z>. - - P. - -
TVl/JOV
-ivyjtxTtaaav or -arrow
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
, inflected like the Present.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present. TUKTSIV, to strike, to be striking.
Perfect 1. rsTvcpsvou, to have struck.
Perfect 2. -lexvnsvai, synonymous with Perfect 1
Future 1. -ivyuv, to be about to strike.
Future 2. ivnitw contracted xvnelv, synonymous with Future I.
Aorist 1. Tvyai, to strike.
Aorist 2. -tvnuv, synonymous with Aorist 1.
PARTICIPLE.
Present, wmwv, ovaa, ov, striking. ( 53. 7.)
Perfect 1. isxvywg, via, o'g> having struck. ( 53. 9.)
Perfect 2. TSTVTTW?, via, 6g, synonymous with Perfect 1. (ibid.)
Future 1. nfywy, ovaa, ov, about to strike. ( 53. 7.)
Future 2. ivnwv, sovaa, iov, contracted rvnwv, ovaa, ovv. (ibid.)
Aorist 1. ivy ag, aaa, av, striking, having struck. ( 53. 1.)
Aorist 2. TVTiwV, ovaa, ov, synonymous with Aorist 1. ( 53. 7.)
74.] PASSIVE VOICE. 79
PASSIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present. 1 am struck.
S. tvmo^ai D. ivmoiiz&ov P. TVmofAS&ot
or -TIT njTiita&ov rvmsafrs
ivmta&ov
Imperfect. I was struck.
D. hvmo^&ov P.
STVHTOV
ETVTITSTO fTvm&a&wv ITVTITOVTO
Perfect. I have been struck.
D. TBTV[t[J,S&OV jP. I
rhvcp&s
Pluperfect. I had been struck.
S. 6TSTl>r)V D. ISTV[A[IS&OV P.
ixixvcp&s
Future 1. I shall or will be struck.
or -at
Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1.
i) inflected like Future 1.
Future 3. / shall remain struck.
, inflected like Future 1.
Aorist 1. I was struck.
S. imcp&riv D. sxvcp&rjjitv P.
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
, inflected like Aorist 1.
80 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 74.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present. I am struck, I may or can be struck.
S. TV7lTG)[i(Xl D. TV71TW[18&OV P. T;V7lTW(J.S&a
Perfect. I have been struck, I may have been struck.
S. TSTVfifisrog (77, ov) w, ?/, r\
D. teTVfiiisvw (ex, at) wjitv, f^ror, yvov
P. TSTVflflSVOl (t, ) W{lV, ^T, W(Jl(r)
Aorist 1. I am struck, I may or can be struck.
S. -ivy&w D. -tv<p&w[isv P.
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
W, inflected like Aorist 1.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
Present. / might, could, would, or should be struck.
8. TVUTOI^V D. TVTITolftsdoV P.
TV71TOIO TVTITOIG&OV
TVTITOITO fvmoia^t]V TVTITOIVTO
Perfect. I might, fyc. have been struck.
S. TSTVftfisvog (rj, OP) si'yv, fl'q?, sl'i]
D. TBTVfi^idrco (, w) ztyfisv, 8l'i]TOV,
P. t^iv^i^voi (t, a) sl'rj^sv, el'ijTS,
Future 1. I should, or would be struck.
v, inflected like the Present.
Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1.
v, inflected like the Present.
Future 3. / should or would remain struck.
v, inflected like the Present.
Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should be struck.
D. TVCp&zlllfASV P. TV(p&sfy}l8V
TVCp&elr)T8 or -SITS
v or
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
, inflected like Aorist 1.
74.]
PASSIVE VOICE.
81
S.
8.
TSTVI/JO
S.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present. Be thou struck.
. - - P. - -
Tvmda&waav or
Perfect. Be thou struck.
D. - - P. -
-rs-ivy&ov -ihvcp&s
vtiixp&wv TSTixp&waav or
Aorist 1. Be thou struck.
D. - P. -
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1
i, inflected like Aorist 1.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present. -ivnTsa&ou, to be struck.
Perfect. rexvy&ai, to have been struck.
Future 1. -cvy&rjosa&ai, to be about to be struck.
Future 2. tvnriaw&aiy synonymous with Future 1.
Future 3. TniHfjta&ai, to remain struck.
Aorist 1. -ivcp&iivou, to be struck.
Aorist 2. tvnrivai, synonymous with Aorist 1
PARTICIPLE.
Present, ivmo^evog, 77, ov, being struck.
Perfect. TSTV^^O?, 77, ov, struck, having been struck.
Future 1. -ivcp&rjadpwog, 77, ov, about to be struck.
Future 2. rvn^oo^ievog, 77, ov, synonymous with Future 1.
Future 3. Tsrvyoftevog, about to remain struck.
Aorist 1. wcp&elg, uaa, sv, being struck. ( 53. 3.)
Aorist 2. ivnelg, tlaa, iv, synonymous with Aorist 1. (ibid.)
All participles in og are inflected like aocpog ( 49. 1).
INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 74.
MIDDLE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present. / strike myself.
wmopou, like the Present Passive.
Imperfect. / was striking myself.
Vj like the Imperfect Passive.
Perfect. / have struck myself.
like the Perfect Passive.
Pluperfect. / had struck myself.
, like the Pluperfect Passive.
Future 1. I shall strike myself.
, inflected like the present.
Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1.
contr. mnovpai, inflected like (pdsopai, ( 116).
Aorist 1. I struck myself.
/ S. eivyaiirjv D. iTvyapedov JP.
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
, inflected like the Imperfect.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present. / strike, I may or can strike myself.
u, the same as in the Passive.
Perfect. / have, or may have, struck myself.
(77, ov) w, as in the Passive.
Aorist 1. I strike, or may or can strike , myself.
S. TVlfJWliai D. TVljJMfie&OV P.
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
, inflected like Aorist 1.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
Present. 7 might, &c. strike myself.
y the same as in the Passive.
74.] MIDDLE VOICE. 83
Perfect. I might , &c. have struck myself.
(rj, ov) el'rjv, as in the Passive.
Future 1. I should or would strike myself.
, inflected like the Present.
Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1.
contr. rvnol^v inflected like (pdsolpriv ( 116).
Aorist 1. I might, &c. strike myself.
D. -ivyialnt&ov P.
TVlfJOUTO
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
v t inflected like the Present.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present. Strike thyself
IVTITOV, as in the Passive.
Perfect. Strike thyself.
, as in the Passive.
Aorist 1. Strike thyself.
Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1.
v, inflected like the Present.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present. TvnTsa&cu, to strike one's self.
Perfect. -isTvcp&ai, to have struck one's self.
Future 1. Tvyeadni, to be about to strike one's self.
Future 2. Tvnhafrai, contracted Timtta&ai, synonymous with
Future 1.
Aorist 1. Tvyaa&at, to strike one's self.
Aorist 2. nnda&ai, synonymous with Aorist 1.
PARTICIPLE.
Present. Tvmo^voq^ ij, ov, striking himself.
Perfect. Ts-tv[i[i8vo?, 77, ov, having struck himself.
Future 1. ivyonwoq, r h ov, about to strike himself.
Future 2. wntofju-vog contracted Tvnov^vog, y, ov, synonymous
with Future 1.
Aorist 1. wifjoifievo?, rj, ov, striking or having struck himself.
Aorist 2. ivnopwog, y, ov, synonymous with Aorist 1.
84 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 75, 76.
AUGMENT.
75. 1. The perfect and third future of all
the moods and of the participle, and the imperfect,
aorist, and pluperfect of the indicative, receive an
increase at the beginning, called augment.
2. There are two kinds of augment ; the syllabic
augment, and the temporal augment.
The syllabic augment is formed l>y prefixing a
syllable or two syllables to the verb.
The temporal augment is formed by lengthening
the first syllable of the verb.
SYLLABIC AUGMENT.
76. 1. When the verb begins with a con-
sonant followed by a vowel or a liquid, the augment
of the PERFECT is formed by prefixing to the verb
that consonant together with an e . E. g.
TTI'(jp,
ysyyacpa,
So xHw, T#VX" cpvo), niyvxa' %alva3 9
pcu. ( 14. 3.)
This kind of syllabic augment is called reduplication.
2. When the verb begins with a double con-
sonant (, |, T/J), or with two consonants the second
of which is not a liquid, the augment of the PER-
FECT is formed by prefixing an f. E. g.
fifTfi'w perf.
NOTE 1 . Some verbs beginning with a liquid take n instead of the redupli-
cation. See the Anomalous Xa^^avw, A^av&;, Aeyw collect, MEIPH,
TEH say.
NOTE 2. Verbs beginning with ( n, yl> //?>, are variable in
the augment of the perfect. E. g. /A^qpco, tykvcpu or
77-79.] AUGMENT. 85
Those beginning with -/v always prefix an e. E. g. yvwgl^w,
tyvtagixa.
NOTE 3. In a few instances, verbs beginning with vr take the reduplication.
See the Anomalous snV-nw, Kvwffu*
The verb xrciopcu, possess, has perf. pass. txrvftKi and xtKrvftxt.
NOTE 4. The Epic language, in a few instances, prefixes the initial consonant
together with an u. E. g. liu, $ti!itt& for liltot.
1. The augment of the PLUPERFECT is
formed by prefixing an f to the reduplication of the
perfect ( 76. 1.) E. g.
rvmat, rtivcpa pluperf. hnvytiv.
2. But when the perfect begins with , the plu-
perfect takes no additional augment. ( 76. 2.) E. g.
crx7iTW, I'axaqpa pluperf. faxwqpsm
NOTE 1. ^The additional augment s of the pluperfect is often
omitted. E. g. TfAa^raw, s-cEjeXevT^eiv or
NOTE 2. The verb 'Iffrvpt often lengthens the syllabic augment i into n in
the pluperfect active. See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs.
When the verb begins with a consonant,
the augment of the IMPERFECT and AORIST is
formed by prefixing an f. E. g.
imperf. tivmov aor.
NOTE 1. These four verbs, ^oyXa/^a;, ^va^a/, Xotvu, and /u<XX&>, often take
the temporal augment in addition to the syllabic. See in the catalogue of An.
omalous Verbs.
NOTE 2. In the Epic dialect the second aorist active and
middle often takes the reduplication through all the moods and
In some instances an e is prefixed to this reduplication, but
only in the indicative. E. g. cpQa^w, Tiecpgadov or enecpgadov.
NOTE 3. The syllabic augment of the imperfect and of the
aorist is often omitted by the epic poets. E. g. (pegco, ysgov for
, TQOtnofirjv for hgccTio^r.
w 79. When the verb begins with p, the aug-
ment is formed by prefixing an , and doubling the
Kg.
), imperf. tQ^amov, perf. i'gf^aqpa, pluperf. c^><5a'<p?, aor.
8
86 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 80.
NOTE 1. In a few instances, Homer does not double the j after the syllabic
augment. E. g. / ig, ?5* for pft%.
NOTE 2. The verb fuveiu, in Homer, has perf. pass. part, ptgutfwf&ivu for
Iffthntftiv**
NOTE 3. The verbs AEIH, MEIPH, and nun, in some of the past
tenses, double the initial consonant after 6. See in the catalogue of Anomalous
Verbs.
TEMPORAL AUGMENT.
SO. 1. When the verb begins with a short
vowel, the augment of all the past tenses is formed
by lengthening that vowel. A and s become ??,
and o becomes a. E. g.
r w, imperf. rjxohov&tov, perf. TJxoAovvfyxa, pluperf.
eiv, aor.
So i'xsm/w, ixfi'Tevo*', TxsTevacc ' vyialvw, vylaivov, vylava.
2. If the vowel is already long, no change takes place ;
except that a (long) is commonly changed into rj. E. g. ^g-
v' wdlvco, wdwov' w'/'craw, ^'i'lcf.
3. When the verb begins with a dipJithong, the augment is
formed by changing the first vowel of that diphthong in the
manner above specified ( 80. 1, 2). E. g. mw, y-c
fjdov' avAsw, yvfaov ' s vxo[icu, rjv^oprjv ' oixg'o), wxtov.
For the iota subscript, see above ( 3).
NOTE 1 . Some verbs lengthen t not into j but into g/. Such are idu, ilu,
lffffw-, 1fx&>, iXxvw, 'Igrtca, \^u^u t i^yK^oftKi, IffTixa* See also the Anomalous
NOTE 2. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic augment.
See the Anomalous ayvy^te/, XM>Jfr/MU, av^ava;, <'&;, s/'AAiw, Ellin, t\tf6>,
tvvt/fAi, EPm, ovgiea, a&i<a, unoficti.
NOTE 3. A few verbs beginning with a vowel take both the syllabic and tem-
poral augment at the same time. See the Anomalous av3ofv<w, lOw, 7^/ t o/'ya;,
oWa/. See also the pluperfect of the anomalous /'&/, J'XTW, and EPFfl.
REMARK 1 . The perfect of the Anomalous 'iS-u lengthens the syllabic aug-
ment e into /. (Compare 77. N. 2 : 78. N. 1.)
REMARK 2. The verb \^v^v t (originally o^rot^u} changes i into \u in the
augmented tenses. E. g. imperf. l^ra^v.
81, 82.] AUGMENT. 87
NOTE 4. The temporal augment is often omitted in the
Attic dialect. E.g. arfdiopat t oi^di^o^v ' eu^/axw, svgiaxov*
olvow, oi'voov.
Verbs beginning with the diphthong ov are never aug-
mented. E. g. ovid'Qw, OVTCI&V, never WVTU&V.
Those beginning with si, are seldom augmented.
NOTE 5. The Epic and the Ionic dialect may omit the tem-
poral augment in all verbs. E. g. ayoyswo, ayogsvov '
81, 1. Some verbs beginning with , E, o, followed by
a single consonant, form the augment of the PERFECT by pre-
fixing the first two letters to the temporal augment. E. g.
perf.
This kind of augment is called Attic reduplication.
Verbs which take the Attic reduplication : As/qpw, a/lew,
lyLe/^to, A/(j(jct), F^WS'O), tysldco, ogiyw, o^t'aaw. See also the An-
omalous a/flfjMj ayw, oc^sw, ANEQSl, ^>a^/axw, c^s
elavvw, EslETOJL, ENEFKJl, ENEOSl, eVe/xw, Igelnto,
' ' OQVVfJtl.
2. The PLUPERFECT in this case takes no additional aug-
ment. E. g. ayelgw, ayyyeQxa, uytiyegxtiv.
Except axovo), axrjxoct, yxrjxoeiv ' &v>w, cA^Aa^ua^,
See also the Anomalous EAETQSl.
NOTE. The epic poets sometimes omit the augment of the second syllable.
See the Anomalous eix.a%ftivo$, u,Xa.o ( u,oii, ei^et^iffea t a%ia>.
AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS.
1. Verbs compounded with a preposition
receive the augment after that preposition. E. g.
, imperf. -nQoa-sygayov, perf. ngoG-yiyguytt, plu-
perf. Ttgoa-tyfyQcxcpfiv, aor.
nyou-r^mov ,
So efi-TiljiiM ( 12. 1), iv-ininroV ey-xQlvot (^ 12.2), ivl-
y-xegixa ' avk-kvw (^ 12. 3), avv-slvov, avl-kskvxa' ov-
12, 4), avv-tvfioov ' x-At'w ( 15. 3 N ,
88 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 83.
REMARK. Prepositions ending in a vowel lose that vowel before the syllabic
augment e. ( 135. 3.) E. g. U.VOX.OKTU, ayrixovrov.
Except */ and vepo. E. g. vsgixovrru, vrttJiixovfrov vrgoXiyu, fgoiXfyot.
(ibid.)
NOTE 1. Some verbs compounded with a preposition take the augment before
*^ a * P re P s iti n * Such are apQtffGwrict/, &yr/0Xto>, iftwoXoieu, Ivavrtoopeti. See
also the Anomalous aftQiivvuftt, up,vi%6> t avaA/<r#6;, ctvoiycv, K(f>ivpu, xa&ifyftui,
NOTE 2. Some take the augment either before or after the preposition.
E. g. vgoSufttefAeti, iTf^oS-vfAtofAnv or vgo&vfAioftnv. See also the Anomalous
NOTE 3. A few verbs take the augment before and after the preposition at
the same time. Such are avogS-ou, ^IOHTKM, ^ietx,oviu t ivo%%.6et> t &a.p<Hviu See
also the Anomalous a,va,Xtff>tu, avi%w, xa.
2. In verbs compounded with other words the augment
stands first. ( 135.) E. g.
j/5 f w, yasfaov, TjadpTJiCGt, derived from uaffiqg (-, (jf/5w).
NOTE 4. From irtiror^oQiu, derived from ivrvorfjoqios ('tvifos, rgtQu), Ly-
curgus forms perf. twvroTT(>o(f>9iKe& for \<jf7fo e r^o^x,a,.
3. Verbs compounded with the particles tv and dva-, if they
begin with , , o, take the augment after these particles. In
all other cases the augment precedes these particles, or, in
compounds with ev, it may be omitted ( 80. N. 4). E. g.
dw, yvdoxlpsov,
VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS.
83. 1. The root of a verb consists of those letters which
are found in every part of that verb. It is obtained by drop-
ping w of the present active ( 94 : 96). E. g. the root of
2. The root of a tense consists of those letters which are
found in every part of that tense. E. g. TVJ// is the root of the
first future active of
84.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 89
INDICATIVE MOOD.
84. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of
the primary tenses of the indicative.
Active.
Person. 1st. 2d. 3d.
Singular, [u g 01
Dual. piv lov iov
Plural. uev is vat
Passive and Middle.
1st. 2d. 3d.
pott aoci, ui iat
pe&ov a&ov a&ov
[ie&ci a&s VTOU
2. The following are the terminations of the secondary
tenses of the indicative.
Active.
Person. 1st. 2d. 3d.
Singular, v g
Dual. fiev iov irjv
Plural. fisv is aav, v
Passive and Middle.
1st. 2d. 3d.
[IS&OV
ao, o
a&ov
a&s no
NOTE 1. The terminations fu and o-i are found in the indicative of verbs in (& t
( 177). In the greatest number of verbs they are dropped. E. g. TV*,
rvvrTtt, rlruQu, Tirufyt, for TU'TfrofAt, i rv < x'7tfi, riTulQa.p.i, <r6rv<p&o'i
NOTE 2. The first aorist active has no termination in the first person singular.
NOTE 3. The third person singular of the secondary tenses of the active has
no termination.
NOTE 4. The termination <rav is found in the pluperfect. Also in the im-
perfect and second aorist of verbs in p i ( 117). Also in the aorist passive
( 92). In all other cases it drops tree. v
The Alexandrian dialect frequently uses this termination in the imperfect and
second aorist E. g. ff^a,^ea y ttr%c6%o<rav for tff^ct^ov ' EAET0H, yXS-oirav
for rj*.B-ov.
NOTE 5. The terminations iron, <ro, are found in the perfect and pluperfect
passive ( 91). Also in verbs in (At ( 117). In all other cases they drop <r.
The Alexandrian dialect sometimes uses <rxi in the present passive of verbs in
&. E. g. cduvdicj, 2d pers. sing, odvveitfcu contracted o$uvoiffai.
NOTE 6. DIALECTS. The following table exhibits the dia-
lectic peculiarities of the indicative mood.
Active. Sing. 2d pers. Old a&a, at, for g. The Attic dia-
lect uses adot in some instances.
The old termination at is found only in
the old foal for tig from slpi, am.
3d pers. Doric it for at, as &'<5o)p, didom for
i"
8*
90 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 85.
Plur. 1st pers. Doric fisg for psv, as
for fQio t usv.
3d pers. Doric rit for vat, as
ovii for [Ao%&lovai, (that is
Passive. Sing. 1st pers. Doric ^uv for ^j>, as eivmopuv for
1st pers. Doric and poetic iita&ov for ps&ov, as
iVTiio^eodov for rvmo^&ov.
Plur. 1st pers. Doric and poetic ^a&a for pe&ot, as
TVTiTofita&a for jvnro^t&oi.
3d pers. Ionic and Epic rca, ro, for JT/, yro.
These terminations are found in the pcr-
yircJ and pluperfect passive. Also in the
present and imperfect of verbs in ^ i ( 117).
The termination TO is found also in the
imperfect of verbs in w ( 85. N. 6).
85. 1. The vowel, which stands between the termination
and the root ( 83 : 84), is called the connecting vowel. It
is an o in the first person of all the numbers, and in the third
person plural ; in all the rest it is an s. Except that,
(1) The connecting vowel of the perfect active, and first
aorist active and middle, is an . But in the third person
singular of the perfect and of the first aorist active^ it is an s.
(2) The connecting vowel of the pluperfect active is an si.
In the third person plural it is an si or e.
(3) The present and future active lengthen o into o>, in the
first person singular, and e into , in the second and third
person singular.
2. The following table exhibits the terminations and the
connecting vowels united.
Pres. fy Fut. Active.
P. 1st. 2d. 3d.
8. to Bi-g BI>
D. O-fJltV B-TOV B-JOV
P. o-uev S-TS ovai ( 12.5)
Imperf. Sf %d A. Act.
P. 1st. 2d. 3d.
S. o-v B-g e
D. O-fJSV B-10V B-iqV
P. O-IUBV 8-T6 O-V
Pres. 4- Fat. Pass, fy Mid.
1st. 2d. 3d.
o-fiai, s-ai, rj, i t-rai
o-pe&ov e-a&av s-a&ov
e-afrs o-viou,
Impf.Pass.fr Mid. $c 2 A.Mid.
1st. 3d. 3d.
O-[ir}V 8-O, OV B-TO
o-pe&ov e-a&ov s-vfryv
e-a&s
85.]
VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS.
91
First
Aorist Active. Fir.
p.
1st.
2d. 3d. 1st.
s.
a
- (X-ftyV
D.
a- per
CC -10V Ct-1t]V Of-^Ufrt^OI
P.
a-litv
-T a-v a-f*e&a
Perfect Active.
P.
1st. 2d.
8.
a #-
D.
Ct-[lSV U-TOV
P.
a-ittv a-zs
Pluperfect Active.
P.
1st. ' 2d.
S.
ft-j> t-
D.
Sl-fltP EL-TOV
P.
ll-UtV Bl-TS
First Aorist Middle.
tt-O, 0)
a-a&ov
a-ads
3d.
a-Tov
3d.
3d:
a-ro
a-vro
5)
si-tfccv, t-actv
REMARK 1. For the terminations of the first and third person singular of
the active, see above ( 84. N. 1, 2, 3).
REMARK 2. The endings /; M, , of the second person singular of the
passive and middle, are contracted into y or u, ou, &/, respectively. In Attic
authors, n is more common than y.
NOTE 1. In some instances the third person plural of the perfect active
takes civ for art. E. g. yiyveurxa, 'iyvuxav.
NOTE 2. In the Alexandrian dialect the second aorist active and middle often
takes the connecting vowel a, of the first aorist. E. g. EIAH, Cfiiu. for tTfrov '
<f>iu i y&t, tQwyxv for tQwyov ' iV(H<rxu, tv^a-ftnv for ivpcftyiv.
On the other hand, the first aorist active and middle, in some instances, takes
the connecting vowels (o, s) of the second aorist. See the Anomalous potivu,
OVCitj IXVlOfAKU
NOTE 3. The Doric dialect uses the short connecting
vowel in the second person singular of the present active.
E. g. e^ut'A/w, apttytg for an&yeig.
NOTE 4. The Epic and the Ionic dialect have, in the singular
of the pluperfect active, , a?, , for stv, sig, SL. E. g.
The Attics contract these endings into ^, rjg, rj.
In some instances the ending of the third person singular
takes v movable before a vowel. See the Anomalous EI/lfL.
NOTE 5. In the imperfect and aorist active, the Epic and the
Doric dialect often use the endings axor, oxtg, axs, plur.
92 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [$ 86.
oxogw, OUSTS, ffxov. In the imperfect passive and aorist middle
they often use the endings axopyv, axo, OXITO, plur. axo^uc^a,
<JXff#, OXOVIO.
In the imperfect and second aorist of mwZe and liquid verbs,
an stands between these endings and the root. E. g.
Tvmtvxov, rvnTsaxopyv for tivmov,
In the imperfect of jwre verbs these endings are very seldom
preceded by s.
In the Jirst aorist active and middle an stands between
these endings and the root. E. g.
for IT
In some instances the imperfect also prefixes an to these
endings. E. g. X^UTITW, XQvmaaxov for
NOTE 6. The Ionic dialect uses the termination ro in the
imperfect passive ; in which case the connecting vowel be-
comes s. E. g. ygdcyw, fyQcuplaTO for f/qporro. In pure
verbs the connecting vowel is omitted before TO. E. g. /^~-
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
86. 1. The subjunctive mood uses the terminations of
the primary tenses of the indicative ( 84. 1).
2. Its connecting vowels are co and 77. But the second and
third person singular active have ?;.
3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the
connecting vowels united.
Passive and Middle.
1st. 2d. 3d.
to-fiai y-cu, y VI-TVLI
y-a&ov
Active.
P. 1st. 2d. 3d.
S. w fl-s-
-D. O-^lfV 1]-TOV 7\-10V
P. a-ptv t]-T coat ( 12. 5) w-ps&a y-a&s OJ-VTOU
HEMARK. The ending vai in the second person singular of the passive and
middle is contracted into y.
NOTE 1 . The perfect of the subjunctive active is sometimes formed by means
of the perfect active participle and tlpi. E. g. nrvQus (v7x, $) a, yg) y> for
$87-]
VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINAT
NOTE 2. The Epic language often uses
w, //$, # ( 84. N. 6.) E. g.
UNITERSITTi
NOTE 3. Sometimes the Epic language uses the connecting
vowels (o, c) of the indicative. E. g. t'^xw, <jp#/w, subj. egv-
<wu, for i^
OPTATIVE MOOD.
87\ 1. The optative mood uses the terminations of the
secondary tenses of the indicative ( 84. 2).
But the first person singular of the optative active takes
ILL ( 84. 1) ; and the third person plural ends in sv.
2. For its connecting vowel it has <u. But in the Jlrst
aorist active and middle it has ou.
3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the
connecting vowels united.
Active.
Pass
we ana Mi
(idle.
p.
1st.
2d.
3d.
1st.
2d.
3d.
s.
Ol-fit
oi-g
01
oi-p^v
ot-o
Ot-TO
D.
oi-psv
Ol-TOV
Ol-Tt]V
Ol-^&OV
oi-aSov
oi-a&i
P.
Ol-^V
01-15
Ol-V
ot-fit&a
Ol-O&S
Ol-VIO
First
Aorist Active.
First
Aorist Middle.
P.
1st.
2d.
3d.
1st.
2d.
3d.
S.
ai-pi
ou-g
/
ai-^v
ai-o
CU-TO
D.
ai- t usv
CCL-TOV
Wi-TTjV
ai-pt&ov
ai-o&ov
ai-o&t
P.
Ul-^V
OU-T8
(Xl-BV
ai-^Oa
(xi-ufre
(JLl-VIO
NOTE 1 . The perfect of the optative active is sometimes formed by means of
the perfect active participle and tipi. E. g. n<rvq>w$ (wet, 05) t't'nv, tins, t"v> for
NOTE 2. In many instances, particularly in contract verbs,
the optative active takes the endings olyv, o/^g, o//?, dual olriiov,
oir)Tr]v, plural on^ci', olrjrs, olrjaav. E. g. (ptvyw, nEfpevyolqv for
NOTE 3. The Jirst aorist active in the optative has also the
endings /, SKXC, i, dual f/aioy, eifXTrfV, plural fuxptr, tla-is, star.
E. g. JVTITW, jvtfjEicc for Tuy/a^t. The second and third person
94 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 88.
singular, and the third person plural, of this form, are more
common than the corresponding persons of the regular form.
These endings are said to belong to the ^Eolic dialect.
NOTE 4. In the Epic language the third person plural of
the optative passive and middle often takes the termination cno
( 84. N. 6). E. g. agao^Laij agyacxlcno for ag
NOTE 5. In some instances the second person singular of
the optative active takes the termination a&a ( 84. N. 6).
E. g. xAcao), xkaloia&a for xhalotg.
NOTE 6. The Alexandrian dialect uses, in the third person
plural, oiGuvy VLIGULV, for oisv, cutr, (84. N. 4.) E. g. TI/TITW,
v, -ivyjctioav, for -ivnoiev,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
88. 1. The following are the terminations of the impera-
tive mood.
Active.
P. 2d. 3d.
S. <&l TO)
D. TOV TO)J>
P. re
Passive and Middle.
2d. 3d.
(TO, O G&W
O&OV O&WV
o&s adwaav, o&cav
NOTE 1 . The terminations $/, <ro, are used when the connecting vowel is
dropped ( 91. N. 6, 7: 117). But when the connecting vowel is used,
S-t is dropped, and <ro becomes a.
2. The connecting vowel of the imperative is an s.
But in the Jirst aorist active and middle it is an . In the
second person singular, however, the first aorist active ends in
ov, and the first aorist middle in eu.
The termination VTWV is preceded by o. But in the first
aorist active it is preceded by ,
3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the
connecting vowels united.
Active.
P. 2d. 3d.
S. S -TW
D. C-TOV s-rcov
P- S-TS e-zwaay, O-VTQJV
Passive.
2d. 3d.
c-o, ov e-o&w
s a&s e-a&waav,
89.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 95
First Aorist Active.
P. 2d. 3d.
8. oy a-TW
D. a-TOV a-Twv
P. a-rs
a-Twaav, CC-VTCOV
First Aorist Middle.
2d. 3d.
ai
a-a&ov a-a&wv
a-a&s a-a&waov,
NOTE 2. The ending n of the second person singular of the passive and
middle is contracted into ov.
NOTE 3. In some instances, the Jlrst aorist takes the connecting vowel t of
the second aorist. See the Anomalous ciyu, AEXfl, OIH bring.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
89. 1. The terminations of the infinitive mood are the
following.
Passive and Middle.
All tenses, except Aorist Pas-
sive ( 92),
Active.
Present, Future, 2 Aor. \
Perfect \
2. For the connecting vowel, the present, future, and second
aorist, active, have an st,. In the frst aorist middle the con-
necting vowel is an . In all the other tenses it is an e.
- But ihejirst aorist active infinitive ends in ai.
3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the
connecting vowels united.
Active.
Pres., Fut., 2 Aor.
Perf.
Passive and Middle.
Pres., Fut., 2 A. Mid.
1 Aor. Mid. . at-a&ai
For the perfect and aorist passive, infinitive, see below
( 91 : 92).
NOTE 1. The termination of the infinitive active in the Epic
language is ^wai or ^tv, which is always preceded by the con-
necting vowel s. E. g. Tilvco, Titvs^evocL or mvspev for nlveiv.
NOTE 2. In the infinitive active, the Doric has sv or yv for
stv. E. g. /3oorxw, (fooxsv for $QGKUV ' %aiQW, %aiQriv for
NOTE 3. The lonians change iiv of the second aorist active
into &iv. E. g. pdtta), poddsiv for
96 INFLECTION OF WORDS.
PARTICIPLE.
. 1. The root of the present, future, and second
aorist, active, participle, is formed by annexing OVT to the root
of the tense ( 83. 2). E. g.
Present. rvmwv, TI' n-c-ovT-og y ( 36. 3, R. 1)
Future 1. ivyon', wyj-ovT-og, (ibid.)
Future 2. wnswv, rvns-ovT-og, (ibid.)
Aorist 2. TfTrwV, ivn-6vi-og, (ibid.)
The ^/?rs aorist active annexes UVT to the root of the tense.
E. g. TU(//C, TVty-1XVJ-Og, ( 36. 2.)
The perfect active annexes or. E. g. TgTuqpw?, TCTvqp-oT-op,
( 36. 2.)
NOTE. The ^Eolic dialect uses cug, ouacc, in the first aorist
active participle, for ?, acja. E. g. dunea, dioxrjacug for
2. The participle in the passive and middle ends in
But in the^rstf aorist middle it ends in apevog. E. g.
-ivniofjwog, -ivydpwog, ( 49. 1.)
For the perfect and aorist passive participle, see below
(91:92).*
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE AND
MIDDLE.
O1 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive and middle
have no connecting vowel ( 85. 1). E. g. navco,
Perfect.
INDIC. S. ninav-iiai, ntnav-Gcu, niiiow-xm, D. nsnav-iis&ov,
v, ndnctv-a&ov, P* nenav-fit&a, ndnav-a&s, ne-
SUBJ* and OPT., see below ( 91. 3, 4, 5).
IMPERAT. S. ninuv-vo, nenav-a&w, D. ninav-a&ov, nsnav-
a&wv, P. ninav-G&t, nenav-a&waav.
INFIN. nsnav-a&ou*
PART. nsTiav-psvog, ri, ov.
Pluperfect.
7t87iav-a&ov, ensTiav-a&rjV, P. entTiav-tts&cc, ininav-
91.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 97
2. In mute and liquid verbs, the third person plural of the
perfect and pluperfect passive is formed by means of the per-
fect passive participle and tial, ^aav s from flpl. E. g.
Perf. 3d plur. jfTv^^erot (ai, a) slol, for ihvn-viai.
Plup. 3d plur. Tiii^^ufVot (t, ) ^acer, for iiiivn-vio.
NOTE 1. The Epic language in a few instances drops * of the termination
ffai. E. g. /3AA.&>, perf. pas. /Si/JAw^a/, /3/3Xja* for ptfiXvff-ui.
NOTE 2. The Epic and Ionic dialects form the third person
plural of the perfect and pluperfect passive by annexing rt,
WTO, to the root of the verb. ( 84. N. 6.) E. g.
Perf. 3d plur. t^OuQnini for tyftagnivoi tlal
Plup. 3d plur. (cpdayaio for iy&aQn&oi qaav.
(1) J/ is commonly changed into s before it, TO. E. g.
oiXTt, otxro, for o/x^j'ra/, O/XT/I^TO.
(2) The consonants TT, /5, x, /, are generally changed into
their corresponding rough ones (cp, ^), before area, TO. E. g.
ley &, AfAf^T, AfAf/To.
(3) Z becomes 5 before ait, aro. E. g. ec^
3. The perfect passive SUBJUNCTIVE and OPTATIVE is formed
by means of the perfect passive participle and slpl. E. g.
Perf. Subj. xeTVpfierog (??, 01^) o>, ?Jc, ^, ^ror, wpzv, rjrs, cuj/.
Perf. Opt. rfTVfji^ierog (r t , ov] efyv, tfyg, tl'rj, Elrpov, tlqiqv, nr)-
fisrj ti'rjTS, d'yaav.
4. The perfect passive SUBJUNCTIVE of verbs in oj, fw, and
ow, is, in a few instances, formed by prefixing the augment of
the perfect to the contracted present subjunctive ( 116).
In this instance as are contracted into 77. E. g. '
Perf. Subj. xexTo^cu, ?y, Tjrat, u[At&ov, wa&ov,
WVTlXl.
5. The perfect passive OPTATIVE of verbs in w, fw, and ow,
is, in a few instances, formed by dropping ^t of the perfect
passive indicative, and successively annexing the regular ter-
minations of the optative passive ( 87. 1 ) preceded by i. E. g.
Perf. Opt. x*TJ?/tiipr, 7^0, ^TO, yps&ov, fja&ov, y
98 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 91.
NOTE 3. These two verbs, xroiofta.! and fjupv/itrKu, form the perfect middle
optative also by prefixing the reduplication to the contracted present middle
optative. Thus, *SXT^}V, uo, euro, &C., fttftMf/M9 t uo, euro, &c.
MifAvrnrKu often changes u into ot, in the perfect middle optative. Thus,
(ttftvoijunv, oto t otro, &c.
In the Ionic and the lpic dialect these verbs change into e<, in the perfect
middle optative. E. g. xtxriMfAiiv, ftspvttpfAnv, for KixryfA
NOTE 4. Aw* is perhaps the only verb in u&>, which forms the perfect passive
optative after the analogy of verbs in <w, tu, oa t t 91. 5.) Thus, Av, *.'&
^vftoti, AeAfytjjv, vo t vrt, &c., or, more analogically, }.t*.vipvv, v7o, u7ro, &c,
NOTE 5. In the perfect passive subjunctive and optative of verbs in a.u, tu,
&, via, (91. 4, 5, N. 4, ) some grammarians place the ACCENT on the ante-
penult, if the last syllable permits it ( 20 ,. E. g. they write XS*T>J^>JV,
xtttryo.
NOTE 6. In some instances the SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE drops the connect-
ing vowel in the dual and plural of the indicative, and throughout the impera-
tive. In this case, the SECOND PLUPERI ECT follows the analogy of the second
perfect. See ivtuyw, AEIH, tyi/i*, El AH, il*,*,, EAET0H, x{*&,
a-a<r%a, -jri'&u, in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs.
NOTE 7. The SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE of a few pure verbs
in w, fo>, is syncopated ( 91. N. 6.) in the dual and plural of
the indicative, throughout the imperative, and in the infinitive.
In the subjunctive and optative it follows the analogy of verbs
in pi ( 117). In the participle it is contracted. E. g. from
BASly
Perfect 2.
INDIC. S. /?/?, ptfitmc, fteflixs, D. {lt(}(X{isv,
SUBJ. S. /?f/5o5, /?f/?/]c, fa(lri t D. ftspups
P. ftf(t(o t uev, ptfnw, fofiwut(v).
OPT. S. fttfttxl^v, pffitxirjc;, ftfflftlri, D. f$sfi*tr)f*fr, ptpalijTOV,
/3t/3<xiir]jr]v, P. /?(flaiyft* t /5f^tr y Tf, Piftaitf0e&.
IMPER. S. (tipa&i, ( 88. N. 1), ^ffa'rw, I>. (tipaiov, fofidTuv,
P. fif/Hart, fisfiuTwaav.
INFIN. (Ispdvai.
PART, foftatog, /5f/?wa (sometimes fopuvta), (ttfiao?, G. (te-
fiaoios, contracted fafiwt;, Pffiuaa, pefiuig, G. ptflajjog.
Pluperfect 2.
S. tftfputiv, ifoflaifig, f /?/?*, />. fftip(*iiiv t i^aroVy e/?-
/5i^v, .P. efiefivtiitv, e/5e'/9are, IpifiuaviV.
NOTE 8. The singular of the second perfect and second
pluperfect of verbs in w, cw, is not used in the indicative.
92.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 99
NOTE 9. The feminine participle of verbs in w generally
ends in era, in the second perfect. Its uncontracted form is
not used.
NOTE 10. The ACCENT of the third person plural of the
indicative (91. N. 7) is placed on the penult, contrary to the
general rule (" 93. 1).
AORIST PASSIVE.
OS. 1 . The root of the first aorist passive is formed by
annexing &e or #77 to the root of the verb. ( 83. 2.)
The root of the second aorist passive is formed by annexing
or ?;. (ibid.)
2. The aorist passive uses the terminations of the active
voice, and, in its inflection, follows the analogy of the second
aorist active (t&rjv) of T/#T^IU ( 1 17) ; except that all the reg-
ular terminations of the indicative, imperative, and infinitive
are preceded by 77. E. g. ivmw,
Aorist 1.
INDIC. S. Irv(p&viv 9 r}g, r\ t D. rjLi
SUBJ. S. rvip&sm, //c, eij 9 D. iwfitv, trjTov, C7?TOJ>, P. e'
srjTS, swat, contracted zu<jp#w, ?]?, fj, w^usv, ijiov, rjiov,
rJT, e5(Jt.
OPT. S. jvcpfttlyv, flrjg, elrj t D* tlrjpw, elrflov, eiijTqr, P. e/
The syncopated endings sl^w, tm, tier y (see the par-
adigm,) are more common than the regular ones.
IMPERAT. S. Tvcpdyn ( 14. N. 4), T?'TW, D. tjiov, rpwv, P.
IJTS, rjiwaav or tviwv.
INFIN. rv^^vai.
PART. Tvy&slg, tlaa, ev, G. cVro?.
Aorist 2.
v, throughout like Aorist 1.
NOTE 1 . The Epic language often changes ?<rav of the third person plural
of the indicative into tv. E. g. xoffftia, xoffftvStv for lxofffAr,3-v(ra.v. ( 1 17. N. 17.)
NOTE 2. The Epic language often changes s in the uncontracted subjunctive
into tt. E. g. rvtyStiu for *vq>iu. ( 117. N. 17.)
NOTE 3. The Epic language often takes fttvat or ptv for v/, in theirifinilive.
E. g. Tu<pri(j(,ivai or Tt^S-Jj^sv for rutpSiivoti. ( 89. N. 1.)
NOTE 4. The Epic language, in some instances, drops the connecting vowels
in the SECOND AORIST MIDDLE. See the Anomalous aXAo^a/, ugetgio-xco, yi-
't^ofieti, 'EAH, Xiyu, AEXH, fAtyvvftt, ogvupti, vrig&a.
100 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 93.
ACCENT OF VERBS.
1. In polysyllabic forms the accent is placed on
the antepenult, if the last syllable permits it ($ 20) ; if not, it
is placed on the penult. E. g.
Compound verbs are not excepted. . E. g. arixym, avays.
2. In dissyllabic forms the accent is placed on the penult.
E. g.
1V71TW, TVTlTfig.
3. The perfect active infinitive, the first aorist active infini-
tive, the perfect passive infinitive and participle, and the
second aorist middle infinitive, take the accent on the penult.
E.g.
Also the Epic infinitive in par. E. g. nlvw, nivipfv.
NOTE 1. In the Epic language, the perfect passive infinitive and participle,
in some instances, take the accent on the antepenult. See the Anomalous
aXdcftai, a.Z.iru.iVCtt, ot^'ita, 'Ell seat.
4. The second aorist active infinitive and participle, and the
erfect active participle, take the accent on the last syllable.
g.
p
E
NOTE 2. The verbs EIAH, Einn, EAET01I, y ? /Vft;, *.apZ<iv*>, in the
second person singular of the second aorist' active hnperathe, take the acute
on the last syllable. In composition, however, they follow the general rule
( 93. 1). See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs.
5. The second person singular of the second aorist middle
imperative usually takes the circumflex on the last syllable.
E. g. TV71TW, JVTIOV.
6. In compound verbs the accent cannot go farther back
than the augment. E. g. Ti^oa^w, nQoaii/ov not H
NOTE 3. In verbs compounded with a preposition, the ac-
cent is placed on that preposition when the augment is omitted.
( 78. N. 3.) E. g. ffjupalvw, tfjqxxirov for eviipttirov.
NOTE 4. When the augment, upon which the accent would
have been placed ( 93. 1), is omitted ( 78. N. 3), the accent
is placed on the penult. E. g. TT/TITW, TILTHS for BTHHTE.
94, 95.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 101
FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
PRESENT ACTIVE.
94. 1. The present active indicative is the
source from which all the other tenses are derived.
2. Verbs are divided into pure verbs, mute verbs, and liquid
verbs, according as the letter before w is a vowel, a mute (ji,
P, 9 ' *> /> X ' T, d, #, also ), or a liquid (A, ^/, v, Q). E. g.
tifiata, <pddat, are pure verbs ; falnta, nUxw, are mute verbs ;
jue'Aw, r^uM, are liquid verbs.
NOTE. 1. These statements apply also to deponent verbs ( 2O8 S as such
verbs are supposed to have been derived from a corresponding active voice.
E. g. a,v*op.a,i, a pure verb ; Jj^^a/, a mute verb ; o^ugopat, a liquid verb.
NOTE 2. The title, " FORMATION OF THE TENSES," relates
only to the first ptrson singular of the tenses of the indicative.
For the inflection of the tenses in the other moods, see above
(83-92).
95. The penult of a pure verb (^ 94. 2), if
short, is lengthened in the perfect, pluperfect, future,
and aorist. A, in the penult, when it is not pre-
ceded by , i, or p, is changed into if.
For examples, see below.
REMARK. This rule does not apply to the second perfect,
second pluperfect , second future, and second aorist.
NOTE 1. Some pure verbs retain the short vowel through all
the tenses. Such are euQ&opm, axio[iai t ta'w, KJWO, w^xsw,
agooi, UQVCO, y&uw, ffieco, ^Aa'oj, XOTSM, /*#VG>, rsixkM, $iw, nxvw,
anoiM, larva, Tfta'a;, TQSW, %w.luw. See also the Anomalous ciya-
fiou, aXeo^ifxi, cifiq>uvvvfit t (XQ<x(jl(jy.(n), (>'(jxo), dctlw divide, dupdrt,
dotTsouvu, donticii, fktxvrw, tvvvfii, tytxu, ea&iM, fi?/Wf, Uwaxo^uwt,
xAaw break, ^nlo^ai, [is&vco, votlo), our v pi, ONJIMI, not-
NOTE 2. The quantity of the penult of some pure verbs is
variable. See the Anomalous m, algsw, x^/^o;, /?M/J>W,
dsot) bind, dldwpi, dvinxfuu, dvM, SQVM, t f ^/cjxw,
t'o^o), xogsrrvui, xptpavvvfjit, Aua>, u'x^o^ini
*
CpT][ll, (f&lXVM.
NOTE 3. X^&> changes a. into >j, contrary to the rule. E. g. %n*6> t
ucn. 'Axpououoci does not change a, into n t as aucpoctfouou.
9*
102 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 96.
NOTE 4. T&vftt lengthens t into a in the perfect active and passive. See
in the catalogue of Anomalous Veibs.
OO. The present in actual use is not always the foundation
upon which the other parts of the verb rest. Many verbs have,
or are supposed to have, more than one present. In order there-
fore to be able to ascertain the original or simple present, the
learner must become acquainted with the methods by which
new presents may be derived from a given present. These
methods are exhibited in the following paragraphs.
1. Some verbs beginning with a consonant, followed by a
yowel or a liquid, prefix that consonant together with i. E. g.
didoM from JO ft
Tti^ttw " TPAfL.
A few verbs beginning with or, o#, TTT, prefix 1. E. g.
fcriwoj from 2'TAfl. Also the verb ViJ2, thus, Uta.
NOTE 1. A few take the Attic reduplication, but without
.the augment of the second syllable ( 80. 1.) E. g. AFAFJl
from tiyu.
NOTE 2. The Attic reduplication of fobtifu from ON AH, and the prefix of
a.u from //a&>, are anomalous.
2. Many verbs, of which the root ends in a labial (n, /?, 9),
drop w and annex TOI. E. g.
ivnrro from TTfi-fl
%()VTiia " KPTBSl, ( 7)
qimta " 'PlftfL, (ibid.)
SO U71TM ((f)), fitXTlTW ((jp), |5A7IT) (ft), dpl'TITO) ((jp), &(XTITW (fp),
&QVTlTti) ((p), KwiVTTTtt (/5), xifiTITW (TZ), X071TU (TI), vlnTto (ft),
QomiM (qp), (jxamn (qo).
Hence it appears, that the root of the simple present of
verbs in TTTW ends in a labial ; generally in n.
3, Many verbs, of which the root ends in a palatal (x, /, #),
or lingual (T, d, &) t drop w with the preceding consonant, and
annex uuw. E. g.
q>(flatj(a from ftPTKfL jdaaw from TAT'fl
3ioWw " I1P4VSL ptiaota " ILUTJl
/5/Joaw " lil/XJl xo^uaaw " KOPTOSl.
So <ln.iiv(jm (y\ /?oao-w (T), tQWOM (T), i[juiaaw (T),
), Uaanpai (T), pdwatfw (x), ndaaw (T), nluauu (&),
' (x).
96.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 103
Hence it appears, that the simple present of verbs in aaw
ends either in a palatal or in a lingual ; generally in y or 8.
NOTE 3. TIXTU is formed from TEKD, by changing t into / and annexing
r to the root. v 96. 16.)
NOTE 4. The last syllable of the simple present of a^tWa; and vaa-yu is either
yu or ^u.
4. Some verbs, of which the root ends in a palatal (x, y, %),
or lingual (r, d, #), drop w with the preceding consonant, and
annex fw. E. g.
xgw'o> from KPAFSl <m*w from 2TATSI
<jTm^oi " (mrcx^oi o " O/JJl.
So to t uiu ((5), {juwilQw (/), Ot//woJ (/), (JTriQi'Qh) (/), az/^w (/),
NOTE 5. In most cases ^presents in ^o>, especially in
syllabic verbs, are considered simple. E. g. tinifa, %'(aQii.
NOTE 6. The last syllable of the simple present of a^cra^w, /3a<r7'<y, vvfra-
u, Tfai^Uy ffaXvi^u, is either yw or S<w.
NOTE 7. Some veibs have tra-u or &/ in tlie present. Such are trtyoiffffu or
from 2<l>Arn, ugpogu or a^otrcru from 'APMOAfl.
5, Some verbs annex y to the last letter of the root. E. g.
ra from ifuw, nliw from
6. Many verbs insert v before the last letter of the root.
E. g,
XAN/lfL from XAdfL
AAMBfL " A4BSI, ( 12. 1)
EXEFKJl " XNEKJl, ( 12. 2)
/to'Mfi) " BAAJl,(^ 12 3.)
Here belong all verbs in Mew and ^w, and some in ^w, as
7. Some verbs annex wro or m> to the root. E. g. av&ru)
from cfi'|it, cA/(jthu;o) or oltadavw from OAI^OfL.
Some annex ro> to, and insert y before the last conso-
nant of the root. E. g.
// n fl r w from jw:4 O SI
li'pffana " AAUSl, (12. 1)
" 7TXJ2, ( 12. 2.)
8. Some annex <r/a) or /axw to the root. E. g.
from 7'oj, xr'/axw from xi'w,
104 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 96.
Sometimes the vowel before axw is lengthened. E. g.
from ONAJl.
9. Some annex WM to the root. In pure verbs this ending
very often doubles the v. E. g.
fcfxrvo) from JETKJl
afiewuw " ZBESl.
Sometimes the vowel preceding this ending is lengthened.
E. g. jfwrifWM from ^o'w.
10. New presents are very often formed by annexing w,
co), oo), or uw, to the root of a verb. E. g.
Q171TSW from (J/7TTCO
OMOJl " OMSl
11. New presents are formed by changing of the perfect
into w. E. g.
<pvM, perfect Trs'qpuxa, new present
12. Sometimes the sound of the present is strengthened by
the endings #&), #eu, vSw. "E. g. Siuxd&w from <5tw'xw,
&(o from cpttyw, cpfrivvVw from cp&lvco.
NOTE 8. "EffSu comes from 'i^a by annexing ^<a/ to the root; thus
if-uj 10. 3.; 'E(r9-/w is immediately derived from eV$&>.
13. Many presents are formed from dissyllabic presents,
which have * in the penult, by changing the into o and annex-
ing ew. E. g. TToy&eca from nig Sot*
Or by changing e into w and annexing o). E. g.
from
NOTE 9. YLirofAKt gives <raTs<j^a/, woTeioficti, and tfurdofAott.
14. A few verbs insert a before the last consonant of the
root. E. g. fila/at from MirSl.
NOTE 10. &3>a.<Tx,ta comes from AIAAXfi by changing ^ into x after the .
Ilatf-^;&; is formed from IIA0n by inserting <r before 9-, and changing $
into x,'
15. A few verbs annex OM to the root. E. g. {& from
J'ZSl from /77^7'JI. ( 9. 2 : 10. 2.)
16. A few change s into /. E. g. nhvu from nETSl,
from 2KJUAJI. ( 96. 5.)
97.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 105
NOTE 11. All the tenses of verbs in HTM, aow, M ( 96. 4),
VU ( 96. 5), AA&/, Qjjrn, MJ'O) or ULVM ( 96. 7), axo), lay.M, vvw t
#, #a, >.'#a), |o) ( 96. 15), except the imperfect, generally
come either from the simple present, or from a new present in
w ( 96. 10), or from both.
17. In dissyllabic verbs the radical vowel is sometimes
placed after the last consonant of the root. ( 26. 2.) E. g.
OWAJl from OANJl
TMESl " T>O>
v OPOJl " OOPJl.
18. In many instances, the penult of the original present is
lengthened :
becomes 77 or m ' as AABSl, AIIBSI ' ftdNJl, spairta.
f ft, and, before a liquid, I asj^P//7/2, iytlnu ' KP1NJI,
x^/Tro*.
8 a (rarely 77) ; as 2HEPSI, anilgw.
o on ' as AKOJl, axuvM.
v u, and, before a liquid, v ' as ftTFSl, cptvyw ' AI2XTNJI,
(UO^L'lh).
On the other hand, m is shortened into , into T or 6,
ev into JJ, 7; into (rarely into .), r into I, ov into o, v into D.
NOTE 12. Sometimes iv in the penult is shortened into s.
See the Anomalous p&eopai, ^-KH rww, TiAew, Tive'w, Qkiu fluw, %e(o,
NOTE 13. 'EAawvto comes from lxy by lengthening into at;, and annexing
9 to the rcot. ( 96. 5.)
19. The radical vowel is often either *, a, or o (rarely oj).
This takes place chiefly in dissyllabic verbs. ( 2. N. 3.) E. g.
2I1EPSI, 2UAPJI, 2
NOTE 14. In some instances the diphthongs ft, and tv are
changed into 01 and ov respectively. Seethe Anomalous
ETJJl, txw, JMliT&JL* mid 'w.
IMPERFECT ACTIVE.
. To form the imperfect active, drop o of
the present, annex oi/, and prefix its augment.
E.g.
imperf.
106 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 98.
FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE.
98. 1. To form the perfect active, drop o
of the present, annex xa, and prefix its augment.
E.g.
7ii'o) perf. Tteirnvxa
<fdtw TTfcpt/r/xa ( 95)
di^oat dtdifitaxu (ibid.)
<5w ^x f 10. 4)
Ttfl&oj nenstxa (ibid.)
&/fw ^'Attixtt (ibid.).
So Tfjuao), Tm'/ui;x<x ( 95) ; d^wG), d&dywxa (ibid.) ; T/W, rsir-
x (ibid.) ; dtxyyvw, Stduxyvxa (ibid.).
(1) The first perfect active of liquid verbs is always derived
from the simple present. E. g. uyytttw, fyytlxu yrxJUoj, I'y/aAxa
(fttlra)y n6<f(xyxa' xadalyw, xixix&ixyxu. {^> 96. 6, IS.)
(2) When the vowel is either *, , or o, the first perfect
of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes . E. g.
fySnyxu. ( 96. 6, 18, 19.)
NOTE 1. The verbs xAmv, x^tvu, vr^vvu), drop v in the first perfect active.
Thus, xeX/ee, xEX/*a, ?revrAfx.
2. To form the perfect active of mute verbs
whose root ends in a labial (TT, /3, 99) or a palatal
(x, 7, #), drop co of the present, annex cc, change
the preceding smooth or middle mute into its cor-
responding rough mute (y, /), and prefix its aug-
ment. E. g.
TQlftw
ygixcpw
n/.iy.w
So TV7iTC>, tirvcpa ' TiQMaoa, nsnQa%a. (^ 96, 2, 3.)
The perfect formed according to these rules ( 98. 1, 2)
is called the FIKST PERFECT ACTIVE.
NOTE 2. The first perfect of the following verbs changes the radical vowel i
into (^ 9f). 19 : *AsT<ra>, xe*A0 * *'&/**&>, irijrof*.<pet ' rgicrea, TiTgoQa
(sometimes TtTa<p . See also the Anomalous ay<a t 'fiu t ENEFKH, and
Aiyor colled.
NOTE 3. The anomalous AEIH, in the first perfect, changes n into M
( 96. N. 14). See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs.
99.]
FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
107
OO. Some verbs form their perfect active also by drop-
ping w of the present, annexing a, and prefixing the augment.
E.g.
(jTfTrw perf. asorjTia.
The perfect thus formed is called the SECOND PERFECT
ACTIVE.
The following list contains nearly all the verbs which have a
second perfect active. For the changes of the root, see above
($ 96 )-
ayvvfii, (AFJl), tuya. xsi'flw, xixev&a.
axovca (AKOJI). axrjxoa. X7?'$<w, xfi'xr/<5.
xAw (KAAFJl), xhixhyyat xc-
XOTITW (KOHJl), xixona.
xo<lM (KPAl'Jl), xixgaya.
xTf/roi (KTENJL), exiova.
AM^UTTOJ, xs^LctuJta.
lavttarto (AAOSl], Ul
hdtjxw (AAKfL), /t'/dx
yrj&tM (FlIOJl), ysyr)&u. fo/naj, Kilomn.
yiyvo^nu (FENJl, FAJl), yiyo- palvw (MANJl), [ii{
va, yiyaa.
FJINJI, yiywvn.
dalw (JAJl)y didrjct.
/JAfL, dkdua.
ANEOJl, avr]vo&a.
ttvwyw, txvwytx.
agagujxw (APJl), ugaga,
(lalrw (BAJl), {Hfaa.
POJl), part.!
(BOTAfL),
puw, (ttpitu.
MEIPJL (MEPfL),
dlw, didiot.
io) (/JOTIlfL), dsdovna.
ft if* ova.
(MAKJl),
tysigai (EFEPJL), i
!#w, ti'tafta.
JBTJJl, olda.^
ti'xw, t'otxa, o7x, tlxa.
EAETVfL (EATOfL),
ENEOSl* trjvo&a.
tgslnm (EPIllfL),
l^w, o/oixa.
&att<u (OAAfL), -ii&r^at.
OA0JI, lid-Tina.
&vqaxw (ONAJl), ri&vaa.
(2TAfL) y tataa.
oi'yco, tuiyu.
oMvpi (OAJl), Si
On SI, onwitx.
ogrvpi (OPJl), og
nd(j/M (UAOJl), nsnov&a,
7iMw t Trinoi&a.
ntgdw, ns7iogd(x.
n^yi'v^iL (IIAFJl), nsnrjya,
TT/TITW (HETfL), part.
), ninbyya.
{ JlPAFJl), ningaya.
( c PATJl), i'ggwya.
), i'gylya.
108 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 100-102.
aalgw (2APfL), oeaqga' qper/w, niytvyn.
antlgw (2 HEP ft], sanoQot. qp^tWoo ( tf>P/XJ2), ntyglxa.
OTsttw (ZTEslfL), taroAa. fl'TZfL* part. HEqpi^wg.
aiegyw, tarogya. qpt'o), neyva.
TIXTO)
TAASly TfcrA. %i'w (XE/lfi),
T/w (TPfl'Ji), rtTQiyot
CpCtlt'Ct) f^-4rV^2], 7l(ptjl'Ct.
NOTE. In Homer, a few pure verbs in aa* t tta y form their second perfect parti-
ciple by changing a or i into > and annexing us. E. g. j
FIRST AND SECOND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE.
1OO. To form the first pluperfect active, drop
a of the first perfect, annex f<i/, and prefix its aug-
ment. E. g.
TvniQ), TSTVcpa 1 pluperf.
1O1. To form the second pluperfect active, drop of the
second perfect, annex fir, and prefix the augment. E. g.
ttxoiJw, owrjxoci 2 pluperf. ijxijxOfir.
FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE ACTIVE.
< To form the future active, drop co of the
present, and annex ao. E. g.
7UXVW . fut. TTMt'aO)
<jP//Lfc'w " ><jp<X?Jaa> ( 95)
5/yioai " c5?/Aw(jw (ibid.)
AtfcTTO) "" Xfc^ W ( 5. 2)
TiU'xw " TiAfc'lw (ibid.).
So rifjnrii, rtti^aa) .( 95) ; dgato, dguaw (ibid.) : T/W, rraaj
(ibid.) ; (^/xorw, dnxgDuM (ibid.) ; rp//?w, T^/^/G) (8. 2) ; /^>(jpw,
yqciytM (ibid ) ; At/o), At'w ( 9. 2) : TSI'/W, jft^w (ibid.) ; (Jw,
a'aco ( JO. 2); Trf/^fo, Tmow (ibid.); fX7i/^w, ^Ti/aw. (ibid.);
CFTItVdd), UTItiuM ( 12. 5).
The future thus formed, is called the FIRST FUTURE ACTIVE.
103.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 109
NOTE 1. Futures in taw, from verbs in *&), often drop the /
a, and are inflected like contract verbs in w ( 116). E. g. j
Jo), fut. xopVw, xopw, isig, iti, dual L&TOV, plur. iovpsv,
NOTE 2. Some futures in aw and saw often drop the cr, and-
are contracted like verbs in w and sw. (ibid.) E. g.
/law fut. shaaco,
^o) " <5i#ffX<5(jw, diaaxtdaw
" TSA(JW,
NOTE 3. The Doric dialect, in the inflection of the first
future active, follows the analogy of contract verbs in so)
(ibid.). E. g. rofieva)) fut. j'o^tsww, Doric
NOTE 4. The Doric often forms futures in |w from pure
verbs or from verbs in w, which among the Attics have aw in
the future. E. g.
NOTE 5. The poets often use craw for aw, in order to make
the preceding syllable long by position. E. g. dvvco, avvaow'
cx^vvco
1O3. To form the future active of a liquid
verb, drop a of the simple present, and annex eo
contracted c5. E. g.
jUsVw fut. pj' f w contr. prw
x^t^f'w x<rw, ( 96. 18
anvvtw * oiftvrta, (ibid.)
xa^w^w, (ibid.)
XT>'W, (ibid.)
ffifAw, ( 96. 6.)
The future thus formed has been called the SECOND FUTURE
ACTIVE.
NOTE 1. A few liquid verbs have their future in <ru. Such are xvgu, xv^tru'
$uga, Qv^ffu ' x&XXu (KEAfL), x.\\<ru. See also the Anomalous u.^a.^ffxu t .
NOTE 2. The pure and mute verbs have no second future active. In the
?aradigm *vxrta t the second future rwria TWXU is introduced merely for exam-
ple's sake.
10
110 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 104.
FIRST AND SECOND AORIST ACTIVE.
1O4. 1. To form the aorist active, drop co of
the present, annex tfoc, and prefix its augment. E. g.
navo) aor. tnctvaa
ydsw " scpttqaa ( 95^
" edfowaa (ibid.)
" ileiya ( 5. 2
" tnleta (ibid.)
So T/iw, Ixlfirjaa ( 95) ; dyacv, i'dQtxaa (ibid.) ; avidia,
yviuva (ibid.); T/W, i'naa (ibid.); daxyvw, tddxgvaa (ibid.);
T//?a>, tTgupa ( 8. 2) ; ygdcpco, eygay>a_ (ibid.) ; Uyw, |'AE?
(9.2); zei^w, irevla (ibid.); (5w, ^aa (10.2); ntl&u,
ensiaa (ibid.); &nl(o, tflmoct (ibid.).
NOTE 1. A few pure and mute verbs annex a, instead of fa. See the An-
omalous aXiofAOLty ^etrioftott, EIELn, ENEFKH, iviixea, xata, fftvu, X^ u '
NOTE 2. Three verbs take * instead of tra. See the Anomalous Sftafti,
wpi, and vt&nfAi.
NOTE 3. The Dorians often form aorists in a from pure
verbs, or from verbs in w. E. g. /dtt'w, ty&a$a ' xopw,
NOTE 4. The poets often double the a after a short vowel.
E. g. avvw, jjvvaaa ' ^Aw, tylkaaoa.
2. To form the aorist active of a liquid verb,
drop a of the simple present, annex a, lengthen
the penult, and prefix its augment. A, in the
penult, is lengthened into ??, and s into ei. E. g.
XQirto aor. i'xfjlva ( 96. 18)
ufivvw " tfiivvot (ibid.)
vipta " eve i pa (ibid.)
T/Uw " waa ( 91. 6, 18)
agxxUw <f lag)?^ (ibid.)
Those liquid verbs, which have t in the penult of the pres-
ent, take 7) or in that of the aorist. E. g. yalvto, Zyrjva '
xa&algia, Ixad-viQa or djtd&a^ ( 96. 18.)
The aorist formed according to these rules ( 104. 1, 2)
is called the FIRST AORIST ACTIVE.
NOTE 5. AJg and a'xxo^a/ change into >j only in the indicative (m con-
sequence of the augment). Thus, ^a, oW, fyettfu, ugov, a^a/, a^aj*
105.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. Ill
t*a/, aA0&B/, a\aptvos. See in the catalogue of Anomalous
Verbs.
NOTE 6. A few liquid verbs take tra, in the first aorist active. Such are
XI/W (KEPfl), 'UiDfftt. ' Ki^KtU (KEAH), tKlXffU. ' KV^U, 'U^fftt, ' ril&>
(TEPfL , T6<r. See also the Anomalous a.^a^iffKu t cTXAor, ogvvpt.
1O5. Some verbs form their aorist active by dropping /,
w of the^resent, annexing ov, and prefixing the augment. E. g. \
aor. srepov.
The aorist thus formed is called the SECOND AORIST ACTIVE.
The following list contains nearly all those verbs which
have a second aorist active. For the changes of the root, see
above ( 96).
e'pc/xco (EPIKSL), %$
(AXJl), ri*nx v - igslnw (EPIIIfL),
, ijhrov.
(EPTFfL), r^gvyov.
EVQOV.
^7iAx/(jxco (AMHAAKJI), r
nhctxov or Tinkaxov.
), %adov or adov.
(APJl), tfg
ATP ft, uvyov.
(BAASl), tfalov.
avM (BAA2TJI), tf
(OIFJl), e&iyov.
(OANfL), &&avov.
(OOPJl), s&ogor.
K Ad Sly xsxuSov.
xixlvw (KANJl), sxavov.
(KAMJI), txa^ov.
(KTOfL), I'xv&ov.
BPAXfL,
duxvo)
/JAJl,
duQ&dv
demotio
AIKSI,
, tSaxov.
EIASl (IJJL), eldov.
EIHfL, dnov.
EAETOfL
ENEFKfL, yvsyxov.
win (ENIUJl), ivlvlnov.
Ivlama, tvianov.
t7io) 3 tonov.
txluyov.
(KPArfL), txQayov.
(KTENJl), txravov.
(KTTIJJl), ^yinynov
w (A AX SI), 3 &v.%ov.
va (AABfL), ttafiov.
(AAOJHL), lla&ov.
(AAKJI), zia%ov.
(AIIISL), ehnov.
dvw (MAOJl),
[MXQ7TTW (MAPIMI),
MEIPfL (MEPSl\
^ir\v.ao^LOLi (MAKJl), tft
fjivxctopai (MTKJI), spvxov.
oha&alvw (OAI2OJI), who&ov.
112 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 106, 107.
oqcs/Aw (0<I>Eu4Jl), wcptlov. T/XTW (TEKJl),
{fiQ>ASi) t cuqpAoy. li^voKo^ai (TTKJl), txvxov.
(nAAfl), sVrorAov. jftyyw (TMArSl),
(HAOJ2), tn
(niOJL)j tTll&OV. T^fcTTW,
, enagdov. T^>(JPW,
&ov. T^W^W (TPAFSl),
(llETfL), tnsoor, ens-cov. -ivyxdvw (TTXJl), tTV%ov.
nlvw (fllJl)j tniov. fPAFJl, ecpocyov.
(nAArfL), tnlriyov. &ENSI, nscpvov, entyvov.
, tnoQor. (psvya) (&TrJl), -tyvyov.
(llTAPJl), tmrxgov. <f>Qnw (ftPAzlJl), tcpgador.
(2'TIXJl) t tOTi^ov. %dra (XA/JJl), xx^oy.
(2TTrJl),sarvyov. %uli'(o (XANJl), tyotvov.
TAFJl, iiayvv. zardam (XA/JJl), fyadov.
le^vco (T^W), tTFfiov, tTa^oy. XPA12MSL)
TETMfL,
NOTE. Some of these verbs have also a first aorist active. See a^a^/Vxa;,
Ellin, ENEFKfl, xXagw, xnivu, f^a,^vria t veiff%&> t vii$-&>, rti(&u, vri7rru t
in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs.
PRESENT AND IMPERFECT PASSIVE.
1O6. 1. To form the present passive, drop o
of the present active, and annex opai. E. g.
TVTttw pres. pass. jvmo^Lai.
2. To form the imperfect passive, drop opai of
the present, annex o^v, and prefix its augment.
E.g.
JV71T6), TfTZTO^Utti imperf. paSS. llVTlTO^irjV.
PERFECT PASSIVE.
^ 1O7. To form the perfect passive, drop o of
the present -active, annex pai, and prefix its aug-
ment. E. g.
perf. pass, ninav^ai
'* n^cfllr^jLtti ( 95)
" dtdfywpai, (ibid.)
^i^L^^.CHi ( 8. 1)
" ninltyput, (9. 1).
108.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 113
So Tif.iaM, Tttifiypttt, ( 95) ; waw, yviafiai (ibid.) ; T/W, TSU-
Utti (ibid.) ; daxQVw, dedixxQVficu (ibid.) ; -lylfita, tiigi^^iai
(8. 1); ygaqxa, y^yga^^ai (ibid.); A/W, Isfayfiai' TEV^M, rl-
(9. 1) ; adw, yapou, ( 10. 1) ; nel&w, n&nsia^aL (ibid.) ;
(ibid.)
For the inflection of the perfect passive, see above (91).
(1) The perfect passive of liquid verbs is always formed
from the simple present. E. g. ayysMito, ^'//d^at ' yuivw,
nsg>afi(juxt. ( 96. 6, 18: 12. 3.)
(2) When the vowel of the root is either e, a, or o, the
perfect passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes . E. g.
slQM, t<f&agpai. ( 96. 6, 18, 19.)
NOTE 1. Some pure verbs, especially such as retain the
short vowel in the penult ( 95. N. 1, 2), insert a before the
terminations ^t, T/, {JLB&OV, [te&ot, E. g.
I NOTE 2. The liquid verbs mentioned above ( 98. N. 1), and a few others,
/ drop the v in the perfect passive. E. g. xXivu, xixXi/xai.
NOTE 3. Some liquid verbs in vco change v before p into a.
E. g. cpalvw, Tiecpaancu for nscp
NOTE 4. If the terminations jiat, ps&ov, fit&a, be preceded
by two consonants, the consonant immediately preceding them
is dropped. E. g. TSQTICO, TST
NOTE 5. In a few instances, the epic poets retain the" lingual (, S-) un-
changed before /A. E. g. KAAH, xixa'SfAat xogvo-tra (KOPT0.Q), x&xo-
NOTE 6. The following mute verbs change s into & in the perfect passive :
( 96/19.)
PLUPERFECT PASSIVE.
^ 1O8. To form the pluperfect passive, drop
pat of the perfect passive, annex fiyr, and prefix
its augment. E. g.
eTv^i^oti plup. pass.
10*
114 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [109,110.
FIRST AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE.
. To form the aorist passive, drop a of
the present active, annex #?p, and prefix its aug-
ment. E. g.
aor. pass,
ydsco " lydj&riv ( 95)
(ibid.)
( 7)
(ibid.).
So fifidto, ixifiri&iiv ( 95); <mw, tjvia&ijv (ibid.);
(ibid.) ; T//?G>, iiQbp&i(V ( 7) ;
(ibid.); tsv^t^, fofvjf&ip' $^ w > ij'a&rjv ( 10. 3);
(ibid.) ; ^w^/^w, ix^Lo^v (ibid.)
The aorist passive thus formed is called the FIRST AORIST
PASSIVE.
(1) The first aorist passive of liquid verbs is always derived
from the simple present. E. g. ayyittw> ijyysi^v ' yalvw,
fydv&ijv. ( 96. 6, 18.)
(2) When the vowel of the root is either e , a, or o, the first
aorist passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs .takes . E. g.
TjV y&slgw, ey&dg&rjv. ( 96. 6, 18, 19.)
NOTE 1. Some pure verbs, particularly such as retain the
short vowel in the penult ( 95. N. I, 2), insert a before d^v.
E.g.
NOTE 2. The liquid verbs mentioned above ( 98. N. 1) often drop the v
jn the first aorist passive. E. g. *X/v*/, i*X/v9->jv, commonly U>./9-v.
1 1 4). Some verbs form their aorist passive also by drop-
ping w of the present active, annexing ^j>, and prefixing the
augment. E. g.
A/w aor. pass. eUyrjv.
The aorist passive thus formed is called the SECOND AORIST
PASSIVE.
The following list contains nearly all those verbs which have
a second aorist passive. For the changes of the root 3 see
above ( 96).
(AFJl), iayriv or iayyv. aMdaao) {AAAATSl}, rj
110, 111.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
115
(BAABSl),
ygcpw,
JAJI, eddrjv.
da) (JAMJl),
dsgco, tddgyv.
(EASl), ed
, (ZTFJl),
(OPT&Jl),
(KEPfL),
(KAEIHI),
XOTTTW
or xaw, exexijv.
(KPTBSL),
(MANJl),
ol'yw, ol'yyv.
ogvoato
, sndyrjv.
nvlyw, I
gew ( C P2*J2),
ffiyvvp
oxmw 2
ansiQW (ZIIEPfL), eangqv.
oil fiat , eajlfirjv.
OTstta (2TEASI), earner.
OTSQBW (2TEPSL),
oqxxaaw
xciaaw (TAFJl), fiu
hgnrjv.
tti, frsQarj
T?;XW (TAKJl),
and
TV71T03 (TTIlJl) ,
Tvcpw (OT<l>fL\
cpalvw (<PANJl),
tp&ttgw ((I>OEPfL)>
(0PAJTJI),
vw, scpvrjv.
(XAPJl),
inlay r\v.
FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE.
1 1 1. 1. To form the first future passive, drop
&r)v of the first aorist passive, annex th^tfo^cu, and
reject the augment. E. g.
rvrnw, exvcp&rjv 1 fut. pass. Tvcp&^ao^oc^
2. To form the second future passive, drop yv of the second
aorist passive, annex ^oopou, and reject the augment. E. g.
w, hvTirjv 2 fut. pass.
116 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 112-114.
112. To form the third future passive, drop
ai of the second person singular of the perfect
passive, and annex opai. E. g.
t 3 fut.
NOTE. Liquid verbs, and verbs beginning with a vowel, very seldom have a
third future passive.
PRESENT, IMPERFECT, PERFECT, AND PLU
PERFECT, MIDDLE.
^113. The present, imperfect, perfect, and plu-
perfect, middle, are the same as in the passive.
FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE MIDDLE.
^114. 1. To form the first future middle, drop
o of the first future active, and annex opai. E. g.
ivmto, wya) 1 fut. mid.
NOTE 1. When the first future active ends in o7 ( 102.
N. 1,2, 3), the first future middle ends in ovpai. E. g. .
xo/u/w, xojtw, 1 fut. mid. xo[uov[A(xi, inflected like
, 1 fut. mid.
So in the Doric dialect, TVTTTW, rvyw, 1 fut. mid.
The Attics sometimes use the Doric first future middle.
2. To form the second future middle, drop a of
the second future active, and annex opou. E. g.
TsAfiw 0TAw 2 fut. mid. axektofioti,, contracted
NOTE 2. In a few instances the second future middle is found in mute and
pure verbs. See the Anomalous V^a/, ^avS-avw, /ia^^a/, viva, vivrw,
rixreu,
115.]
FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
117
FIRST AND SECOND AORIST MIDDLE.
115. 1. To form the first aorist middle, drop
a of the first aorist active, and annex apqv. E. g.
1 aor. mid.
2. Some verbs form their aorist middle by dropping
<w of the present active, annexing op?v, and prefixing the aug-
ment. E. g.
*EASl aor. mid. &lop
The aorist middle thus formed is called the SECOND AORIST
MIDDLE.
The following list contains nearly all tho^e verbs which
have a second aorist middle. For the changes of the root,
see above (96).
a/a), rj
ai'gco (APfi), ^QO
^
ahncxlvco (AAITJI),
i(t) (AXJl), rjx
aVo7 (AABfL),
dvw (AAOSL),
(AAKfL),
(AIIIJl),
{OAft), (a
OQWfJLt (OPfL),
ylyvo^ai
data
(BAASl),
lai (j
(JAJI
i (EF
EIASl, eld6 t
wacpgo-
flTjV.
nd&u
(UTOJl),
r)v.
(o (rs/uw),
, haQnofiy
(TEKJI),
(Vxw), I
NOTE. Some of these verbs have also a first aorist middle. Such are
118 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 116.
CONTRACT VERBS.
116. Pure verbs in aa, s w, and oa> 9 are con-
tracted by the Attics in the present and imperfect.
NOTE 1. Dissyllabic verbs in w are contracted only when
and s come together. E. g. ntew, ntisig nhlg, nUsi nlu, nUo-
pev, nUeje TiMrc, nliovai.
REMARK. Ae<w, bind y deviates from this analogy ( 116. N. 1). E. g.
ViOVffl 'boVffl)
NOTE 2. For the contraction of li^ciu, %>au t xvxu, vuvetco, ffp.Kt,
da, see above ( 23. N. 1).
NOTE 3. XJ^ movable v ( 15. 1) is very seldom appended
to the contrairod third person singular of the imperfect active.
NOTE 4. The Epic dialect sometimes changes the radical
vowel g into . E. g. ox?/w for oxn'w.
NOTE 5. The Epic contracts sent into siou, and ho into 7o.
E. g. aidbtat aidsiai, aldefo txidelo, from atdf'o/xat. Sometimes it
drops the second e. E. g. fivdwi for nv&itai from
NOTE 6. The Epic protracts a or (contracted) into or
, and w (contracted) into ow or ww or wo, and w into ow.
E-g.
u, dyoaaso&e a/OQua&e, Epic ayognaads
, Epic Tieddo} ' ntddeig ntdac, Epic ntdnag
^/?aw, rjpdovaa r//5coaa, Epic rj^wwaa ' rjfiuovTsg qjjwvTsg,
Epic fjfiwovieg
ah LOCO pot i > ouTiiioiTO alviano, Epic aiuoano.
In the Epic dialect, verbs in ow sometimes follow the analogy
of verbs in w. E. g. 6*??<fo'w, fai'ioono dyiovvTo, Epic ^^tow^TO '
drj'i&oiBv dqiolev, Epic 5^Vdwy, as if from dtfidw.
NOTE 7/ In some instances the Epic changes the* radical
vowel injo w. E. g. gw, w'w. ( 96. 19.)
NOTE 8. The Ionic very often changes the radical vowel
into . E. g. qpom'w for qporraw.
NOTE 9. The Ionic often changes o into ew. E. g.
viwviou for [irixavdovxai from
116.] CONTRACT VERBS.
ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD
119
Present,
I honor
I love
S. JlfMXO)
8. (piktw
TlflW
<pikco
rifpttg
cpdssig
np/e!
cpdesi,
D.
Tipaxov
P.
TtjUttSTS
s.
D.
P.
lllftttBTS
D.
(pilsiiov
cpdovptv
D.
P
ecpttsov
ewllovv
I manifest
S.
D.
drjhoexov
drjkovxov
P.
Imperfect.
hl^iaov
S. ecplfaov
S. edfaoov
erlfiw
tcpikovv
iSrilovv
silfiasg
fylteeg
tdfaoeg
lil^ocg
(plfaig
edfaovg
ericas
ip&ci
Idfaos
tr/^ua
efplhei
edifiov
D.
edrjloerov
P.
edrjloov
edrjkovv
120
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
S.
flflttO)
D.
TlfMtTOV
P.
TlflOlTS
S.
D.
TlflW
llflMTOV
P.
S.
frqloyg
yfi
D.
cpdeyis
OPTATIVE MOOD
S.
cpdsoi
(fdol
D.
D.
cpdeonov
P.
cpdeone
D.
dykoqTov
P. drihoa
dyhoonov
cpdeoitv
TIJJMSV cpdolw
Or thus ( 87. N. 2).
q)iy?, taij (pdolyv, olyg, ofy dr^olriv, ofyg, ofy
v, wrpov, wrJTijv olyptv, otrjTOV, oirjTyv oli]j*&
!, MTjauv oirjpev, olrjis, olqaav ofypev, olyTe, oL^oav
116.]
CONTRACT VERBS.
121
S.
D. -iipasiov
TlfACtTOV
P.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
*S. (ptt.se ^
dyloe
D. (fdsSTOV D.
(JpdslTOV
ri(j,(xeTS
P. (fdssrs P.
CpdstTS
or cpdssTwaav or
or (pdstTwaav or
dehorns
or
drjhomwaavor
INFINITIVE MOOD.
rifidsiv (pdssiv drjlosiv
Jiftctv (pdslv drjkovv
PARTICIPLE.
twcoj', ov(j, dov (pdiuv, iovaa, sov dyhowv, oovaa, oov
Ttftwv, wff, wy (fdwVf ovaa, ovv dyhwv, ovact, ovv
G. dovxog t wviog G. tovcog, ovvrog G. oovvog, ovvrog
S.
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
INDICATIVE MOOD. Present.
S, Tipdonou
cpdovfictt,
or -hi
or -si
P. T//iaO|U$ce
D.
P. (pdsofie&a
D.
qtdssv&s
ydsla&e
11
(pdovvrai
122 INFLECTION OF WORDS.
Imperfect.
S. 6Tl[l(x6(l1JV S.
I
sydov sdr^ov
STlfldfTO
tTlflCCTO
D. iii[ioL6u J &&ov D. etpdsofis&ov D.
fjipdsa&ov
P iiitiaLous&cii P. ecpdeous&ot P.
ecpdovvvo
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
S. iiu.duu.oLi 8. adiMuat S.
(pihrJTai,
D. Tiuawus&ov D. adswus&ov D.
rifjicia&ov
(pdsrja&ov
vpdrja&ov drjhwa&ov
P. Tiuctwus&a D. cpdewus&a P.
116.]
CONTRACT VERBS.
123
s.
OPTATIVE MOOD
S. qnlsolfirjv S.
D.
iipwo
T^UWTO
drjlolo
D. cpifaolpe&ov D.
ItflMO^OV
(piKsoia&ov
cpdola&ov
drjhooia&ov
drjkoHa&ov
drjhoola&qv
P.
P.
P.
TifAUOlVTO
TlfAWVTO
(fl^SOLVTO
S.
D.
P.
TlflW
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
S. (piJiBov S. dyhoov
cfilov dylov
D. <pdeea&ov D.
P.
P.
iiltaEa&wactv or (pifosa&wactv or drjlosa&waav or
tpdeea&wv dyJioscr&ojv
or (pdsla&waav or SrjJiovo&wacxvOT
INFINITIVE MOOD.
ydeia&ai,
PARTICIPLE.
ov (pifaopevog, ??, ov
, ov g)dovfivog t 77, ov
1], OV
-, 77, ov
124 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 117.
VERBS IN MI.
1 17. 1. Some verbs in aa, so, 00, v&, form their
present and imperfect, and their second aorist active
and middle, by dropping a, and annexing the termin-
ations without the connecting vowels. ( 84: 85.)
The augment of the past tenses of verbs in pi follows the
general rules ( 78-80).
NOTE 1 . All verbs in fit may be inflected like verbs in u. E. g. n&iu, ing,
*/, for TiB-rjfAif 9if t fitrt t imperf. irtS-tey, ttg, tt, for l<r/3-jv, *j?, ?.
2. The radical vowel (, c, o, v) is lengthened in the singu-
lar of the present and imperfect INDICATIVE ACTIVE. ^4 and e
become 77, and o becomes w.
The first and third persons singular of the present indicative
active end in pi, ai, respectively. ( 84. N. 1.) E. g.
gives lffT?y/ut, rjg, rjai, * laii}v, ?;, 77
jl&rifjiit yg, ijai ' frl&riv, i]g, i] *
dldco^ii, cog, coat ' edldwv, cog, w *
delxvvpi, $g, vat ' eddxvvv, tig, v.
NOTE 2. The termination vai of the third person plural of
the indicative active is often changed into aai. E. g. T/d^p,
ii&iaat, for -ti&elai) that is, for ti&ivai, ( 12. 5.)
3. The INDICATIVE PASSIVE and MIDDLE generally retains
the short vowel of the root. E. g.
ICFTOIW, \airiiJLif pass. 'iGTafioti, aaai, aim* l(JTafj,i]v, aao, cero "
Tt&eo), il&rjfii,, " Tl&ffiai, foai, etai ' 8ii-&sfi / rjv f eao, &TO '
didow, dldcofii, " dldoftai, oaai, oiai ' edid6fjir]v } ovo, OTO *
dtixvvo), dtlxvvfjii, " dslxvvfiai, vacu, viui, ' fdEixvvftrjv, vao, VTO.
NOTE 3. The terminations am, ao, of the second person singu-
lar, often drop the a, and are contracted with the radical
vowel. E. g. rl&T][ii, il&fji(u, -il&Eaat, rl&sai contracted ^l&r|.
The old writers (as Homer, Hesiod, Herodotus) generally
use the uncontracted second person singular.
4. The SUBJUNCTIVE of verbs in npi and topi, takes the con-
necting vowels and is contracted. In this case ?? and ay are
contracted into 77 and ^ respectively. The subjunctive of verbs
in vpi follows the analogy of ivmw. E. g.
subj. icrraw, ayg, ay contracted JTOJ, ?/c, fj
"^ r ", syg, sy Tf^w, fjg, ?/
oyg, oy didw, <*jg, w
* vys> vy*
117.] VERBS IN pi. 125
NOTE 4. In some instances the subjunctive of verbs in vfti rejects the connect-
ing vowel. Ei. g. ^tourxtboivvvfju, ^iotffxt$a,vvv<rt for heurxtdotMuy. Such forms may
be easily mistaken for the corresponding ones of the indicative. ( 86. N. 2. )
5. The OPTATIVE ACTIVE of verbs in t^u and p annexes
to the root of the verb the endings j\v, rjg, v\, dual 77x0?, rjTrjv,
plural ruler, rjTe, yaw, preceded by i. E. g.
opt. act. laTal'TjV, alyg, alrj
ii&UTqVy flyg, elrj
didolrjv, olt]g, olr}.
The optative active of verbs in vpi follows the analogy of
TUTITW. E. g. dsixvvto, dslxvvfii, detxvvoifti, voig, voi.
NOTE 5. The dual and plural of the optative active often
drop 7? * in which case ^ay becomes er. See the paradigms.
NOTE 6. In a few instances, the diphthong 01 in the optative active of verbs in
fAi is changed into y. E. g. VibufAi, 2 aor. opt. lur t v y dyns, for "Soinv, 'Sows.
6. The OPTATIVE PASSIVE and MIDDLE of verbs in r^ja
and w^i annexes the terminations ( 87), likewise preceded
by an i. E. g.
aw, c iaT7)[ii opt. pas. laTalfirjV, cuo, euro
l&r\iLi ti^il^v^ slo, elxo
didoa), dldwfit, didolprjv, olo, olio
The optative passive and middle of verbs in V^JLI follows the
analogy of TUTTTW. E. g. dsixvvw, dslxvvpi,, dewvvolfirjv, voio, vono.
NOTE. 7. In some instances, the optative of verbs in vpi is formed after the
analogy of verbs in ^/ or apt. E. g. 'bowvuy tiettvufju, pres. mid. opt. 3d pers.
sing. Scttvvro (more analogically $ouvu7ro)
7. The IMPERATIVE annexes the terminations to the
root. ( 88. 1.) E. g.
imperat. uj-ta&i, TW IWaero, a^w *
-etOf lid-inn, " il&su ( 14. N. 4), STM ' TI&SCFO, da&w "
didow, dldcofii ft dldo&i, OTCU * dldoao, oo&ca '
dsixvvw, dslxvvfii <( delxrv&t,, VT<H * delxvvao, vo&<n.
NOTE 8. The second person singular of the imperative active
sometimes drops #t, and lengthens the radical vowel. E. g.
T7][ii, 'IOTIJ for iorce^ dslxvvfii, dslxvv for dsiww&i.
NOTE 9. The termination GO of the second person singular
of the imperative passive and middle often drops the cr, and is
contracted with the radical vowel. E. g. lon^i, iaracro, latao
contracted tarw.
8. The INFINITIVE ACTIVE annexes von to the root of the
verb. E. g.
11*
126 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 117.
infin. act. laravctt,
8 id ow,
deixvvw, dslxvvfii dswvvvcu.
9. The INFINITIVE PASSIVE and MIDDLE annexes a#cu to
the root. E. g.
inf. pas. & mid. laraa&ou,, arua&cu
di86(o t dldupi, dldoa&cu, doa&cti
dstxrvco, delxwfAi, dslxrva&cM.
10. The root of the PARTICIPLE ACTIVE is formed by an-
nexing vi to the root of the verb. E. g.
laidw, 'iOTrjfii part. act. lords, avxog, ( 36. 2)
TI&SW, liSviiii Ti&tlg, svTog, (ibid.)
did 6w, 8ldo\ut 8i8ovg, ovrog, (ibid.)
dtixvvM, dslxvvfii dfixrvg, wro,(ibid.)
11. The PARTICIPLE PASSIVE and MIDDLE annexes pwog to
the root of the verb. E. g.
ffTw, 'lOTTjfii, part. pas. &, mid. laTotfiwog, (noipsvog
Ti#'w, ri&rjfjii, vt&efievog, frefASvog
didow, didwf.il Sidojiitvog, Sopsrog
Seixvvw, Selxvvfii dsixvi'fisvog.
12. The SECOND AORIST ACTIVE lengthens the radical vowel
throughout the indicative and imperative, and in the infinitive.
A, when it is not preceded by Q, becomes ^. E. g. /5t/5w,
2 aor. efirjv, ijg, r), TJTOV, rJTrjV, r^sv, rjis, r)oav' imperat,
r^TWy T]TOVj rjiwv, jjje, yrwoav ' infin. /??Jiw.
NOTE 10. KTHMI and OTTHMI retain the short vowel in the second
aorist active. See the Anomalous ttrtivej and olrdu. See also xXu&>.
Aftupi and *&vp.t lengthen the vowel only in the singular of the second
aorist indicative, and in the second aorist infinitive. See the paradigms.
NOTE 1 1 . The second person singular of the second aorist imperative, in a few
instances, takes s instead of S-*. See the Anora. S/a;^, %%&>, 7?^/, riS-yjM, $gi&>.
NOTE 1 2. The imperatives /3j&/ and 0-T5J9v, from fiifivfu and Iffrtjf&i, in com-
position, often drop $/, and change v into &. E.g. xra/3a for xxrafinSh
NOTE 13. The verbs r/S^/, 't*if&i t and $ft&>ju.i, lengthen s and o into tt and on
in the second aorist active infinitive . thus, S-t7veu t slva/, Sovvat.
NOTE 14. KTIMI, HIMI, O0IMI, and HAHMI, in some of the parts
of the second aorist follow the analogy of verbs in tif&i or apt. See the
Anomalous KTIH, -rtvea, <p3-ivu t and vr\&<u.
NOTE 15. In a few instances, the SECOND AORIST MIDDLE lengthens the
radical vowel in the indicative, imperative, infinitive, and participle. See the
Anomalous
NOTE 16. Those verbs in vpt, of which the present is used,
II?.] VERBS IN pi. 127
have no second aorist. On the other hand, when t.he second
aorist is used, the present is obsolete. E. g. dslwvfu has no
second aorist; and tyvv comes from the obsolete &TML
In order, therefore, to complete the paradigm of verbs in
iiy the second aorist of JTMIis subjoined to dslxw^i.
NOTE 17. DIALECTS. (I) In the INDICATIVE the Doric has
n, VTI, for 01, VGI. E. g. ilfrrpi, ii&ivii. ( 84. N. 6.)
(2) In the imperfect and second aorist indicative, the Epic
and Ionic dialects often use axov, oxofiyv, in which case the
radical vowel always remains short. E. g. T/vfyp, Tl&eaxov for
lftrjv ' laTrj^i^oTccaxov for eoTrjv. ( 85. N. 5.)
(3) The Epic often drops aa in the third person plural of the
imperfect and second aorist active indicative, in which case the
preceding long vowel is shortened. E. g. loiyfii, eaTav for lai;?/-
oav ' rl&rifu, tTi&sv for frl&eaav' 4TMI, %dvv for tdvaav.
(4) The Ionic often uses com, TO, in the indicative passive
and middle. E. g. xl&r][M, n&ionai, eii&daTo. ( 84. N. 6.)
(5) The Epic and Ionic often use the uncontracted SUB-
JUNCTIVE. E. g. -[l&ijfu, &sG) for #w.
(6) Sometimes the Epic, in the subjunctive, lengthens the
radical vowel s into si or 77. E. g. il&ruu, delta, dyy?, for &sa,
dfyg. (116. N. 4.)
(7) It sometimes shortens the connecting vowels of the sub-
junctive. E. g. iLd-rjfii, falopw for -frelwusv. ( 86. N. 3.)
(8) In the third person singular of the subjunctive active, it
sometimes uses at. E. g. dldtopi, Swai for dw. ( 86. N. 2 )
(9) Verbs in api sometimes change the radical o into w in
the subjunctive. E. g. dldwfii, dtoto, dwyg, for dw, dco?.
(10) The epic poets sometimes lengthen the radical vowel
in the INFINITIVE ACTIVE, and PARTICIPLE PASSIVE and MIDDLE.
E. g. Tl&rjfM, vi&riiitvai, ii-d-^fjievog ' dldwfjii,, dtdovvai.
NOTE 18. ACCENT. The rules stated above (93) apply also to verbs in pi.
We only observe here that,
( 1 ) The accent of the regular third person plural of the indicative active devi-
ates from the rule ' 93. 1).
(2; The dissyllabic forms of the present active indicative of tipi and Quipi, de-
viate from the rule ( 93. 2). In composition, however, they follow the rule.
(3 ) The infinitive active takes the accent on the penult. E. g. /<r<rav/. Ex.
cept the Epic infinitive in fttveti, as r&jfttveu.
(4) The participle active takes the accent on the last syllable. E.g. /Wa,r/9-/f .
(5) When the syllabic augment is omitted ( 78. N. 3), long monosyllabic
forms take the circumflex. E. g. yvu for 'iyvu from fyiiyvutrxu.
( 6) For the accent of the subjunctive and optative passive of 70>rqce< and $/$#-
ftt, see the paradigms.
Aftupi sometimes throws the accent back on the antepenult in the subjunctive
and optative passive, when the last syllable permits it( 20j. "10-Tw^ sometimes
does the same in the optative passive.
128
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
Synopti-
ACTIVE
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. OPTATIVE.
Present.
Imperfect.
Aorist 2.
Present.
Imperfect.
Aorist 2.
Present.
Imperfect.
Aorist 2.
Present.
Imperfect.
Aorist 2.
Present.
Imperfect.
2 Aor. Mid.
Present.
Imperfect.
2 Aor. Mid.
Present.
Imperfect.
2 Aor. Mid.
Present.
Imperfect.
2 Aor. Mid.
TlfhfUl
SiScof.il
edidav
Hdcov
TI&&
tSzixvvv
e8vv
Seixvva
Svo
Soir^v
SeixvvoifjLi
Sv-qv
PASSIVE AND
SiSofiai
Scoftai
in.]
cal Table.
VOICE.
IMPERATIVE.
ictia&t,
VERBS IN
129
818000
8600
8tixvv0o
INFINITIVE.
icstdvat,
&S6&CU
Soa&at
Ssixvv0&ai
PARTICIPLE.
L0rds
ri&sk
#m
&zlvai
fats
8i8o&L
Si86vou
SiSovs
S6fo
Sovvai
8ovs
tefavto
Sswvvvat
Seixvvs
Sv&i
Svvat,
*<*
MIDDLE.
Sl86[J,VOS
dvao
Sva&ai
130
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
K
S.
I place
ICTT^S
D* t
UJTCITOV
ICFTttTOV
JP. iOTOtfiSV
S.
UJTTjg
tarrj
ioiaaav
D.
IGTUTOV
P. la
S.
D.
JP.
BOTTJ
GTV\1QV
ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
I put I give
didwg
ll&STOV
dldofisv
dldoTOV
frt&SflfV
dldoptv
or didovai(v) or
Imperfect.
edldwv
edldwg
tdlda
tdldopsv
edldoTOV
edidoTijv
hl&wav edldoaav
Second Aorist.
ISvv
9m
e&frov
e&trs
e&eaav
tdoaa
I show
delxvvfi
delxvvg
delxvvTov
delxrvTov
or
")
sdslxvvv
edeixvv
sdelxvvTOV
sdelxvvpsv
edslxvvTe
edelxvvaav
sdvv
edv
tdiJTOV
I'dvre
edvaav
( 117. N. 16.)
117.]
S. fffTW
ACTIVE VOICE OF VERBS IN fit.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
131
dswvvw
laiy
D. la
larriTOV
P. I
-ii&yg
vi&fj
didwg
didwfisv
didwiov
dewvvrjTov
OTW in-
flect, like
the Pres.
dsi,xvvtaai(v)
Second Aorist.
#w inflected 5w inflected dvw ( 117. 4.)
like the like the
Pres. Pres.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
Present.
S. larttlrjv
ioTalrig
iGTairi
D. loTctlri
P.
n&elrjg
didolr]
didolriptv
deixvvoig
dswvvoi
dswvvonov
SeixvvolTrjv
didolrjjs
dswvvons
D. laTCUTOV
Or thus (117. N. 5)
didolTyv
lr]v in-
fleet, like
the Pres.
didotrs
didolsv
Second Aorist.
inflect, dolyv inflect. $vr t
like the like the
Pres. Pres. (
132
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
K
or lair}
D. toTonov
P. forms
8.
OTlf]T(0
D. GTrJTOV
P. GT7JTS
Gift
or
2 Aor.
Pres. I
2 Aor.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present.
tl&ne
dldois
diSoTWGUV
or
or TtxHVrwj'
Second Aorist.
\ or <&eg do&t, or dog
S^iiov
doiov
or &8VT(i3v or doviwv
INFINITIVE MOOD.
didovai,
PARTICIPLE.
didovg
dovg
delxrv&t
or dtlxvv
dflxVVTS
or dswvvvTGw
dv&i,
dmov
dvTMaav
or dvvrwv
dsixvvvott
dvvai
deixvvg
dvg
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
S. Torrc^u a*
lavaatu
'li&sGni
or il&
tide-cat,
dldoaat,
dldoTou
delxvvaai
ddxvvrai
ll&ZG&OV
loxua&ov
P. IG
dldoG&ov
dldoo&ov
Ssixvva&ov
ddxvvadov
rl&sa&s
dldovTcu
OF THB
117.]
S. lotn
PASSIVE AND
or !'<
IfflttTO
D. laTa^ie&ov
laTOUJ&OV
P. laja^da
inflected
like the
Imperf.
S. l
iary
D. l(JTW
P. i(JTWlulS&Ct
lar'fia&B
tCFTWVTOM
like the
Present.
MIDDLE OF VERBSJjhjJ^ J y E&S I T "X
Imperfect.
.
edldoao
or hl&ov or edidov
hl&tto IbidoTO
tdLdofis&ov
sdldoa&ov
hl&sa&ov
eu&sa&e
edldoa&s
edidovjo
Second Aorist Middle.
inflected inflected
like the like the
Imperf. Imperf.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present
Ti^M^UL
Tl&7)T(Xl
didw
didwa&ov
Vl&fjCf&S
Tl&WVTGtl
Second Aorist Middle.
frwfiixi, deacon,
like the like the
Present. Present.
sdely.vvao
id SIX WTO
fdttxrvadov
tdtlxr
inflected
like
like
134
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
S. ivTalpw
laiaio
IOTOUJO
D. la
iajoua&ov
iaicua&s
GTOtl{J,r]V
like the
Present.
S. HoTctao
or l'(
P. V(
OTocao
like the
Present.
Pres.
2A.M. (jTaa&cu
Pres.
2 A.M.
OPTATIVE MOOD.
Present.
diSolo
didolTO
didola&ov
dsixvvoio
dsixvvoijo
deMvvol[j,e&ov
dsixvvoia&ov
didolafte
Second Aorist Middle.
like the
Present.
like the
Present.
xl&ta&ov dldov&ov.
didoa&wv
dldoafrs
didoa&Mcruv
or ^t^off^toj
Second Aorist Middle.
&soo or &ov douo or dov
like the like the
Present. Present.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PARTICIPLE.
duxvvoivxo
( 117. N. 17.)
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present.
tl&sao dldoao dslxvvao
or -il&ov or dldov
dtlxvvafrov
deixvva&wv
delxvva&e
deixvixj&caaav
or dfi
dvuo
like
delxvvao.
dslxvva&ai
dvG&ai
dvperog
REMARK. It is supposed that the aorist of verbs in pi originally ended in
, c^ujjv, ( 105 : 115. 2.) Hence its name second aorist*
118.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
135
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
118. 1. Anomalous verbs are those which have, or are
supposed to have, more than one present ( 96).
2. All verbal forms, which omit the connecting vowel ( 85.
1), are anomalous ; except the perfect and aorist passive
( 91 : 92).
3. The following catalogue contains nearly all those verbs
which are apt to perplex the learner.
REMARK. In this Grammar, obsolete or imaginary Presents
( 96) and Nominatives ( 46), are always printed in capitals.
They are so printed " in order that the eye may not become
accustomed, by means of the common letters, to a multitude
of unused and merely imaginary forms, and thus rendered less
capable of detecting barbarisms at first sight."
A.
AAJl, injure, A. aaoa contract-
ed aaa, A. Pass, acxa&rjv, A.
Mid. aaadfirjv. Pres. Mid.
3d pers. sing, action. ( 109.
N. 1.)
/^i (ATASly ArHMI), ad-
mire, A. Pass, riyda&riv, F.
Mid. uyaaofjiai, A. Mid. (not
Attic) r^aoaijrjv. ( 117 :
95. N. 1: 109. N. 1.)
The Present ayao^at or
ayalo^ni, am angry at, envy,
is used by the epic poets.
^ ( 96. 18.)
uyelgta (AFEPJl), collect, uye-
QM, tfysiga, ayriysQxa, ayriytQ-
{iai, yytQ&ip'* ^ A Mid. yye-
Qonr\v (Epic), Infin. aytQK-
i, Part, ayyontvoq for
g. (96. 18:81.
1: 26. J.)
ayvvfii (AFSL), break, F. |o),
A. l| (rarely ^e), 2 Perf.
l/a, 2 A. Pass, fw/r/v or
ax^i'. (96.9:80. N.2.)
NOTE. The simple AFH was
originally FAFfl, whence X.U.VK^O.IS
(see xarci'yvvft^ , which originally
was *FF^/f. ( 1. N. 1, 3 :
10. N. 2.)
ctyw, lead, |w, rfca, Perf. fact
and ctyrio%ct, ^y^cti, v\X,&v[v>
2 A. tfyuyov, 2 A. Mid. riya-
yoprjv. ( 96. 19, N. 1 :
81. 1.) The Perfect ayrjoza
is not Attic.
NOTE 1 . 'Aywo^a is formed as
follows: &yu, AFAFH, AFOFH,
omission of the second y is acci-
dental.
NOTE 2. In Homer we find
Aor. Imperat, 2d pers. plur. u%tn
for &Zatrt. ( 88. N. 3.)
C A/UI, see avdiww.
aelQw (AEPJl), regular, =z
al'gw. The epic poets have
Pluperf. Mid. 3d pers. sing.
W ? TO for 7?V- ( 9G - 19
f'So), Epic, = ftftw.
(AESl), blow, Infin. a^vai,
Part, adg, Imperf. ayv (in
Homer). Pres. Pass, urjfiai.
( 117. N. 17.)
alvew, praise, eaco and T^aw, tact
136
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
[ 118.
and rjaa, ? ; x,
(95. N. 2.)
take, choose, Tjcrw, qxct,
r^tai, e&rjv. { 95. N. 2.)
From 'EAJl, % A. fdov, 2 A.
Mid. tUo/iqi', 2 F. &LW (rare).
In the Perfect, the Ionics prefix
to this verb a sort of Attic redupli-
cation with the smooth breathing,
aouignxct, agettgnfteti. ( 81.)
aijpw (APJl), raise, agw t rJQot,
riQxa, rjotia!, tj(f&ipt. (&& 96.
18: 104. N. 5.)
ala&dvopai ( 1/^OJl), perceive,
feel, Perf. Mid. fja&iuiai, F.
Mid. aiati reopen, 2. A. Mid.
^ yadofiyv. ( 96. 7, 10.)
axa/o) (AXfL), trouble, afflict,
F. xtt/'j / '(/to, A. i]xj/a, 2 A.
yxoizov, 2 A. Mid. TjxaxouTjv.
Mid. ttxtt#/ojuat, grieve, feel
grief, am afflicted. (& 96.
10, N. 1.) *
anttxfuros, r\ 9 ov, sharpened,
pointed, a defective Perf.
Pass. Par#. from AXJl.
> ( 81. N.)
axova) (AKOJl), hear, tfxovoa,
rjxovxa (not Attic), ovaficci,
ovadyv, ovooftat, 2 Perf. x?J-
xo, 2 Pluperf. r t xr]x6siv.
(^96. 18:81: 107. N. 1:
^ 109. N. 1.)
jxlaopat, ^vander, rove, Perf.
Mid. alalrjftat synonymous
with the Present, Infin. aid-
Iria&ai, Part, ahalyuwog.
} (81. N.: 93. N. I.)
uldairia (AA/JSl), increase, Im-
perf. (as if from aAdaVw)
^ fydavov. ( 96. 7.)
eudffcrxG) (AA/JJl),grow, thrive,
cause to grow, F. aA^ifaw.
(96. 10,8.)
>U'!tt (AAEKJl), ward of, F.
odeSij'ae*, A. Mid. ^h^x
2. A. r/AAxor. ( 96. 15,
10, N. 1 : 26. 1.)
NOTE. The Aor. faetXxov is ob-
tained in the following manner :
or alfvo^ai, avoid, es-
cape, A. Mid. qfotipriv or
ijJUvtti^v. ( 96. N. 12:
104. N. l.j
afolg, see ct7Ao).
As/(jpw (AAI&Jl), anoint, dyw,
tiya, Perf. cJeAtyJUgx*, A?fA^-
fia. (96. 18:81.)
'AAT2KJI (AAJl), capture,
Perf. eofAwxa and ^'Ao)x 7iz;e
6ecw captured, F. aJuaaopai
shall be captured. From
'AAJIMI, 2 A. Awy and
TifAroi' ^s captured, Aw, Aot-
^v and ccAw^y, aAw^at, Aov.
Pass. uUoxojttu,, am cap-
tured. ( 96. 8, 10 : 80.
N. 2: 117. 12, N. 6.)
ulnalvw (AAlTJl), sin against,
offend, F. eUtr^aw, 2 A. r/At-
TOV, 2 A. Mid. y
( 96. 7, 10.)
^ The Perf. Mid.
ahx^erog has the force of
an adjective, that has sinned
against, that has offended.
c> (93. N. 1.)
ccUo^m CAAJI), leap, spring,
A. Mid. ftdpnv, 2 F. Mid.
cdovftvti, 2 A. Mid. rilo^iip'.
( 96. 6: 104. N. 5.)
NOTE. Forms without the con-
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 2d pers.
sing. aiXffo, 3d pers. sing. XT<J,
Part. ahfAtvos, all with the smooth
breathing, for #A.<ro, %\i<ro, aXo^s-
v$. ( 92. N. 4.)
cUo'w (AJJl), used only in the
compound y>low, which
118]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
137
see. See also 'AAI2KJI.
^ ( 96. 10.)
AUJXW (AATKSl), shun, avoid,
F. Mfa, A. fovfr. ( 96.
, 14.)
tthynlvM or ahfpdvw (AA3>fL),
procure, bring, find, 2 A.
7?A(j>o*>. ( 96. 7.)
AAfLy see
ro) (^AMAPTSl), err, sin,
miss, Perf. i^a^xa, Perf.
Pass. fjfiutQiimat, A. Pass.
fub/y, F. Mid. apotQ-
, 2 A. yuotoTov. ( 96.
7, 10.)
For WOIQTOV Homer has al-
so ^U^QOTOV, with the smooth
breathing.
NOTE. The Homeric jjf&fyorov
is formed as follows : 'AMAPTH,
*AMOPTfl, fiftogrov, vftgorov, %ft-
fyorov. ( 96. 19: 26. 2, N.)
/3A/(jxw and W^/JAOW, miscar-
ry,
(96.8.) The Present ^i-
/?Aow occurs only in com-
pounds.
ct{j.7is%(a (otficpl, l^w), wrap a-
round, clothe, Imperf. a^mu-
%ov, F. ttftcpsSw, F. Mid. ri^u-
cpE^ofica, 2 A. yfimaxov, 2 A.
Mid. ^Tnoxo^rjv. Mid. a^ini-
%ofjai, wear, put on. ( 14.
3:82. N.I.)
and
(AMnAAKJl), miss, err, F.
rtfinlnxqaw, 2 A. yfinhctxov,
Infin. danlny.uv and some-
times anlaxsiv, without the
//. ( 96. 8, 10.)
l f evrvui), clothe,
12*
F. ctf4ipita<a or cl^qpiw, A.
^iuqp/(j, Perf. Mid. yaffle-
(jfj,oci, A. Mid. rjfjcpisau^iiv.
Mid. aiiyiivwtJiou, put on,
dress myself. (102. N. 2:
82. N. 1.)
sometimes yAow
(^, *AAI2KJl t WAO'OJ), ex-
pend, consume, Imperf e^'-
Ataxov or avdlovv, F. avaAw-
aw, A. yAcoaa or a^Awaa,
Perf. ^Awxa or a^^Acoxw.
In double composition, A.
?;mAco(ja, as xaT7?J'Ao)(Jtt.
( 80. N. 4: 82. N. 1.)
*>dra> ^AdfL), please^ delight,
Imperf. r^vdavov or edrdavov
or krivdotvov, F. <5?7'a, 2 A.
6<5ov or <$o>, 2 Perf. f<5a.
(96.7, 10:80. N. 2, 3, 5.)
For g&>v Homer has also ivctbov,
with the smooth breathing.
The Doric has 2 Perf. 'iitia, with
the smooth breathing.
NOTE. The simple 'AAD, was
originally FA AH, from which came
2 A. cFFftfc* (like i/AfAa^ov from
MEIPH), which finally was chang-
ed into tvotiov. ( 1. N. 1, 3.)
ANEOfL y spring forth, 2 Perf.
avrivo&ot synonymous with
the Present. ( 96. 19 :
, 8L) ,
ave%(o (civ a, l^co), hold up, F.
Mid. aveSofAou, 2 A. avG%ov,
2 A. Mid. r)Vo%6ur]v. Mid.
avixo^Ltti, endure, Imperf. ^~
vfXOfirjv. ( 82. N. 3.)
avolyw (y, ol'^ci)), open, Im-
perf. ocycWoy, F. yo/|a>, A.
wyso^a (later ^fvo/|), Perf
avsofxot, Perf. Pass, aj'ecpy^cu,
A. Pass. avfwx&W* 2 Perf.
v f o)/ stand open, 2 A. Pass.
(later) ^o//^. ( 82. N. 1.)
138
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
[ 118.
eWj Imperf. avwyeov, =. fol-
lowing.
, command, order, |w, ,
2 Perf. civwya synonymous
with the Present.
NOTE. Forms without the con-
necting vowel, 2 Perf. 1 st pers.
plur. cLvwyftsv, Imperat. eiva%3-i,
av&>%Q-ctt t civa%Ss, for civ&jyz, i<ru t
*rs. ( 91. N. 6: 88. N. 1.)
The last two forms take the Pas-
sive terminations <rea, <r$s, a,vuy-
t. ( 11 : 7.)
away, A. Part, anovgag, A.
Mid. Part. anovQafiwog.
7r(jc)/(jxw (A&Jl), deceive, F.
ajiatprjaot), 2 A. j]7iot(pov.
^ ( 96. 8, 10, N. 1.)
aTroAaua) (WTTO, Aavw), enjoy, Im-
perf. oTrg'Aauor or anfyavov,
F. 7roAavaw, A. a7T>li/cra or
of, F. Mid. 7
cr?, see
i, invoke, curse, aao-
, aaa^v, regular. From
APIIMI comes Epic Infin.
agrJitwou. ( 117. N. 17.)
aQUQiaxM (APJl), jit, adapt,
join, F. w'^aw, A. ygaa, Perf.
Pass. aQ^Qf^ai, 2 A. TIQ
2 Perf. 'ow0a (Ionic a
Part. fern. aQaQV~ut ( 96.
8, 10, N. 1 : 81. N.: 103.
N. 1: 104. N. 6.)
NOTE. The syncopated 2 A.
Mid. Part, eigpivof has the force
of an adjective, suitable, adapted.
( 92. N. 4.)
V/ro (APJl), please, gratify,
F. atggwti, Perf. Pass, r/pfa/ura.
(^ 96. 10, 8 : 95. N. 1 :
107. N. 1.)
(APJl), procure, ac-
quire, earn, save, Imperf.
rjQvvfirjv. ( 96. 9.)
QOG), ploUgk, till, OffW, 0(J,
From APfLMI, Infin. Act.
(Epic) aQomiwai. ( 81 :
95. N. 1 )
w^Tra^o), seize, snatch, erw or
|w, a or , x, oiapcd,
or ctyfiat, act&rjv or ax&r]V, 2
A. Pass. wQTiayriv. ( 96.
N. 6.)
APJl, see r^w, otQaglattto, MQS-
(7XW, &QWfUH
ai/lco or-u^Vw (ATrJl), in-
crease, F. av|?f(7w, A. ^i/l^cra,
Perf. Pass, yvfypai,, A. Pass.
^v^Oriv. ( 96. 15, 7, 10.)
ctVQaw, otVQEQ), avQlaxopoti, (AT-
PJl,) used in the compounds
7rV'w, snaVQsw, inavgl-
axouai, which see. ( 96.
8, 10.)
ATPfL, see the preceding.
aqpeWrat, see aqp/fy/uf.
ayir]iLi (anc, fyfu), let, go, Im-
perf. dcpleov or r^cpUov some-
times r)<plrjv, F. acprjaa), A.
acpfjxa, Perf. qpetx#, Perf.
Pass, acfsifiai, A. Pass, aqps'-
^j^v or ayzl&rjv, 2 A. (p^v,
2 A. Mid. acpiuyv or B(jp/-
^^v. ( 82. N. 1.)
NOTE. The form a^ia/vra/, in
the New Testament, stands for
Perf. Pass. 3d pers. plur. <prvr*.
(See ?/BJ.)
^t'aaw, rfraz/? forth (liquids\
F. <pt;|w, A. ^(fvocn. ( 96.
N. 4.)
A<l>Jl, see 7Twqp/(jxw.
^f r w (AX ft), Part.axwv, ovaa,
afflicted, grieved, Perf. Pass.
118.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
139
jlicted, grieve, Infin. x^-
o&ai, Part. (wn%riiitvo$ or
Axwiptvoq. (96. 10:95.
N. 2:81. N. :93. N. 1.)
$X&o[i<u (AXOJl), am offended,
pained, feel indignant, A.
Pass, rjx&ea&yv, F. Mid.
ax&saopai. ( 96. 10 : 95.
N. I: 109. N.I.)
axvvfiai, or a^opou, (AXJl), =
Axaxl&nui, which see. ( 96,
9.)
AXJl, see
aw, 6/0Z0, Imperf. ov. ( 80.
^ N. 5.)
aw, sleep, Aor. aWa or aaa.
( 96. 10.)
aw, satiate, Infin. Spsvai (Ep-
ic) for tj>, aaat, dan. Pass.
aofiat, 3d pers. sing. rt
^ Epicr t . ( 116. N. 6.)
UWQTO, see
/5tVw and /?ffxw (BASL), go,
walk, F. ^aw sAa?/ cz/sc #o
^o, Perf. /5/5ryx, Perf. Pass.
ftepanaL (only in composi-
tion), A. Pass, spu&riv (only
in composition), F. Mid.
i, A. Mid. (Epic) f/fy-
and foo^v, 2 Perf.
From
A.
(in composition often
M\, farm, /?'<? (96. 5,
18,8: 95. N. 2: 85. N.2:
91. N. 7.)
NOTE. The Homeric /3/a^a/ or
fit'ioftxi, I shall live, is a 2 A. Mid.
Sw6/. for jS^a/. ( 116. N. 8,
4: 117. N. 17 : 215. N. 7.)
(BAAfL), throw, cast,
F. /foAoj sometimes
Perf. /56/5A7 ? x, Perf. Pass.
Ptfftrjpou, A. Pass, l^&r^v,
F. Mid. (ftyaoiiai (Epic),
2 A. r/?aXoy, 2 A. Mid. ^-
Ao>^. (96. 6, 10, 17.)
From BAEJl, BAIIM1, 2
A. I'/SV, 2 A. Mid. iffi-
, Subj. 3d pers. sing,
for {H?ii(u, Opt. /?Aa-
, Infin. /5>l^(j^at, Part.
, all Epic. (117.
N. 15, 17: 96. 19.)
/9(jxw, see (falrm.
/5aTaJw, carry, daw, aaa, a-
&yv. ( 96. N. 6.)
, see pabco.
or /?f/0|Ui, see /3alvw.
or /9//J^* (J3AJ1), =
/vw, which see. (96. 1.)
(BOPfL), cat, F.
), Perf. /?/?^wx, Perf.
Pass. ftspQwpat, A. Pass.
efigia&rjv, 3 F. ftf^waoftai,
2 Perf.- Par*, /fe^w?. From
BPSIMI, %A.%0g<av. (96.
17, 1,8: 117. 12.)
/9fOW, /Zt?C, WOY/, WX, WfJMl, MOO-
fiai. From BIJlMf, 2 A.
efiloiv, /3ia), fiiolrjv and /3iwr)v,
fituvni, Siovg. ( 117. *12,
N. 6.)
/ftw'ffxo^cu (/5fow), revive, bor-
rows the other tenses, ex-
cept Imperf, from the pre-
ceding.
/5AaTVco (BAA2TSL), bud,
sprout, F. /?Aa<jT7(jw, A. e-
/5AffT??xa, 2 A. eoXatrrov.
( 96. 7, 10 : 76. N. 2.)
BAAfL or BAESl, see pdUw.
/ftw'axw (MOAfL), come, go.
140
INFLECTION OP WORDS.
Perf. (iffiftkuKot, 2 Aor.
\ov, 2 F. Mid.
( 96. 17, 8 : 26. N.)
NOTE. The Present fiXvorxe* is
formed as follows : MO AH,
MAOfl, MBAOH, p$\uffx,u,
fcXuffKSj. The p is dropped because
the combination p,$). cannot begin a
Greek word. ( 16. N. 1.)
pocito, cry out, ?Jao>, you, TJXW,
7?/iw/, gt^v, ^oofiai, regular.
From the simple ijfOJi come
the Ionic forms efiuHja, e'/Jw-
a&yv, priaoiiat. ( 109. N.I.)
BOAEfL (BAASl\ Perf. Pass.
Seftoblftai, =. /5Ho). ( 96.
19, 10.)
BOASl, see
BOPJl, see
/Soaxw (BOJ2), /ecc?, pasture,
F. /?oax?|(jft}, A. c^oax^aa.
( 96. 8, 10.)
I3ov)iofica (BOAJl), will, Imperf.
tfitvlofAifw or ^ovXo^rjv, Perf.
Pass. f}s/3ovKijiJiai, A. Pass.
efiovkr)&T)V or Tifiovhriftriv, F.
Mid. fiovlrjaoficu, 2 Perf. /5s-
comp. in Homer TT^O-
a. (96. 18,10: 78.
N. 1.) From the simple
Present come Pres. Pass, jjfo-
liofiai, 2d pers. plur. p6faa&e.
BOfL, see ^oa'oo, /Jocrxw.
BPAXJl, crash, rattle, 2 A
BPOfL, see
fiovy/wiiai, (BPTXfL), roar,
yaopcu, vjadfirjv, Perf. ffsfiQV-
%a synonymous with the
Present. (96. 10.)
n
(FAMfL), marry, F.
, A. eyrjfiat (later fy-
, Perf. ^f^a^^xa, Perf.
Pass, ytynpripai, A. Pass.
, Part. fern, also
yct(j.ei(ja, F. Mid. ya^saao-
pat (in Homer). (96. 10'
95. N. 2 : 102. N. 5.)
, see nrNJl.
ysywvco and ysywvsw (jT/lIV/l),
ca// aloud, 2 Perf, ysywva
synonymous with the Pres.
yslvouctt, (FJENJl), beget, bring
forth, am born, A. Mid.
tyBivapip begat, brought
forth. ( 96. 18.)
ysvio, see yLyvo^ai, *EAfL.
FJENJ2, see ylyroftcu.
(rilOSL), rejoice, tjow,
, 2 Perf. ysyrj&a synony-
mous with the Present.
( 96. 10.)
and yrigawj grow old,
, ff, x, aao^ica. From
, 2 A. tyJQuv, yrj~
, yrjQoig. ( 117. 12.)
(FENJl, TASl\ pro-
duce, .cause to exist, Perf.
Mid. ytytrqptn, Pass, iytvn*
dj\v, F. Mid. ysvyaopai, 2
Perf. ytyova (poetic also
yeyua), 2 A. Mid. tygvoprjv.
Mid. ylyvopcu or ylvouni,
produce myself, make myself,
become. ( 96. 1, 5, 10,
19: 26. 1.)
The 2 Perf. /*/ is in-
flected, as far as it goes,
like jftjffii* ( 91. N. 7.)
NOTE. For 2 A. Mid. 3d pers.
sing, tygygra, we find 'iy&vro or }>>-
ra. ( 92. N. 4.)
yiyvwaxw(rNOJl)> later ywwaxw,
know, A. eyvtoan (chiefly in
composition), Perf. syrtaxn,
Perf. Pass, tyvmainxi,, A. Pass.
tyyfaa&vjv, F. Mid.
From TNSIMT, 2 A. s/
118.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
141
yrti) yvolrjv, yvw&i, yvwvoH,
yvovg. ( 96. 1, 8: 76.
N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 109.
N. 1 : 117. 12.)
yoaw (FOfL), bewail, regular.
Imperf. also tyoov. From
rOHMT, Infin. Epic yoy pe-
rm. (96.10: 117. N. 17.)
TfLNfL, see ysycorw.
/I.
deuvvw or dalca, give to eat,
entertain, F. daiaw, A. i'dou-
aot, A.Pass. ldalad"i]v, A. Mid.
feast, Opt. 3d pers. sing.
dalvvTo. ( 96. 9: 109.
N. 1: 117. N. 7.)
(JAJL), divide, Perf. Pass.
u, 3d pers. plur. ds-
(in Homer), F.Mid.
i, A. Mid. idaadfiyv.
(96. 18: 107. N. 1: 95.
Y. 1.)
(JAJl), burn, 2 Perf. 5i'-
drja, 2 A.Mid. idao^iriv. Mid.
dalopat, am on Jire, burn.
(96. 18.)
xxi'w (JAKJI), bite, Perf. fo-
dr)%M, Perf. Pass, dedyyucti,,
A.Pass. tbrix&riv, F.Mid. Sri-
|oa/. 2 A. f'daxov. (^S 96. 5.
18.)
3f//'w (j/lMfl), subdue, tame,
df.ir]xct, dsd^^oti, A. Pass.
IdfArj&rjv, 2 A. Pass. ^8a^.r]v.
(96. 10, 17:95. N. 1.)
fiat, = preceding. ( 96. 5.)
i'w (dAPOft), sleep, Perf.
dtduy&rjXM, A.Pass. t&uo&rjv,
F.Mid. duQ&iiaojjtti, 2 A.
tdag&ov or Hdgnd-ov. ( 96.
7,10: 26. 2: 11.)
, divide, share, A.Mid.
. ( 104. N. 1.)
, see fla/w.
y cause to learn, teach,
Perf. deddyxa have learned,
Perf. Pass, dsdarj^ioci, F.Mid.
dcHgcropflu, 2 A. tdaov, 2 Perf.
dedaa have learned, 2 A.
Pass. <5V I learned. From
AEdAfL, Pass, dtduopat.
(96. 10, 11.)
or
del (dew), it behooves, one must,
Impersonal, F. ^sijacf* A.
(dlto),
frighten, scare, A.Mid. 3ft-
Wce^v. (96. 11, 8, 3:
76. N. 4.)
deldto, see AETfL.
df-lxvvpt (4ETKJI), show, F.
de/lco, A. i'5f^, Perf. Pass.
dddeiypou, A.Pass. tdsfy&riv.
( 96. 9.)
The Ionic has fc'w, |'3e|a,
JETJI or 5tw or dsld(o,fear, A.
I'flsiaa (in Homer tddeiaa),
Perf. dtdoixa am afraid,
F.Mid. deiaogiai, 2 Perf. ^ fi '-
5 aw afraid. ( 96. 18,
N 14:98. N. 3:79. N. 3.)
NOTE. Forms without the con-
necting vowel, 2 Perf. Itfttptv, $i/-
J/TI, Imperat. Itft&t, 2 Pluperf.
i2V- (5 91- N, 6 : 76. N. 4 :
88. N. 1.)
dspw, build, A. i'ds^uw, Perf.
dep7]xa, A. Mid.
( 96. 17.)
i, see 5f r w, want.
t, see, 2 A,
2 Perf. &?3o ? xa, A. Pass.
142
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
lar.
% A. Pass. %xx7?i/.
6. 19, 17: 26.2.)
receive, dsdi/fiat, Ids-
deSofuxi, ^efctjuijf, regu-
(not Attic), 2 A. id
NOTE. Forms without the con-
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. iSey/^v,
Ssx<r, (for tti^^unr, s^trtf,) /n-
^. $/$/ (for 2c^i-^/\ Part.
Scy^sv^ as Present. ( 92. N. 4 :
9. 1 : 7: 11.)
&a) (rarely dldrj^i], fo'wd, ?Jaw,
you, x, tyiat, i\)r\v, 3d F.
8td>'t<jopat. ( 95. N. 2:
96. 1: 116. R.)
'w, aw wanting to, want, F.
&>, A. td&yacc, A. Pass.
F. Mid. dsTjaofiai.
Mid. dtoftai, want, need,
pray, beseech. ( 96. 10.)
For A. 3d pers. sing.
edtyaev, Homer has dijasr.
JHKJl, see ddxvu.
dyw (JAJl), as Future, shall
jind.
(dIJAXJl), teach, F.
j (poetic also didaaxy-
cyw), A. fdldaSa (poetic also
Id id da XTJ a a), Perf. dedldatxa,
Perf. Pass, dedldaypai, A.
Pass. tfidax&W- ( 96 - 10 .
N. 10.)
dldr]jj.i, see (Js'w, bind.
didgdaxco (dPAJl), run away,
Perf. dedQaxa, F.Mid. fyaao-
^uat. From 4P1JMI, 2 A.
edguv, dgw, dgaiyv, dgoi&i,
dqwui, dqd?. ( 96. 1,8:
117. 12.) This verb occurs
only'in composition
didwpi and Mow (4OJl),give,
F. 5 wad), A. |'3o)xa, Perf.
i6)xa, Perf. Pass, dsdopou,
A.Pass. edo&yv, A. Mid. tow-
, , or 5oj, dovyai,
dovg, 2 A. Mid. Idofirjv.
(96. 1 : 117: 104. N. 2:
95. N. 2.)
flt'fw, seeA:, F.Mid. ditfaofiou.
Mid. dl^TjfKXi, seek, retains
the 7i throughout, as Part.
diMpevos. (96. 10: 117.
3.)
JIKJI, cast, fling, 2 A.
diw, see /IE1SL, de
JMAJl, JMEJl, see dctpdca,
dff^a).
doaiat or dsata^ it seems, Im-
personal, A. Mid. donaaa-
TO, Subj. 5otf(/5Ti, Epic.
( 102. N. 5: 86. N. 3.)
dox-dw (JOKJl), seem, think,
F. do$u, A. idofc, Perf. Pass.
dtdoyfiai. The regular forms
<5ox?j(jw, ^cj, ^*, are not
common. ( 96. 10.)
dovnew (AOTIIfL), resound,
sound heavily, A. Idovnrjoa
(also tybovinriau}, 2 Perf. de-
dovna. ( 96. 10.)
NOTE. The A. iybovvvxrot comes
from TAOrriEn, which is formed
after the analogy of KTWX'IU from
Trrm ( 7.)
4PAMJI or JPJEMJ1, Perf. og-
i, Perf. Pass,
(little used), 2 A.
, 2 Perf. 5%o^u (Epic),
F. Mid. dQcxfjiov^ai, = rpf^w,
which see. (96. 10, 19.)
am able, can, Imperf. tdvvd-
Perf. Pass.
A.Pass.
jdwfj&iiv (and {
F.Mid. dwyaopat, A. Mid.
(in Homer)
118.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
143
, Perf.
( 78. N. 1 : 95. N. 2 :
109. N. 1.)
dvco and dvvca, enter, set, cause
to enter, F. dvaco, A.
Perf. dsdvxct, A.Pass. tfvi
F. Mid. dvGOfiou, A. Mid.
sdvad^v (Epic also Idvao-
[irjv), Part, dvaopevog as
Present, setting. From
/JTMI, 2 A. zdvv, dvco, dvrjv,
dv&i, dvvai, dvg. ( 96. 5 :
95. N. 2: 85. N. 2: 117.
12, N. 7.)
or Ea(p&<r], was fastened,
Aor. Pass. 3d pers. sing.,
found only in Homer.
slyw (ETEPJl), wake, rouse,
F. eysQO), A. yyEigct, Perf.
irf. Pass, f'yrjytg-
., A. Pass. TjyeQ&qv, 2 Perf.
i am awakefiA. lyQo- t#
v, eygso (Epic),
. Mid. eyuQo^oiL rise.
(96. 18: 81: 26. 1.)
EldfL (T/IJl), see, F. sidyaa) (rare)
shall know, A. Mid. cladpriv seemed, 2 A. tidov (rarely I'dov)
saw, i'da), I'doifii, Ids and Ids, Idflv, idtov, ^ A. Mid. eldo^v saw,
i'dtofitti, idolfirjv, Idov (as interjection, Idov, behold !), idta&ai,
idopsvpg, 2 Perf. oidot know, eidw, sidelrjv, la^h, eldsrcti, tidwg t
2 Pluperf. ydsiv knew. Pass, ti'dopai, seem, resemble. ( 96.
18, 10, N. 14: 93. N. 2 80. N. 4.)
The 2 Perf. oidot, arid 2 Pluperf. ydeiv, are inflected as
follows :
Perfect 2.
INJ>. S. olda D. fofiw P.
oia&a I'VTOV
olde(v) I'OTOV
SUBJ. S. eldw, sldyg, eldy, D. fidrjrov, P. eldM^sv, sidyis,
P.
NOTE 1. The Attic reduplication
of iyf>wyo(iot. is anomalous.
NOTE 2. Homer has 2 Perf. 3d
pers. plur. \y^ny'o^-SLtn for lypqydm
atff h as if from EFEP0I1.
NOTE 3. Forms without the con-
necting vowel, 2 Perf. Imperat.
2d pers. plur. iygvyogS-t, Infin.
lygyiyogS-eu, with the terminations
of the Passive, trSt, o-S-ou.
on, see so&lw.
,, see the following.
ipou (^JEJJl), seat myself, sit,
Imperf. e6[tr)v, A. Pass, g-
a&yv (later), 2 F.Mid. tdov-
/tiai. (96.4: 114. N. 2.)
This verb is chiefly used in
the compound xi
which see.
or xHAeo, will, F. j
or fiehyod), A. r\&&i]ai
( 96. 10.)
am accustomed, 2 Perf.
(Ionic #) synony-
mous with the Present.
(96.19: 80. N. 3, R.I.)
F.Mid.
OPT. S. fidelyv, fidelyg, sidsfy, D. fldelrjTOV,
eldelrjpev, siduqjs, tldelyaav.
IMP. 8. i'v&i D. i'aiov P. lore
laiwv
144
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
[ 118.
INF.
PART, eldwg, vita, 6g, G. oT
Pluperfect 2.
S. T}Ssiv, jjdr] D.
jjdtig, fjdeia&a,
P. ydtifiw, rjaptv
jjdens, yore
, ydrj, r t dfLV 9/fc/Tigr, ^arr^v rfitaav, y
NOTE 1. Perfect. IND. 2d pers. sing. 7<r$ stands for ft<rS-a. ( 84.
N 6 : 91. N. 6 : 10. 2.) In the dual and plural, the forms JWov, JV^sv,
?Ws, stand for ftrov, Jtym. ftre. ( 91. N. 6 : 10, 1, 3.)
SUBJ. and OPT. &u t cftc/qy, come from EIAEil, whence also the F.
M. ; 91. N. 6.)
IMP. JVS/, iVr, &c. for TJ^i, ft, &c. ( 91. N. 6 : 88. N. 1 : 10. 3.)
v
Pluperfect. For 1st pers. sing, fin, and 3d pers. sing, jfitj or jfittv, see
above ( 85. N. 4.) For 2d pers. sing. ffiturSec, or fin<rSa, see above
( 84. N. 6 : 85. N. 4.) For the syncopated forms ycrfttv, yrrs, yffetv,
see above (Cj 91. N. 6 : 10. 1, 2. 3.)
NOTE 2. The regular forms of the Perfect c7$#, oYbaptv, oftarov, aftar,
oftctfft, belong chiefly to the later Greek
NOTE 3. DIALECTS. Perfect. IND. 1st pers, plur. Epic and Ionic ityv
for
INF. Epic ft^eva/ for
i for tftbeu. ( 89. N. 1.)
Pluperfect. Epic and Ionic /$/v, t??, / or ?-, plur. wt/Se/^sv, s/rs, 3d pers.
JWv. ( 85. N. 4: 91. N. 6 : 10. 2.) Here the prefix * seems to be
the syllabic augment lengthened. ( 8O. N. 2.) For 3d pers. sing. *$j/,
Herodotus (1, 45) has &/$.
fl'xw, seem, resemble, 2 Perf.
t'ofxw, sometimes slxa (Ionic
olxw), synonymous with the
Present, 2 Pluperf. tyW.
(96. N. 14: 80. N/2,3,
For 2 Perf. 3d. pers. plur.
eo/xaat we sometimes find
NOTE. Forms without the con-
necting vowel, 2 Perf. toiyptv,
%'ixrov, for loittet/^tv, ioixarov, 2 Plu-
perf. itxrvv for ItuKttrnv. ( 91.
N. 6: 9. I.)
The epic poets have also y'ixra or
fJ*T for !*/, with the Passive ter-
mination ro ( 84. 2).
or ftAa) or iAfw (EAfi),
roll up, drive to, F. gU^'cj
A. rA7?(j, Infin. also t'A
or 6 r A(jt, Pr#. also !'Aa,
Perf. fl'Aijxoe, Perf. Pass.
ai, IVA^ucet, A.Pass. U?J-
/ ; 2 A. Pass. A??r. /w/?w.
r#. Aa' ? . (' 96.
J8, 10, 6: 104. N. 6: 80.
N. 2.)
NOTE. The form \o\vtro for Plu-
peif. Pass. 3d pers. sing. I'frvro, is
formed as follows : EAH, OAEH,
oX^>?v, loXj^jjv, -, lo'A.wr. ( 96.
13 : 80. N. 2.)
, see METPSl.
118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 145
flfil (EJl, E2SI), am, a), l?^, la#/, rival, wV, Imperf. ^v (some-
times ^u?p), F. taoftui, i(Joi^r t Vy baea&ott, taopevog.
Present.
IND. S. flfil D. lopsv P. taper
eig, si
SUBJ. S. W, fig, ?J, D. toftSV, VjTOV, V\1QV, P. W^J>, ^T, W(Jl(v).
OPT. 8. w]v> si'yg, si'rj, D. siypw, tl'qjov, ^'T^J>, P. elijfiw,
ei'tjTt, efyaotv.
IMP. S. la-d-i D. loroy P. HOTS
INF. eivui, to 6e.
PART. wV, ovoa, 6V, G. ovrog, being.
Imperfect.
Future.
IND. S. eaogjuxi, I'd/j or lact, lasrwt or i'oicu, D
saso&ov, saea&ov, P. eoops&ct, easa&s, taovrai.
OPT. ^. eaoifi^v 9 taoto, saono t
o&rjv, P. eaolps&a, taoia&s, I'OOWTO.
INF. I'afo&txt, to be about to be.
PART, laoptfog, ^ ov, about to be.
NOTE 1. Present IND. The 2d pers. sing. iT belongs to the Middle
voice. Compare ^/Xja^a/, 2d pers. <p/A.ej or q>t\tu contracted ^/Xs7. )
The forms l<rr/, lo-^iv, iffrov, Itrri come from the original E2H. The 3d
pers. plur. tla-i is formed from EH after the analogy of nS-i7<ri from riS-njM,
SUBJ. and OPT, u, i/tiv are formed from Efl after the analogy of r&u,
r&tin9 t from r&nfu*
IMP. iV9-/, 6<rT(W, &c. come from the original E2H. In the 2d pers.
sing, the radical vowel i becomes /.
PART. eSv, ovfftt t ov, stands for luv, tovffct, lov. (See next Note.)
Imperfect. The 1st pers. sing, jf is contracted from tot. (See next Note.)
For the 2d pers. sing. *S, see above ( 84. N. 6.) The 3d pers.
sing, '^v is contracted from jjfty. (See next Note.) The forms foray, vffrtjv,
%0-re, come from the original E2H.
NOTE 2. DIALECTS. Present. IND. 1st pers. sing. Doric Iftpi for it pi..
2d pers. sing, old Iffi for i7?, from the original E2H. ( 84. N. 6.)
3d pers. sing. Doric IVT/, not to be confounded with the 3d pers. plur.
13
146 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ <j, 118.
1st pers. plur. Ionic ip,iv, poetic Ip'tv. 3d pers. plur. Ionic for* (like
<r&&etfft from riB-npi), Doric IVT/ ( 117. N. 17).
SUBJ. uncontracted stu, ty$, ty, iuptv, 'i-nt^ W;(v), Ionic.
OPT. uncontracted 'ioifii, tots, tot, &c. Ionic.
IMPER. 2d pers. sing, 10-0, after the analogy of the Middle. 3d pers.
sing. yjTu for 'irrtu.
INF. Epic tftptveu, sftptv, ipivu.1, tptv, Doric '^y, vpts* ( 89. N. 1. )
Imperfect. 1st pers. sing. Ionic 'iet or , g'ov, trxov. ( 85. N. 5.)
2d pers. sing. Ionic '?, sV*E?, Epic iVS-*. ( 84. N. 6 : 85. N. 5.)
3d pers. sing. Ionic ^s(v), tcrxs, Epic V, #v, Doric vis. ( 80. N. 2.)
3d pers. plur. Ionic and Doric Wv.
NOTE 3. The 3d pers. sing. i<rri takes the ACCENT on the penult, W/,
when it signifies he, she, or it exists. Also when it comes after eJ, y, us t
aXA.' (for XXa), and TOUT (for TayVa) } as oux, ttrn, aXX* ?.
et t ut (HI, EJl, ElfL), go, shall go, Tw, i'oifu or io/?yy, i'&i, ilvat,
Iwv, Imperf. /v, F. Mid. d'aopcu (Epic), A. Mid. (Epic)
no*W (96. 18: 87. N. 2.)
The Present and Imperfect are inflected as follows :
Present.
IND. S. dpi, D. fyev P. I'pev
tig, si 1'iov ITS
SUBJ. >S^. I'w, l/;c, I/,, -D. t'w^sy, I'^TOV, ^roy, jP. I'c
l'woi(v).
OPT. ^S>. Ibf^ut, lot?, I'oi, D. i'oifiev, I'OITOV, loliyy, P. i'
I'OITS, i'oiev.
IMP. S. ISi, si D. ITOV P. ITS
ITW ITOJV i'Twaav or i
INF. livau
PART. twV, lovaa, lov, G. iov
Imperfect.
S. ijsiv D. yu^M, ypsv P. yft
ysig, rjeia&a ysnov, TJTOV TJELTS, ^
ysi, fjsiv yeiTyv, yTr\v yeoav
NOTE 1 . Present. IND. The 2d pers. sing. T, like 7 from tipi, follows
the analogy of the Middle. The 3d pers. plur. teet follows the analogy
of r&i&ffi from riS-vpi.. ($ 117. N. 2. >
IMP. 2d pers. sing. tJ is used only in composition, as 'ifyi for f|/S/ from
%&ft,. Compare 11-7. N. 8.)
INF. liveti comes from the imaginary IEH, IHMI, after the analogy of
T;$gva/ from nS-ico, TI^^I.
Imperfect. The forms s/v, fag, &c. follow the analogy of the Pluperfect
Active.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
147
NOTE 2. DIALECTS. Present. IND. 2d pers. sing. Epic ti<rd- for
&. ( 84. N. 6.;
INF. Epic "pivxt or J'^sv, without the connecting vowel . ( 89. N. 1.)
Imperfect. 1 st pers. sing. Ionic *}/, jj, Epic *j7ov, Jov. The Ionic forms
are often used by the Attics. 3d pers. sing. Ionic #i, Epic It. 3d pers.
dual Epic JVjv. 1st pers. plur. Epic yoptv, 3d pers. plur. Ionic jjiVav,
Epic yffetv, JWv.
96.
. 2.)
see),
illaoL, see d'xw.
EIIIfL (EIISl), say, A.
2 A. siTiov, fi'nw,
tins, sintiv, tinwv.
18: 104. N. 1: 93.
From C PEJI (which
Perf. Bl'Qr^a, Perf. Pass, el'-
A. Pass, cggi?'^? or
3 F. e
From efyw, F. egem
The epic poets have also
2 A. esinov ( 80. N. 2.)
gyvvfjii or el'^o (old egyw,
etgyw), inclose, include, shut
in, F. tigSoi, A. ugSct or
Perf. Pass, tlyypai or
Or egypoti. ( ^6.
18,9: 80. N. 5.)
l^w (EPJTL), F. ^w e^w, =
EinfL, which see. ( 96.
18.)
sfoxco or l(7xw (itxo>), liken,
compare, Imperf. rjiaxov or
( 96. 14.)
see e'#w.
ilavvw (rarely daw), drive,
march, F. &aoo or Ac5, A.
ylaaa, Perf. tl^axa, Perf.
Pass. &4?X/ciK, later ft^la-
A. Pass. ^>L^v, later
96. N. 13 : 95.
N. 1 : 102. N. 2 : 107. N. 1 :
109. N. 1.)
EAETOfL (EATOfL), F. Mid.
ffavQOfjcai, 2 A. fyv&ov com-
monly ril&ov, tl&v>, '&&oi,fu 9
2 Perf.
(rarely
u, which see. ( 96.
18: 26. 1 : 93 N. 2.)
NOTE. Homer has 2 Perf. i/Xif.
1 st pers. plur. e/X^Xot/^jy
' for 8/XwXoy^a^gv. ( 96. N. 14 :
81 : 91. N. 6.)
eknco, cause to hope, give hope,
2 Perf. wfaa as Present, 2
Pluperf. iwlntiv as Imper-
fect. Mid. Elnopau, cause
myself to hope, simply /
hope. ( 80. N. 2, 3.)
'l, F. Uw (rare), 2. A.
v, I'Aw, tkoifii, fta, fiAfil^,
wV, 2 A. Mid. tikouyv
(Alexandrian elldurjv), =.
alysw, which see. ( 80.
N. 1: 85. N. 2.)
NOTE. It may be supposed that
'EAn was originally FEAH, of
which the 2 A. Mid. 3d. pers.
sing., without the connecting vowel,
would be FsXra or FEVTO (like
fieNntrros for jSsAr^roj). The
form FevTtf was finally changed into
yevro, he seized, which is found in
Homer. ( 1. N. 3 : 92. N. 4.)
EAfL, see el'AAw.
ENEFKfL (ENEKfL), A. ^V/-
xce, Perf. eV^Vo^a, Perf. Pass.
ivi]Vy(jiou, A. Pass. yvs%&i]v t
2 A. yvsyxov, = (psQCOf which
see. ( 96. 6 : 104. N. 1 :
98. N. 2 : 81.)
ENEOfL, float, lie on, sit, 2
Perf. ivrivo&a. ($$ 96. 19 :
81.)
ENEKJl, see ENEFKJl.
148
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
118.
svenw or Ivviivn or JENinJi or
ENI2IISI (fcV, EIIJl), F. evi-
(77177 aw or &fyt, 2 A. tvianov,
poetic, = EinSl, which see.
( 96. 14, 16, 10.)
ivlmu or ivlaau (ENIIMl),
chide, 2 A. svdnnov and (as
if from ENIHAnfL}, rivina-
nov. ( 96. 2, N. 1.)
ENI2IMI, see eVsTrw.
ivvinw, see ivinw.
svvvpi (ESI), put on, clothe, F.
law, Perf. Pass. J^at or
lapou, Pluperf. Pass, ii^v or
a7/^v or e&afirjv, A. Pass.
ea&i]v, A. Mid. eeaa^v,
poetic. ( 96. 9 : 95. N. 1 :
107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1 : 80.
N. 2.)
o, see si'Mw.
or tnavglaxofioci (inl,
tVQtw, avglaxopai), enjoy,
F. Mid. cTrau^'ao/ica, 2 A.
inr^Qov, enavgw,
2 A. Mid. enr)V()6fj.r}v,
and inav-
(EIII2TASI, EI1I-
2THMI), understand, Im-
perf. riTiLard^v, A. Pass. r\m-
oiri^v or imaxri&riv, F. Mid.
iniairiaouoii. (^ 117: 80.
N.4.)
, see EIHJl.
w, am occupied with, am
busy, Imperf. unov, F. Mid.
^(//o^wcet, 2 A. tonov, OTIW,
onuv, onajv, 2 A. Mid. 6(7710-
ju?p, (jnwficti, Gnol^Vj vnov,
onea&ou, anofjiwoq. Mid. gjro-
liai, follow. ( 80. N. 1.)
The old poets have 2 A.
Mid. Subj. aj7rot)//ou, /w/*.
eaTiea&at, Part, konojjisvog.
NOTE. It seems that 1*u was
originally SEIin, whence 2 A.
gVecrav, syncopated iV^av. (Compare
v$, ffvg, sus ; Ix-opa,!, sequor : v<ri^,
sujtfr ; UTTO, sub ; e, se ; vfiHrvs*
semis; i&peu or rather 'EAH,
A.?, 5/, salum.)
(poetic tya/nai, inflected
like iarof^wt), /i/ve, am in love
with, A. Pass. ygdaStji', A.
Mid. rjQavtifjii}* (poetic) fdl
in love. (^ 95. N. 1 : 109.
N. 1.)
EPFfL or fgda), see $eto.
eyslnw (EPIIIJl), demolish,
throw down, tyslyw, rJQsiya,
rjQeiijjajMlv, 2 A. ygmov fell
down, 2 Perf. (Q^Qina have
fallen down, Pluperf. Pass.
3d pers. sing. SOSQITITO.
-(96. 18: 81. N.)'
see egopai.
lvco (EPTJJl), quarrel, vie
with, A. Mid. Inf. Igid^oa-
( 96. 7, 10.)
(EPJl), Ionic tigopixi,
Epic also EQSW, ask, inquire,
F. Mid. egrjaopcu, 2 A. Mid.
rjQO^rjv, egtoftai, lgol{J.rjV, FQOV,
sQta&ai, tooptvog. ( 96. 18,
10.)
The Present ^o^ueu is not
Attic.
(EPfL), go forth, go to
perdition, F. f^Tjaw, A. ^Q-
(96. 6, 10.)
NOTE. From the simple Present
comes the Homeric A. 3d pers.
sing. i^<rs, in composition 0.^0^1,
he caused to go forth, he hurried
away. ( 104. N. 6.)
w or eQevyopat(EPTrJl),
eructate, 2 A. rjyvyov. ( 96.
7, 18.)
, (EPTOJl), make red,
F. sov&rjao), A. rjQV&yoa,
Perf. ^^x. ( 96. 7, 10.)
113.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
149
or ^uxctt'w or fyvxavato,
impede, keep, 2 A. (Epic)
SQVXKXOV (as if from EPT-
KAKJl), Inf. fyvxaxisir.
( 96. 7, 10 : 89. N. 2.)
W or flgvcoj draw, fyvaw,
Perf. Pass. sl'QVfiou, A. Mid.
eiQvaa^rjv. ( 95. N. 2.)
From EIPTMT, Pres. 7ra/.
slgvpevoti, Pres. Pass. Jra/".
ei'Qvo&ou or sQva&cti, Imperf.
Pass. 3d pers. sing. d'gvTo or
, all Epic.
, go, come, Imperf. i?@o-
Hr\v. From EAETQSl (which
see), F. Mid. eAevao^a^ 2 A.
rjlv&ov commonly
wV, 2 P. tt
EPJl, see egofMU, I'QQW.
E2OEJI, Perf. Pass. Par*.
sa&rjfisvog or ?i<j&7)[j.8vog, r], ov,
clothed, dressed.
ea&lco, poetic IV^w or !'&, cf,
Perf. Pass, tdydefffiou, 2 A.
Pass, jdeo&rjv, 2 Perf. rdq&x
(Epic). Pres. Pass, tdofini,
as F. Active, shall eat. From
(which see), 2 A.
v. (96. 10, 19, N. 8:
98. N. 2 : 81 : 107. N. 1 :
109. N. 1.)
Homer has Inf. Act. tSfttvxt
(for JM^eva^, and Perf. Pass.
tofafMu. ( 89. N. 1.)
(EllJl), used only in the
Imperat. 2d pers. plur. laTre-
TS (poetic), = EinSl, which
see. ( 96. 14.)
ivadf t see avdavw.
tvdw, sleep, Imperf. ^v5oy, F.
svdjoa. ( 96. 10.)
xw (ETPSl},Jind, F. e^ij-
(jw, Perf. ei/gqxce, Perf. Pass.
svgrjfiui, A. Pass.
2 A. evQov, 2 A. Mid.
and, in writers not Attic,
svgdw ( 96 - 8, 10 : 95.
N. 2: 85. N. 2.)
#w, ^afc, Perf. Pass. ^^f,
F.Mid. fy&jaopai, 2 A. Mid.
rJX&Qprp. Pres. Pass. c^^-
ro^uat (later l^o^at), used
chiefly in the compound
ansz&etvop&t, am hated.
(^96. 10, 7.)
( C EXJ1), have, Imperf. ?7-
^OF, F. I'|w, 2 A. earyor, (j^oj,
a%olr}v, o%iv, a%(&v, 2 A. Mid.
14. N. 5 : 80. N. 1 :
87. N. 2.) From 2XESI,
SXHMl, 2 A. Imperat.
a X s ? . (117. N. 11.)
The forms ff%fo, 'to-grncii, $<r%v-
ftett, lff%i&)v t which commonly are
subjoined to 2^, in strictness be-
long to 7<r^ft/, which see.
NOTE 1 , Homer has a 2 Perf.
Sxcoxct (II. 2, 218), formed as fol-
lows : ?#, OXn ( 96. 19),
u^ct,, &X, u x> OL ) O'X&XK contrary to
the rule ( 14. 3).
NOTE 2. It would seem that the
original form of ^ was 2EXH,
whence 2 A. t<ri%o* 9 syncopated
fo%ov. (Compare ftr*. )
l'<//w (rarely e^Eco), cook, boil,
F. j//?Jaw, A. I'y/^ora. ( 96.
10.)
jJ2, w, see slju/.
C J1, put on, see
*EJl, send, see l'^
place, cause to sit, set, A. elan, Perf. Mid, ^ue siY, Pluperf.
Mid. ripnv sat, F.Mid. iiaoptu, A. Mid. (lad(iijv. ( 80. N. 1.)
*
150 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 118.
The Perfect and Pluperfect Middle are inflected as follows :
Perfect Middle.
X
IND. S. r t aai D. riu.&ov P. rfjU
wafts
SUBJ. wpai, used only in the compound ytd&rjfKxt,, which
see.
OPT. o'lfirjv, only in the compound nd^rjfiai.
IMP. S. fjoo D. iia&ov P. ya
INF.
PART. ^tvog t y, ov, ( 93. N. 1.)
Pluperfect Middle.
S. wunv D. wue&ov P.
NOTE 1. For the forms fovai, $<rro, see above ( 107. N. 1.)
NOTE 2. For frrat, jvr, the Ionic has **/, 'ittro. ( 91. N. 2.)
',, see J^u/. r^v d 3 iyw, said I; $ d* og,
Z. said he.
live, Jfjaw, l?^a, e'n%ot, ^/uvw, bend down, regular.
( 116. N. 2.) Homer has Perf. 3d pers.
From ZHMIy Imperat. gy&i sing, fyvrjpvxe (in composi-
{ sometimes fij), Imperf. tgqv. tion vnsuvr^vxe) for tfuvxe.
$ 117. N. 8.) ( 81.)
svyvv[ii, (ZTFJl), yoke, F. 0.
^v|w, A. l?v^, Perf. Pass. OANJl, see dvyaxw.
s&vypaiy A. Pass. svx&r)v r ftdouoii and ^e'o/it, admire,
iJ A. Pass, f^vyyv. ( 96. F. Mid. &r)r}ao[iai,, A. Mid.
18, 9.) e&rioci[iriv and
^(ovviJfii> (ZOJ2) f gird) F. worw, (^ 96. 18, 10.)
A. Itwaa, Perf. l?wx, Perf. -fran (OA&SI), bury,
T / T ' J/ Cl T A T '
Pass, e^wa^at, A. Pass. cw- e^y/, T&&OIHIIUI, A A. "ass.
(j^v (^ 96. 9 : 107. N. 1 : ita^v. ( 96. 2 : 14. 3.)
109. N. 1.) OA<l>Jl, am astonished, 2 A.
H. eicupov, 2 Perf. ledyna (con-
^t, see !BJI, place. trary to 14. 3) synonymous
.ijji/, 5y. The Imperfect ^v, ^, with the Present. ( 96. 18.)
is used chiefly in the formulas OAfL y suckle, suck, A. Mid.
us.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
151
Pres. Mid. Inf. OOPJl, see
(contracted from OPE&Jl, see
, 23. N. 1)
#e'Aw, see &iha.
OEPfL, warm, F. Mid.
Mid.
myself.
, 2 A. Pass.
&sgopai; warm
( 103. N. 1.)
(OETJl), run, F. Mid.
-frsvaopou, devaovfiou. ( 96.
N. 12: 114. N. 1.)
'w, jow, see vl&imi.
see #0juca.
( OIFJl), touch, F.Mid.
'(96. 7.) /0 '
(OANSl), die, Perf.
G57W /ead, 2 A.
, 2 Perf. is&vaa, i
TS&VCtVOU,
0PJEXJI, see
&QVTITW (OPT0J2.), crumble,
, H&Qvynx, 2 A. Pass.
(OOPJl), leap, spring,
'2 A. S&OQOV, F. Mid. &OQOV-
VLV.I. ( 96. 17, 18.)
OT0JI, see W(jp(.
sacrifice, -friiaw, e&vaot,
, tTV&qv. ( 95. N.
2 : 14. N. 3.)
I.
locate, vaw. vaa, vxa t
A. Pass, idv&rjv and
. ( 95. 5.)
see
, see
(Epic Te&rrjwg or T#mafe), I'fw and ^Vw (^EjJl), seat, sit,
F. Mid. davovoti. From F. law and tw, A. l'ax, F.Mid.
TEONHKJl, F. TS#>^'!W, igqaopiu. ( 96. 16, 4, 7,
wtfwjloiia*. ( 96. 17, 8, 10: 102. N. 1.)
11: 91. N. 7: 99. N.)
jUi and t r o) ( C J2), send, Imperf. VT^V or lovy, F. TJCTW, A. ^x,
Perf. slxa, Perf. Pass. ^ucu, A. Pass. e-S-rfv or d&yv, 2 A. ^
(not used in the sing, of the Jrac?.), w, efyy, I'^-i, or eg, elv/,
elg, 2 A. Mid. ^uijy or sifjtvjv, w^ai, cl'^eijv, lao or ov, fa^at,
f^yoff. ( 96. 1: 104. N. 2 : 80. N. 1 : 95. N. 2 : 117.
N. 11, 13.)
The Present and Imperfect, and the Second Aorist Active
and Middle are inflected as follows :
Present Active.
IND. S. 'ir^u
fyg
D.
Present Passive and Middle.
S. tsfiat,
D.
l'Tt
tSftS&OV
ILSJOV
P. fft
)> laai(v)
INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 118.
SUBJ. tw, like 'ii&w from SUBJ. lu^ai, like
OPT. lelqv, like Tt&slrjv. OPT. lelfiyv, like
IMP. o. !'$*, tTw, /X le- IMP. $. IWo or
v, jP. I'erf, Z). lea^oy, isa&(*
Isa&waav.
INF. icvai. INF. lisa&ou.
PART, lelg, s7cra, eV. PART, l^pevog, 77, ov.
Imperfect Active. Imperf. Passive and Middle.
S. Hyv f fyg, fy, D. HsfisVf S. isftTjv, teao or I'ov, I'ero,
IETOV, ihrjv, P. fofisv, D. ispt&ov, Isa&ov, lea
isif, tsaav. . P. Itfis&a, ! f g(j#, ISVTO.
Second Aorist Active. Second Aorist Middle.
IND. S. yv S. spy
yg sao
r) ITO, tho
D. spw, fipsv D. eps&ov,
STOV, shov su&ov, sia&ov
sroVf SiTrjv
P. fy^&iw P.
STS, sits ea&s, tio
soar, slaav eVro, elvro
SUBJ. w, inflected like the SUBJ. w^a/, inflected like the
Present. Present.
OPT. ffyv, like the Pres- OPT. tipyv, like the Present,
ent.
IMP. s-d-i, like the Present. IMP. Tao, like the Present.
INF. eh'ui. INF. so&cKt,.
PART, tig, tiaa, sv. PART, tptvog, r], ov.
NOTE 1. The Present Ind. 3d peris, plur. IZn is contracted from /&/.
( 117. N. 2.)
NOTE 2. For Imperf. Act. ftp, there occurs a form ft/, found only in
composition.
NOTE 3. Homer has F. !, A. IW, 'hxu. ( 95. N. 2 : 8O. N. 3.)
NOTE 4. The form lavreu for Perf. Pass. 3d pers. plur. ilvroti, is obtained
as follows: 'EH, 'OH, peu t M/ACU, iarou. ( 96. 19: 80. N. 3.) See
118.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
153
Ixveo^ca and Ixarw and txw,
come, Perf. I^u, F. Mid.
llo^uat, 2 A. Mid.
( 96. 5, 10, 7.)
NOTE. Homer has A. Act. 3d
pers. plur. 3|av for 7gav. ( 85.
N. 2.)
'lAUMl ^lAASl], am propitious,
Imperat. Ua&t- or U^t,
Perf. (as Present) Subj. ttj-
x, O/?. llyxoipi, F. Mid.
A. Mid.
pat, 2 A. I'o^ov. Mid.
pou, restrain myself. ( 96.
1, 10: 95.2.)
IfL, see eipi, go.
K.
KAdSl, see xalvvfioti.
xa&e^oficei (XT, e&pai), sit
down, Imperf. exa&t^ofiyv, A.
Pass, exa&sa&rjv (later), 2 F.
Mid. xad-edoviicti. (14. 1:
82. N. 1.)
Mid.' lldaxo^ (rarely aJ - xa f **" >*' .f^)' 5/ ^>
ucu), propitiate. (96.8: Im P erf ' ^^^.1
95. N. 2.)
na^uat (lITAJl, 'lIITHMl),
F. Mid. Trir;^, 2 A. I'-
v, 2 A. Mid. ima^v, =.
i, which see. (96.1.)
Icjxw, see ei'axa).
'iairiiii (2TAfL), place, cause to
Stand, F. aTTfaw, A. earrjaa,
Perf. lar^xa stand, later
a/rx ^we placed, Pluperf.
standing, Perf. Pass. !em*-
^f , A. Pass. t<jT<x&riv, 2 Perf.
OT(xoc stand, WTO), eaT&fyv,
earafri, eardvai,, eaTwg, 2 A.
^t, 0T7j'cu, (TTOfV. Mid. l'0ra-
^wafc, cause myself to stand,
stand, (96. I: 117: 77.
N. 2: 91. N. 7: 95. N. 2.)
NOTE. The augment of the
Perfect and Pluperfect, in this verb,
takes the rough breathing.
which see. ( 96. 7, 10.)
iaxvsouou, = l'v%ouou. ( 96. 5,
10.)
(l^w), take hold of, hold,
restrain, F. o^aco, Perf.
!o#7?x, Perf. Pass.
A. eaye&yv, F. Mid.
dov or exd&tvdov, F. xce
W ( 14. 1 : 82. N. 2.)
&rjfAcei (XT, ?;p)a), 52^ down,
Subj. xd&wfiai, Opt. %a&ol-
fiyv, Imperat. xd&rjao (later
xd&ov), Inf. xadri a &ou, Part.
, Pluperf. Mid. xa-
riv or ena^fujv sat down.
14. I : 82. N. 3 )
and xa&idvw (xwrce,
, Imperf.
F. xa&law or
A. fxoe^taa, Perf. xx
F. Mid. xa&i&aoucu. ( 14.
1 : 82. N. 1.)
surpass, excel, Im-
perf. exouvvprjv, Perf. Pass.
(from KAJJl), xexaapou or
*exadiiat. ( 107. N. 5.)
x/w or xw, 6wrw, A. (Epic)
cxTfa or Ixea or I'xcftx, 2 A.
Pass, fxa^y. From KATSl,
F. xaww, A. excxvacx, Perf.
Pass, xexavpai, A. Pass, c-
x^v. (96. 18: 104.
N. I.)
(KAAfL), call, F. xa/UW
or xAw, A. cWyUcra, Perf.
xexhrjxa, Perf. Pass, x? xA^^wat,
. xexhypyv, Inf. xsxlrj-
154 INFLECTION OF WORDS.
:, Part, xsx^^svog, A. the augment of the Aor.
Pass, cxly&riv. ( 96. 10, Ind.), A. xaxsaSa, Part. x-
17: 95. N. 1 : 91. 5 : 102. -isdfrg with the augment of
N. 2.) the Indicative, 2 Perf xar-
fj.ro) \KAMfL), labor, am aya, am broken to pieces, 2
weary, Perf. xsxprjxa, 2 A. A. Pass, xtxieayijv.
I'xapov, F. Mid. xa^ovpcti. NOTE. For Aor. Opt. 2d pers.
(96. 5, 17.) sing. *aT|^, Hesiod (Op. et D.
idyvvfit (XT, ayvv^i), break 692 ) has **i"l ( see ^y^O-
down, break to pieces, F. xavd&ig, see the preceding.
xiccw (also xaTa|w, with KATJl, see x/w.
fc'w, x/w, KEIMl), lie down, recline, xEwpai
xtlao, xelff&at, xi[itvog, Imperf. extlfi^v f F. Mid.
"96. 18: 117.)
The Present and Imperfect are inflected as follows :
Present.
IND. S. xelfiat D. xslps&ov P. xslfis&a
xelaat, xsia&ov x&a&e
xtlrai, xsla&ov xuvrott
SUBJ. x f w^t, like
OPT. xtol^v, like
IMP. S. xtlao D. xito&ov P. xslo&s
INF. xsla&ai.
PART. x//uevo?, 77, ov.
Imperfect.
D. X/^e#oj> P.
txsia&ov
NOTE. The Present x/ or i/ has the signification of the Future,
/ie f/ozt'?i / also, desire to lie down.
., command, F. Mid. x- xf'x^axo', Perf. Pass.
, A. Mid. IxFltjadnyv, or xsxsQctGpai, A. Pass. -
2 A Mid. Xx>lo^t^^ for ^x- ygd&riv or exsQMO&iyv. (^96.
xeloarjv. ( 96 10 : 78. 9 : 26. 1 : 107. N. 1 : 109.
N. 2 : 26. 1.) N. 1.)
uT r w, prick, regular. From For Aor. Act. Inf. xtfifai,
KENTJl, A. Inf. xevoai. Homer has *&<ratt.
( 96. 10: 12. N. 4.) xs^l (KEP/lfL), gain, F.
odwvfu (poetic x^a>), mix, xeydavw (in writers not Attic
F. xf(jw, A. exf'^atftt, Perf. xegdyaw), A. exigdava (not
118.]
Attic
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
155
), Perf.
dwx or
7, 10.)
xw, see
x/J<5w (KA/lfL}, trouble, vex,
worry, F. Mid. xxa<5?j<ro^ca,
A. Mid. Impcrat. 2d. pers.
sing, xjjfotfcu, 2 Perf.
w anxious. Mid.
95. N. 1 : 107.
( 96. N. 1 : 109. N. I : 117.)
x/luw, hear, Imperf. whvov sy-
nonymous with the Aorist.
From KATMf, 2 &.Imperat.
xhv&i and xxAi>cH, 2 A. Mid.
Part, xhvpevog as adjective,
celebrated, famous. ( 78.
N. 2: 117. N. 10.)
anxious about, care for. KMAfL, see
(96. 18, 10, 11:95.N.2.)
dnjiM, Mid. Ki&v#pvn> ^^ oxl-
xtxbjaxw (KAAfL), = xaJlea).
($00. 17,1,8.)
WIAI. ( 96. 16, 6.)
xt/ui'M (K/XJL), reach, finely F.
Mid. xixfaopou, A. Mid. e'xt-
Xmjapnpi 2 A. ext^ov. From
KIX1IMI, 2 A. ex^i^r, $%'.
Xf^w (Epic xt^e/w), Op^. ja-
X^Vj Inf. xi%rjvou, Part. y.i
#& 2 A. Mid. Pa?-/, x/^f
afro?. (96.7, 10. 117.
N. 17, 15.)
*WQW L (XQUM)) fond, the rest
from^otft?, which see. ( 96.
xrw, g"0, Imperf. ex/ov.
xiicfw (KAATSl\ clang, F.
xAtf'Sw, A. IxAa/|a, 2 A. I-
y, 2 Perf. xe'xA?^ or xs f -
. From xsxybj/w, Pres.
6x^>;y. f 96. 4,
6, 18, 11.)
a/w or xAw, ?^fp, F. x>Lat?f(Ta}
or xA?/(jw. From K^iATJl,
A. exAavaa, F. Mid. x/Lwuao^
wcu, yMwaovuou. ( 96. 10 :
114. N. 1.)
a'w, break, xAacrw, I'xAftaa, xs-
From KAHMI, 2 A. Par/?.
(KOPSl), satiate, F.
A. txoQsaa, Perf.
, Perf. Pass, xsxo^s-
(Ionic *#ogiwf*e), A.
Pass, txoysa&rjv. ( 96.
10, 9 : 95. N. 2 : 107. N. 1 :
109. N. 1.)
fL), cry, F. X|M,
F. Mid. xQnSopou, 2 Perf.
xx^/ synonymous with
the Present. From /GE-
KPAFJi), F. Mid. xsx^w-
o;ueu, A. (later) fxexoci|a.
(90-4,11.)
NOTE. Forms without the con-
necting vowel, 2 Perf. 1st pers.
plur. xt*ay,av, Imperat. 2d pers.
sing, xex^a^/, 2 Pluperf. 1st. pers.
plur. i*ix&<yftt9. ( 91. N. 6.)
suspend myself, hang, Subj.
y>;#. xe6ptf4ifi> or
F. Mid.
(117.)
(later x^f^aw), 5?/s-
??^, F. xoF/i'(jw or
, A. cx^^^aw, A. Pass.
(969:95.
N.I: 102. N. 2: 109. N.I.)
vttpat, Imperf.
fitgilfiv&pip' :=: preceding.
( 96.6: 117.)
, possess, Perf. Mid. xs-
xzT/^uat and ix
156
XT</ZC, Opt.
xexTMnqv (Ionic
Iiifin. xXT>J(j#ae, Part. x-
XTIUISVOJ, F. Mid. XTTjcJO^Uttt,
A. Mid. exjyaduvv, ($$ 76.
N. 3:91.N. 3.)
Tf/vo) and xilvrvui (KTENJl,
KTAfL), kill, F. XTSVW, A.
i'xTf}'j Perf. ixTotxa and -
xroV?;xa, Perf Pass. wrapou,
A. Pass, sx-tu&rjv (sometimes
MTtXV&rjv), 2 A. tXTdVOV, 2
Perf. I'xTOJ/a. From KTHMI,
2 A. fXTJ>, XTW, XtaltJVf XT-
, 2 A. Mid. exTeejuip,
jdpsvo?. ( 96.
5, 19, 18, 16, 9, 13: 117.
N. 10.)
Homer has also F. xravia, x<r-
l4yMM*
K77/Z, KTIMI, build, 2 A.
Mid. P?^. xrlpevog, <r\, ov,
built. ($ 117. N. 14.)
XTVTito) (KTTIIfL), make noise,
thunder, T^GM, rjaoc, ^xa, v)fiai 9
n&wv, 2 A. SXTVTIOV. (^ 96.
10.)
xwc'o) (KTJl), kiss, F. xv'(jw,
A. ixvcrof. The compound
nQooxvvew, prostrate myself,
adore, is generally regular,
as F. nQoaxvvyau. ( 96.
5, 10: 95. N.I.)
XMO or xvw or xv'/axw, co?z-
e pregnant, F.
rjcfQ), A. exvrjact, A. Mid.
exv^aw^^r, poetic exvadtiijv.
( 96. 10, 8.)
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
and
[118.
y see Jiap/3av<.
avw (AAXJl), receive by
lot, obtain, F. Mid. lytofiai
(Ionic Aa'lo/utti), 2 A. I'A
Perf. et'A^a and
96. 7, 18, 19, 6: 76.
!)
AAQfL, see hav&dvw.
AAKSl, see A<JXW.
, , Vw (AABJl), receive, take,
Perf. sftr](pa, Perf. Pass, el-
^i]fjifiai 9 A. Pass. eJirjcp&iiv, F.
Mid. htyofioti, 2 A. ilocpov,
2 A. Mid. tiapopiiv. ( 96.
7, 18: 76. N. I.)
From AAMBH, the Ionic has
Perf. Pass. \iXa.(Afjt,on, A. Pass.
eAa^pS-jjv, F. Mid. Xaff^/ofAat. It
has also Perf. AfXa/3jx. ( 96.
6, 10: 107. N. 4.)
hid, escape notice, Perf. Pass.
pat, (in Homer Af'Aa-
i, F. Mid. lyoofjiai, 2 A.
', 2 Perf. JU'tytfa, 2 A.
Mid. &ad-3{ti)v. Mid. j
vo^ai (sometimes fo]6
forget. ( 96. 7, 18.)'
jterxw (AAKfL), talk, gabble,
A. f'Aa'xi^a, F. Mid. Ar^x^o-
/uat, '2 A. ftaxoF, 2 Perf. Ae-
Aax (Ionic AfA?;x), 2 A. Mid.
(Epic) A*Axo>,>'. ( 96.
14, 10: 78. N. 2.)
VM, tkctvov or jjX(xvov, Ai/aw,
i'Aofuaa, used only in the
compound 7roAua;, which
see. ( 78. N. 1.)
AAXfL, see A/^rw.
Aty&>, collect, &>, |, Perf. stAo-
^, Perf. Pass, ti'faypai, 2 A.
, Pass. e'Aey^y. ( 76. N. 1 :
98. N. 2.) Jftya, say, is
regular. .
NOTE. Forms without the con-
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. iXiy^v,
3d pers. sing. Xixro, for iXty^unfj
iXt-ytro. (^ 92. N. 4 : 7.)
AEXJl, came to lie down, w, |,
A. Mid. s^otfjtijv lay down,
118.]
ANOMALOUS YERKS.
157
Impcrat. (in Homer)
Inf. Af'<j#/, 2 A. Mid.
lUy^v lay down, 3d pers.
sing. Afxro, Impcrat. Ae'o.
(88. N. 3: 92. N. 4 : 9.
1: 7.)
AHBfL, see jLafAJSavto.
or AT^W, cflwse /0 /or-
#cf, F. lijaw, 2 A. (Epic)
v, 2 A. Mid. (Epic)
v. ( 96. 7: 78.
N. 2.) See also lavSavw.
AIJXE'CM, Ionic, = Aaaxw, which
see.
AHXfL, see layxuvto.
(old Aeiw, Aot'w), wash,
bathe, AOVCJW, eAouacr, ta'Aouxa,
l&ovpui. Mid. Lovo^ctiy com-
monly Aoi^a*, ?0s/t myself,
bat lie. (90. 18, 10.)
The Present and Imper-
fect commonly drop the con-
necting vowels o and t.
E. g. Pres. lovptv for Aovo-
jUj ; , Aourat for Aoi)fif, Aovr-
jt for kovovTcti, kova&ai for
i, Imperf. I'Aofy for
y, tAouro for fkovsTo.
Avw, /oosc, 50/yc, Af-aw, i'kvan,
Xe'Avxa, tetiuuai, tkv&riv. (95.
N. 2.)
From ATMI, 2 A. Mid. (Epic)
3d pers. sing. Ay<ro as Passive.
For the Perf. Pass. Opt. 3d pers.
sing. yUXyro, see above (^ 91. N.
4.)
M.
MAOfL, see ^av&dvo).
pai^idw) see |Uw.
fiulofiui (//w), y*cc/, touch,
handle, F. Mid. [inaopou, A.
Mid. f >atx>?i'. (96. 18:
95. N. I.)
MAKJl, see ^r\yiao^.at.
(MAO ft), learn, un-
14
2 A.
(also
>), 2
.)
(Epic
114.
der stand, Perf
F. Mid. na
i'fjta&ov, 2 F. Doric
contracted from
(96. 7, 10: 114. N. 2:
23. N. 1.)
XQvaftoti, Jight, Opt. fiaQval-
fit]v or naQvolfiriv, Imperf.
tyaQVafinjv, inflected like
UJTO^WOU.
TTTW (MAPHJl), take hold
of, seize, F. paQyw, A.
fym^a, 2 A. I'fiotQTiov
ffAUTiov, without the
Perf. fiifia^a. ( 96.
(I nic jiVZtGfut
combat, Perf. Mid.
F. Mid. ^uHjo,M
A. Mid.
2 F. Mid.
(96.10: 95. N. 2:
N. 2.)
and ^ai^aw, desire, am
eager, strive, feel a strong
impulse, 2 Perf. /UE/UMU sy-
nonymous with the Present.
Mid. px'o^at, desire, seek,
Impcrat. JJWEO, Inf. //a~(j3r.a.
(96. N. 2: 116. N. 7.)
The 2 Perf. ^s^aa is inflected,
as far as it goes, like (Zifiotot. ( 91.
N. 7.)
&vaxw ( t L>uco), ?.'?/7A:c drunk,
intoxicate, F. ^tfiujw, A.
ffjil&vaa, A. Pass, fpt&va&riv.
Mid. ii&voxo{iai, am intoxi-
cated. (96. 8: 95. N.I.)
, am intoxicated, equiva-
lent to the Middle of the
preceding.
MEIPJl(MEPJl), divide, share,
Perf. Pass. 3d pers. sing.
it is fated, Part.
fated, destined,
15S
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
[ 118.
Pluperf. Pass, 3d pers. sing.
elfiofQTo it was fated, 2 A.
eppogov I obtained, 2 Perf.
efjLfioga have obtained. Mid.
peloopai,, receive a share,
obtain. ( 96. 18, 19 : 76.
N. 1 : 79. N. 3.)
The augment a of the Perf.
and Pluperf. Pass, takes the rough
breathing.
The forms fAtfiogqr
are sometimes used for
. ( 96. 13.)
u, am about to be or do any
thing, shall, F. [isttyow, A.
c>a^a. (96. 10.)
eho, am a concern to, F. pt-
>t?j(jw, A. sjuelrjaot, 2 Perf.
(Epic) PBM)M. ( 96. 10,
18.)
The epic poets have Perf. Pass.
3d pers. sing. /u,if*fi*.sTai for ptftl-
Xsra/. ( 26. N,)
and plprw, remain, F.
w, A. estiva, Perf. usue-
a. ( 96. 1, 10:26. 1.)
MENJl (not to be confounded
with the preceding), intend,
purpose, 2 Perf. pspovct sy-
nonymous with the Present.
( 96. 19.)
yxdopou (MAKSl), bleat, 2 A.
BittrxQ?; 2 Perf. fisprixa.
From ptfJL^xv, Imperf. f^ic-
v. (96. 18, 10, 11.)
, stain, regular. Homer
(11.4, 146) has A. Pass. 3d
pers. plur. fiiavd-^v for plav-
&fv for tuiuv&riaav. ( 92.
N. 1.)
lyvvfit and (tlayto (MITJl),
mix, F. ^u/lu), A. e/ue|a, Perf.
Pass, fiifiiyfioti, A. Pass.
efilxfryv, 2 A. Pass, tuiyriv.
( 96. 9, 14.)
NOTE. Form without the con-
necting vowel 2 A. Mid. 3d pers.
sing. ifUM>r or fiixro for I^a/ysra.
( 91. N. 4: 7.)
pipvifajxto (MNAJ2), cause to
remember, remind, F.
A. efivyaa, Perf. Mid. pefi
pen, remember, Subj.
(sai,, Opt.
prjv or fiepvolprjv (Ionic
fitpvscpjLirjv), Imp. nepvyao,
Inf. (isfivqu&ait Part,
[livog, A. Pass.
3 F. ptpvyaofLict*, F. Mid.
(afyaofiai,, A. Mid. tpvrjadprjv.
Mid. pipitfaxouai, remind
myself, remember. ( 96.
1,8: 91. N.3: 109. N. 1.)
plftvia, see
MNAJl, see
MOAfL, see
fjwxvopcu (MTKJl), bellow, ya
[icti, yaoiftrjv, 2 A. sftvxov,
2 Perf. ^i^vxa. (96. 10.)
IV.
ya/w (NAJl), dwell, A. IVaaa
caused to dwell, p laced, Perf.
Pass. vBvaafjLui, A. Pass. V-
a&yv, F. Mid. ra(jo(jLai, A.
Mid. iraadiiijv. ( 96. 18:
95. N. 1 : 107. N. J : 109.
N. I.)
j'aWw, pe& closely, stuff, F.
y|w, A. IV|, Perf. Pass.
vevaapai,. ( 96. N. 4.)
IV14J2, see j>/w.
ye/uo), distribute, F. ra^w or
?faw, A. tvsiptx, Perf. i/cpjf-
t, Perf. Pass. yerefiTjfiat,
A. Pass. lv*nri&ifi or fvsfj.8-
<V- (96.10: 95. N. 2.)
w (NJETJl), swim, A. svsvoa,
Perf. j'gVfuxw, F. Mid. vvvao-
118.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
159
96. N.
12: 114. N. 1.)
j'/fw or vlmw (NIJBJL), wash,
vlyta, tviifta, vevifjfiai,
( 96. 2.)
vow (.ZVOJ2), think,
frorjau, vEvoyxa, vev
evo^v. ( 96. 10.)
The Ionic has veairu, 'ivu
all from the simple Present.
a'Qw, feel sleepy,
and vvavcitjto,
, &c.
ivvoiaw. -(96. N. 6.)
and
gdw (ZTPfL),shave,
regular. Mid. frgsopctt, o-
fioti, commonly ^vgofiai,, shave
myself , shave.
O.
ofw (OJJl), emit an odor, have
the smell of, smell, F. o^aco
(Ionic offiW)), A. w^cra, 2
Perf. odwda synonymous with
the Present. ( 96. 4, 10 :
95. N. 2.)
ol'yw or ofyvvfju, open, Imperf.
Iw/or, F. ot|a), A. Io)^a, Perf.
i'utXat, Perf. Pass, emyfiau, A.
Pass, cajzd-'ijv, 2 Perf. fw/a
stand open. ( 96. 9: 80.
N. 3.) See also arolyto.
The epic poets change the diph-
thong w into <w/', as Stifyt. for w^a.
ol(5, see E/JfL.
oldalvM or oldarw or oidew,
swell, F. oidrjoo), A. w<^tf,
Perf. w^xw.
ai, depart, am gone, Perf.
a (in Homer also w^-
Perf. Pass. w/i?/i*, F.
Mid. olMaopai. (96. 10.)
ol'w or o/'w (both Epic), think,
suppose, A. Pass, ta
(Epic wia&ijv), F. Mid.
y A. Mid. oioajATjv
(Epic). Mid. oib^uwi or ot^cu
(Epic oi'optu), synonymous
with the Active, Imperf.
WOUTJV or w^u^r. ( ^- 10 1
i09. N. I.')
, F. ofow, A. wjoe (rare),
Imper. otae, F. Pass, ola^-
u, = cpKQto, which see.
88. N. 3 : 109. N. 1.)
m and oha&dvw
2O Jl), slip, slide, F.o
A. coUa&rjau, Perf. wkla
2 A. cw';U(j#o. ( 96. 7, 10.)
AiJ^f (OJJl\ destroy, cause
to perish, F. oAgVw or oAw,
A. (w'taaa, Perf. o/wAsxa, 2
Perf. 6'AcwAa 7ve perished,
F. Mid. oAoupu, 2 A. Mid.
wkoprjv. Mid. ollv^ai, perish.
(96. 6, 10: 81.)
NOTE. The poetic 2 A. Mid.
Part. oXofttvos or ov^ofttvos has the
force of an adjective, destructive,
fatal, pernicious*
vvpi (OMJ2), swear, A. cu'^o-
aa, Perf. O^CO'/AOXW, Perf. Pass.
o^Lw^LOG^.ai and o^a?//0|Ut, A.
Pass, topo&viv, F. Mid. o/jov-
^uai. ( 96. 9, 10 : 95. N.
1 : 107. N. 1 : 81.)
ogyrv^ (OMOPrSL), wipe
off, F. Ojuo^lw, A. w//o()|a,
A. Mid. wfio$dpr)v. 96.
-
Qrfctyt* ( ONAfL, ONHMl), bene-
Jit, F. oyr/aw, A. ojV^cr, 2 A.
Mid. wvafiyv and tov^fi^v.
Mid. QvlvayiVLi, derive, benefit,
enjoy. ($ 96. N. 2: 117.
N. 15.)
ONJIMI (ONOJl, OIVJZ),Pass.
oVo^wat (inflected like dldofiai,
from <5/<5wp), blame, Jind
160
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
118.
fault withy insult, A. Pass.
wioa&rjv, F. Mid. oroao^icti,
A. Mid. torocra^v and oW-
W. (96. 10: 95. N. 1:
109. N. 1 : 117.)
The form tfatrti (II. 24, 241)
stands for Pres. Pass. 2d pers.
plur. SntrSt from ONH.
O/7J2, Perf.Pass. w^ou, A. Pass.
OMjpthjr, F. Mid. oyofiou, A.
Mid. oi/jtxfirjv (little used),
2 Perf. oTrwTra (poetic), =
opaw, which see. ( 81.)
o'w, see, Imperf. eo^ao^ (Ionic
Wcoj>), Perf. Iw'paxa, Perf.
Pass. ero'gHx/icM. From i'/JJl
(which see), 2 A. tldov, Ida,
1'dotfj.i,, Ids, id sir, t$wV, 2 A.
Mid. fidofirp, I'd to pa i, idolpyv,
Idov, idku&(ti,id6{ifro<s* From
OnfL( which see), Perf. Pass .
wppou, A. Pass. wqp^ifx, F.
Mid. fyopai. ( SO. N. 3.)
$QVvpi (OPJl), rouse, excite, F.
o^tfo), A. a>0a#, Perf. Mid.
oQtogtfiai, 2 Perf. OQWQOI have
risen, 2 A. Mid. MQO^V.
Mid. oQWfAcu, also o^o^uea,
oQsofint,, rouse myself, arise.
h 96. 9, 10: 103. N. 1 :
104. N.-6: 81.)
NOTE. Forms without the con*
necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 3d pers.
sing, agro, Imperat. 2d pers. sing.
a^ and %<rw, /n/. o'^S-a/, Par^.
o^s#f. ( 92. N. 4: 11.)
ro^icH (02<1>PSI), smdl,
F. Mid. CHJcpyrjaoptxi, A. Mid.
Kt(i(fQi t (jd^iriv (later), 2 A.
Mid. &Kjqpo<7jU??v rarely wacpgci-
/ii?r. ( 96. 7, 10: 85.
a N. 2.)
i'^'o), mingo, Imperf. tovytov,
F. Mid. ovorjvouui. ( 80.
N. 2.)
oviaar, wound, regular. From
OTTHMI, 2 A. ot5i^, ///.
(Epic) omd[itvai or ovidpsr t
2 A. Mid. Pr#. oind^vo<;
as Passive, wounded. ( 117.
N. 10, 17.)
oqpH'AG) (OftEASl), owe, must,
ought, F. oqpsi^aw, A. ca^c/-
^a. ( 96. 18, 10.)
The 2 A. uQ&ov and o$i*.ov, ?,
s, always expresses a wis/j, Mai /
wowW to God! ( 217. N. 3, 4.)
ocphaxdva (OftslJl), incur, for-
feit, F. og)X?jaw, Perf. wqpiij-
x, 2 A. u^oy. ( 96. 8, 7,
10.)
IIAOJI, see
nalw, play, jest, enaiaa, TIB-
nouapai, enala&rjv, F. Mid.
nal^ofjiait na^ov^ai. In later
writers, fnatSa, ninaiy^ui 9
inal X driv. ( 96. N. 6:
114. N. 1.)
7Hx/o>, strike, F. nalaw and
7iwt?Jcjra>, A. iTiaiatx, Perf. TTS-
Tratxa, Perf. Pass. ninaiGyiui,
A. Pass, enala&yv. ( 96.
10: 107. N. 1: 109. N. 1.)
Trao^w (HAOJl, IIENOJl), suf-
fer, A. ETiijcra (not common),
F. Mid. nslaofjtou (rarely TTT?'-
(jo^uat), 2 A. sTiatfor, 2 Perf.
ninov&a (rarely nin^a}.
(^ 96. 6, 18, 19, N. 10:
12. 5.)
NOTE. The form r65ro<r$e iOd.
23, 53 , for trtWy^arc, is ob-
tained as follows : HA0P-, IIO-
n, 5rra^a, vifo-ffS-t (for vivoS-
<r3-' with the Passive termination
r&s. ( 96. 19: 10. 2.)
ntnlopai (iJAfL), eat, Perf.
Pass. irBnaapcu, A. Mid.
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
1C1
inaaapi)v. ( 95. N. 1 :
107. N. 1.)
ASly Perf. Mid. nenafjiou, pos-
sess, acquire, A. Mid. ena-
(niOJl), persuade, nd-
O{iv.i, Inela&yv, 2 A. ST
(poetic), 2 Perf.
trust, 2 A. Mid. sm&oprjv.
Mid. nsl&ofAcu, trust, believe,
obey. ( 96. 18, N. 14.)
NOTE. The form
stands for 2 Pluperf. 1st pers. plur.
tvuroi&iipn. ( 91. N. 6.)
fffAao) and TrsAw'w, cause to
approach, bring near, ap-
proach, come near, nskdau,
en&ctaa, enskda&rjv and 7rA-
#??i>. From nAHMl comes
2 A. Mid. tnl^v. ( 26.
1: 117. N. 15.)
Ke'Ao), revolve, move about, am,
Imperf. 3d. pers. sing. &rAs
for I'jrde. Mid. n^o^iav sy-
nonymous with the Active,
Part. nJiopevog used only in
composition, Imperf. 2d
pers. sing, e'jiteo tTihsv thou
art, 3d pers. sing . I'jzvUro he
is. (26. 1: 23. N. 1.)
IlENOJl, see
rctnoa&s, see
, pedo, F. Mid. nugdyao-
i, 2 A. enagdor, 2 Perf.
a. Mid. negdo^ai, sy-
nonymous with the Active.
( 96. 19, 10.)
8Q&W, Sack, 7lQ(JW, STlSQOOtt
2 A. l'7roa#o. ( 96. 19 :
26. 2.)
NOTE. Homer has 2 A. Mid.
/ft/*, rtfiu.i without the connecting
vowel for #ifilv*h ( 92. N.
4: 10. 2: 11.)
neaaw, later TISTHM, boil, digest,
F. TTsy/w, A. I'TI(/;, Peri.
Pass, nintniitti, A. Pass.
Insy&yv. ( 96. 2.)
nndvvv^Li (IIETASL}, expand,
spread, F. nvtaaw or TTTW,
A. eTisTctaa, Perf. Pass. TTS-
maou, A. Pass. c7iT'a^v.
96. 9 : 95. N. 1 : 102.
. 2: 109. N. 1: 26. 1.)
, fly, F. Mid. nei^oo-
l, 2 A. ETlTOflTjV (for 67TSTO-
o&ai, Ttro^ievog. ( 96. 10 :
26. 1.)
IIETJl, See 7T/7TTO).
IIETOfL, see nvv&dvonou.
nicpvov, see &ENJI.
nriyvvjjii (jlATS^), later jr?J(jaw,
jfa, fasten, F. 7riJ|w, A. I'^la,
Perf. Pass. TiEny/pai, A. Pass.
inrix&riv, 2 Perf. Tienyyot
stand fast, 2 A. Pass. eW-
y^y. ( 96. 18, 9, 3.)
UHOfL, see Trceo^w.
niOESl (niOSl], obey, follow,
trust, m&yow also neni^ow,
InlSriaa. (96. 10, 11.)
niOSl, see 7r/^w and the pre-
ceding. , -
nih^i and mlvaw
Mid. ni).vafAai,
which see. (96. 16, 6.)
nlfinlrjfii and m^nldo) (nAAJl},
Jill, F. TiAifffft), A. IVrA^aa,
Perf. ninl^a, Perf. Pass.
nenlrjafioti, A. Pass.
a&rjv, 2 A. Mid.
Opt. nfalfirjv, Imperat.
oo, Part. Ti^fisvoc. ( 96.
1 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1 :
117. N. 15.)
The letter ^, in the first sylla.
ble, is dropped when, in composition,
IG2
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
another p comes to stand before the
first syllable of this verb ; as t^-
tt*cXtyt4, not ifA-viju.vXyiui. The
same is observed of sr/^sy^^/.
JllfATtQTjf.ll and 7llfJ,7lQ(X(0 (llPASl),
burn, F. TT^aw, A. engrjaa,
Perf. Pass. ningria^ai, A.
Pass. Ing^o^v. (. 96. 1 :
107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1.)
For the omission of ^ in com-
position, see <rip.<r\n[ti.
Ttlvw (niSl), drink, 2 A. I'THO?,
2 F. Mid. niovfiai (later).
Pass, niofiai, as F. Active,
5/ia// e?nra&. From 77OJ2,
Perf. 7i7iwKa, Perf. Pass.
nenofivu, A. Pass, ino&riv.
From niMIy 2 A. Imperat.
2d pers. sing. 7rl#i. ( 96.
5: 114. N. 2: 95. N. 2:
117. N. 14.)
mnlaxw (nifL), ewse drink,
give to drink, F. nlaw, A.
ejncja. ( 96. 1, 8.) .
mngdaxw (TTSQOCO)), sell, Perf.
TienQctxa, Perf. Pass, ninga-
fiat, A. Pass. Ingd&riv, 3 F.
TitTiodaouai. ( 96. 1,8:
26. 1.)
W/TTTO) (nETfL), fall, A. cTisaa
(little used), Perf. nsmwxa,
2 A. fjisaov (Doric tTrexoy),
2 Perf. Part. nETiTewg, ns-
Wg, 2 F. Mid. 7T8-
(&4 96. 1, 19, 17,
15: 114. N. 2.)
mmx'w and nl-ivr^i (llETASl},
rr: ntTcxvrvfii, which see.
(96. 16,6: 117.)
nLTvii^nETf^^nlniw, which
see. ( 96. 16, 5, 10.)
ntcpdaxw or TiicpavoxM
show, make known, communi-
cate. ( 96. 1,8.)
/7JJ2, see TiiVw,
iiot
F.
, see
^w (nAAFJl), cause to wan-
der, F. 7ii'/w, A. l'7rA/|,
A. Pass. tnlayx&W- Mid.
jria^ouaty wander about ,
(96.3,6.)
fiw (nAETJl), sail,
Perf. nsnfovxa, Perf. Pass.
, A. Pass.
. Mid.
( 96. N. 12 :
107. N. 1: 114. N. 1.)
(nAAFJl), rarely TiA^-
, strike, F. TiA^w, A.
a, Perf. Pass. ninlv\-
yiiai, 2 A. ntnkriyov (Epic),
2 Perf. ninlyyu, 2 A. Pass.
(in composition e-
, 2 A. Mid. (Epic)
W. ( 96. 18, 3,
9: 78. N.2 ; )
fi'w), wo'w, &/C. 2 A.
(from nAfLMl) tnlwv, Part.
nlwq, G. TrAwrro^, Ionic, =
TryLs'w, which see. ( 96.
19: 117. N. 14.)
fw (HNETJI, UNTJI), blow,
breathe, A. mvivau, Perf.
nsm'tvxa, Perf. Pass, rcsnvsv-
o^iai, A. Pass. invi\)G&r\v, F.
Mid. nvsvaoftai, nvevaov^ioci.
( 96. N. 12 : 107. N. 1 :
109. N.I : 114. N. 1.)
Poetic forms, Perf. Pass. ?rgiri>y-
^/, am prudent, animated, intelli-
gent, A. Pass. 3d pers. sing, l-rvvv^jj
used in the compound a^-wvyi'S-fl,
from Ktafviuy 2 A. Mid. (from
IINTM!) io^y. ( 96. 6:
117. N. 15.)
or, desire, miss,
and
aa,
v. ( 95. N. 2 :
109. N. 1.)
118.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
163
l, give, 2 A. ZTIOQOV, Perf.
Pass. 3d. pers. sing. ntngw-
tai it has been decreed by
fate, Part. ncTiQWfievog des-
tined. ( 96. 17.)
JIOJI, see nivto.
UPAJl, see nl[A7igr][ti.
I1PIAMAI, buy, 2 A. Mid.
or
ngiaoo or nglw, 7T/
TlQLfffiSVOg. ( 117. N. 9.)
/7POJ2, see IIOPJI.
UTAfL, see iTnapcu, mr)0aw.
7IT7?<J(JW, CrOUch } F. 7ET1?(, A.
7TTr;|a, Perf. IVn^a. From
HTAJl comes 2 Perf. Part.
nsmrjwg. From J1THMI, 2
A. 3d pers. on dual TIT??-
T^y, in composition XT-
TTTT^J" ( 96. 3 : 99. N. :
117, 12.)
11TOJI, see nlnrw.
nvv&dvoiuxi (llTOJl), poetic
nsv&opou, inquire, Perf. Midi
nsnvafiai, F. Mid. nevaoficu,
2 A. Mid. inv&owv. ( 96.
18, 7.)
P.
e PArJ2, see tfyyvpi.
Qotlvw, sprinkle, regular. From
C PAJJI, A. Imperat. 2d pers.
plur. Qaaoons, Perf. Pass. 3d
pers. plur. &6ddaTtn 9 Epic.
( 104. N. 4: 91. N. 2.)
^cjw or I'^^w or EPFSl y F. t'w,
A. I'^cla (Epic also I'^la),
2 Perf. lo^/, 2 Pluperf. ^V
ysir. ( 80. N. 2, 3.
(few (PETSl, C PTSL), flow, A.
egqevaa, Perf. eQQvrjxot, F.
Mid. Qtvaonfti or gvyaoncu,
2 A. Pass. <^iV. ( 96. 18,
10, N. 12.)
, Perf. e^j^xa, Perf. Pass.
A. Pass.
(not Attic
, 3 F.
i, = EinSly which see.
(< 76. N. 1 : 95. N. 2.)
yvvpi (PArJl), later ^'aorlo,
^6r, &Mr5^, F. ijc, A. 1^^-
|, 2 Perf. igqtoya am torn
to pieces, 2 A. Pass.
( 96. 18, 9, 3, 19.)
( C P/JTJ2), shudder, gi
&c. 2 Perf. egQiya synony-
mous with the Present.
(96. 10.)
C POJ2, see
y see
see
(POJZ), strengthen, F.
, A. ('ggojoa, Peif. tggto-
xa, Perf. Pass, eggtapat, Imp.
i'gQwao farewell, &c. A. Pass.
( 96. 9 : 109.
sound a
trumpet, F. actlnlyl-to, later
aahnlaw, A. lodkmySa, later
eWA7r t a. (96. 6, N. 6.)^
aaow (rarely (yw), 5flt;c, aaw-
ao), &c. From 2ASIMI
comes Imperf. Act. 3d pers.
sing. (Epic) aaw. ( 96.
10: 78. N. 3: 117.)
apivvvpi (2BESI), extinguish,
F. a/? r aw, A. I'a/fcaa, Perf.
Pass, eapsapou, A. Pass. (j/5-
ff^v. From 2BHMI, 2 A.
eaprjv, ofolyv, offivat. ( 96.
9:95. N. 2: 107. N.I: 109.
N. 1.)
), shaJce, move, agi-
tate, F. aei/tfw, A. eoosvoe,
Perf. Pass, saavpai, Pluperf.
Pass, eaaviiyv, A. Pass, ea-
164
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
118.
av&rjv sometimes
From 2TMI, 2 A. Mid.
eaav^v and avprjv. Mid.
asvoiKu and, without the
connecting vowel, aevuou.
~\ 18: 104. N. 1:78.
/3 : 79. N. 3.)
avvviii (2KEdAfL), scatter ,
disperse, spread, F. oxsddaco
or oxedw, A. saxsdaact, Perf.
eaxsdaxa, Perf. Pass, eaxtda-
afitti, A. Pass. eGxedcxo\)"r]v.
( 96. 9 : 102. N. 2 : 107.
N. 1: 109. N. 1.)
cause to wither, F. oxs>lw,
A. taxrjhx, Perf. I'
drzW Wj0, F. Mid.
From 2KAHM1, 2 A. I
oxhalrjv, G^r^vai. Mid.
/ii, tat *Aer. ( 96. 6, 17, 18.)
otxldvripi, (2KE4AJI), Mid. vxl-
dvapai, =. (jxtdavvvfu, which
see. (96.6, 16.)
aovpcti (oreuco), Imp. 2d. pers.
sing, oovao, 2 A. Pass. 3d
pers. sing, taaova, in compo-
sition dntaaova (Laconic)
he is gone, he is dead, =.
osvfiat, from asvw, which see.
( 96. N. 15.)
aow, see (jojw.
aneo&cu, see enco.
2TASI, see lattjfii.
CfTfQSCO Or (JTS()l(JXCO (2TEPSI),
deprive, bereave, F. areQijaai,
A. 6aTQr}<j(x, Perf. eaTeQijxa f
Perf. Pass. iaTsgri^ai, A.
Pass. eaTfri&rjv, 2 A. Pass.
fk (poetic). Pass.
. Or (JTSQO^lCtL. ( 96.
8,10.)
OQBVVV^I or GTOQVV^L or (TT^aJy-
yt/^ui (2TOPSI), streiv, spread,
F. aro^ficrw, aT^w'tfw, A. earo-
, Perf. Pass.
, A. PaSS. 80TOQS-
. {96. 10,
9, 17:95. N.I: 109. N.I.)
(2TTrfL), fear, hate,
oivyriaw, &c. 2 A. saTvyov.
Aor. also ecriv^ci I terrified.
( 96. 10.)
e?j>, see ^w, To^w.
(Epic (jow), save,
asacoxoc,
(oraw),n=preceding. (116.
N. 7.)
TATSl, see
TAAAfL, bear, suffer, venture,
A. fTAa, Perf. -csrtyxct, 2
Perf. xirloKx, Opt. Tttlalrv
Imp. ihla&i, Infin.
From TAHMI, 2 A. T
( 26. 1 : 95. N. 2 :
91. N. 7: 117. 12.)
F. xa^ufi'o), Ionic, nr T8-
TAFSl, take, Imperat.
2d pers. sing. TT? (contracted
from T) #aX:e thou, 2 A.
Par/. TTa/wV, Epic. (23.
N. 1 : 78. N. 2.)
TWO* (TENJI, TAJI), stretch,
extend, F. Tevw, A. Irs^a,
Perf. xeraxa, Perf. Pass. Tsrce-
wi, A. Pass. Tci&<nv. ( 96.
19, 5, 18.)
TEKSl, see T/XTW.
T>yw (rarely TC'^UW), cwf, F. T-
^uw, Perf. xsTprjxa, Perf. Pass.
TfiT^^uat, A. Pass. 3r/fi}ipv2
A. TS(j,ov and erocfiov, 2 A. M.
trapCM*. (96.5,17,19.)
or tTSTfiov, I found, met
ivith, a defective 2 A. Act
( 78. N. 2.)
118.]
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
165
TETXfL, see ri'/^wVw.
it], see TAfL, take.
TIESl, Perf. Part. xmr/w's af-
flicted, Perf. Mid. i^lfi^ai
am afflicted, am sorrowful.
(09. N.)
Tl&ijUi, (rarely Ttxh'w, th'w),
jw, j9/ce, F. #?7(jw, A. '#77-
xa, Perf. is&fixa, Perf. Pass.
T&ei{iai, A. Pass, hi&rp, A.
Mid. ed-itxdiMjv (not Attic),
2 A. I'tfyr, #w, &*lijv, friti
or #&, -d-en'Od, &elg, 2 A.
Mid. ^>^. ( 96. 1 :
104. N. 2:95. N. 2, 4 : 14.
3, N.3: 117. N. 11, 13.)
T/XTOO (TEKJl), bring forth, F.
Ts'Sw, A. Pass, (later) hi^^v,
F. Mid. To[jiai, 2 A. Irexor, 2
Perf. TeToxa, 2 F. Mid.
^uat, 2 A. Mid. (poetic) er
TPArJl, see
TPASl, see
, llVVVfJLl, =T/W, Ao/Z-
or, which is regular. ( 96.
5,9.)
iw (TPAJl), bore, F. r^ij-
(jw, A. eiQrjoot, Perf. Tcr^ijxa,
Per. Pas. TSTo^ t . (96,1.)
JtJxw (TOJPJ2), wound, F.
CFW, A. t'jQwaa, Perf. T-
, Perf. Pass. jsTQOjfjni,
A. Pass. liQuSriv. ( 96.
17, 1, 8.)
ai (TTKfL), prepare,
take aim at, 2 A. TSTVXOV,
2 A. Mid. TSTVXO^V, Epic.
(96. 1, 14: 78. N. 2.)
TAASl, see TAAASl.
TMESl, TMAfL, see TS//VD).
T0^)5&) ( TO PJi), pierce, TOQT^OM,
&c. 2 A. i' ro? oy. ( 96. 10.)
TOPll, see
TQecpca (OP<I>Jl), nourish,feed,
support, F. &Qsyw, A. t'^^s-
y/tf, Perf. T6TQO(f)(x, Perf. Pass.
te&Qtxufiai, A. Pass. ^-
(p&riv, 2 A. TQct(pov (Epic),
2 A. Pass. Irgayriv. ( 14.
3 : 96. 19 : 107. N. 6.)
(OPEXfL), run, A. I'^s-
, F. Mid. &QgofAixi. From
4PAMJI or JPEMJl (which
see) come Perf. c^jwpjxa,
Perf. Pass. dtdQapqfiai, 2 A.
i90Qp>* 2 Perf.
(Epic), F. Mid. doc
( 14. 3.)
(TPAFJl), eat, gnaw, F.
Mid. TQW^OUttl, 2 A. eTQOtYOV.
( 96. 19.
yxavw (TTXJl), happen, at-
tain, A. eivx^aa (Epic), Perf.
i^r/x, Perf. Mid. (poetic)
i, F. Mid.
i, 2 A', eryxov. ( 96.
7, 10, 18.)
( TTIMl), strike, F. TI'(//O>
commonly xvmr^M, A. eTuya,
Perf. Ttrv<pa, 2 Perf. xhvfi-
iut commonly itTvniypni, A.
Pass. cTvy&riv, 2 A. Pass.
( 96. 2, 10.)
2\
xf, see ijjwvw.
io(j.ai and vnlayoftcii (vno,
promise,
Perf. Pass. vndaxr)^ai t A.
Pass, vntaztdyv, F. Mid.
t, 2 A. Mid. VTT-
from rvyxat'ta, which see.
ftAPfL, 2 A. I'qxxyov, Pass, cpa-
yo^itti (later) as F. Active,
= lad-lot f which see.
1GG
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
[ 118.
, see q>rj[il.
see
&ENJI,
&ENJI ( AJl} t kill, Perf. Pass.
(which see), A. TJW/xa, Perf.
4vyvoxa, Perf. Pass, frfae/pai,,
A. Pass, yvex&qv, 2 A. jjvtv-
{, y
F.
o (<l>TrfL), flee, escape,
Mid. qpevj-ofiai, ysv&vpou,
nicprov or msyvor. ( 96.
5, 19:95. N. 2: 78. N. 2 :
26. 1.)
, bring, carry, bear, Im-
perf. tysQov. From O/J2, F.
ol'cjw, A. Imperat. 2d pers.
sing. oias. From ENEFKfL
and qpa'crxw (<PAJl), say, Imperf. l'<jp^r, F. qpTj'ffw, A. fc(p?;a,
Perf. Pass, n^ao^on, 2 A. Mid. i^d^v, Imperat. ydo (Epic),
Jw/w. ya'(j#*. (^ 96. 8 : 95. N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 117. N. 9.)
The Present and Imperfect Active are inflected as fol-
lows :
Present.
2 A. tyvyov, 2 Perf. myiv-
yn. (96 18: 114. N. 1.)
Homer has also 2 Perf. Part.
#i$vons (as form <E>YZfL), and
Perf. Pass, Part. veQwyftivos hav-
ing escaped.
IND. S.
SUBJ. S. qpw, <pfjg
D. (pUfAEV
yaiov
P.
(py,
(prTOV,
epv.al(v)
, P.
OPT. S. yalyv, yalrjg, <pulrj, D. yotlrjfiev, cpalrjTOV,
P. cpalrjfisv, cpatrjis, (palrjaav Or (pouev.
IMP. S. (>'#*( 1 4. N, 4) D.yaTOV P. cpdis
yaw? (paTWcrctv, (
INF. <pdvai.
PART, qpcfc, qpa, cpdv, G. (pdviog.
Imperfect.
S. ecprjv D. ecfxx^ey P. I'cpafisv
eyyg, eyya&ct tyaxov lgDT
etpr] IcpaTijv tcpaaocv
NOTE 1. The 2d pers. sing, of the Ind. is very often written <pjs.
NOTE 2. For the 2d pers. sing, of the Imperfect, see above ( 84. N. 6).
frdvw (d>OAJl), come before,
anticipate, F. (p&daM, A.
l'g)^(j, Perf. f^^x, F.
Mid. c^aotai. From
MI, 2 A. tyfryv, (f&u, ydai-
yv, (p&yvai, y&dq, 2 A. Mid.
{(p&dfArjV, (p&dfitrog. ( 96.
5:95. N. 2: 117.)
ANOMALOUS VERBS.
107
lrw, cpSiw, consume, perish,
(p&law, 8<f&iaa, Iqpthxtt, scp&i-
pui. From &OIMI, 2 A.
Mid. lcp&lpr]v, Subj. <jp#/o)-
liaiy Opt. cp&lftrjv, Inf. cp&l-
a#ca, Part. ydlfievog.
(96. 5: 117. N. 14.)
>U'w, Jove, regular. From the
simple (PIAfL, A. Mid. eyi-
Idftrjv, Imperat. 2d pers. sing.
qTdou, Epic.
8w, carry, bear, wear, regu-
lar. From &OPI2MT, Inf.
(in Homer) nooijvai. ( 117.
N. 17.)
^G)), cpQi'jaw, &c. used
only in composition. From
<I>PHMI comes 2 A. Imp.
Wig. ( 96. 17: 117. N.
11.)
TZ&, see qpfiyw.
vot), produce, cpvaw, scpvaa, rii-
cpvxa am, 2 Perf. nscpva am,
2 A. Pass, (later) eyvyv.
From &TMI, 2 A. lyw aw,
Subj. cpvco, Opt. cpvyv, Inf.
(pvvoti, Part. g)vg. (^ 117.
N. 7, 16.)
X.
A4JI, see ^fw, xavdavw.
&o (XAJJl, KA/JSl), yield,
give way, F. xsxw^Tjao) sAa//
deprive, 2 A. vexadovlmade
to give way, deprived, 2 A.
Mid. xsxaflopfv. ( 96. 4,
10, 11 : 78. N. 2.)
(XANSl, XAfi.), com-
monly ^ffxo?, ^joe, 2 A.
%ttvov, 2 Perf. xs%r]V(x, F.
Mid. ^yov^f. ( 96. 5, 18,
8.)
/^D> (XAPJl), rejoice, F ^t-
^ijffw, Perf. xEjfceo^fttXj Perf.
Pass. xt%<xgrinni, (poetic xs-
), A. Mid.
(poetic), 2 A. Pass,
2 A. Mid. XSXUQOMV (Epic).
Homer has also F. xftfa^'aw,
%%a()ijao[i(xt. ( 96. 18, 10,
11: 78. N. 2.)
XENJJl), contain, hold, re-
ceive, F. Mid. xelaopcu, 2 A.
, 2 Perf. xexavda.
96. 6, 7, 19 : 12. 5.)
), caco, A.
and l/(/oy, Perf. Pass,
t, F. Mid. xsoo^ai, %saov-
at, 2 Perf. x^o^a. ( 96.
4, 19: 85. N. 2: 114.N. J.)
to (XETSl, XTJl), pour, F.
XSM sometimes ^vaw, A.
E/sa sometimes e'xevaa (Epic
l/fi/a), Perf. xi/xo?, Perf.
Pass, x^u^uoft, A. Pass, f^u-
^7/v. From XTMT, 2 A. Mid.
fyvw*. ( 96. 18, N. 12 :
95. N. 1 : 102. N. 2 : 104.
N. 1 : 117.)
XPAT2MSI, help, F.
A. f/oa/ff^oFtf, 2 A.
apov. ( 96. 10.)
XQttw, deliver an oracle,
&c.. Mid. xQ<xt* ai > use *
(95. N. 3: J16. N. 2.)
yf? 1 ? (^ ww )> ^ * s necessary, Im-
personal, >S^w6;. ^?J, Op#.
^4>f/?/, Jw/*. xqrivou, Part.
neut. x.Q f v > Iniperf. f^^v
or ^^i, F. ^ifae^.
The compound ano^ij, it
is enough, has Inf. anoxgyv,
Imperf. ani%Qr\.
NOTE. The IND. ^ regularly
would be^j?, ( 116. N. 2.)
The OPT. %g&iy and the INP.
168 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 119.
Xfivott come from %$&) (Ionic N , ip
XPHMI. (6 116. N. 8: 117. , 7 ,
N. 17.) yitfw, coo/, y/vlw, &c. 2 A.
The PART. X p& stands for Pass - tyvynv (as if from
tf^v. ( 116. N. 9.) WTFJl)
The Imperfect l;jv is contracted J2.
from^M. ( 116. N. 3). For
^ e v, see above ( 78. N. 3: <#W (JIOJL), push, Imperf.
93. N. 4 : 23. N. 3). ftJdvM F - #??(7 or waoi,
(XPOJl), color, F. A. IWa, Perf Iwxa, Perf.
, A. f'xgwaa, Perf. xs- Pass. tW^uaf, A. Pass, ew-
, Perf. Pass. xexQCoaficu, a^r/r,F.Mid. oKjo^uca. (96.
A. Pass, togrio&iiv. f 96. 10 : 80. N. 2.)
9 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1.) oW 0| wcu, &wy, Imperf.
%K>vvv[ii (%6w), heap up, dam, Perf. Pass, etovtjfiai, F. Mid.
F. ^cJfjw, A. ^w(j, Perf. x- wvyaoiiat,, A. Mid. (not Attic)
^a)x, Perf. Pass, xs^oafioti, eoiv^aa^v or wvrjaafiyv. (80.
A. Pass. 4ro)'<r#qv. (ibid.) N. 2.)
NOTE. In the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs, tenses of
easy formation (as F. Pass.) are not generally given.
ADVERB.
119. 1. Many adverbs answering to the question nwg,
HOW? IN WHAT MANNER? are formed from adjectives, pro-
nouns, and participles, by changing og of the nominative or
genitive into wg. E. g.
g, wisely, from oocpog, wise ;
vg, gracefully, from xccyUig, wiog, graceful;
c, contracted e^#<w, truly, from A?^^V, sog, true ;
ovTMg, thus, from omog, this ;
g, indeed, from wV, ovrog, being.
2. Some adverbs of this class end in dqv or ddyv. Such
adverbs are derived from verbs. E. g. yqafffaff, scratchingly,
from ygdyw, scratch; Ioyd8r]v, selectedly, from Uyw, select,
collect. ( 7 ; 96. 19.)
3. Some end in dov or -ydov. Such adverbs are derived from
nouns. E. g, ayelydov, in herds, from ayskr), herd;
dor, like a quadruped, from TST^WTTOVC, odog, four-footed.
4. Some end in I or d, xl or rsl. E. g. l&^ovrL, voluntarily,
from ifr&wv, ovrog, willing ; /?a^/5a^tai/, like a barbarian, from
lZw, act like a barbarian.
120, 121.] ADVERB. 169
5. Some end in . E. g. &aUa, by turns , crosswise, from
tvvattdaata, ^?/ace across.
6. A few adverbs of this class end in M?;j>. E. g.
^v, according to (his) wealth, from TrAoCio?, riches.
12O. Adverbs answering to the question noodxig,
HOW OFTEN ? end in dug. Such adverbs are derived from
adjectives. E. g. avxvdxig, often, from av%v6g, frequent.
For the numeral adverbs, see above ( 62. 4).
121. 1. Adverbs answering to the question nodi or
nov, WHERE? IN WHAT PLACE? end in &i or oi(v). E. g.
avTo&t, in that very spot, from amog.
The termination ac(r) is chiefly appended to names of towns.
It is preceded by rj ' but when the nominative singular of the
noun ends (or would end) in a pure or qa, it is preceded by at.
E. g. 'Ad-yvriai, at Athens, from 'Adyvou, Athens ; OWTUOHH, at
ThespicB, from Oeamal, Thespia.
(1) Some adverbs of this class end in ov or a%ov. E. g.
avTov, there, from amog ' navTu%ov, everywhere, from nag, nav-
rog.
(2) Some end in ot. E. g. 'la&nol, at the Isthmus, from
Yavtyioff, Isthmus.
(3) The following adverbs also answer to the question
WHERE ? /^t or ay%ov, avexug, itvw, e/yvg, exdg, exti, exrog, tvdov,
tv&a or tv&dde or ei>T(xv&a (Ionic lv&avw) t eviog, t|w, laco, I'xra^,
XTW, n&cxg, TiEQct and ni^av, n'^olov, TIOQQW, TiQoaca, ryks or
rykov, wds, and some others.
NOTE 1. The adverb afoo/, ctf /zome, from 7aj, house, takes the acute on the
penult. ( 20. N. 1.)
2. Adverbs answering to the question no&ev, WHENCE?
FROM WHAT PLACE ? end in <&er. E. g.
3 A$r)vr)&ev,from Athens, from 'A&TJVCU, Athens;
ovQav6&sv,from heaven, from ovgavog, heaven.
Here belongs IV #aj> or fr&evds or WTEV&SV (Ionic Iv&tvTev),
hence, thence, whence.
3. Adverbs answering to the question Trotjf, WHITHER? TO
WHAT PLACE ? end in as, ds, or fg. E. g.
cxgfog, thither, from ^x7, there;
oixovds, to the house, home, from oTxo, house;
0y8a(s, to Thebes, from Or^Sai, Thebes.
15
170
INFLECTION OF WORDS.
122, 123.
is appended to the accusative singular or
to Jlight, imply nom. OIH,
NOTE 2. In strictness, the ending
plural of the noun.
NOTE 3. The adverbs olxetii, home t an
4>TS, whence accus. olxet, Qvyot.
4. Adverbs answering to the question nr lt IN WHAT DIREC-
TION ? end in r\ or ^ij. E. g.
fiy, in no way, from ovda t u6g, none ;
'tt another direction, from a'J
NOTE 4. The ending becomes >j only when the nominative of the adjective,
from which such adverbs are derived, is not obsolete.
122. The following adverbs answer to the question
n 6 T E, WHEN ? IN WHAT TIME ? asl r CtVQlor, Xa<JTOT, tTlSLTCt,
fy&tg or %&ig, vstaa-il, VVXTUQ, vvv, oi//f, yrwAa*, naviots, TISQVCFI,
TIQIV, TtQOx&sg, ngwriv, nQw'i', ar^itgov, T^T?, VOTSQOV, and some
others.
1 23. The following table exhibits the adverbs derived
from n02, '01102, T02, and og. ( 73. 1 : 63. N. 2: 71.)
Interrogative.
Indefinite.
Demonstrative.
Relative.
nov or no&i,
nov or no&i,
TO&I, here,
ov or o&i or
where 1
somewhere
in this
oTiov or OTIO-
place
-&i, where
no dsv, whence ?
no&iv,from
TO&SV, thence
o&ev or OTTO-
some place
&ev, whence
TTol or noas,
not, some-
wanting
ol or OHO t)
whither ?
whither
whither
ny, in what
nrj, in some
T% or Ti]ds or
rj Or 0717],
direction 1
direction
Tamp, in this
in which
direction
direction
HOTS, when ?
HOTS, at some
TOTS, then
OTS or OTTOTS
time, once
when
Tiutg, how ?
ntog, some-
Ttog or tods or
tog or OTTWC,
how
ovitog, thus, so
as
nqvlxa, at
wanting
Trivet, Trirwd-
yvlxa or
what time ?
ds, TrjvwavTot,
onrivixot, at
at this or that
which time
time
Ttrjfiog, when ?
wanting
Tijfjog or TIJ-
ypog or onri-
ftoads or TV)- .
pog, when
fiovTog, then
wanting
wanting
Tttog, so long
tug, until
v/anting
wanting
ToyQot, so long
ocpgot, as long as
124, 125.] ADVERB. 171
NOTE 1. The forms *o$t, vro&i, r'oSi, o&t, ro-&v, ol, rug) ?r^c;, rtjf^os, tjf&os,
rotpga, Spgot, are poetic.
Instead of rug, the poets sometimes use us, with the acute accent.
NOTE 2. The letter i is annexed to the demonstratives raurri, J5s, ayra;*, for
the sake of emphasis. Thus, rctvr^i, ubl, ovrwa-l. ( 7O. N. 2.)
NOTE 3. Also the adverbs ^wgo, IvS-aSt or IvrgtJS-sv, and yyv, take /. Thus,
^ivpt) evS^a^/ or tv<rotv&t, Jv-rsfSsy/, vyy/.
NOTE 4. Some of the relative adverbs are strengthened by trig or ovv, or
by both united. E. g. us, uffvrt^ uffxi^ovv, as / ovou, QKOVOVV wherever.
134. 1. Some genitives , datives, and accusatives are
used adverbially. E. g. drjfioala, publicly, from $ij(i6oiog t pub-
lic ; T&og, finally, lastly, from T&O& cwc?.
2. Especially the accusative singular or plural of the neuter
of an adjective is often used adverbially. E. g. HQVOV, only,
from povog, alone ; nolv or TTO^W, much, from TrovltV, much.
NOTE. In some instances, a word with the preposition, which governs it, is
used adverbially. E. g. rg^?/z (Va^a %p9)f&&), instantly / vrtJovgyov (wga
%(><you}, to the purpose ; xaa.Ktt> {x,oi& ciftg), as.
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.
133|. The comparative of an adverb derived from an
adjective is the same with the neuter singular of the compara-
tive, and the superlative is the same with the neuter plural of
the superlative, of that adjective. E. g.
ooqtwg, wisely, oocpwiegov, more wisely, aocpwTona, most wisely,
from aocpog, wise. ( 57.)
yddmg, pleasantly, ydlov, more pleasantly, ydiaTtx, most pleas-
antly, from ydvg, pleasant. ( 58.)
NOTE 1. Some adverbs of the comparative degree end in us. E. g. ^aXs-
9T&>;, goi.Xfx'u'rigus, from ^aXswoj.
Superlatives in us are rare.
NOTE 2. Some comparative and superlative adverbs end in u, particularly
when the positive ends in ea. E. g. civu, up, avuri^u, a-vurtirea.
NOTE 3. The following adverbs are anomalous in their comparison :
tLyW or a.y%ou, near, Wov, eiy^nrra. (Compare 58. N. I.)
ixdif, afar t izao-rigea, txotffraru. ( 125. N. 2.)
ivbov, within, tvSoTtgeit, tv^oTUTw. (ibid.)
ftdiXa., very, ^aAXov, more, rather, fteiXiffree, very much, especially.
vvKna^, nightly, by night ; vux,rKx,tTtoov, farther back in the night, that is, ear-
lier in the morning, vyxT/a/V/x-ra, very early in the morning.
rtiget, farther, beyond, iri^ctiri^u or vrtpctirtgov, fftoa.iTu.Tu. (ibid.)
^ov^yov, to the purpose, r^ou^yiKir^ov, more to the purpose, v^ov^yiKtrATet,
very muck to the purpose.
172 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [ 126, 127.
DERIVATION OF WORDS.
ISO. All words, which cannot be proved to be deriva-
tive, must be considered as primitive.
DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES.
127. Substantives derived FROM OTHER SUB-
STANTIVES end in
idqg, adqg, ludyg, Iwv, Ig, , Ivy, iwvrj, patronymics :
iov, Idiov, (xQior, vXhov, vdyiov, vcpiov, laxog, vMog or vkog,
Ig, diminutives :
tog, fT??, (XTqg, yir)g, ifarjg, iwTrjg, avog, yvog, Ivog, mg, a, ig, ag,
(ar, WVLU, Trig, iig, aact, icrva, appellatives.
1. PATRONYMICS, that is, names of persons derived from
their parents or ancestors, end in idyg, adyg, tudyg, gen. ov, and
iwv gen. cwog, masculine : ig gen. idog, ag gen. adog, and ivt\,
iwvr], feminine.
(1) Patronymics from nouns in 77$ or ?, of the jirst declen-
sion, end in adiig (fern. ^). E. g. C l7in6iijg t c l7inoTad^g son of
Hippotes ; Bogeag, BoQsddrjg son of Boreas.
(2) Patronymics from nouns in og and toe, of the second
declension, end in idyg (fern, ig) and ia8vjg (fein. tag) respec-
tively. E. g. Kgovag, Kgovldyg son of Saturn; 3 4axhr}mog,
*Aaidr)niadrig son of jEsculapius.
In this case, the poets often use icav (fern, ivy, iwvy) for idyg
E. g. Kgovltav for Kgovldyg ' "Adgyaiog, 'Adgyailvy daughter of
Adrastus.
(3) Patronymics from nouns of the third declension are
formed by dropping og of the genitive of the primitive, and
annexing idyg (fern, ig) or iadyg. E. g. /Zfi'Aoi//, nog, Zldomdyg
son of Pelops ; ftegyg, yTog, ftsQyTuxdyg son of Pheres ; "Artag,
VTOC, *Ailavii$ daughter of Atlas.
The poets sometimes use iwv for idrjg. E. g. Uylevgj eog,
v son of Peleus.
NOTE 1 . The epic poets often form patronymics from nouns in ts, by drop-
ping os of the Ionic genitive ( 44. N. 2), and annexing talus, ts. E. g. ITj-
tevs %os, nX)$jj? 5071 of Peleus ; "B^ttr&vs, yo$, Bgjffn?; daughter of Briseus.
Feminine patronymics in iV are sometimes contracted in the oblique cases.
E. g. Njgsvf, no;, N^j?f daughter of Nereus, Nereid, gen. plur. N^si^v.
2. A DIMINUTIVE signifies a small thing of the kind denoted
by the primitive,
128.] DERIVATION OP WORDS. 173
Diminutives end in iov, idiov, UQIOV, vttiov, vdgior, vytov,
neuter : taxog, vUog or vlog, masculine : taxy, ig gen. idog, fem-
inine. E. g. av&gcanog, man, av&Qwmov, a little fellow; <mqpa-
vog, crown, oTscpcxvlaxog, a little crown ; fislga^, xoc, girl, [AEIQOI-
xlaxr), a little girl.
NOTE. 2. The first syllable of iltov is contracted with the preceding vowel.
E. g. fiou$, fioas> ox, fiofifov, a little ox ; Xtfys, tus> word, tefyftiov, a little word.
In this case, the ending e^/ov often becomes tiiov.
NOTE 3. Many diminutives in M have lost their diminutive signification.
E. g. yrtiov, vt^iov, plain.
3. National APPELLATIVES end in tog, nyg, cnyg, yTyg, laryg,
itaTrjg, avog, yvog, ivog, gen. ov, and evg gen. sog, masculine : ,
ig gen. idog, and ag gen. adog, feminine. E. g. Kogiv&og, Cor-
inth, KoQlvdiog, a Corinthian ; ^Tuysiga, Stagira,
a Stagirite ; Ttyia, Tegea, Ts/sotT^g, a Teg eon.
NOTE 4. When the nominative singular of the noun denoting the place ends
(or would end) in a, or , the ending 40$ is generally contracted with the preced-
ing vowel. E. g. 'AS-Jjva/, 'A^nvuios.
4. Nouns denoting a place, where there are many things of
the same kind, end in wv or ow. E. g. ddcpvq, laurel^ dayvwv,
laurel-grove; $6dov t rose, godavid, rose-garden.
5. Many masculine appellatives end in rqg gen. ov. E. g.
nolig, city, noUxrig, citizen ; 'innog, horse, iTinoTrjg, horseman,
Those in iTqg have the i in the penult long.
Feminine appellatives of this class end in tig, E. g. nottug,
female citizen.
6. Some masculine appellatives end in evg. E. g. f innog,
horse, Innsvg, horseman.
7. Some feminine appellatives end in aaa or taacc. E. g.
Qgn*, a Tkracian, Ogaaaa, a Thracian woman ; paadwg, king,
(Saalhaoa, queen.
Substantives derived FROM ADJECTIVES end
in la, irjg gen. r t iog, ovvrj, og gen. sog, a gen. ag, and ^. Such
substantives denote the ABSTRACT of their primitives. E, g,
xwx/a, vice from xaxog, wicked
oSvTrjg, sharpness " o$vg, sharp
dixnioovvr], justice " dlxaiog, just
fiiid-og, depth " fia&vg, deep.
NOTE 1. If the ending tct be preceded by i or o, a contraction takes place.
E. g. Aj&/, trutk, from aXjjS^jjj, iog, true; civotet, folly, from civ oos, foolish.
15*
174 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 129.
The ending UK often becomes /. E. g. a^aS/a for a^aSe/a, ignorance,
from a^aS^jjf, ignorant,
NOTE 2. Those in TJJ; are always feminine. They are generally paroxy.
tone. ( 19. 2.)
NOTE 3. If the penult of the primitive be short, the ending otrvvn becomes
uffvvn. E. g. h^uffvvy, priesthood, from legos, sacred*
NOTE 4. Those in os are always derived from adjectives in vg ( 51), by
changing u$ into 05.
NOTE 5. Abstract nouns in a. or t> f from adjectives in 0$, are always paroxy-
tone ( 19. 2;. E. g. <?;$, enmity, from i%S-go$, enemy.
Substantives derived FROM VERBS end in
, 77, o, z?70, T??, TWO, k, i}g, ag, aig, alec, /-toV, /u, p?.
1. Verbal nouns in a, y, and o? gen. ov or so?, denote the
ABSTRACT of the primitive. E. g.
X<*Q(x> jy from #/ow, rejoice, ( 96. 18)
pax*!, battle " ^1^0^.011, fight
q, confutation " fAs'/^o), confute
g, thing " ngdaao), do, ( 96. 3.)
NOTE 1. When the radical vowel is either e, , or o, ( 96.
19,) verbal nouns of this class ( 129. 1) have o in the penult.
E. g. Ao'/o?, word, from Ac'/w, sy.
NOTE 2. Feminines in / come from verbs in tuu. E. g. jSa^/Xs/a, so^-
reignty, from /3a<r/Xgy&>, mn.
2. Verbal nouns denoting the SUBJECT of the verb ( 156)
end in T^^) (fern. TSIQCX, TQIOC, jglg gen. /<5oc), T?;?, ra>(), v?, ^
(fern, ig gen. /5o?), a^, and og gen. ov. The penult of those in
T^O, Trig, TWO, is generally like that of the perfect passive
<$ 107). E. g.
gvTJ]g, one who draws from c prJ2, <^r^
tioiTjTrjg, maker " noiew, make
grjTWQ, speaker " C PEJ2, speak
ygoupevg, writer " yyaqxa, write.
NOTE 3. Those in rjg, &g, gen. ov, annex these endings to
the last consonant of the verb. They are chiefly found in
composition. E. g. ytwpsTQyg, geometer, from yea, earth, and
fiSTQsm, measure ; (pvyado&rjQug, hunter of fugitives, from
fugitive, and #7?0a'w, hunt.
NOTE 4. Those in og are generally found in composition.
E. g. pr]Too<povog, a matricide, from ^T^ and
< 130, 131.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 175
3. Nouns denoting the ACTION of the verb end in aig, oia,
uog. Their penult is generally like that of the perfect passive
(107). E.g.
oQctaig, vision from ogaw, see
slxaala, conjecture " etxa'^w, / conjecture
di(ayp6g, pursuit " diwxa), pursue, ( 9. 1.)
4. Nouns denoting the EFFECT of the verb end in pa. Their
penult is generally like that of the perfect passive ( 107).
Kg.
x6[*[*tx, that which is cut off, piece, from XO'TITW, cut, ( 96.
2: 8. 1.)
5. Verbal nouns in ^ sometimes denote the action and
sometimes the effect of the verb. E.g. dniar^pri, knowledge,
from f7tl(jT(X[i<u, understand; ygctppy, line drawn, from ygaipa),
write, ( 8. 1.)
DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES.
13O. Adjectives derived FROM OTHER ADJEC-
TIVES end in tog, oiog, %og, ctxog. E. g. &ev&$Qog, free, tfav-
fregiog, liberal; txeoV, ovrog, willing, knovoiog, voluntary, ( 12.
5 ; ) 3 fa vg, female, xfyvl vxog, feminine.
131. Adjectives derived FROM SUBSTANTIVES
end in
to?, aiog, eiog, oiog, wog' wog eog, swog, wog' tgog, rigoq,
txhsog, yhog, whog ' ipog ' yeig, isig, oeig ' (odyg.
1. The endings tog, aiog, siog, oiog, o)og, wog, denote be-
longing to or relating to. E. g. al^Q, sgog, ether, al&tgiog,
ethereal; Orjfiai, Thebes, OripotioQ, Theban ; noi^iys, poet,
TioirjTiyog, poetic.
2. The endings sog, stvog, ivog, generally denote the material
of which any thing is made. E. g. /^vcroV, gold, zyvaeog,
golden; dgvg, oak, dgvivog, oaken.
3. The endings egog, ygog, cdsog, ylog, wlog, denote quality.
E. g. TQvyri, luxury, rgvcpsgog, luxurious ; -9-aggog, courage,
courageous.
4. The ending ipog generally denotes fitness. E. g.
food, edwdipog, eatable.
5. The endings yfig, mg, osig, generally denote fulness. E. g.
, value, Ti^sig, valuable ; %d()ig, grace, ^of^/e^, graceful.
176 INFLECTION OF WORDS.
6. The ending wdyg denotes resemblance. E. g. nvg, fire,
, like fire.
132. Adjectives derived FROM VERBS end in tog,
Tsog, hog, vog, yg, pg, fitav.
1. Verbal adjectives in tog are equivalent to the perfect
passive participle. E. g. noiin, make, noirjjog, made.
Frequently they imply capableness. E. g. dedopai, see, #-
TO> visible, capable of being seen.
NOTE 1 . Sometimes verbal adjectives in rog have an active signification,
E. g. Ktt\vf7oi, cover, xett.vx'ros, covering.
2. Verbal adjectives in reog imply necessity, obligation, or
propriety. E. g. TIOLSW, make, noirjTsog, to be made, that must
be made.
NOTE 2. The penult of adjectives in res and nos is generally like that of the
perfect passive ( 107).
3. A few verbal adjectives end in Ao?, vog. E. g.
fear, dsdog, timid, dswog, terrible.
4. Many adjectives are formed from verbs by annexing yg
gen. toe, og gen. ov, to the root. Such adjectives are generally
found in composition. E. g. /*#??'?, ignorant, from - and
[iav&dvw, ( 96. 7: 135. 4;) nolvhoyog, talkative, from nolvg
and Uyu, ($| 135. I : 96. 19.)
5. Verbal adjectives in [iwv are active in their signification.
E. g. 7iiaTi]fj.wv, knowing, from inLaTa^ai, know.
133. A few adjectives in wo$ are derived FROM AD-
VERBS. E. g. %&ig, yesterday, xd-eaivog, yesterday's, of
yesterday.
DERIVATION OF VERBS.
134. Derivative verbs end in aw, c'w, ow, evw, a'w, /Jw,
ctlvco, vvw, a/w, tw.
1. In verbs derived from nouns of the first and second de-
clension, the verbal ending takes the place of the ending of the
nominative ( 31. 1 : 33. 1). E. g.
riprj, honor iipou*), I honor
xotvwvog, partaker xonwvem, partake
[iia&6g, wages pia&ow, let, hire
dlxrj, justice dix<x(0, judge.
135.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 177
In verbs derived from nouns of the third declension, the
ending takes the place of the termination og of the genitive
($ 35. 1 ). But when the nominative singular ends in a vowel,
or in $ preceded by a vowel ( 36. 1), the verbal ending
generally takes the place of the ending of the nominative. E. g.
S, xoc, rudder otax/, steer
wonder &avudw, admire
NOTE 1 . Verbs in ettvu, uv&, generally come from adjectives in as, vs gen.
to$ t respectively. E. g. p&gos, foolish, pugettva, act in a foolish manner /
, deep, fiaSvvw, deepen.
NOTE 2. Verbs in cmw express a desire, and are formed by
annexing this ending to the root of the primitive verb. E. g.
dga'ft), do, dQaaelco, desire to do.
Also some verbs in taw or express a desire. Such verbs
are derived from substantives. E. g. oTgaTyyog, general,
idw, desire to become a general.
2. Some verbs are formed from nouns by changing the end-
ing of the nominative into , and modifying the penult accord-
ing to 96. E. g. xafandg, injurious, %nksnT(o, injure, ( 96.
2;) ^uwAaxoV, soft, fiaJidaaco, soften, (96. 3;) ayyskog, mes*
senger, ayysttw, announce, ( 96. 6 ;) xa&agog, clean,
1 clean, ($ 96. 18.)
COMPOSITION OF WORDS.
135. 1. When the first component part of a word is a
noun of the^rs^ or second declension, its ending is dropped,
and an o is substituted. E. g.
singer from povaa, noisw
yg, holy " Isgog, TiQtnw.
But when it is a noun of the third declension, the termina-
tion og of the genitive is dropped, and an o is substituted. E.g.
g, instructor, from noug, ncudog, -
NOTE 1. The o is generally omitted when the root of the
first component part ends in av, i, ov, v. ( 36. 1, R. 1.) E. g.
g, city -destroy ing, from nohg,
NOTE 2. The o is often omitted when the last component
part begins with a vowel. E. g. ygw^ro?, newly bought, from
178 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ 135.
NOTE 3. The e is sometimes omitted when the root of the first component
part ends in y. (ibid.) E. g. ftiXdyxa^ros, producing black fruit, from ^aeAa?,
's. ( 12. 2.)
NOTE 4. When the first component part is yfa, earth t the o is changed into
at, E. g. yiuy(>a,q>of , geographer, from y, ygetQu*
2. When the first component part is a #er&, the connecting
letter is or t. Sometimes i becomes 01. E. g.
g, brave from fidvfa, IIUM
vrof, thunder-ruling' " V^t, xtgawog
g, receiving presents " di^o^ni, dwyov, ( 9. 2 )
NOTE 5. Sometimes 0v drcps / before a vowel. E. g. pi^aff^ns (for //^/a-
*/?, that is, ptv-tri-affvts), coward, from pinna, ufftrtf. (^> 96. 2 : 8. 2.)
3. The primitive PREPOSITIONS are the only ones with which
other words are compounded. ( 226. 1.)
These prepositions generally lose the final vowel, when the
word, with which they are compounded, begins with a vowel ;
except negl and nqo. E. g.
av-dyw, lead up from uvd, ayw
sTi-airsw, praise " inl, alvtto
i), contain " nfgl, i'xio
excel " nyo, f^w.
NOTE 6. In TTQO, the o is often contracted with the following
vowel. E. g. TIQOV^O) for TT^O^CO.
NOTE 7. 'A^p/ often retains the t before a vowel. E. g. upQilvvvfu from
Kfttp'l, iVVVftt.
NOTE 8. The Epic language often drops the final vowel of a
preposition even before a consonant. E. g. an-ni^n^ for ano-
718^710).
4. The negative prefix - (called alpha privative) corre-
sponds to the English prefix MH-, or to the suffix -less. Before
a vowel it generally becomes dv-. E. g.
a-aocpog, unwise from -, oocpog
a-xgrjaiog, useless " a-, xgriaiog
ixv-dkiog> unworthy " -, ci&og.
PART III.
SYNTAX.
SUBSTANTIVE.
136. 1. A substantive annexed to another
substantive or to a pronoun, for the sake of explana-
tion or emphasis, is put in the same case. E. g.
g fiaailitvg, King Xerxes. Here (taaiUvg is an-
nexed to ZbQ$r\s.
TOV TrjQia, Me Tereus.
A substantive thus annexed to another substantive is said to
be in APPOSITION with it
NOTE 1. Sometimes the substantive is repeated for the sake of emphasis.
E. g. Aao9-oj 3-vyr7 "AXraa yi^ovros ' "^.Xr&u, o; AtXtyiffffi QiXovrro-
tipoiffiv a,vaitrffti, Laothoe the daughter of old Attes ; of Altes who rules over the
warlike Leleges.
NOTE 2. The repeated noun ( 136. N. 1) is, in some instances, put in the
nominative. E. g. ' Av$goju,ei%yi, B-uydrf)^ fAsyot.Xri'rogo; 'Her tuvos * 'H -
riav, as tvoutv V-TTO TL^oixtu vXylfffy, Andromache the daughter of magnanimous
Eelion ; Eetion, who dwelt at t/iefoot of woody Placus.
NOTE 3. Sometimes a substantive supplies the place of an adjective. E. g.
2avj WA./; C EXX?, Sane, a Grecian city, where the substantive 'ExXay,
Greece^ stands for the adjective 'EAAmx^, Grecian.
REMARK. Personal or national appellatives are often accompanied by the
word a,vyg, man. E. g. BamXsuj a v, a man who is a king, simply a king.
"Av^sj 'A9-9}VK7ot, men of Athens, simply Athenians.
NOTE 4, An abstract noun is often used for the corresponding concrete.
E. g. 'lxtavov, Stay yivurtv, Oceanus, the parent of the gods, where the
abstract yiv&ffiv, production, stands for the concrete ysv*r>jv, producer.
NOTE 5. The limiting noun, which regularly is put in the genitive ( 173),
sometimes stands in apposition with the limited noun. E. g. Asxa ftva7
tiffQoga, for Axa ^ttv&Jv tio-Qogu, a contribution often mints.
2. A substantive in apposition with two or more substantives
is put in the plural. E. g.
AplaTgyg, AQjoicpQEvrjg, xal Msyafia^yg, tayol USQ-
owv, Amistres, Artaphernes, and Megabazes, leaders of
the Persians.
180 SYNTAX. [ 137.
ADJECTIVE.
^ 137. 1. An adjective agrees with its substan-
tive in gender, number, and case. E. g.
*Aviig aoqpo?, A wise man. 'Avdgbg aoyov, Of a wise
man.
"Avdgsg aoyol, Wise men. *AvS(>wv aoopwy, Of wise
men.
This rule applies also to the article, to the possessive, inter-
rogative, and demonstrative pronouns, and to the participle.
NOTE 1. A feminine substantive in the dual often takes a
masculine adjective, article, pronoun, or participle. E. g.
TOVTW TW rex vtx > for Tama ia re%va, These two curt s.
NOTE 2. Sometimes the gender of the adjective or participle has reference to
the gender implied in the substantive. E. g. ^u^vi QnZaiov Ttigitrieto,
%(>vffiov a-K^-x-r^ov 6%cav, the soul of the Theban Tiresias, holding a golden
sceptre, where the masculine t%&>* is used on account of Ttigiffiao.
NOTE 3. In some instances the gender and number of the adjective or par-
ticiple are determined by the noun governed by its substantive. E. g. II<r)-
vuv cfyiXai v -ro^iiiroc. vrtg, flocks of birds fearing, where the masculine
faedtiffctvrts refers to Trnwv, although it agrees in case with
2. If an adjective, pronoun, or participle refers to two or
more substantives, it is put in the plural. If the substantives
denote animate beings, the adjective, pronoun, or participle, is
masculine, when one of the substantives is masculine. If
they denote inanimate beings, the adjective, &,c. is generally
neuter. E. g.
Bovv v.a\ Innov xnl xcifirj^ov olovg omovg. An ox, a
horse, and a camel, roasted whole.
Al&Qi TC xal Tiklv&oi xal |JA TXTW l^^i^jUfiVcr,
Stones, clay, wood, and brick, thrown together without
order.
NOTE 4. The adjective often agrees with one of the substan-
tives. E. g. "AI.OXOI xai vynia xexva noxid iypsvai, wives
and infants expecting.
NOTE 5. The adjective or participle is often put in the dual,
if it refers to two substantives. E. g. K all lag xal *Alxi-
ftiddyg rjxsryv ayovtt tov UgoSwov, both Callias and Al-
cibiades came bringing Prodicus.
$ 138, 139.] ARTICLE. 181
3. A collective substantive in the singular often takes an
adjective or participle in the plural. E. g.
Tgolyv ehovjsg 'AQ-yiiwv oiolog. The army of the Greeks
having taken Troy. Here the plural participle klovisg
agrees with the singular substantive orohog.
NOTE 6. A noun or a personal pronoun in the dual often
takes a participle in the plural. E. g. JVw xaTctfidvisg, we
both going dozen.
On the other hand, a noun in the plural sometimes takes
a participle in the dual, in which case only two things are
meant. E. g. Al/vniol xAo>T, two vultures uttering
loud shrieks.
NOTE 7. In Homer, the dual nouns oWe and ^ovp are accompanied by plural
adjectives. E. g. "Orfft (p&nvec, two bright eyes. "AXx/^a $ovg&, two
stout spears.
NOTE 8. The duals luo and K^U are frequently joined to plural substantives.
E. g. Ay'o -^v^oisj for Ay'o "^v^at,, two souls.
138. 1. An adjective is often used substantivcly, the
substantive, with which it agrees, being understood. E. g.
<Pllog SC. avr^g, A friend.
Ol &vr)Tol, sc. av&gunoi, Mortals.
2. The neuter singular of an adjective or participle is often
equivalent to the abstract ( 128) of that adjective or participle.
In this case the article precedes the adjective or participle.
E. g. To xahov, the beautiful, beauty. To psMiov, the future.
NOTE 1. Masculine or feminine adjectives often supply the
place of adverbs. E. g. Zevg %&iog I/ft?, Jupiter went yester-
day, where the adjective xdi^oq, hesternus, is equivalent to the
adverb %&e$, yesterday.
So all adjectives in atog answering to the question TroaraToc,
on what day ? (62.3.) E.g. Tgnalog aqp/xsro, he came
on the third day.
NOTE 2. It has already been remarked, that the neuter of an adjective is often
used adverbially. ( 124. 1.)
ARTICLE.
139. 1. In its leading signification the Greek article
corresponds to the English article the. E. g.
e O avriQ, The man. O I avdqsc:, The men.
c fl yvrr), The woman. Ai yvvctixs?, The women.
To dsrdoor, The tree. Ta dtvdga, The trees^
16
182 SYNTAX. [ 140.
2. A Greek noun without the article is equivalent to the
corresponding English noun with the article a or an. E. g.
avrjQ, a man ; yvvri, a woman ; Sivdgov, a tree.
3. Proper names very often take the article. But the article
is generally omitted when the proper name is accompanied by
a substantive with the article, ( 136.) E. g.
C O "Olvpnog, Olympus.
Umaxbg o Mvulrjvalog, Pittdcus the Mytilenian.
NOTE 1. The article accompanies the leading character of a well-known story
or anecdote. E. g. T "Stftfiy Xi-yavr/, en [0s / a/0'<ro*A.jjf] ou /' aurbv y
XX $iet rtjv raA/v tfttJUfi*, to a Seripkian saying, that he [ Themistocles} had
become famous not through himself, but through the city, where the article ru is
used, because the remark of the Seriphian and the reply of Themistocles were
well known in Athens.
NOTE 2. The article sometimes accompanies the second accusative after verbs
signifying to call ( 166). E. g. 'l*i%sioutri fioiXX&tv rov Aifyvvov, a. v * a-
Z. o v v T i s r o v or g o$ o r tj v, they attempted to strike Dexippus, exclaiming^
" The traitor ! " not calling him a traitor.
14O. 1. The article is very often separated from its
substantive by an adjective, possessive pronoun, participle, or
by a genitive depending on the substantive ( 173). E. g.
C O xaAyUejrjJs *Ayd&wv, The elegant Agathon.
Tov s[ibv Innov, My horse.
C Oeaaakwv fiuodsvg, The king of the Thessalians.
The article is also separated by other words connected with
the substantive, in which case a participle (commonly yevope-
VOQ or o)V) may be supplied. E. g. Tov xotT 3 aaTQa Zyrog,
of Jupiter, who dwells among the stars.
REMARK 1 . Two or even three articles may stand together. E. g. T o r y
iro\ti ffvfttpigav, that which is profitable to the city. Ta rtjg r u v voXXafv
^tr^jj? op peer et, the eyes of the souls of the majority of mankind.
NOTE 1 . In Ionic writers, the article is often separated from its substantive
by the word upon which the substantive depends ( 173). E. g. Tuv rig
ff 7 P a. T i u i i u v, for Tuv ffTgetniuTiav ms , one of the soldiers.
REMARK 2. Sometimes the article is separated from the word, to which it
belongs, by an incidental proposition. E. g. 'A<r0TvW? r ov, overt fiofaoivro
txuffroi, yvvtuKot, K <y ff S- a, t , for ' Avrovretuffa.; rov >yvvoe.7)t,ex. a.yiff'&cti, effort $ov-
Z.OIVTO e lxa<rroi) having stopped tltemfro?n marrying whenever they wished.
2. The words connected with the substantive are often
placed after it, in which case the article is repeated. The
first article however is often omitted. E. g.
o ft i x Q 6 g, Little Cligenes.
Tag ere gag, The other seasons.
140.] ARTICLE. 183
This arrangement is more emphatic than that exhibited
above ( 140. 1).
NOTE 2. In some instances this order is inverted. E. g. T a X X et <raya$
for TayaS-a <ra>Aflr, the other good things*
3. The participle preceded by the article is equivalent
to ixilvog og, he who, and the finite verb. E. g. Tovg
noke pr) o MVT ag idlg fiagfidgoig, those who fought against the
barbarians, where jovg nole^aviag is equivalent to exdvovg oi
eno^s^oar. But no^^uuviag loig fiaQfidyoig would mean hav-
ing fought against the barbarians.
NOTE 3. Hence, a participle preceded by the article is
often equivalent to a substantive. E. g. ol (pdoaoyovvTtg, equiv-
alent to Ol (pdoaocpoi, the philosophers.
NOTE 4. When the adjective stands before or after the sub-
stantive and its article, the substantive with the article involves
the relative pronoun og. E. g. Ov fidvavaov tr^v ii%vr\v SXTT;-
od^v, equivalent to C H ifyvri, yv exTr}ad{ir]v t ov ftavctvaog eaxir t
the art which I possess is not low.
. 4. When a noun, which has just preceded, would naturally
be repeated, the article belonging to it is alone expressed. E. g.
Tov filov TWV idiwTsvoviwv, % TOV TWV TVQavvsvovitov, The
life of private persons, or that of those who are rulers.
NOTE 5. In certain phrases a noun is understood after the
article. The nouns which are to be understood are chiefly the
following :
y ?J, land, country, as Elg ir^v iavxwv, To their own country.
yv&W opinion, as XT ys TJ\V i^v t In my opinion at least.
odog, way, as Tr\v TaxloTyv, The quickest way.
nQccyfia, thing, as Tot rfg notewg, The affairs of the state.
vlog, son, as C O Kfaivlov, The son of Clinias.
5. The demonstrative pronoun, and the adjective nag or
vin a g, are placed either before the substantive and its article,
or after the substantive. E. g.
OvTog o ogvig, or *O ogvig ovvog, This bird.
To ftdgog TOVTO, or Tovxo TO ftdgog, This burden.
'Ana v?n g Tovg ctQi&iiovg, OT Tovg aQi&[iovg anctv-
rag, All the numbers.
The article, however, in this case is often omitted. E. g.
Oviog ar^g, this man. Ilavisg oiv&Qwnoi, oilmen,
184 SYNTAX. [ 141, 142.
NOTE 6. TLeis in the singular without the article often means every > each,
E.g. Has vs7, every man.
NOTE 7. "OXos and ix.a<rros often imitate vretg. E. g. Toy o-xoi^eus
oXoVf of the whole ship. Toy oa*A./THv exao-rov, every heavy-armed sol-
dier. 'Rxoifrus ftis olxiusy of every house.
NOTES. Toiovrof is sometimes preceded by the article. E. g. 'Ev raTg
rotuvretis 6vrtfAt*.i{cus> in such pursuits.
NOTE 9. The article is sometimes placed before the interrogative pronoun
T/f and the pronominal adjective *dio$. E.g. To ri\ what is it? To, vro'ix
Tttura, ; such as what ?
NOTE 1O. The indefinite pronoun ^ttva. is preceded by the article. E. g.
C O j7va, such-a-one.
141. 1. An adverb preceded by the article is equivalent
to an adjective. E. g. Ol TOT uv&gwnoi, the men of that
time, the men who lived in those days.
2. An adverb preceded by the article, without any substan-
tive expressed, has the force of a substantive. E. g. e // a v-
giov, sc. ?jHt'0tt, the morrow.
NOTE 1. Sometimes the article does not perceptibly affect the adverb before
which it is placed. E. g. To raX/ or <r0raAa*, in olden time, anciently.
T vt/v or TKVVV, noWy at the present time. T etvrixet t immediately.
3. The neuter singular of the article, often stands before an
entire proposition. E. g. To o^olwg a^ffolv axoa#t, to hear
both impartially,
4. The neuter singular of the article is often placed before
single words which are explained or quoted. E. g. To v fists
oiav el'nw, ir\v nohv Uyw, when I say YOU, / mean the state.
Toi tlvat, xyria&ai, xal TW xwqis, to use the words rivvu,
and %toQig.
NOTE 2. Sometimes the article is of the gender of the substantive which refers
to the quotation. E. g. KXjv jf^w vrctg&ivteiv iJvxi rjv x,a,oouva,/u,tv
f^^tjy, he said, " To sacrifice to the gods according to thy power " is very
good advice, where the gender of the article before the expression xa^va/*/x
'iobtiv is determined by the substantive ram<r/v.
NOTE 3. In grammatical language, every word regarded as an independent
object takes the gender of the name of the part of speech, to which it belongs.
E. g. *H \yu sc. avTa/vt/^/a, the pronoun iyw, I. 'H uieo sc. a^oS-g?/?, the
preposition v<7r'o t under. C O ya.o sc. o-vvbtfftos, the conjunction yu-^for.
149. 1. In the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, the
article is very often equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun,
or to awes in the oblique cases. E. g.
143.] PRONOUN. 185
To v Srttgov, equivalent to Tomov rov ovngov, This dream.
Trj g ds a^fdbr fa&' 'Evoalx&wv, And the Shaker of the earth
came near her. Here 1% is equivalent to avi^g.
The Attic dialect also often uses the article in this sense,
particularly in the formula o fisv ____ 6 ds, the one .... the other,
one ____ another. E. g.
"Orav o fj.sv it'tvy ftialwg, o d* enavaaTQscpfiv SWITCH, When
the one pulls violently one way, and the other is able to
putt back.
Tolg [iev 7iQO(Js%ovTceg tov vovv, twv ds ovds rrjv (pwvyv
avfjofievovc, Paying attention to some persons, but not
tolerating even the voice of others.
NOTE 1. The article is equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun, when it
stands immediately before the relative &, otro$, or olos. E. g. Outiivog vuv off a,
ai<r%uv9]v l<rri (pigovret, none of those things which bring shame. M iffiiv rous
olos ?* oSrost to hate those who are like this man.
NOTE 2. The proper name to which o (Ait refers is sometimes joined with it.
E. g. C O plv ovreiff' ' 'Arvftvtov c%6'i$ougi ) 'Avri>.o%o$ t the one, namely, An-
tilochus, pierced Atymnius with the sharp spear.
NOTE 3. 'O f&\v and o 3i are not always opposed to each other, but, instead
of one of them, another word is sometimes put. E. g. Ttagyog fiiv &, o 31
s, the one a husbandman, the other a builder of houses.
NOTE 4. The second part (o $) of the formula o /t*v ..... o M generally
refers to a person or thing different from that to which the first part (o p'sv)
refers.
2. In the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, the article is
often equivalent to the relative pronoun. E. g. "Ogvig IQOS, TW
ovvopa <polvi* 9 a sacred bird, the name of which is Phenix,
where TW stands for w.
NOTE 5. The tragedians (^Eschylus, Sophocles, Euripides) sometimes use
the article in this sense,
PRONOUN.
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
113. The personal pronoun of the third person may refer
either to a person or thing different from the subject of the
proposition, or to the subject of the proposition, in which it
stands. E.g. (II. 4, 533 5) Ogijixs?, ol e waav anb ayelwv,
the Thracians who drove him away from their position, where
refers to the person driven away, and aytlwv to 0^'ftce.;, the
antecedent of ol p .
16*
186 SYNTAX. [ 144.
It often refers to the subject of the preceding proposition,
if the proposition, in which it stands, is closely connected with
the preceding. E. g. ^AQyajdKwv ^.r\ ii ol yivritui xaxov f
fearing lest any evil should befall him, where ol refers to the
substantive with which ag$<udta>v agrees.
NOTE 1. In Homer and Herodotus the pronoun of the third person generally
refers to a person or thing different from the subject of the proposition, in which
it stands. In the Attic writers, it is generally reflexive, that is, it refers to the
subject of the proposition, in which it stands, or of the preceding, if the second
be closely connected with it.
NOTE 2. In some instances the personal pronoun of the third person stands
for that of the second. E. g. (II. 10, 398 : Herod. 3, 71.)
NOTE 3. The personal pronoun is sometimes repeated in the same proposition
for the sake of perspicuity. E. g. 'E^a* plv, il *} (MI xatQ-' 'Exx^va/v
^9-oW TiSW^tfciS-', XA.* ovv "fvr (tot $oxi7f X.i'yuv, to us, although we
have not been brought up in the land of the Greeks, nevertheless thou seemest to
speak intelligible things.
NOTE 4. The forms Ifiov, cpol, tys, are more emphatic than
the corresponding enclitics pov t pol, ps. E. g. Jog epol, give
to ME, but Jo? [i 01, give me.
After a preposition only efiov, efiol, tys are used. Except p$
In the formula nqoq /we, to me.
14 4. ! Amog, in the genitive, dative, and accusative,
without a substantive joined with it, signifies him, her, it, them.
E.g.
<C O rofjiog avTov ovx ea, The law does not permit him.
fQi OIVTOV tlva yvw^v ; What does she think of him ?
NOTE 1. Avros in the abovementioned cases is sometimes used in this sense,
when the noun, to which it refers, goes before in the same proposition. This
happens when the noun is separated from the verb, upon which it depends, by
intermediate clauses. E. g. 'Ey&/ /ulv ovv fix<ri*.iet, J <roXXa ovrag iff*' *&
ffVf/,/*ct%a, ii<xt vf^o^-VfAtiroe.1 fiftus u^ro^.ia'en, ovx otoet o <rt $t7 KVTOV op-offai,
now, for my part, I do not see why the king, whose resources are so great, should
swear to us, if he really meant to destroy us.
REMARK 1 . Aurog in the oblique cases is sometimes joined to the relative
pronoun for the sake of perspicuity. E. g. Tip o piv avruv, one of whom.
Examples of this kind often occur in the Septuagint and New Testament.
2. Avrog, joined to a substantive, signifies self, very. In
this case, it is placed either before the substantive and its
article, or after the substantive. The article, however, is often
omitted. E. g.
*TTI* avrov TOVQUVOV TOV XVTTOCQOV, Under the very vault
of heaven.
145.] PRONOUN. 187
NOTE 2. The personal pronouns tyri, ov, rjptlg, v^flg, with
which avTog is put in apposition, are very often omitted ; in
which case amog has the appearance of these pronouns. E. g.
AvTol evdselg eafiev iwv x# 3 ^aioav^wt are in want of our
daily bread. AVTOI -cpctlvea&e ftallov tovioig muTsvovreg,
you seem to place more confidence in these men.
NOTE 3. AUTOS often signifies /u.ovo;, alone- E. g. Auro} ya,^ lo-ft-v, xouvru
%ivoi ra^nfftvjfor we are by ourselves, and strangers have not yet come.
REMARK 2. AUTOS is used when a person or thing is to be opposed to any
thing connected with it. E. g. HoXXas $' itpS-tpous ^u%ois "A'i^i vr^olioL-^/iv
Hgaeuv, etvrovg $1 tXea^toe. nv%& xuvifftrtv, and sent prematurely many brave
souls of heroes to Hades, and made their bodies the prey of dogs, where etvrovf,
them, that is, the heroes, or rather, their bodies, is opposed to -^v^xg.
REMARK 3. AUTOS denotes the principal person as distinguished from servants
or disciples. E.g. (Aristoph. Nub. 218-19) Tt$ euros o avfy ; MA0.
AUTOS- 2TP. Tts air os \ MA0. "%ux,oa.Tn$, Pray who is that man?
Disc. It is HE. STR. What HE ? Disc. Socrates.
NOTE 4. AUTOS is often appended to the subject of a proposition containing
the reflexive pronoun iavrou, for the sake of emphasis. E. g. TLet^xta-rriv vuv
iea(>otffx,iutt.tTtt.i i<r* eturos ctvru, he is preparing a combatant against himself.
In such cases nlros is placed as near letvrov as possible ( 232).
NOTE 5. Avjog is often used with ordinal numbers, to show
that one person with others, whose number is less by one than
the number implied in the ordinal, is spoken of. E. g. c fli,gs&r]
TtQtaptviviq eg ^tocxBdalfiova amoxgonwQ, dexctrog ctvxog, he,
with nine others, was appointed plenipotentiary to Laccdamion,
where dexctrog avTog is equivalent to ^ST' allow tvvia, with nine
others.
NOTE 6. In some instances, auras is equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun.
E. g. 'A^riflTTt;^' ayrjjv, I despise that (woman).
3. Amog, with the article before it, signifies the same. E. g.
IIsQi ttov UVTWV trig avTrg rj^sgag ov rav-cot
[isv, We do not have the same opinion concerning the
same things on the same day.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUN.
145. The reflexive pronoun refers to the subject of the
proposition in which it stands, or to the subject of the preced-
ing, if the second be closely connected with it. E. g.
sTiidelxvv, Shoic thyself.
avp/3ovlovg rovg ctfietvov yoovovrTag vpwv v-
T w v, You icish to have those for your advisers, who reason
better than you.
IS8 SYNTAX. [146-143.
NOTE 1. Sometimes the reflexive pronoun of the third person stands for that of
the first or second. E. g. Ai? y/teis KvtgitrS-eu ictv<rous,we must ask ourselves,
where i<zwrou; stands for ^usc; O,UTOU$. Mo^ov <rbv KVTWS oljS-a, tlwu knowest
thy lot, where etvrtjs stands for o-ayr*??.
NOTE 2. Sometimes this pronoun in the third person dual and plural stands
for the reciprocal pronoun. E. g. KaS- 1 ttvroTv, for KT' aXAA0/v, against
each other. 3>d-ovovvrsg iauroTg, for <&&ovou*rtg XAjA?, envying one
another*
POSSESSIVE PRONOUN.
141O. It has already been remarked, that the possessive
pronouns are, in signification, equivalent to the genitive of the
personal pronouns (^ 67). E. g.
Otxo? o aog, equivalent to O oixog oov, Thy house. ( 173.)
17 1x1$ a 6$, equivalent to'naig aov, A son of thine, (ibid.)
NOTE 1. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used objectively. E. g. 2 a*
voS-os, my regret for thee, not thy regret for others. ( 173. N. 2.)
NOTE 2. In some instances the possessive pronoun of the third person is put
for that of the^rsf or second. E. g. O^i^/v yfftv, for O^<r/v t^ua/V, in my soul.
NOTE 3. Sometimes log, his, stands for ff<pirio$, their f and ff$rtos for log.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.
147. The interrogative pronoun tig is used either in
direct or in indirect questions. E. g. 2v tig el; who art
thou 1 Olds 1 1 POV)LSTOU, he knows what (it) wants.
This head includes also the interrogative pronominal adjec-
tives (73). E. g. Kara nolagnvkag siafo&es ; through what
gates did you come in 1
NOTE 1. It is to be observed that tig does not always stand
at the beginning of the interrogative clause.
NOTE 2. Tig is sometimes equivalent to nolog. E. g. Tlva
ambv (fr^ao^v elvou / what kind of person shall we call him 1
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
14 8. 1. The indefinite pronoun -rig annexed to a substan-
tive means a certain^ some, or simply, a, an. E, g."0gvi,&eg
uvig, some birds, 'ipovidv tivot, a well-rope.
2. Without a substantive it means some one, somebody, a
certain one. E. g. l4ma#V^v tig xafaad-w, let some one
call Antisthenes.
149.] PRONOUN. 189
NOTE 1. 1} s is sometimes equivalent to 'Uacros. E. g. Ev rtg tyu $*
let every one sharpen his spear well.
NOTE 2. Sometimes TV; refers to the person who speaks, and sometimes to
the person addressed. E. g. Ho7 rtg Qvyot ; where can one (that is, I) go?
"H.xu TM x&xov, misfortune is coming to some body (that is, to thee .
NOTE 3. Ttg is often joined to adjectives of quality or quantity. E. g. Twn
ugotioraTti <rts, a most blooming woman. &t*.ovo*.i$ ri? sVS-' o $aip,cuv, the
god is friendly to the city. Ho<ro$ rig; how great? 'Hpiga.; ifi^oftvxovra,
Tivets, some seventy days, or, about seventy days.
NOTE 4. Tig sometimes means somebody, in the sense of a distinguished
person, a man of consequence, and T< means something great. E. g. 3>atvop.eit
vis vptg, I seem to be some body, that is, a man of consequence. M E$o%i
vi tiviTv, he seemed to say something great.
NOTE 5. Sometimes the poets double rig. E. g. "E^rr/ r/y ov Xo<ro)
Svrtig'rvs xo\n rig, there is a certain city not far from Sparta.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN
149. 1. OvTog and ode regularly denote that which
is present or near in place or time, or something just men-
tioned. E. g. Oviog o avriQ, this man. "Hds y yvvr), this
woman, 'ravin wxovaug, hearing these things.
NOTE 1 . Qvros and 'obi are sometimes equivalent to the adverbs bravS-a, JS,
here. E. g. Atirtj 2s a-oi ytjg wtgicdog KafHg. 'O^a? ; A7s [t\v 'AS-qvetf.
Here thou hast a map of the whole earth. Seest thou ? Here is Athens*
2. 'fixelvog regularly refers to a remote person or thing.
E. g. TOVTOVI yovv old 3 eyw, xvixeirovi, I know this one.
and that one.
NOTE 2. 3 xflvog often refers to that which immediately
precedes, in which case it corresponds to the English he. E. g.
&QOVOV, he had possession of the
tragic throne.
NOTE 3. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun refers to a noun which goes
before in the same proposition, if that noun has been separated from the govern-
ing word by intervening clauses. E. g. Tv peivrtv, as Cixiro Ty ffr^etri^
<ry<rj, M.fyiffrixv rov 'Axee,gvtjva, ..... rovrov TOV s}Vv<r l reJv t^uy
vu, ju.iM.ovra. ff$i Ix/3am/v, <p&vtgos \<rrt Atavfins awro rfffruv, it is evident that
Leonidas tried to send away the soothsayer Megistias tJie Acarnanian, who
followed this army, ..... / mean the one who prophesied what would happen to
them.
NOTE 4. The demonstrative pronoun sometimes follows the
relative in the same proposition. E. g. *Ivdov noroc^bv, o g x^o-
xodfllovg dfVTfgog ovTog noiotfi&v naviwv Tra^^crai, the river
Indus, which is the only river in the world, except onc 9 that
produces crocodiles.
190 SYNTAX. [ 150.
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
15O. 1. The relative pronoun agrees with the
noun, to which it refers, in gender and number.
Its case depends on the construction of the clause
in which it stands. E. g.
Ns o x A * / <5 ?; , og ion rvcplog, Neodides, who is blind.
Miaw TioklTTjv, oaTig tocpehslv nongav (Sgadvg necpvxf, I
hate that citizen who is slow to aid his country.
Twv dud ex a fivuv, ctg tkafag, Of the twelve mince, which
thou receivedst.
The word, to which the relative refers, is called the ante-
cedent.
This head includes also the relative pronominal adjectives
(73). E. g. *AMoi oaoig psTsaTi rov xgyarov TQOTIOV, as
many others as possess a good character.
NOTE 1. In some instances a masculine relative pronoun in
the dual refers to a feminine noun. E. g. 'ffpwv iv exdctTM dvo
jive fornv Idea $Q%OVJS xal ayovis, olv kno^&a, in each one
of us there are two ideas governing and leading us, which
we follow.
NOTE 2. Sometimes the gender of the relative is determined by the gender
implied in the antecedent. E. g. Tag 'AS-wvaj, o't <yt l^at xui yfttri^oc. <ro
iftov v-T70|av otiixa. woitvvrts, Athens, which city began Jirst to injure me and
my father, where oi refers to the inhabitants of Athens.
NOTE 3. The relative often agrees in gender and number
with the noun which is joined to it by a verb signifying to call
or name, to be, to believe, ( 166.) E. g. "AK^YIV, at xalivvxai,
Khri'idtg, a promontory, which is called Cleides. C cpofiog,
r^v aida) tino^v, that kind of 'fear , which we called respect.
2. If the relative refers to two or more nouns, it is
generally put in the plural. If the nouns denote animate
beings, the relative is masculine when one of the nouns is
masculine. If the nouns denote inanimate objects, the relative
is generally neuter. E. g. Al'ag xal Tevxgog, ot tieyiaiov t'Af/-
%ov tdoaav Tyg avTWi' avdgiag, Ajax and Teucer, who gave the
greatest proof of their valor, negl nolepov x&l slyyvrj?, a
fjLByLaTr^v fysi, dvvot[uv, concerning war and peace, which have
very great power.
NOTE 4. The relative often agrees in gender with one
OF
150.] PRONOUN.
of the nouns to which it refers. E. g. *A
xal xwSvvwv Y.CU Tuga%ri<;, tig r^v y x. T. L, being delivered from
wars, dangers, and trouble, to which, fyc.
3. The relative is often put in the plural, when it refers
to a collective noun in the singular. E.g. shlnelioibv ovg
Tci(pQog egvxev, he left the people, whom the ditch kept back.
flag TLQ opvvoLj olg ocpsttw, every one, to whom I happen to
owe money, swears.
REMARK. The relative is put in the plural also when it
refers to a whole class of persons or things implied in a singu-
lar antecedent. E. g. *Avr\Q, ay'vovgybg, olneg oco'ovai y^v t
a man of the working class, which class are the safety of the
land.
NOTE 5. The relative in the singular often refers to an
antecedent in the plural, when one of the persons or things
contained in that antecedent is meant. E. g. Olvog as TQaiei,
(jishrfdrjg, og is xal alhovg fikoiTnsi,, og av piv %avSbv I'AJ?, sweet
wine affects thee, which injures whoever else takes it freely ,
where og refers to any person contained in
4. The proposition containing the relative is often placed
before the proposition which contains the antecedent, when
the leading idea of the whole period is contained in the former.
This is called inversion. E. g. Ovg V ?wv hoycov A/w xlvwr,
Tovads xtxl ngdoaziv aw/a), I do not dare to do those things,
which it gives me pain to hear. Mdov 3 oatig civil T%g aviov
nuuQag ylkov vo{ilei, TOVTOV ovdapov Ac'/w, whoever thinks
that he has a dearer friend than his own country, him I call a
contemptible man.
This inversion often takes place also for the sake of emphasis.
NOTE 6. This remark applies also to the relative adverbs.
( 123.) E. g. Ol d* OTS dy Q' f ixut'ov, o&i axonov ''ExTogog
txTuv, f'v ft* *0dvuavg psv SQVJ-S wxiag Innovg, and when they
came there where they had killed the spy of Hector, then
Ulysses stopped the swift horses.
5. The antecedent is often omittedj when it is either a gen-
eral word (xQrina, ngay^ia, ovrog, txelvog}, or one which can be
easily supplied from the context. E. g. C l4 (Jovtea&t heyovrsg,
saying what you like, where refers to ngdy^aia governed by
?.8/o?'Tc. To [isys&og, VJIEQ w v ovvtlijfiv&apsv, the magnitude
of the business, for which ive are assembled.
So in the formula Elalv 01 Uyovaiv, there are who say.
192 SYNTAX. [ 151.
NOTE 7. In some instances the antecedent is implied in a
possessive pronoun. E. g. 'AvctrSQtn rfj y /u T s Q a, olnvss as
ov dieawaapw, through the cowardice of us, who did not save
thee, where qpm'^a is equivalent to ?^wy, to which the relative
in reality refers.
191. 1. In general, when the relative would
regularly be put in the accusative, it is put in the
genitive or dative, according as the antecedent is in
the genitive or dative. This is called ATTRACTION.
E.g.
*x TOVTWV, wv Uyn, From these things, which he says.
Here wv stands for the accusative after Ityet. ( 163. 1.)
!fe> avTolg olg tnotyyettovrai, In those things which they
profess. Here olg stands for a after enctyysMoviai. (ibid.)
REMARK 1. If the antecedent be a demonstrative pronoun,
this pronoun is generally omitted ( 148. 5), and the relative
takes its case. E. g. ^ligyovtag oig civ IXWJASV, for ^TsgyovTotg
cxfivoig, a av l/w^usv, being satisfied with what we have.
v wv jvyxdvofABV e^ovisg, for '.El Ixtlvtov, a ivy%avo^v
g, we go away from those possessions which we happen to
have.
REMARK 2. In attraction the noun joined to the relative
pronoun by a verb signifying to call, to be, to believe, ( 166,)
also takes the case of the relative. E. g. TOVTWV, wv av
Ssunoivwv xAif, for Tomwv, oig av d&ffixotrag xaktlg, of these,
whom thou callest mistresses.
NOTE 1. In some instances the relative, even when it would be in the nomi-
native, is attracted by the antecedent. E. g. (Herod. 1, 78) OlMv xu titans
<ruv v\v Tspi 2a^;j, for Qv'bsv KU tftorts ixiivuv a, %v *ff^^i 2a^o/?, as yet know-
ing nothing of what happened in Sardes.
REMARK 3. The nominative of the pronominal o7o$ is often attracted by the
antecedent. E. g. Tlgos civ^gets ro>.fn.^^ovst 'iov$ xctt 'AS-yvetiovs, to
daring men, such as the Athenians are, where o'iovs xat 'ASwot'tovf stands for
0401 X.O.} ' AS-flVKiOt ftffl.
REMARK 4. In some instances the personal pronoun, connected with olo$,
remains in the nominative, though 010$ has been attracted by its antecedent.
E. g. Near/*; 31, o'iovs <rv, S/aSsSjaxoras, but young men, like thee,
decamping, where etovg trv stands for oJos ffv ti.
REMARK 5. 'Hx/**; sometimes imitates oTos ( 151. R. 3). E. g. 'Exttva
"Sttvov roTffiv hx'txotfft vuv, that is a hard thing to men of our years> where
fatxtirt vuv stands for fatxot vy \<r^.
152.] PRONOUN. 193
NOTE 2. Relative adverbs (^ 123) also are attracted by the
word to which they refer. E. g. 'fc'x /TJS, o&ev TIQOVXSITO,
from the place where it lay, where odiv stands for o&i or onov.
2. On the other hand, the antecedent is sometimes put in
the case of its relative. E. g.
M&iayqog Tag ftev rificcg ag shafts q>a.vtgal t The honors which
Meleager received are well known, where -tag Tipag stands
for oil npctl.
Ovx olaOa polQag yg ivx&v avxyv XQ ft **; Knowest thounot
the fate which she must meet 1 for ^olg
NOTE 3. The same- is true of relative adverbs. E. g.*'Al-
hoas OTIOI av txcplxy ayanifaovoi as, they will love thee in
other places whither thou mayest go, where a'AAooe stands for
or
3. Very frequently, in case of attraction, the antecedent is
put after its relative. E. g.
Kujaay.svoc^ovTCt r\g UQ^OI %WQug, for Kmuaxtva^ovToi jyv %(a-
guv, rig u^oi, Improving the country, which he governed.
REMARK 6. Frequently the principal words are attracted by,
and placed after, the relative. E.g. Ol'ztrm qpeiyrur, ov r^ytq
IKXQTV Qa, for *0 [ia(jTvg t ov ftf*?, ol'xtiai (ptvyMr, the wit-
ness whom you brought has decamped. Ol ncdctiol wtivoi,
d)v oropnTct p-f/ukw. AtytTixi enl ao(jp/, 7/tTTxov if, x/ hlctv-
iog, those ancient persons, Pitfacus and Bias, who are re-
nowned for wisdom, where wy attracts only the proper names.
REMARK 7. The antecedent may be placed after its relative
even when apparently no attraction takes place. E. g. 'Anoyv-
yoig V r\vtiv* av 6ovty dixy?, you can get clear in any
lawsuit you please.
NOTE 4. Sometimes only the adjective belonging to the antecedent is placed
after the relative. E. g. Aoyous a.x,ovffov t ovg &GI ^uffTu^tTs tjtu <f>i/av t for
Aoyou; ax.ov<rov ^vfrv^t7s t oils ffot %xw $l(>av, hear the melancholy news which I
have brought to thee.
5. The relative pronoun often stands for the demonstra-
tive pronoun, especially in the Epic language. E. g. JidrQoxhov
o yt*Q ysQotg earl davovrwr, let us mourn PatrocluSj
for this (that is, to mourn) is honor to the dead.
So in the formula og ph.... og ds, equivalent to o pir...,
de, ( 142. 1.)
17
194 SYNTAX. [ 153- 156.
So in the formula Kal oV, for Kod oviog. E. g. Km} o$, /*-
fiwuas /ue/a, wj'ee^^cJcjxct, awe? Ae, uttering a loud cry, jumps up.
So in the formula >/<5' o?, said he, used parenthetically.
NOTE 1. Frequently the relative is apparently put for the
demonstrative. E. g. (II. 1.0, 314, etseq.)V/y 8i TI? iv Tgusaat
dolwv, Ev^.i]dBo<s vlog, ..... o got JOTS Tywalv rs xcu "jExrogi, juv-
^oy Zsintv, there was among the Trojans a certain Dolon, son
of E-umedes, ..... that man, I say, spoke to the Trojans and
to Hector.
NOTE 2. This rule ( 15*2) applies also to the relative ad-
verb u s . ($ 123. N. 1.)
The relative often stands for the interrogative rig,
but only in indirect interrogations. E. g. 4>gd&i> TW
oa tic tail, he declares to the captain of the vessel who he is.
NOTE. "Oar/? is particularly used when the person, who is
asked, repeats the question before he answers it. E. g. (Aristoph.
Nub. 1496) "Av&gwne, il nomg , 2TP. "0 11 noiw ; Man, what
are you doing ? STR. What am I doing ?
ltS4L Frequently the relative has the force of the con-
junction IW, in order that, that. E. g. Ugsa/Selav nsunw,
rjTtc javT egu, to send an embassy to say these things.
RECIPROCAL PRONOUN.
1JO. The reciprocal pronoun regularly refers to the
subject of the proposition in which it stands, which subject is
either in the dual or plural. E.g. TOHXVTM TIQO
uyooivov, such things were they saying to one another.
NOTE. Sometimes aXA^Xwv stands for lavruv. E.g. A/c^St/gay
they destroyed themselves, that is, each destroyed himself.
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
1*56. 1. The subject of a proposition is that of which
any thing is affirmed. The predicate is that which is affirmed
of the subject. E. g. l4Ax//5iJy? flnev, Alcibiades said, where
3 AkxL{3i(xdT]g is the subject of the proposition, and tintr, the
predicate. 'jByu txTotyoc tlpi, I am timid, where fyw is the sub-
ject, and aW/jo? el t ui, the predicate.
2. The subject is either grammatical or logical.
157.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 195
The grammatical subject is either a substantive or some
word standing for a substantive.
The logical subject consists of the grammatical subject with
the words connected with it. E. g. in the proposition 'Axovaag
rccvxa o KvQog tTiil&ETo, Cyrus, hearing these things, was
persuaded, KvQog is the grammatical, and axovaug jama o
Kvyog, the logical subject.
157. 1. The SUBJECT OF A FINITE VERB
is put in the nominative.
A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative
in number and person. E. g.
3 JEyw ley a, I say.
2v Ityeig, Thou sayest.
*%s1vog kdysi, He says.
2. The nominative of the neuter plural very often takes the
verb in the singular. E. g.
Tn tfTttTv^T aywvlfsiai, The armies arc fighting.
tysrixo, These things happened.
NOTE 1. Sometimes masculines and feminines dual or plural take the verb in
the singular. E. g. SavSett xoptzi xetrtvvvoS-tv upovs, her auburn hair
was flowing over her shuulders. 'H/u.7v olx, 'i<m KU^U* IK, <pogp.fto$ ^ov\u
vet<*ppi'rrou*rt <ro7s S-teuplvots, we do not exhibit two slaves throwing nuts
out of a basket to the spectators.
So in the phrase "E/rriv oi, ( 150. 5,) there are who.
3.' If the verb belongs to more than one subject, it is put
in the plural and in the chief person. The chief person is
the first with respect to the second or third, and the second
with respect to the third. E. g.
TOTS I^^TLOMVTO Hoasid awv Y.ULI *Anoh).wv Ti%og e^uaZ-
dvvnu, Then Neptune and Apollo resolved to demolish the
wall.
NOTE 2. Frequently the verb agrees in number with one of
the substantives, and especially with that which stands nearest
to it. E. g. 2vv d' EVQOQ rs NoTog T snsae, Zecpvgog js dvaaqg,
xnl Bogey?, Eurus and Notus rushed together, the blustering
Zt'phyrus and Boreas.
REMARK 1. The verb is often put in the dual, if it belongs
to two substantives in the singular. E. g. C J/ kvyonoiixr) x<n rj
mt&m*t<fTuri) nolv duxcpsQSTov (xMnft.oiv, the art of making tyres,
and the art of playing on the harp, differ much from each other.
196 SYNTAX. (_$ 157.
NOTE 3. When the substantives are connected by the con-
junction if, or, the verb is put either in the plural or in the
singular. E. g. Ji dd * *ld(jij? tx(j%wai pozygt i] <l>oHfto<; *Anok-
JLwv, but if Mars commence the fight, or Phwbus Apollo. "Ov
*fv f'yu aytx'/M, 1} AAo !4^twy, whom I or any other of the
Achccans may bring.
4. A collective noun in the singular very often has the verb
in the plural. E. g.
To n A i] & o g oi'ovtttt, The multitude think,
flaxaav y nJni&vg, The multitude spake.
This rule applies also to the pronominal adjectives txaaiog
and liMog. E.g. "jtpflikov la$KJ&ixi OQ^t t d\)v f'xworzog dixot
dgazptis, each person teas to have for his share ten drachmae.
NOTE 4. A noun in the dual often takes a plural verb.
E. g. JTcp o) o a (J a T e, you two will save.
On the other hand, a noun in the plural takes a verb in the
dual, when only two persons or things are meant. E. g.
(II. 3, 278 -9) OV rlwvdov, you two who punish, where o*
refers to Pluto and Proserpine.
NOTE 5. The nominatives tyw, VM, 17/1 f 7?, are f tne fi fst
person ; au, ayw, v^uf/c, are of the second person ; all other
nominatives are of the third person.
The nominatives of the first and second person are usually
not expressed, except when emphasis is required.
NOTE 6. The verb which agrees with the relative pronoun
is in the first or second person, accord ing as the antecedent is
of the first or of the second person. E. g. '///uly ov 3vtie,
a'ljivfg iriQov^tfv u t w?, you do not sacrifice to us, who pre-
serve you. A^tkiQ^ ^*}PJ v? i% fi ? *n v fvj? ptiiWQovj O thou
immeasurable Air I who holdcst the earth suspended.
So when the antecedent is implied in a possessive pronoun
( 150. N. 7). E. g. 'ArtxrdQin jfj ?^fT'^, o'irtrtg OE ov
di eoojau^LfVj through the cowardice of us, who did not save
thcc.
REMARK 2. Any noun which is in apposition with the omitted personal pro-
noun ( 136 : 157. N. 5) of the first person, may have the verb in the first
person. E. g. Qspio-roHXti; %KU vretgat ei, I, Themistoclcs, have come to thee.
NOTE 7. Sometimes the verb agrees in number with the nominative in the
predicate 160. 1 ). This takes place chiefly when the nominative in the pred-
icate precedes the verb. E. g. 'Eirrov Sue \o$u n 'Oa/mw y^*X, equivalent
to n 'Idtyetvu tc-ri $vo Xo^ w^fl/.a/, Idomene is two high /tills.
158.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 197
NOTE 8. The third person of a verb is often found without
a subject,
(1) When any thing general and indefinite is expressed.
E. g. Oudt xev tv&ct Tfov ye fidvog xal %ttQttg OVOITO, sc. rig,
even here no one would find fault with thy valor and strength.
Atyovai or (paal sc. UV&QMTIOI, they say.
Frequently the word 7r^/// is to be supplied. E. g. z/?;>lw-
#?j'(jrat, the thing will show itself. Ovwg txsi, it is so. /ZoA-
lov del, it icant s much, far from it. Jsl%si drj nfaa, the event
will soon show.
(2) When the verb indicates the employment of any person,
the word denoting that person is generally omitted. E. g.
J$xi}ov$t TO!? "l&hiai naQnaxtvdaaa&ai, sc. o XTJ^VS, the herald
proclaimed to the Greeks to prepare themselves. Tov vofiov
vfiiv aviov (xvayvwaeTai, sc. 6 ygctmj.ctTev$, the secretary shall
read to you the law itself.
(3) Frequently the verb is changed into the third person
singular passive, and its subject-nominative into the dative
( 206. 2). E. g. Toig nofaploig VTVxr]Tai, for Ol
tvivxyxuai, the enemy have succeeded. Kalug aoi
for Kalwg a7ifxX(t(/o, thou hadst answered well.
(4) The subject of verbs denoting the state of the weather
or the operations of nature is not expressed. E. g. "Tei, it rains.
2V/qpa, it snows, ^'aaaf, there ivas an earthquake. JVaxoTf,
it grows dark.
NOTE 9. Frequently the subject of a proposition becomes
the immediate object ( 163. 1) of the verb of the preceding
proposition. E. g. ffrtQe vvv dfrgyaa TIQMTOV TOVTOVI, o 11
dya, for 4>/^s vvv a^f<j>, o 11 dga oi'iooi, now let me secjirst
what this fellow here is doing.
NOTE 10. The verb tlpl, a???, is very often omitted, but
chiefly when it is a copula ( 160. 1). E. g. "fLga Stmivai, sc.
imi, it is time to go.
REMARK 3. Other verbs also may be omitted, but only when
they can be supplied from the context.
NOTE 11. The nominative is often used for the vocative.
E.g. tfu'Aoe, for &lfa, friend.
ltS8. 1. The SUBJECT OF THE INFINITIVE
MOOD is put in the accusative. E. g.
Bovha&e GCVTOV tld-slv ; Do you wish him to come? Here
the accusative nviov is the subject of the infinitive &&clv.
El v on, &tovg fW/itffr, He believed that there arc gods.
aolv avTov paatleveiv, They say that he reigns.
108 SYNTAX. [ 158.
2. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed
when it is the same with the subject of the pre-
ceding proposition. E. g.
Olfjui firorjttifqi, I think I have found. Here the sub-
ject (fit) of tvQijxbw is not expressed because it refers to
the subject (tyw) of o7/*w*.
Tv<flb<: yvwvai Soxtl rouro, A blind man seems to know this.
J'.m vftw u n o /i f Q p ) t Q i a a t, I wish to doze.
NOTE 1. Sometimes the accusative of the personal or reflexive pronoun is
expressed before the infinitive, contrary to the preceding rule ( 158. 2). E. g.
' <pvp.t XiXctfftivo* ip i vat aXxijs, I suy that I have forgotten my valor.
NOTK 2. The subject of the infinitive is frequently put in
the case of the subject of the preceding independent proposi-
tion. This takes place chiefly when both subjects refer to the
same person or tiling. E. g.
ffc *pjun?c (tiv wi$t<j&ai oov, or* TO; ds rvmyofivj
t thou imagine that we shall tolerate thcc, and that
thou canst strike ? Here aviog stands for OKVTOV.
[t oi'tufr* Vfilv tltioiativ, vpfl? ds ve^itla^ai; Do you
think that I shall contribute, but that you will enjoy the
contribution ? Here vftg stands for
So *jf: qp TJ (j & n KQOVIMVI oi'i] i.oiyov ftp v vex i, thou saidst that
thou alone avertcdst destruction from the son of Saturn. Here
ofy stands for ol'uv agreeing with ae understood.
NOTE 3. Frequently the subject of the infinitive is wanting
even when it is different from that of the preceding independ-
ent proposition. E. g. Hr t [.ioru7<fi> xayu&rp/fflti, naa^eir u\yti-
vouaiv, I am afflicted with mffcritigs painful to endure, where
the subject of 7iun%fiv (nvu understood) is different from that
. (See also 219. N. 3.)
3. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed
also when it is the same with the object of the pre-
ceding proposition. E. g.
*Edt!ro nviwv poy&f'iv fpoi, He prayed them to aid me.
Here the subject (uroi'c) is not expressed, because it re-
fers to the object (ai/rwr) of tdflio ( 181).
awy'/eilev fjfjlv xnfl tvdtiv, He commanded us to sleep.
Here the subject (fang) of xn&fvdfiv is omitted because it
is the same with the object (t^uiv) of nn^yyedtv ( 196. 2).
vtfovopev aAAijAwy nsign&i'jvai, We request
159, 160.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 199
two men to try each other's skill. In such instances the
accusative denoting the object of the verb ( 1(53) must
not be mistaken for the subject of the infinitive.
NOTE 4. A participle agreeing with the omitted subject of
the infinitive is very often put in the accusative. E. g.
vovg, OTI ovx av ytroiro TOVTOV pflZtnr uyu'n> (.101, I beseech you
to condemn Theomnestus, when you consider that I could not
have had a severer trial than this. ?rla i]y^iv nay*' yy tils,
Infiovrn TOI'V ilrdqag, he requested Xenias to take the men and
come. ( 158. 3.)
NOTE 5. When the infinitive has the force of a neuter sub-
stantive ( 159. 2 : 221), its subject is frequently omitted, in
which case the accusative of ilg or i5roc is to be supplied.
E. g. JQUV Twurw %qi] t sc. xiva, one must do these things.
1*5O. 1. In general, any word or clause may be the
subject of a proposition. E. g.
<I>IAO pw euTiv (#>} TOV xwxoi;, The word <1>IAO indeed is the
beginning of the evil.
2. Particularly, the subject of a proposition may be an
infinitive with the words connected with it. E. .
J o
IIQOXSIQOV fijnv sjiaiveaoti rt]v (>fr?jv, It is easy to praise
virtue. Here tnuLviaat ^r^v uynriv is the subject of the
proposition.
NOTE 1. The subject of Stt,
oviifialvu, %gri, and some others, is generally an infinitive.
E.g.
z/fi f^u ksysiv, I must say, or It is necessary that I should
say. Here fys. \iynv is the subject of del.
NOTE 2. Verbs, of wliicli the subject is an infinitive are called IMPERSONAL.
Such verbs must not be confounded with those, of which the subject is not
expressed ( 157. N. 8).
3. The subject of an infinitive is frequently another infini-
tive with the words connected with it. E. g. Ov (pr^i, %Qn~
vai tovg viovg jt t v ylwiwnv (/x7i', he says that young men
ought not to exercise the tongue, where jov$ viovq TTJV
av is the subject of ^ojjyca ( 159. N. 1, 2).
16O. 1. The PREDICATE, like the subject ($ 156. 2),
is either grammatical or logical.
200 SYNTAX. [ 161.
The grammatical predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb
(commonly a verb signifying to be, to be called), and a sub-
stantive, adjective, pronoun, or participle. In the latter case,
the verb is called the copula.
The logical predicate consists of the grammatical predicate
with the words connected with it. E. g. *HV Ktndav'^g tv-
Quvvog ^(xydiwv, Candaules was king of Sardes, where yv
TVQcxrvog is the grammatical, and ?]> ivqawog 2v.(>diu)v, the logical
predicate.
2. A substantive in the predicate is put in the same case as
the subject when it refers to the same person or thing. ( 136.)
E.g. '
!fi/eJ flfii nlovTog, lam Plutus. Here Ji^oviog agrees in
case with tya.
*Hv Kav$uvl7\<; rvQcevvog 2aQ8lwv, Candaules was king
of Sardes. Here ivqnvvoq in the predicate agrees with
the subject Kurdav^g in case.
3. The gender, number, and case of an adjective, standing
in the predicate, and referring to the subject, are determined
by 137. E. g.
a&drmog fifti, I am immortal.
avrov ywstf&at aocpov; Do you wish him to be-
come wise 1
NOTE 1. When the subject is any word but a nominative
( 159), the adjective or pronoun in the predicate is neuter
(commonly neuter singular). E. g. Ov dlxaiov f\m jovg
xQfiTTovg IMV rfTTovwv UQ%SIV, it is not right, that the stronger
should rule the weaker.
NOTE 2. Frequently a neuter adjective in the predicate
refers to a masculine or feminine noun. E. g. ftihoixxiatov
yvvri eaTi, woman is a very tender-hearted thing.
In such cases, the word Tigix/pa is sometimes expressed.
E. g, rvvnUxa d' livm nQuyp tcpr) vov flvaTixov , but wo-
man, he said, is a prudent thing.
1O1. 1. When the subject of the infinitive is not ex-
pressed ( 158. 2, 3), the substantive or adjective, standing in
the predicate and referring to the omitted subject, is put in the
case, in which the subject has already appeared. E. g.
slvai doxng, Thou seem est to be pale. Here the ad-
jective is put in the nominative on account of av with
which doxug agrees ( 157. N. 5).
162.] OBJECT. 201
KVQOV edtovTO ngo&v poiatov ysvi&ai r They besought
Cyrus to be very eager.
Jiaxe^tvaopat, io"lq iovaiv flvott, n QO&V J.IOTUTOI g, I will
command those icho go to be very eager.
NOTE. This construction ( 161. l) may take place also when the infinitive
has the article before it ( 221). E. g. *O Ai<r%vXos <ra.\iv eivruirtv o'l'xotSi,
$ia ro ffuvtros tJveti, jEschylus returns home because he is wise.
It takes place also when the infinitive comes after the particle a/We ( 220).
Also when the infinitive depends on a participle ( 219). K. g. TLoXXot
ruv T o ffirotvffafAi vta v tUveti ffoQurrav, for n^XXo/ ixitvcav ol vr^offi-
*oiYi<ra.v<To ttveu troQiirra.!, many of those who pretended to be sophists, ( InO. 3.)
2. When a proposition is made the subject of another propo-
sition ( 159. 2, 3), the substantive, adjective, or participle in
the predicate or subject of the former proposition is often put
in the case of the noun which is in the predicate of the latter.
E. g. *E(p fj pi v t'cmu TO initiviiai xul cpuvkoic sivui, for
To i]fi(Hi; fTiifixfls xi/.l (pnviovg Hviu tari ftp *l[u v y to be respecta-
ble or worthless will depend upon us, where the proposition TO
snisixtai ..... uvaL is the subject, and iy r^av e'arua, the
predicate.
In such cases the predicate always precedes the subject.
Further, this takes place only when the attracting word in the
predicate is in the dative,
OBJECT.
1OS. 1. That on which an action is exerted, or to
which it refers, is called the object.
The object is put in the accusative, genitive, or dative.
2. Participles and verbal adjectives in
(^ 132. 2) are followed by the same case as the
verb from which they are derived.
For examples, see below.
NOTE 1. The verbal in reov with fVr/ (expressed or under-
stood) represents du ($ 159. N. 1) and the infinitive active or
middle of the verb from which it is derived. E. g.
xoi'o, hear, nxouotiov equivalent to dn uxovnv, one must hear.
pi plop n i, imitate, pipyTiov equivalent to dtl pi^Ha^ai, one
must imitate.
In some instances it represents dt? and the infinitive passive.
E. g. TjTi(xo t uou, am surpassed, ^r^iiov, one must be surpassed.
202 SYNTAX. [ 163, 164.
NOTE 2. The neuter plural of the verbal adjective in TSOV
is often used instead of the singular. E. g. axovoiia for
ttxoucmor.
3. Any word or clause may be the object of a verb. E. g.
KVQOI; txtlvM dwgtx I'dwxe, 'LTITIOV ZQvaoznJiirov, x< orQemov XQV-
aovr, xect r^v JMQUV prjxsri, 7i6a#i, Cyrus gave him
presents, a horse with a golden bridle, a golden necklace,
and that the country should no longer be plundered, where the
proposition xr/v ^w^av pyxhi otQnd&a&ai is one of the objects
of e'Jwxe.
ACCUSATIVE.
^163. 1. The immediate object of a transitive
VERB is put in the accusative. E. g.
noiu, I do these things.
tg TavTut, Having done these things. ( 162. 2.)
Tavxa, One must do these things, (ibid . )
2. Many verbs, which are intransitive in English, are transi-
tive in Greek. E. g. 3 A&avctTovs wAtTsa^at, to sin against
tive in Greek. E. g. 3 A&avctTovs wAtTsa^at, to sin against
the immortals.
Verbs of this class are oJUia/r*, anodtdQuaxco, dog
dmogxsta, oprvju, InuyoTitvu, Ay^Vw, and many others.
164. The accusative of a substantive is often joined to
a verb of which it denotes the abstract idea. ( 129.) In
this case the accusative is generally accompanied by an adjec-
tive. E. g.
neatly mwuaT* ovx avaa^sTa, To fall an insupportable
fall.
'Hi $ctv dgo [irjfia de LVOV, They rushed furiously.
So in English, To die the death of the righteous. To run
a race .
NOTE 1. A substantive is, In the poets, often joined to a verb signifying to
see, to look, (/3A.ET&/, V^aofz.a.t, \ivyffu, ogau,} to mark the expression of the look.
E. g. ofiov jSXe-rwv, looking terrible. 'H Bevln e'jSAg^e yart/, the
Senate looked mustard, that is, looked displeased.
Sometimes the substantive ^y^a, is to be supplied after these verbs. E. g.
Kxi *> /SXffrt/, he looks thievish.
NOTE 2. Verbs signifying to conquer (as wxw'w) are often
followed by the accusative of a noun denoting the place or
165.] ACCUSATIVE. 203
nature of the conquest. E. g. Maxn v vixyv, to gain a battle.
'Olvftnioi vevixrjXMg, having conquered in the. Olympic games.
The nouns following verbs of this description are chiefly
aytov, jwojffib POT, vai\uaxla, nolf^og. Also the names of the
public games, 'Olvpma, nv9ioc, Nipta, %vfy/t.
Sometimes an accusative denoting the name of the person
conquered is added. E. g. Mdjiddrjg o TJ\V iv MaQndwvi, pd-
%rjv Tovg paQfidgovg vixyaug, Miltiades who conquered the
barbarians at the battle of Marathon.
165. 1 . VERBS signifying to ask, to teach, to take
away, to clothe, to unclothe, to do, to say, and some
others, are followed by two accusatives, the one of
a person, and the other of a thing. E. g.
Tavru fis eQ(*nag, Thou askest me about thrse things.
Air fir tov dr^jLov qpvAx, To ask guards of the people.
Tor drjpov %h&l,vttv r}fj,nia%ov, I clothed the people with
robes.
Verbs of this class are
txdvvw, et'dvi'w, e^txiQeoficu, sSemfli', f|r^a), i'ydca or ^'
ouai, b(jo^int t eganuw, XQVTITW, ^ey&t, Titxidsvo), nel&o),
noisw, TiQuaaopoti, aTtcpavoM, avkuw, and a few others.
NOTE 1. Sometimes the accusative of the thing denotes the abstract of the
Verb ( 164% E. g. 'O Ot>x/o? <vdXtf05 u.ii/j.vrirov sra/^s/ay ecu TO us
i-rettliiuriv, the Phocian war taught them an ever memorable lesson. 'Ea/y-
r AwjSaTa/ Xy|8^v vnt<rrov t he injures himself' incurably.
NOTE 2. Frequently verbs signifying to do, or to say, are
followed by an accusative and the adverb tv, well, or xxw,
badly. E. g. Tovg cpllovg ev noiovai, they do good to their
friends, where tv Tioiovai is equivalent to ayada notovai. Ka-
xwg "kiyovviv oi (xyu&ol rovg xaxovg, the good speak
ill of the bad, where xaxw? A/ouat is equivalent to xx
tiyovai.
NOTE 3. Sometimes the word denoting the person is put in the dative ( 196.
4). E.g. II*xXa **' av9-<y?ro/(r/v iu^yn, he did much evil to men.
uyotSov vrot'hffot.s r^ voX&i, having do ne no good to the state.
REMARK. 'Aro<rrigieu, and, in the later writers, ct<pmgioft<u, are often followed
also by the accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing. ( 181 . 2.)
2. Verbs signifying to divide take two accusatives. E. g.
To OTQtxTsvpa xwxe'yfit/Afi dwdsxa fieQrj, he divided the
army into twelve parts.
204 SYNTAX. [ 166, 167.
The preposition ? is often found before the accusative
denoting the number of parts. E. g. Zyiag UVTOVC; eg e
ftoiyng d i I A o r, they divided themselves into six parts.
NOTE 4. Sometimes the noun denoting the thing dwided is put in the geni-
tive ( 173 , and depends on the accusative denoting the purls. E. g. A/e/X-
fjt&cc rr,s i/.)X*|i*xf "5>7 $uo t equivalent to A/^Ao^sS-* TJV itio/Xo-
Wtf*v uV <'2> $y', we divided the art of making images ittto two parts.
166. VERBS signifying, to name or call, to choose, to
render or constitute, to esteem or consider, are followed by two
accusatives denoting the same person or thing. E. g.
^TQu-iiiyov avTov dndd ti$ev, He appointed him general.
Tov vlov Inn ia edidd$ctTO dyct&ov, If e caused his son
to be brought up a good horseman.
NOTE 1. In the passive such verbs become copulas ( 16O. 1). E. g.
S'raTU'x^; a,-7rtbit%&n, he was appointed general. 'O vies &4$;S} l-jfrtvs
os, the son was brought up a good horseman. ( 206. 1.)
NOTE 2. Frequently the infinitive tUtui is expressed before the second accu-
sative. E. g. 2o<p/ff-Tiv ivfjL,^ovfft rev av$ga tTva/, they call him a
sophist, or rather, they say that he is a sophist.
So in the passive, 'A^t^i^S-n rr,s 'trvtv t*vett 'fir*'ag%os ) he was ap-
pointed master of the horse.
167. The accusative is very often used to
limit any word or expression. E. g.
J\Qoi<jo? i)v jdvdo? TO y ivog, CroBsus was a Lydian by birth.
Here the accusative yivog limits or explains further the
meaning of ytvdoc.
TCXVTU yjtvdorTui, They lie in these tilings.
C II #'A(jo"tt o v 8 s v ylyt'fTtxt nfatmv. The sea does not become
larger, literally The sea becomes larger in nothing.
The accusative thus used is called the SYNECDOCHICAL
ACCUSATIVE.
REMARK. The neuter accusative il (from T/C) often means
for what 1 why 1 E. g. Tl TUVTOI nav&uvw, for ivhat am I
learning these things 1
NOTE 1. Here belong most of the accusatives which commonly are said to
be used adverbially ( 124).
NOTE 2. Hither we may refer parenthetical phrases like
the following. To fayon*vov, as the saying is. To TOV 'Ofi^-
gov, as Homer has it, or according to Homer. Ilav
on the contrary.
168.] ACCUSATIVE. 205
NOTE 3. Sometimes the preposition xura or 11$ is used before this accusative.
E. g. KstSctgov x.0.} KOC.TO, ro ffupa. xxt xce.ru rtjv ^v^wy, jntre in body
and in soul. Alvu; a&avT>j<r/ S-ws tig una. i'0/xsv, she astonishingly re-
sembles the immortal goddesses in looks.
NOTE 4. The accusative is sometimes subjoined to a clause
in order further to qualify the contents of it. E. g. Kal /us
&rjiViv naxrig &VTJTM nag 3 ardgi, TO>>'<$' anoiv , yrayxcxasv, and
the father compelled me to serve with a mortal man as a recom-
pense for these. TOJ noude TW orci ^ut'AyLfToy, Toh[iy[A(XT 3 ai'axiaTct,
povonuxeiv, thy two sons are about to Jight a duel, a most dis-
graceful act, where joA/i^aia qualifies TW nouds TW ow /
V, ainfj -froifid-ciov demvg -todl, ngocpa-
oiv, l'(jpaxoy, and I, showing to her this garment here, as a
pretext said.
^ 168. LA noun denoting DURATION OF TIME
is put in the accusative. E. g.
Jexa I'TT? xot^wvTt, They sleep ten years.
TOVTOV fierce 2iTodxovg tnivov tov XQOVOV, During this
time I was feasting with Sitalces.
IIolvv XQOVOV vpQixe, He has insulted a long time.
2. Frequently the accusative answers to the question WHEN?
E. g. 'jEvTedcxpevog ij]v WQIJV inctyivitiv ocplai tag aiyotg, com-
manding (him) to bring the goats to them at the regular time.
NOTE 1. When the substantive is accompanied by an ordinal
number ( 61), it denotes duration of time past. E. g. 3 JSwa-
xr\v fjpegav ysyafirjpEvriv, married nine days ago } or having
been married nine days.
Also when it is accompanied by cardinal numbers. E. g.
0g Ttdvyxs lavra igla !'T?, who has been dead these three
years.
NOTE 2. Sometimes the accusative is equivalent to the
genitive absolute ( 192), particularly the following neuter
accusatives : dtdoyptvov, doxovv, do^av, from doxs'w siQ^ftsvov
from C PJSJI ' t$6v from I'^Eifit, 6V from n^iL * TKXQS^OV from net-
gtxco ' 7igoaj]xov from 7r^oa?Jxo} " tv^ov from Tvy%arto ' and a few
others. E. g.
E$ov avTolg anodovatv JElfyip aTtyhcxx&ai TWV TIUQOVTWV
xaxwv, Although it was in their power to give up Helen,
and be delivered from the impending danger. The con-
struction of the clause 3 E$ov umolg ..... xaxwy, in the
indicative would be "E&onv avioUg ..... xaxwr, ( 159,
2, N. 1, 2.)
18
206 SYNTAX. [169-172.
NOTE 3. Frequently, for the sake of emphasis, a preposition (chiefly l<r/) is
placed before this accusative. E.g. *E<r/ OKTU .} t"*oiri 'irux, %%ov rrjt
'Atrins o* 2*i&/, the Scythians ruled Asia for eight and twenty years.
169. The accusative is used to denote EX-
TENT OF SPACE. E. g.
^Jisa^ov eoUiJ/Lwi' TQiaxovia cfiaSia, They were thirty
stadia from each other.
2-fadlovg ds nsvrs xal T e a o a Q a x o v t a diaxo^ilaotVTsg am-
KOVTO eg to IQOV, And carrying (her) forty-jive stadia they
arrived at the temple.
1 TO. Sometimes the accusative answers to the question
WHITHER ? E. g.
Ai'yJiT] na^cfotrocoaa di* alfrdgog OVQOIVOV ixev, The bright
effulgence went to heaven through ether.
3 Ay bang /? Orifiag, Thou earnest to illustrious Thebes.
171. The accusative follows the particles of protesta-
tion fid and v-r\. E. g.
Jkfa ir\v 'AvctTivorjv, pa TO Xcxog, pa rov 'Aega, By Breathy by
Chaos, by Air.
Ny xov Hoaetdw (pdwae, By Neptune Hove thee.
NOTK 1. Ma is used only in negative, and v only in affirmative, propositions.
But when va/, yes, certainly, is placed before ^ua, the proposition is affirmative.
NOTE 2. Sometimes ft is omitted. E.g. 0, <rov$' "Okvftvrov, no, by
this Heaven.
NOTE 3. Sometimes the name of the god sworn by is omitted after these
particles, in which case the article of the omitted name is always expressed.
E. g. M TOV \yu /Jt.lv ov$* av i#iSofAfiv, by / should not believe it.
^ 172. The accusative is put after the following
PREPOSITIONS.
9 Af*q>l t about, around. 3 Afi(pl delkrjv, about evening. '
UVTOV, around him. So in connection with numerals. 3 A[i(pl
ta exxaldsxa sir] ywopevog, being about sixteen years old.
*Ava f on, in, through , throughout, during. 3 Ava TOV noltpov,
during the war, throughout the war. 3 Ava OTQV.IOV , in the
army. *Ava nvQlxyv, on a tamarisk.
With numerals it means at the rate of, a-piece. *Ava nev-rs
nctQaadyyag trjg fjfisQtxg, at the rate ofjiveparasangs a day.
Jut, through, on account of, in. "A vvv oqpst/w diu as, which
I now owe on your account, dia. vvKta, in the night.
Elg t to , into. Eig Kilixiav , to Cilicia.
173.] GENITIVE. 207
With numerals it generally means about. Elg iitQa-
xiaxihlovg , about four thousand men.
Frequently elg is found before a genitive, the noun, to
which it properly belongs, being omitted. Elg naido-tyl-
fiov, sc. olxoy, to the teacher's house.
'jEnt, upon, against. *Enl &QOVOV, upon a throne. 'En 3
avTov, against him.
Komi, according to, in relation to, in, on, near, during. Kara
lov C 'O|U??OJ', according to Homer. Kara TO aw^wa, in re-
lation to the body. KaTa TOV noXe^ovj during the war.
Merci, after. Me TV ds i a v T a , and after these things.
Hocga, to, besides, along, contrary to, on account of. Uagtx
Kauftvaea, to Cambyses. Haga lav-cu, besides these.
After comparatives it means than, revolat* av xal nag a
Tijv MVTWV (fvoiv a^iuvovBgy they might become superior to
their nature,
l, synonymous with apcpl.
og, to, in respect to, towards. Hgog ndvTctg, to all men.
Kalog TtQog dgojiov, good in running, or a good racer.
c TnsQ, over, beyond, against. C TTISQ tovg ahlovg, over the
others.
e TTIO, under, at. c T n o y rj v, under the earth. c Tnb "lliov ,
under Ilion.
f Jlg, synonymous with elg. It is always placed before nouns
denoting intelligent objects.
GENITIVE.
173. A SUBSTANTIVE which limits the mean-
ing of another substantive, denoting a different
person or thing, is put in the genitive. E. g.
To Tsperog TOV &eov, The temple of the god.
To v C /TT ndq%ov ddvarov , The death of Hipparchus.
2xv&wv paaihtlg, Kings of the Scythians.
This rule applies also to the personal, reflexive, and recipro-
cal pronouns, and to the indefinite pronoun duva.
The genitive thus used has been called the ADNOMINAL
GENITIVE.
NOTE 1. The adnominal genitive denotes various relations,
the most common of which are those of possession, quality,
subject, object, material, source, a whole, component parts.
208 SYNTAX. [ 174, 175.
NOTE 2. The adnominal genitive is called subjective when
it is equivalent to the subject-nominative ( 157. 1). It is
called objective when it denotes the object of an action ( 162.
1 ) . E. g. "E Q y o v C H (f a I a T o v , the work of Vulcan, that which
Vulcan did, where the genitive is used subjectively. 'H axgo-
ctaig TWV keyovjwv, the act of hearing the speakers, where
the genitive is used objectively.
NOTE 3. A substantive is sometimes followed by two geni-
tives denoting different relations. E. g. Tr^v nilonoq una-
or t <; nilonovvi]uov xaidteiyw, the taking of the whole of
Pctoponnesus by Pelops.
IT 4. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS and adjectives implying
possession, are frequently followed by a genitive, which is in
apposition with the genitive implied in the possessive pronoun
or adjective ( 67: 131. 1). E. g.
Tov e[j,ov av TOV tov -lakctmw QOV filov, The life of me,
a miserable man. Here avrov TOV Takounwgov is in appo-
sition with e\uov implied in tfibv.
roQ^elrjv xcpa)ir]v, deivolto Tifhugov, The head of Gorgo y
a terrible monster. Here rogyd^v is equivalent to the
genitive Foyyovg with which jifXwQov is in apposition.
NOTE. Under this head belong the adjectives i^/a?, h^of, xotvos, el>cs7os. E. g.
ToJf a-vruv i^iois *goffi%nv TOV vouv, to attend to their private affairs. 'legos
ya.% OVTOS TUV Kara %&ovos iuv, for he is consecrated to the infernal deities.
"E^yov xotvov A^etxt^oujtoviuv re Kai *A$j vet, t u v, a work performed by
the Lacedemonians and .Athenians in common. "A oit7et rav XK^US $<*,-
ffihivovruv tff-rt, which belong to those who rule well.
. The genitive is put after verbs signify-
ing to be, to belong, to denote the person or thing
to which any thing in any way BELONGS. E. g.
C O naiq slaxtdaipov lav tail, The boy belongs to the
Laced&monians.
*Avoiag earl TO xbjpaa^ca xwa, It is characteristic of folly
to be in pursuit of vain things.
Elvai Tt5i> iQiuY.ovitt y To be. thirty years old.
Verbs of this class are ylyvo[iai, t sipl, XI/^E'W, 7id<pvxa and
from
NOTE 1. This genitive is often preceded by the preposition r^os. E. g.
Aei;<oy TT^OS etv^gos lffTi t it is the characteristic of a man of parts.
NOTE 2. Frequently the genitive after these verbs denotes
the person or thing from which any thing proceeds. E. g.
xal UaQvad-tidos ylyvovjoa nvude$ dvo, of Da-
176, 177.] GENITIVE. 209
rius and >Pary satis two children were born, or Darius and
Pary satis had two sons. Ovyrov nscpvxag freer Qog, ihou
art the offspring of a mortal father.
Sometimes the genitive, in such instances, is preceded by lx.
E. g. naxQog x TUVTOV yiywg, being born of the same father.
NOTE 3. Frequently the adjective sig or the pronoun <rt$ is to be supplied
before this genitive ( 175). E.g. Tour&iv <ytvou, become one of these.
1 76. The neuter of the article followed by a substantive
in the genitive denotes something to which that substantive is
related. E. g.
Jsi (ptQetv -i a TWV &swv, We must bear what comes from
the gods.
To TOV 'OpiiQov, That which Homer says.
NOTE. This idiom gives rise to phrases like the following:
Ta iriq oyyi]?, for c // ogyi], anger, wrath. Ta T^g fyTitiQlag, for
C /Z ffiTistQla, experience. Ta iwv OstTalMv, for Oi Osnahol, the
Thessalians. To IMP ini&v{juwv, for Al eTu&vplai, desires.
177. 1. ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, and AD-
VERBS, denoting a PART, are followed by a genitive
denoting the WHOLE. E. g.
jk'*a(7T^ -iwv nohtutv, Each of the states.
Ovditg TWV psiyaxlwv, No one of the young men.
Uov yrig ; Where on earth ?
*O i]{jinjvq TOV otQi&ptov, H alf the number.
Tyv nlslGTyv r?J? OTQcniag, The greatest part of the
army.
xQilriq av^vyv, A good deal of coal-dust.
This rule applies to the genitive after numerals ( 60 : 61 :
62. 4), after interrogative, indefinite, demonstrative, and relative
words ( 68-71 : 73 : 123), after superlatives, and in general,
after any adjective or adverb designating a part.
NOTE 1. A participle preceded by the article is often fol-
lowed by the genitive. ( 140. 3.) E. g. Oi xaTayvyovc eg
avTWv, equivalent to 'i'xaVot aviwv oi xctTayvyov, such of
them as escaped.
Sometimes i* is used in such cases. E g. 3 A'x TWV ar&Qw-
TTMV loiq iv TiQoiTiovat, to the prospering part of mankind.
NOTE 2. The nature of the noun denoting the whole determines the number,
in which the genitive is put.
IS*
210 SYNTAX. [ 178.
NOTE 3. The adjectives "bKipovios, $Tog t rXaj, f%ir*.ios, and a few others, are
often followed by the genitive plural. E. g. AT* yvvcuKuv, divine woman*
TaAa/va *9-tvtov, unfortunate virgin. 2%ir*.t' av^wv, unfortunate
man.
It is supposed by many that the idea of superlativeness lies in these adjectives.
2. Frequently the genitive denoting a whole depends on a
neuter adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun. E. g.
Msaov 7} us gag, The middle part of the day.
Trjg arQajtys TO nollov, The greater part of the army.
To reTQocfiip&vov TWJ> fiagfiaQwv, The defeated part of
the barbarians.
Eig toy TO dvdyxyg, To this degree of necessity.
NOTE 4. In some instances the neuter plural is used before this genitive
( 177. 2). E. g. "Affvpu. fions, f or * Affnpov ($0%$, indistinct noise.
NOTE 5. The genitive of the reflexive pronoun often follows
an adjective of the superlative degree ; in which case the
highest degree, to which a person or thing attains, is expressed.
E. g. "Oie dstvoToiTog a OIVTOV ivtVTct rja&a, when your skill in
these matters was highest. Tfj evgyTaxr) tail ami] ewvTrjg,
ivhere it is widest.
178. 1. The genitive maybe put after any
VERB, when the action does not refer to the whole
object, but to a PART only. E. g.
He [i Tie i TWV Av8wv, He sends some of the Lydians. But
nipnei jovg jiv8ovg y He sends the Lydians.
Tw v XQSUV EX Ism or, I stole some pieces of the meat.
AafiovTa TWV TCXIVIWV, Taking some of the fillets.
2. Particularly, the genitive is put after VERBS
signifying to partake, to enjoy, to obtain, to inherit,
E.g.
7kfT/w &Qciaog, I partake of courage.
Tr t g dvvdutwg xoivwvovai, They parta ke of the power.
Verbs of this class are avriuw, anolavM, rt^ f w, tnavglaxo-
pal, tdrjQovousw, xowwvsw, xi/^tw, ia/yarw, psrcdciyxavw,
fldvco, {izTlxo), ovlvauai, ovvaigofiai, Tvy%dvw, and some others.
NOTE 1. Sometimes ft'&go;, part, is found after ^TaXa-y^av^ and pirtxa.
E. g. Mf9-^s/v rocQou ft 6^0$, about to partake of burial.
Mt<r<%iu is also found with the accusative in which one participates. E. g.
Msrsr^sj ra? 'iff as vXyycts spot, thou didst receive the same numiter of
stripes with me.
179.] GENITIVE. 211
'A'roZ.xuu, Xa.y>%eiva, and <rwy%ce.v&i are often followed by the accusative.
E.g. ' A * o A a u s / v T / , Jo ery'oy any /Aing. ' A y * v a ru^euv, hitting the
elbow.
KXvgovoft&u, inherit, in some instances takes the accusative of the thing in-
herited. The name of the person of whom one inherits is put in the genitive,
and depends on the thing inherited. E.g. KA viovofAt7v TO, % T -h p at. r a,
rtvost to inherit the possessions of any one. Later authors put even the name
of the person in the accusative.
NOTE 2. The genitive in connection with ^mcrrt and ngoa-
>Jx depends on the subject (expressed or understood) of these
verbs. E. g.'ttvfirjdsv psgog iolg nowigoig fisTOTi,in which
the wicked do not participate. Ovx MHO ngoayxeiv ovdevl
g, he thought that no person ought to rule.
NOTE 3. The preposition Sg or U is sometimes used before this genitive
( 178. l). E. g. A.afiuv tx rav atfvrt^uv, taking some (or one) of the
shields.
^ 179. 1. VERBS signifying to take hold of, to
touch, to feel, to hear, to taste, to smell, are followed
by the genitive. E. g.
TOVTOV, Take hold of this man.
VTWV, To touch them.
tivgag, Knock at the door, literally Taste of
the door.
Verbs of this class are ala&avopai, w, xovco, ttx^oo^ut,
WTTTO^at, yevopou, ^aaao/uwt, l^o^uwt, &iyydvw, xhvw, hapfiavopcu,
o^w, oacpQalvo^ai, ntigdopai, nvv^avo^ai> y yavw, and some
others.
2. Verbs signifying to take hold of are frequently followed
by the accusative of the object taken hold of, and the genitive
of the part by which it is taken. E. g. ^la^ovi
iVy they took Orontes by the girdle.
NOTE 1. 'Axovtv and its synonymes, and S-tyyavu and fya.vu) are frequently
followed by the accusative. E. g. 'Axov<ra$ Ty<r, hearing these things.
NOTE 2. Frequently xxovv and its synonymes take that which is heard in the
accusative, and that from which the thing heard proceeds, in the genitive. E. g.
Tov av^ cryvS-avau roJv o^oivrb(>uv, inquire of the travellers about the
man.
NOTE 3. Ttueu, cause to taste, is followed by the accusative of the person,
and the genitive of the thing. E. g. Tsvttv O.VTOV nvo$, to make him
taste of any thing.
Frequently this verb is followed by two accusatives. E. g. Ttvcu <r\
^6/9-y , I will give thee wine to taste.
212 SYNTAX. [ ISO, 181.
18O. 1. VERBS denoting to let go, to cease,
to desist, to free, to miss, to separate, to escape, are
followed by the genitive. E. g.
To v T o v- fi s & I s a # a i , To let this man go.
U/jftyitytiw* Iriy %Qi,dog, Agamemnon left off Ms wrath
Jifoxov ttlljjlw, They separated from each other.
Verbs of this class are aJLwxo), ^^rVw, a//7iAx/erxo), TT-
iofjL(xi, a7ioaT(XTKW, aqtlffttxi, dit%M, ei'xco retreat^ fx-
j, A/J/w, [Ae&lrjpi, commonly pte&ipfteu, fte
(psvyw, ^w^s'w, and some others.
2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusa-
tive of the immediate, and the genitive of the remote, object.
E. g.
Havco as TOVTOV, I make thee cease from this.
Tyv ^Aolyv SiovQlguv rrjs Aifivi]$ y Separating Asia
from Libya.
Such verbs are a^tvVet), aTraHaaaw, ane^M, acplaTr^i, dtoylta t
ely/to, efev&egow, fgrjTvat, xa^a/^w, xwiuw, Awu, navw, and some
others.
NOTE. The genitive in connection with verbs signifying to free, to cease,
sometimes depends on the preposition ix, or uvo. E. g. Haucrov Ix xaxav
if*i t deliver me from evil.
^181. 1. VERBS, ADJECTIVES, and ADVERBS,
implying fulness, emptiness, bereavement, are fol-
lowed by the genitive. E. g.
He v I (t $ ri noli? e/sfisv , The city was full of poverty.
Ksvwv doSaapaTwv nlrjQsig, Full of vain notions.
Twv rs&pyy.oTwv all?, Enough of dead persons.
Words of this class are 5ijv, ah?, o^Tj^ayfw, anogso), ro?,
, yEftw, dew and dso^uai, \Jii8n]?, tQ^toc;, itadagog,
nsrijs, ntvouai, nltw?, 7iA?J^w, nkyQrjg, nlovaio?,
*j and some others.
2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusa-
tive of the immediate, and the genitive of the remote, object.
Erg,
Ha giv voacpislg ftlov , Thou wilt deprive Paris of life.
Such verbs are anooTtgeto, iQijfiotn, xerow, xogevvvpi,
ow, and some others.
182, 183.] GENITIVE. 213
NOTE 1. Jel and zgy are followed by the accusative of a
person and the genitive of a thing. E. g. AVTOV as del
Uopy&da) c, tliou thyself ncedest a Prometheus. Tso os
y, what wantcst tlwul
NOTE 2. Ad sometimes takes the dative of the person and
the genitive of the^thing. E.g. Jsivtiv -jot povlevpdTwv
eoixe dslv ngog UVTOV, it seems that thou must employ profound
reasoning against him.
VERBS signifying to remember, to for-
get, to admire, to contemn, to desire, to care for,
to spare, to neglect, to consider, to understand, are
followed by the genitive. E. g.
po v, Remember me.
ir\q ayerrjg, To admire virtue.
s, Thou desirest great things.
Verbs of this class are aya(jnxi t atap'/fw, avfinoLsofia
cidevai, fpna^ofMxi, fr&Vfi4ofiai t inL^v^w, snlaTotficti,
, fivrjfioveva), oJUytootO), OQe
, and some others.
NOTE 1. Most verbs of this class often take the accusative instead of the
genitive. E. g. <&(>ovrtovrccs ra, r o t e&u r a, , caring about such things.
NOTE 2. ftltftvfoxu and X>jS-av&; or X^w, and their compounds, are followed
by the accusative of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E. g. 'Tcrs-
ftvno-tv T i vctTgos, and he reminded him of his father. *E x %i f&& vuv-
TUV X>j9-avi<, and makes me forget all things.
Sometimes piftvnerxtv is followed by tivo accusatives. E. g. OS 'Eys<r<ra~<M
^vpfxa.x'ux.v KvxfAif&vv<rxovris 'AS-*? vetio v s, the Egestians refunding
the Athenians of iheir alliance.
NOTE 3. MeXs/, it is a care, it is a concern, is generally followed by the
dative of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E. g. M/As* <roi rovrou,
thou carest for this. ( 157. N. 8.)
NOTE 4. The genitive in connection with some of these verbs sometimes de-
pends on a preposition. E. g. II a/So; <ffi^t rou if&ou pvi ^vj<r9->jTs
T/, as to my son, make no more mention of him* II & gt rcjy lv h.\yv7eru xctt
Iv 2/xsX/a Ivv&ff&ati fgovrigstv, to be able to take care of the affairs of Egypt
and Sicily.
183. 1. VERBS signifying to accuse, to prose-
cute, to convict, are followed by the accusative de-
noting the person accused, and the genitive denot-
ing the crime. E. g.
214 SYNTAX. [ 184.
d i cJ I o fjiul as d e 1 1 1 g , / 0/// prosecute you for cowardice.
KKiatvu 8w(ftav kkovtes, Convicting Clean of bribery.
Verbs of this class are algim, cuTtdofiai, dixd'w, dunxat,
REMARK 1. Qtvyea, am accused, and uXuvai, to be convicted, are followed
only by the genitive. E. g. 'Art fit lets Qivyovru,, accused of impiety.
*Ev <n$ a,Xu KXo-vy;, if any one sliall be convicted of theft.
Alnaopcti, accuse, is sometimes followed by two accusatives.
2. VERBS of this class compounded with the
preposition xara are followed by the genitive of
the person and the accusative denoting the crime
or punishment. E. g.
2savTov xaT(xdixueig & avai ov , Thou condcmncst thy-
self to death.
Such verbs are xwrof/f/i'oJtfxa), xwra&x'o>, xTx^tVw,
REMARK 2. The accusative is often wanting after these verbs ( 183. 2).
E. g. K<r ny o ^ s?v O.UTOV) to accuse him.
NOTE 1. Ket<r'yoiu is sometimes followed by two genitires. E. g. Ila^a-
vgtfffitias CCU-TOU x.etTnyo^i'iv, to indict him for unfaithfully discharging
his duties as ambassador.
NOTE 2. The noun denoting the punisJnnent is sometimes put in i\\e genitive.
In classical Greek, lu.'wever, only ^AVKTOV is found in connection with verbs of
this sort. E. g. avaray vvra'yxyuv M/X/r/a^sa i$MMUj he accused AfiUlia-
des capitally.
NOTE 3. ^Vo^oc, wider sentence, guilty, which generally is
followed by the dative ( 196. 1), sometimes takes the genitive.
c Tjiiv$vvog, guilty , is followed by the genitive denoting the
crime.
184. 1. VERBS signifying to begin, to rule,
to surpass, are followed by the genitive. E.g.
*'A Q x * i" * f s > Begin the fight.
g ivdo<J<frV, Ruling Sparta.
d i a n Q i n s i g , Thou surpasscst all men.
Verbs of this class are avuvoo), ^mTftw, (Vgjw, /Suadsva), de-
iwpsqto excel, tmajuiita, xc^X<arfi'o^i, x^atVw,
n^Qi/iyvofini y Tifqlfifii, TT^O^W, ngoiajcx^ai^
dw, rvyawtvw, vK+qfiattto, vnfQtxw, and some
others.
$ 185, 186.] GENITIVE. 215
NOTE 1. Those derived from substantives or adjectives may be said to take
the genitive in consequence of the noun implied in them. E. g. Twv xa$*
iotvTov; v9-<w2ra/v a,^tff7tv<rotvTis is equivalent to O? ci/>t<rroi TUV xaS-'
latvrous OL&ZUVUV 9J<retv y having surpassed the men of their times, ( 177.)
NOTE. 2. Some verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the dative or
accusative. E. g. K/X/'xe0-0- > aiv^i<r<riv avtiffffuv, ruling over the
Cilicians.
NOTE 3. 'Avaiffffu is, in Homer, sometimes followed by the preposition fjurd
with the dative. E. g. (II. 1, 252. )
2. Causative verbs of this class are followed by the accusa-
tive and genitive. E. g. Nixa ps y aQirfj rr^g i'x&gug, his
valor affects me more than his enmity. ( 205. 2.)
Such verbs are wxa'w, Tr^oxazccxAtrw, nQoxglvta, and some
others.
1 85. Many VERBAL ADJECTIVES which have
an active signification are followed by the genitive.
E.g.
Skilled in horsemanship.
Qualified to rule men.
Adjectives of this class are <xyvuc, aidyig, alxiog, ccTinldsviog,
g, hvaavlotg, Tglfiwv. Also many adjectives in ygiog, utog, as
oV, ( 131. 1 : 129. 2.) Also, many adjectives
in r)g, og, [iwv, as avyxoog, adarjg, dayman', ( 132. 4, 5.)
NOTE 1. Sometimes adjectives of this class are followed by the accusative t
provided the verbs, from which they are derived, take the accusative. E. g.
ret roid^t, skilled in suck things.
NOTE 2. Adjectives of this class, which are derived from verbs followed by
the genitive, are often said to take the genitive in consequence of the verb im-
plied in them. E. g. OLVVIKOO; takes the genitive because OLKOVW is followed by
the genitive ( 179).
NOTE 3. Sometimes the genitive or accusative, in connection with adjectives
of this class, depends on the preposition <rsg/.
18O. 1. The genitive is put after ADJECTIVES
and AB VERBS of the COMPARATIVE degree to de-
note that with which the comparison is made. E. g.
Superior to this man.
NOTE 1. When the substantive which is compared is the
same as that with which it is compared, the latter is omit-
ted, provided it be limited by a genitive ( 173). The
216 SYNTAX. [ 187.
ambiguity which may arise from this construction can be re-
moved only by considering the nature of the statement. E. ff.
~ ' >, r c . r .. &
XMQCHV %STS ovosv IJTTOV yfiwr svTifior, lor Xw^av c^exs
ovdev rjTTov Trjg xwgug r^JLtav WTIJJLOV, you have a country not less
valuable than ours.
2. The genitive is put after some positive adjectives and
adverbs implying a comparison. E. g. 'Exigovg TMV vvv
OVTWV, other than those who now arc.
Adjectives of this class are Uo7o?, attog, u
duxcpoQog different, eTSQog, t)Uutiuo& TieyiTTog. Also numeral ad-
jectives in nkoog or nlaaiog ( 62. 2).
REMARK. AwQogos and a\*.oTto$ are sometimes followed by the dative.
NOTE 2. 'EvavT/0$, which commonly is followed by the dative, sometimes
takes the genitive. The following example shows, that the idea of comparison
lies in this adjective : Touvetvriov fyuv t y n-^oirn^ avru vroi&Tv, doing contrary
to what he ought to do, (Aristoph. Plut. 14.)
NOTE 3. A*a0sas differ, and its derivative $ia<ptovru$, differently, are fol-
lowed by the genitive, because the}' imply a comparison. E.g. A/a<pgi
avv) ruv ci^Xuv %uuv, man differs from the other animals.
NOTE 4. Sometimes this genitive depends on avri or <r^o. E. g. Ms/^av*
avrt Ttjs etvrov Targets QtXov voft%tt, he loves another more than his own
country. Qlttriv n vv^otvvif &/>o iXtvS-s^ins W ai<rvtzff<rdrigov t to whom
tyranny was more welcome than liberty.
NOTE 5. When the conjunction 77, than, is introduced, the
word compared, and the noun with 'which it is compared, are
put in the same case. E. g. MsMeig In avdyag aTQonEvsv&ai,
oifislvovag % Snvfrag, t/wu art about to march against men
superior to the Scythians. Tolg fiaaihevoi t&v ^/axfJa/^o-
viwv adiy.elv TJTTOV s&aTiv q rolg id icoTotig, the king's of the
Lacedemonians have less power to do harm than private indi-
viduals.
NOTE 6. Sometimes the nominative is used after #, the context determining
its verb. E. g. To7s vtufi^ois xa,} fAciZ.%.ov atXfAci^ouo'iv >} \y&>, votgoetv&j,
sc. aKftK^a, / advise the young who are more vigorous than I am. 'H^wv
ciftavov, -h i < 7 f 4| TO (JL'&XOV ffgootJufjii vav, sc. 9Toouvra,t, we foreseeing the
future better than they.
187. 1. The genitive is often used to denote
that on account of which any thing takes place.
E.g.
ZT^W os rriq svftovhlag, I admire you for your wisdom.
Ttj vjAfTfyct nofai Tijg yijg Trjg vn Jlgtonlwdeftoftivn? (jo^o-
vovai, They are jealous of your city, on account of the
land given to you by the Oropians.
188.] GENITIVE. 217
2. The genitive, with or without an interjection, is used in
exclamations. E. g. y fL Iloasidov, TOV jucxxp-ov?) Neptune, what
a length ! Kal Tig side TIOJTIOTS fiovg xgifiavhaq ; TWV aA#w-
v v n d i CD v, and who ever saw whole oxen roasted in the oven 1
what tough stories !
3. The genitive after verbs signifying to entreat denotes
the person or thing, for the sake of which the person entreated
is to grant the request. E. g. Mv\ pe yovvwr yovvdso,
ftsds T o K ri & v, do not entreat me by my knees, nor by my
parents. Frequently the preposition vnsg, avTt, or nyog, is
placed before this genitive.
4. Sometimes the genitive, in connection with a passive
form, denotes the subject of the action. E. g. ill yy elg
<frvyaTQog Ti]g i [iijs vnfg xa'^a, being struck in the head by
my daughter.
5. Sometimes the genitive denotes the instrument of an ac-
tion. E.g. Uyrjaou nvQogdrj'ioio $VQTQ(XJ to burn the gates
with burning fire.
188. 1. The genitive is used to denote that
in respect of which any thing is affirmed. E. g.
"Anaig tgasvog yovov, Childless in respect to male off-
spring, in other words, Having no sons.
' Allot, vv TOV ye &tol filamovoi x^Aev^ov, But the gods now
injure him in respect to his way, that is, hinder him.
*JEovaav ^'<5?; uvdyoq wQixlyv, Being now of the right age to
be married.
2. The genitive is used to limit the meaning of the following
ADVERBS : ay/i or ayxov, avw, dl%a, f/yvg, IxaV, i&v or txHv,
I'xjvg, xatTonir, XTW, XQVCpa, >t#0ff, n&ctg, nhyolov, Tiogyw, TIQOOW,
tr^ov, rr^o&tv, and some others. E. g. *Eyyvg Tiros, near
any thing.
NOTE. "E^ai and yxeu, limited by an adverb, are often followed by the
genitive. E. g. '11$ eT#s roi^ov s > as Just as lie could run, E nxti*
Giou, to be well advanced in life.
3. The genitive is put after verbs denoting to take aim at,
to rush against, to throw at. E.g. *EaTo%d JSTO TOV ^.fi-
Qaxlov, he was taking aim at the stripling. 'O'
Msvtldov, shoot an arrow at Mcneldus. AvToto
TO, he took aim at him.
19
218 SYNTAX. [$139-191.
189. The genitive is used after VERBS and
ADJECTIVES to denote the MATERIAL of which any
thing is made. E. g.
XwAxoi; noitiovicti aydkpaia, Statues are made of brass.
'PLVOV noiTjTqr , Made of ox-hide.
NOTE. The prepositions !*, &#o, are often used before the genitive. E. g.
a r o l^vXav vrttrom/ttya,, garments made of cotton cloth
^ 19O. 1. The noun denoting the PRICE of any
thing is put in the genitive. E. g.
J2 v o v T a i rag yvvalxag naga TWV yovewv
Awy, They buy their wives of their parents for mucli
money.
Twv novwv ntohovaiv r^ilv ndvia rayud* ol &sol, The
gods sell to us every good thing for labor.
NOTE 1. Sometimes the thing bought is in the genitive, in which case the
verb of the proposition does not signify to buy or to sell. E. g. 'A<r ri %gtog
tftet fjt,i [tiTo. rov TLeurixv ; T t7g f<tv&7 3 1 <f> gi irx ov, Then w/iat debt came upon
me next to Pa sins' s ? Three mince for a little carriage.
NOTE 2. The dative ( 198) is sometimes used for this genitive. E. g.
Olvi^ovro, aXA.0/ p,tv % at. A. * &J, XXo/ ' m'tS-uvi ffi^ r n^u t they bought wine,
some for brass, others for bright iron.
2. "A&og, a&wg, and wvyTo? are followed by the genitive. E. g.
^novSrjg a$ia, deserving serious consideration.
NOTE 3. "Afyos is sometimes followed by the dative ( 196. 1), in which
case it means^/if, proper, becoming.
NOTE 4. The verb |tow, think worthy, is followed by the
accusative of a person, and the genitive of a thing. E. g.
*A$tovviv avrov [isydlwv, they think him ivorthy of great
things.
1. The genitive often answers to the
question WHEN 1 E. g.
Trig vvxTog v^ovxai, They feed in the night.
2. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question HOW
LONG SINCE? E. g. HotOV % f) 6 V O V 7T87T0^5r/Tt 7l6hg ; llOW
long since the city has been taken? noilwv ITWV tv&dde
ovx eTudsSrjfirjxsv, he has not been at home for many years.
3. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question HOW
SOON? E. g. TQlMKOVltt fljJLSQWV 01710
within thirty days from this day.
192.] GENITIVE. 219
Sometimes the adverb Iviog accompanies this genitive. E g.
os ov noMov xgovov, within a short time.
193. A substantive with a participle is very
often put in the genitive, to denote the TIME or
CAUSE of, or any CIRCUMSTANCE connected with,
an action. E. g.
Taw* tnoax&ii, Kovwvog aTQaiyyovvio g , These things
were done when Conon was general. Here the genitive
denotes the time when KXVT* enQax&y.
TshevTrjoaviog ^Akvdnsco, f$sdt$aro ify (iaadtfl'rjv KQOI-
oog, After the death of Alyattes, Croesus received the king-
dom.
The genitive thus used is called the GENITIVE ABSOLUTE.
REMARK 1 . Strictly speaking the genitive absolute is a modification of the
genitive of time ( 191).
NOTE 1. In some instances the genitive of the participle uv is wanting. E. g.
T n,v txpwynrav, who being leaders* where ovruv must be supplied.
NOTE 2. Frequently wg, wansg, wars, aie, ola, that, as if, in-
asmuch as, on the supposition that, stand before this genitive.
fc*
c Jlg w' $XQVIW iwvd* enlaiao&al os xgy, Thou must
know that these things are so.
REMARK 2. Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often used in connection
with the abovementioned particles. E. g. Qi>% vfysi \iyta &', aXX' iK&7-
vav at vetgovree. v$v, I do not say these things out of wantonness, but because
I believe that he is near us. 'fig ?ov #j vronlv auro7$, o n &v fiov\onro t
inasmuch as they had now the liberty to do what they pleased. (See 168. N. 2.)
NOTE 3. When the subject of a proposition is not expressed
( 157. N. 8), the participle alone is put in the genitive abso-
lute. E. g."TovTos TroMoJ, it raining heavily, which in the
indicative is "Tei TioHw, it rains heavily.
NOTE 4. The genitive absolute is used also when the sub-
ject is a proposition commencing with OT/, that. ( 159. 1.) E. g.
2acpws dvkw&sviog oil iv ralg vavul JMV 'Ettiyvwv, x. r.h., it
being quite apparent, that in the ships of the Greeks, fyc.,
which in the indicative is 2acpwg edyhw-frr) on iv Tcug, x. i. L,
the subject of which is on iv -itxlg, x. r. L
In such instances, the genitive plural is sometimes used.
E. g. Eiacxyysk&evTwv oil ftolvioaat, vyeg en* nvrovg ejre-
nfaov, it being announced that Phoenician ships were sailing
against them, where, however, the plural vysg may be said to
affect the participle.
SYNTAX. [$ 193, 194.
NOTE 5. But when the subject of the proposition is an in-
Jinitive ( 159. 2), the accusative is used instead of the geni-
tive absolute. For examples, see above ( 168. N. 2.)
193. Frequently the genitive answers to the question
WHERE? E. g. Ovx "Agyeog rjev ; was he not in Argos ?
Aaiag zeigbg olxovat Xalvfteg, on the left hand dwell the
Chalybes.
194. The genitive is put after the following
PREPOSITIONS.
>l, synonymous with
*'Avtv, without. "Avev e&ev, without him.
*Avrl, instead of, for. *Av&* Ipaxlov tysiv yaxog, to have a
rag instead of a garment. *Avi\ no lag a IT: lag; for what
reason.
It is often used in comparisons with respect to value.
rvvatxbg op* avil ICTUJJO, you are now equivalent to a
woman. (See also 186. N. 4.)
*Ano, from. *Ano c Hkiovn6kiog,from Heliopolis. In general
this preposition denotes motion from one place to another.
>f AiQ, synonymous with uvsv.
"AxQig or &XQ 1 > until. *'A%qi xvscpaog, till evening.
did, through, by means of, with the assistance of, in. A ia rr t g
nohewg, through the city. Jia vvxiog, in (or during) the
night.
"jSvsxa, on account of, for the sake of, in respect of, as to. T ov
enaivela&ai, Zvexa, for the sake of being praised. Hold a
is oov aTirjftova TOV (pvhaaaovTog elvexsv Tigoodoxa IOL
aTioroaTrjasiv, so far as his guardian is concerned, expect
thy son to return safe.
*| or Ix, out of, from, of. !z?x i^g olxlag, from the house.
In connection with passive forms it is equivalent to vno,
by. Ta lex&ivia e 'Als%dvd QOV, the words spoken by
Alexander.
jb'Ti/, on, upon, to, during. 'Enl TWV xf(pZwy, upon their
heads. 3 nl SaQ^EMv, to Sardes. *Enl aQ%ovTog JKv-
&vx)ieovg, during the archonship of Euthycles, or when
Euthycles was archon.
Kara, against, down from, on, upon. Ka-t spov, against me.
oi, with, together with. ME? a TWV nalSwv, ivith my
children.
fXQig or pexgt, until, as far as. Mi%qi lovvov, until this
time.
195.] DATIVE. 221
Haga, from, of. Xgvolov nag a, aov lafiwv, receiving gold
from thee.
negl, concerning, about, in respect to. Hegl 'A&yvuv, about
Athens.
JlXyv, except.
Ilgo, before, in preference to. Ilgo &vgwv, before the doors.
Ilgo TOVTWV TWV x a x w *> r)[uv ys xgsoaov xeu OTLWV oc'AZo
na&eeiv earl, it is better for us to suffer any thing else than
these evils. ( 186. N. 4.)
Hg6g, of, for, on the side of. ngog nongog
a tomb-breaker on his father's side. ngog TMV
in behalf of the rich.
So in protestations, 2s ngog tov oov vexvov
I beseech thee by thy child.
In connection with passive forms it is equivalent to vno, by.
'E&SJ.WV pa&esiv TO noisvpsvov ngog ^taxedaipovlwv,
wishing to know that which was done by the Laccdcemonians.
c Tneg, over, above, in behalf of , for the sake of. c Tnsg rj^wv
nogevofASVog, passing over us. Ta Itgot T &v6fj,eva vnsg
IT\<; nohswg, the victims offered in behalf of the city. ALG-
aofi 3 vnsg yv%rjg, I beseech thee by thy life.
c 2Vro, under. c T(p* ag pot-tog, under the car. In connection
with passive verbs, by. Hgooxvvovfisvog ydy dag ffaaifavg
vnb -IMV apy ambv, being now saluted as king by his at-
tendants.
DATIVE.
195. 1. The dative is used after ADJECTIVES,
ADVERBS, and VERBS, implying resemblance, union,
approach. E. g.
'jfx e A o g d 1 1, Resembling Jupiter.
jtaxto'aifiorloig dta^wc^scr #t, To Jight with the Lace-
dcemonians.
Words of this class are adelyog resembling, axoZovfo'a), xo-
hov&og, apa, cnulaviog, 8iaywvl^o^ai t diadfyoiMXi, dials/of^oii, stxo-
T(og, lxo> look like, resemble, enofiai, tgi^w, I'xshog, I'aog, I'awg,
[uxxopai, opog and its compounds and derivatives, nnlalw,
TtngnnliTJoiog, nhyalog, Tsofoftlw, waavTwg, and many others. Add
to these the adverbs a/^ou, iyyvg, n&ac, which commonly take
the genitive ( 188. 2).
2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accu-
sative of the immediate, and the dative of the remote, ob-
19*
222 SYNTAX. [ 196.
ject. E. g. Kg art i n Q oa spi^s de07i6fy]v,he led Ms master
to victory.
Such verbs are elxdw, filyvviii, o/iotow, and some others.
NOTE 1. The adjectives op<uos and $sA<po$, and those compounded with truv
and ofAov t are sometimes followed by the genitive ( 188). K0wV> common*
which usually takes the dative, is followed by the genitive, when it implies pos-
session, ( 174. N.)
NOTE 2. When the substantive, which depends on I'aog or
ofioioc, is the same as that with which I'aog or opowg agrees,
the former is omitted, and the noun which limits it ( 173)
is put in the dative. E.g. Kopai XaylTsuaiv opolat,, for
Kopai, oinolai foils xofteug iwv X/TWV, hair resembling that of
the Graces. Ov pfjsixsg tag i'aag n^yag ipol, thou didst not
receive, the same number of stripes with me.
NOTE 3. The pronoun o avrog, the same, ( 144. 3,) is
often followed by the dative. In general, however, the dative,
to which o amog directly refers, is omitted, and the limiting
noun (^ 173) is put in the dative, ( 195. N. 2.) E. g. Ovdsv
iwv CIVTWV exslroig nQUTTOftsv, we do nothing like the things
which they did, where rwr amwv refers to the deeds, and exdvoig
to the doers.
NOTE 4. ET$ sometimes imitates I etvro's. E. g. n Os IfAo} picis iyivtr'
ix fAaTtgos, who proceeded from the same mother as I.
^ 196. 1. The dative is used to denote that to
which the quality of an ADJECTIVE is directed.
E. g.
Tolg (plhoig, Dear to his friends.
&eolg, Most hateful to the gods.
Adjectives of this class are aya&og, alaxgog, evavrlog svxgr]-
oxog, fy&Qog, ydvg, xAo?, no&swog, gadiog, ylkog, ^aA7ro?, and
many others.
2. The dative is used after VERBS, to denote the
object to or for which any thing is done. E. g.
Borj&etv rfl ndrQa, To aid the country.
Tolg &avovoi nhomog ovdsv tocpekel, JVealth in no way
benefits the dead.
Av 11 a iv ofjLsvri TW vexgcp, Abusing the dead body.
*Jl%Qu sivai fi 01 doxelg, Thou seemest to me to be pale.
This rule applies also to the dative after IMPERSONAL VERBS
( 159. N. 1, 2). E. g. Joxs? /iot, it seems tome.
197.] DATIVE. 223
Verbs of this class are wta'lfw, avddvw, ^ f (/xw, w^'/w, UQ-
, fioy&fo, doxeay, el'xw yield, lvo%Mw t
xaTctxova), Aai^w, At^uc^Vo^eu,
, nixgtyyvoiWj nu&oiioii, nQinw, nQoardaaw,
vnaxovto, vndxw, vnomriaow, vnoTl&spai, y&oviw, %a-
i, and many others.
NOTE 1. Many verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the accusative
( 163. 1) instead of the dative.
3. The dative is used after verbs signifying to be, to denote
that to which any thing belongs. E. g.
TeMw ncudsg ^aav xakol IE xuya&ol, Tellus had good and
noble children.
NOTE 2. The substantive in the dative after eivm, ylytsa&ai,
is often accompanied by a participle signifying willing, being
pleased, expecting. E. g. Ol KQOTWVICITUI einov, ovx av acpicsi
povhofisvotg slvai, the Crotonians said that they should not
be willing.
o
The participles, of which the dative accompanies the sub-
stantive, are ^ovlo^voq, eAjro^fvo^ ydopsvog, <&&wv, ngood^o^vog.
Add to these the adjective xwv.
Verbs signifying to come sometimes imitate slvai. E. g.
Jl^waxw * e$ a<jpwVv eekdofievoiaiv ixdvto, I know that
you longed for my arrival.
4. Many transitive VERBS of this class ( 196. 2) are fol-
lowed by the accusative of the immediate, and the dative of the
remote, object. E. g.
A Id w^w i GO i TOVTO, I give this to thee*
NOTE 3. A few verbs denoting to give a part (as usTotdldwfit,)
are often followed by the dative of a person, and the genitive
of the thing imparted ( 178. 1).
5. The dative is put after the INTERJECTIONS ol', w, ito, and
oval. E. g. Ol poi, woe is me.
^197. 1. The dative is often used to denote
that with regard to which any thing is affirmed.
E.g.
Mahotoi oTiovd^g a&ct ir\ 7roAt, Of the utmost considera-
tion with regard to the state, or Deserving the most serious
attention of the state.
2q>wv fitsv EvroJir) Jiog l^st lilog dy, As to you two, the com-
mand of Jupiter is now done.
224 SYNTAX. [ 198.
So *Anb *EfacpctVTlvrjg nohog aVw \ovii avavTsg satt TO XWQ'IOV,
to a person going up from the city Elephantine the country ap-
pears steep.
NOTE 1. This dative is often preceded by the particle wg.
E. g. 3 JEnsl7iQ ! ysvvaiog wg Idovti, since thou art of noble
descent to one who sees thee, or rather, as thy appearance in-
dicates.
Hence the phrase e Jlg l^ol, or "Jig y' ipol, in my opinion.
E. g. KQBCOV yv fylwrbg, wg spot, TTOTC, Creon was once, in my
opinion, in an enviable condition.
NOTE 2. Frequently the dative of the personal pronoun is
apparently superfluous. E. g. Elnipwal poi, Tgwsg, ayavov
Ihovr^oq naryl q>ttw xrxi fj.rjTQl yorjftevou, O Trojans, do tell the
beloved father and mother of illustrious llioneus to bewail,
where poi might have been omitted without any essential in-
jury to the sense. ^A^d a' eg 'Hkvaiov nedlov a&avaTOt, nsp^jov-
oiv, ovvw' %xig 'Ekevrjv, xal ayiv ya^Qog 4iog eaai, but the
immortals will send thee to the Ely sian fields , because thou hast
Helen for thy wife, and art son-in-law to Jupiter, where the
dative ocplv, referring to #aVTot, implies that the person, to
whom as refers, is a favorite of the gods.
2. The dative is often used to limit any word or
expression. E. g.
dvvoLioi ywoptvoi xal rolg awfj,aGi xal ralg ipvxctlg, Be-
coming strong both in body and soul. Here the dative
denotes that in which they became strong.
l$ sxsxaoTo, He was eminent with the spear.
NOTE 3. The dative is put after comparatives to denote the
excess of one thing over another. E. g. noli loyl{iw q
c Ellnq ysyove aafrsvearsQi], Greece has become weaker by one
distinguished city.
NOTE 4. Particularly, the dative is often used to limit the
meaning of a substantive, in which case it is nearly equiva-
lent to the adnominal genitive ( 173). E. g.
Oriftaiaiv V|, King of Thebes.
Joaig ixv&wnoiaiv, A gift to men. Here the dative is
used objectively, (.$ 173. N. 2.)
^198. The dative is used to denote the cause,
manner, means, and instrument. E. g.
< 199, 200.] DATIVE. 225
To lg nsTigaypsroig alaxvvopevoi, Being ashamed of their
past acts.
4 Q op 01 I'evTo eg tovg fiaQpagovg, They went running against
the barbarians.
TM a co fi aii EQya^6^vog t Working with his body .
NOTE 1. The dative after the verb XQULOHUI, avail my self \
use, and its compounds, may be referred to this head. E. g.
X QW [is& a avTO), we use it.
NOTE 2. This dative sometimes depends on lv, rwv, v#o. E. g. *Dy<r* I 1
oftftac-tv, seeing with my eyes. "Ivet x,tffiv i> r' Am'iao $*fttii t that he might
fall by the hands ofjEneas.
199. The dative is used to denote that by which any
thing is accompanied. E. g. ^Efiori&rioctv idlg dwgievaiv eaviwv
7e nevTotxoaloig xal %ihloig onhliaig xal TWV ^v^t^ioi^wv
Hvgloig, they assisted the Dorians with one thousand jive
hundred heavy-armed soldiers of their own, and ten thousand
of their allies.
The nouns, of which the dative may thus be used, are chiefly
the following : Innsvg, vavg, onUirig, ne&g, nefaounyg, onlog,
NOTE 1. This dative is frequently accompanied by the da-
tive of amog. E. g. TQ^^ig avtotg nit] QW paGi die<p&d-
grioav y galleys were destroyed with every thing on board.
NOTE 2. Sometimes the preposition ovv is found before this
dative. E. g. "Efeyov ctvibv vnonQyatti, nuactg avTrj avv no hi,
they said that he burned them all together with the city.
. 1. Frequently the dative, in connection with a
passive form, denotes the subject of the action. E. g.
ngoonoloig qpt/yLaatygTat, He is taken care of by the
servants, the active construction of which is ngooTiolot,
yvldaaovaLv ainov } The servants are taking care of him-
( 163. 1.)
doiolai x ao LyvriTOiGi dctpsvTS, Being slain by two
brothers.
NOTE 1. The preposition turo is often used before this dative. E. g. "H*
viro Tv'Sti'by #vxwa,t x^oviovro $u.\ayyis 'T^<w<v, thus were the close ranks
of the Trojans routed by Tydides.
2. The dative after verbal adjectives in rog and xeog ( 132.
1, 2) denotes the subject of the action. E. g. Elntg Tipcia&ai
(fovtei, wcpekrjTsa aoi ?y nohg iGilv y if thou wishest to be hon-
oredj thou must benefit the state.
226 SYNTAX. [201-203.
So when the neuter of the verbal in reog is equivalent to Sal
with the infinitive ( 162. N. 1), Ov yvvaixwv ovdinofr' ea&'
jTe'a riplv, we must never be conquered by women, where
is equivalent to del -
NOTE 2. When the verbal in isov is equivalent to del with
the infinitive, the accusative is often used instead of the dative.
The accusative in this case denotes the subject of the infini-
tive implied in the verbal adjective ( 159. N. 1.) E. g. OVTS
pt,a&o<f)0()r]Teov aMovg 1} iovg OTgonevo pe'vovg, nor
must others, than those who serve in the army, receive wages,
where fua&ocpoQrjTeov is equivalent to del
^ 20 1. The dative often answers to the ques-
tion AT WHAT TIME 1 WHEN ? E. g.
TavTij ty fjfieQa ovx e^axeoaxo (taadsvg, The king did
not fight on that day.
NOTE 1. Sometimes this dative depends on iy. E. g. T $' ev #^ar/, on
this day, to-day.
NOTE 2. Sometimes the dative is equivalent to the genitive
absolute ( 192). E.g. UoiyaavTi <&QVvl%M dQci[ia Mihrj-
lov a^woiv xat didd^avTi eg dcixova eneas TO ^er^rgov, when
Phrynichus wrote a play, entitled, The Capture of Miletus,
and acted it, the spectators wept. ,
3 O2. The dative often answers to the question IN WHAT
PLACE ? WHERE? E. g. Maga&wvi, ox r)fiev, gduoxogiev, when
we were at Marathon, we pursued (the enemy}.
2O 3. The dative is put after the following
PREPOSITIONS I
)l, about, on, concerning. E. g. 9 A [i cp I nlevQulg, about
the sides. 3 A[i(pl TQani^aig, on the tables. 'Apcpl yv-
vaixi, about (that is, for the sake of) a woman.
*Ava, upon, only in the poets.
*Ev, in, at. E. g. 3 v TOVTM TW von to, in this place.
Sometimes V is found before a genitive, the noun, to
which it belongs, being understood. E. g. "Ev Cf Aidov, sc.
dopoig, in the palaces of Hades, simply in Hades.
3 nl, upon, on account of, on condition that. *En\ TW yelng /
what dost thou laugh at? *Enl rolade xovg nQsofleig in
ctQiarov xaka), on this condition I invite the ambassadors
to dinner.
204, 205.] VOICES. 227
Mew, among, with, only in the poets. "Oyg su sidw, oaaov
e/M /ifi n a a iv airjjUOTcm? "freog tlfja, that I may well
know, how much I am the most unhonored goddess of
all
i, at, by the side of, with. JlaQu aol, with thee, at thy
house.
Ql, about, on account of, for. nsyl glcpsi, about (on)
the sword, llsgl ycty dls noipevi lawv, for he feared
for the shepherd of the people.
oq, with, in addition to. HQ bg aol, with thee. HQ o g
-tovToig, in addition to these things.
2vv, with, by means of. 2vv aol, with thee. 2vv paxaig,
by means of battles.
'TJIO, under. c Tno rolg 8v va [idvoiair wv, being under the
powerful.
In connection with passive verbs, vno means by. c Tno
Tvdsldr] xhoveovro yakayysg, the ranks were routed by
Tydides.
VOCATIVE.
2O4. 1. The vocative forms no part of a
proposition. It is used simply in addressing a per-
son or thing. E. g.
Eixe, Jibg &vyotTBQ, noU^iov, Depart, daughter of Jupiter,
from war.
2. The vocative is often put after the INTERJECTIONS w, lot.
E. g. !ft *Axil*v 9 O Achilles.
VOICES.
ACTIVE.
2Off. 1. The active voice comprises the greater num-
ber of transitive or active, and intransitive or neuter, verbs.
E. g. xoTTtw, cut ; Tw, run.
NOTE 1. The accusative of the reflexive pronoun is fre-
quently omitted ; in which case the verb has the appearance
of an intransitive verb. E. g. tlavvw sc. l^avxov, impel myself,
proceed, march.
228
SYNTAX.
[205.
NOTE 2. The perfect and pluperfect active of the following
verbs borrow the signification of the passive or middle.
i, open, ol'yopai, am opened,
iwya, stand open. But the
first perfect Iw#a means have
opened.
>, destroy, olkv[iv.i, perish,
oAwAa, have perished. But
the first perfect oAwyUxa
means have destroyed.
rouse, oQWfuxi, rise,
oQwga, have arisen.
i, persuade, Tiel&ofjiai, am
persuaded, ninoi&a, confide
in, trust.
'AAI2KSI, capture,
am captured, mlowa, have
been captured.
PQvzdopai,, roar, (tifiQv%a, roar.
riFNJL, produce, ylyvo^oa, am
produced, become, yeyova,
am.
dalco (transitive), burn, dnlo^ai
(intransitive), burn, deduct,
burn.
AASl, teach, dedaa, have learn-
ed.
i, see, dsdogxa, see.
, raise, tyslgofieu, raise nrjyvvpi,fix, nyyvvpai, am fix-
myself, rise, fygyyoga, am ed, ninriya, stand fast.
awake. But the first per-
fect tyriyegxa, means have
raised.
Qel7i(>), demolish, egyQiTtot, am
demolished,
lattiiju, cause to stand, WTOC pai ,
cause myself to stand, stand,
tOTrjxa, eaTotct, stand. But
the later form I'ainxa means
have placed,
xsv&co (transitive), hide, xsxev-
'&a (intransitive), hide.
w, afflict, x^opxi, care for,
ot, care for.
, tear, sygtoya, am torn
to pieces.
dvvvfu, extinguish, afisvrvftai,
am extinguished, la/ft? x, am
extinguished.
(transitive), to rot, or\nQ-
, (intransitive), to rot,
, to be rotten.
, cause to wither, emTlo-
(intransitive), wither,
am withered.
(transitive), melt,
(intransitive), melt,
am melted.
madden,
am cpalva), make appear, cpalvo[iai, t
appear, Tii^vu, have ap-
peared.
cpvw, produce, (fvo^ai, am pro~
duced, nscpvxa, nicpva, am.
mad, [ttfiyva, am mad, rave.
^^x0|Ut, bleat, ^g'^xa, bleat.
/uvxoeo^wt, bellow, ftifivxa, bel-
low.
REMARK. Sometimes the perfects * / # X >j y a, , from >.
from <p&&i/)eii, take the signification of the passive.
NOTE 3. When the verb is both transitive and intransitive,
the first perfect is transitive, and the second perfect (if there
be any), intransitive. E. g. nguaaco, transitive, do, has 1 perf.
7iinQa%a, have done ; but nQaaaw, intransitive, am or do, has
2 perf. nengoiya.
206.] VOICES. 229
NOTE 4. The second aorist active of the following verbs
takes the signification of the passive or middle.
*AAI2KSI, cdlaxoiicti, ecikwv, was juvxao^ueu, tpvxov, bellowed.
captured. o^ivvv^ii, apevvvpcu, ea/jrjv, was
deQxopui, edgaxov, saw. extinguished.
Qslx(o (transitive), break, %QI- axfi'Mw, axsU,o(jtai f taxtyr, with-
Y.OV (intransitive), broke. ered.
fgslno), fgdno^ai, jjgmov, fell (pvco, cpvo^iai, tcptiv, was produc-
down. ed, am. But the first aorist
, 'iaTttfioti, IffT^v, stood. scpvaa means I produced.
bleated.
2. Causative verbs, that is, verbs signifying to cause (one)
to do any thing, belong to the active voice. E. g. ysvoa, cause
to taste ; ptprqaxUi cause to remember, remind.
PASSIVE.
2O C. 1. The passive takes for its subject that which
was the immediate object of the active ( 163. 1). That,
which was subject-nominative in the active ( 157), becomes
genitive in the passive, and depends on vno, naga, ngog, or e&
vnb TMV ngsafiewv, We
completely deceived by the ambassadors. The active
struction of this example would be Ol ngsofieig
ypoig, The ambassadors are completely deceiving us.
2. The dative without a preposition is often used instead of
the genitive with vno, particularly in connection with the per-
fect and pluperfect passive. E. g.
JSi'grjro ravja TW Ev&vdyfiM, These things had been,
said by Euthydemus, equivalent to Elgr^n taiiTct o Ev&v-
dqpo?, Euthydemus had said these things.
REMARK. The context will determine whether a dative in connection with fr
passive verb denotes the subject ( 200) or the object ( 196) of that verb.
3. When the active is followed by two cases, the
passive retains the latter. E. g.
*Tnb dibs Innoavvag tdiddx&yg, Thou wast taught
horsemanship by Jove, the active construction of which
would be C Ztvg Innoavvag as tdlda&v, Jove taught thee
horsemanship, ( 165.)
20
230 SYNTAX. [207.
sr at, iwv v o p I [i w v vno nvog, Jffe is deprived of
privileges by somebody, the active construction of which
would be Ely/si TI? aviov TWV voplficov, Somebody deprives
him of privileges, ( 180. 2.)
NOTE 1. The object, which was in the genitive or dative, is
sometimes made the subject of the passive. E. g. 'fixslvog
xareyrjyla&r], he was condemned, (183.2.) Ol jLaxs-
8aip,6vioi an KJTOVVT a i vno ndvxwv HehoTiovvrjalwv, the
Lacedemonians are distrusted by all the Peloponnesians, the
active construction of which would be ndvjsg
tdlg ^iuxsdaifiovloig f ( 196. 2.)
NOTE 2. The aorist passive frequently has the signification
of the aorist middle. In such cases the aorist middle is either
rare or obsolete. E. g. txnaMdaow, deliver, anrjMdyrjv, delivered
myself, not was delivered.
MIDDLE.
3OT. 1. The middle is often equivalent to the active
followed by the accusative of the reflexive pronoun. E. g.
vlnTopcu equivalent to vlmw tyavTov, wash myself.
So CHyOL^ko^iai, CtVGtQTWOfACtl, OtTlCiyXOflGU, UnS%0[AOCL,
xtlgoiKU, xTwlo[iai, hovofiai, ^vgaogAtM, negctLoo^LCti, :
fiat, and some others.
When the active is followed by two cases, middle verbs of
this class retain the latter. E. g. 3 vdvsTai TOV dcogaxa,
he puts on the cuirass, of which the active construction would
be 'Erftvtt kaviov TOV #o>x, ( 165.)
NOTE 1 . The accusative after xeigoftat, nt^ou'oopou, Qoptopoti, and some others,
is properly speaking synecdochical ( 167).
NOTE 2. Some middle verbs of this class ( 2O7. l) have apparently be-
come intransitive. E. g. sXvra, cause to hope, tXvrof&uij cause myself to hope,
simply hope ; vXa%&>, cause to wander, vr>.aZ > of*,ou, cause myself to wander,
simply wander.
2. Very frequently the middle is equivalent to the active
followed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun. In this case
the middle is used transitively. E. g.
Uoistad- at TTJV elQqvrjv, To make a peace for one's self.
But noislv ir\v tlg^vriv, To make a peace for others.
Ha()aay.V(xo[ial TL, I prepare something for myself.
But UctQctaytsva^o) 11, I prepare something for somebody.
$ 207.] VOICES. 231
3. The middle is sometimes used transitively to denote that
the object of the action is a thing belonging to the subject of
the verb. E. g.
Xgvarig ylds Ivaopsvo? &vy argot, Chryses came in order to
ransom his own daughter.
NOTE 3. Sometimes, for the sake of emphasis, the reflexive pronoun is an-
nexed to a middle verb used transitively ( 207. 2, 3). E, g. Tey^a^-
IA KI \(jt,cLvr u rccvrXf I have written these things for myself.
4. Sometimes the middle is equivalent to the corresponding
active with the reciprocal pronoun. E. g. koidogovfis&a equiva-
lent to loidoQovpsv aMftoi?, we are reviling one another ; but
loidoQovfte&ot, in the passive, would mean we are reviled by
others.
5. Sometimes the middle is used transitively to express an
action which takes place at the command of the subject of the
proposition. E. g.
*Edt,dcxgd[iriv G s, I caused thee to be taught, I have given
thee an education. But *dlda$d os, I taught thee.
NOTE 4. Frequently the middle does not seem to differ from
the active. E. g. idsa&ou, in Homer, is equivalent to idelv,
to see.
NOTE 5. The future middle is often equivalent to the future
active. In such cases the future active is either rare or obsolete.
E. g. -d-av[idw t admire, tfavfidaopou,, shall admire, not shall
admire myself.
Verbs, of which the future middle is equivalent to the future
active : ayvoseo, rcflw, axouw, a^wa^Twrw, annvidw, ano'kaiJM, /?a-
5/fw, palvw, (flow, /5AeJaxo), /5oo), ^?Aw, yyQaaxw, yiyvwaxw, dd-
xvw, SctQ&dvw, JETfL, didgdaxw, JPAMJL, e/xw/u/w, El A SI,
tiftl am, EAETOfL, Inaivim, eniogxsw, &uv[Adw, xHw run,
w, yw swim, o^a
OIIJl, ovQ(a, nal(a, ndo%(a, nrjddw, nlnno, TrAsw, nvsw, nvlyw,
Q8Q)JIOW, Oiyd(0, (JLWTldM, (7XOJ7TTW, <J7lOvddw, (JVQl(*),
yw, Tw#aw, ysvyto, ^w, ^w^sw, and some others.
NOTE 6. Sometimes the future middle is equivalent to the
future passive. E. g. wqpfAs'w, benejit, wqp^'ao^uat, shall be
benefited, not shall benefit myself.
Verbs of which the future middle is equivalent to the future
232 SYNTAX. [208,209.
passive : aSwiw, aintHdaaw, jSlamco,
w, yvldaaw, and some others.
NOTE 7. The aorist middle is in a few instances equivalent to the aorist pas-
sive. E. g. X/r<w, leave, lliroftnv, was left, not left myself.
DEPONENT VERBS.
3O8. Deponent verbs are those, which are used only in
the passive or middle voice. They are called deponent passive
or deponent middle, according as their aorist is taken from the
passive or middle. In respect to signification, they are either
transitive or intransitive. E. g.
i, take care of, Inspetf&rjr, is a deponent passive.
ten 9 work, slQ/aacx^v, is a deponent middle.
NOTE 1. Some deponents have both the aorist passive and the aorist middle.
E. g. Mvetpcu, am able, ffivvyS-nv, in Ho
NOTE 2. Some deponents have, in the perfect and pluperfect, also a passive
signification. E. g. eya<y**, work, perf. il^ya.ffft.a.t, have worked, sometimes
have been worked.
NOTE 3. Sometimes the aorist passive of a deponent verb has a passive signi-
fication ; in which case the aorist middle follows the present. E. g. xu.r$v-
QiZ.ofAtti, condemn, Ketrt^9i<piffS-tjv t was condemned, xu.rr4,yiq>iff<iiMnv t condemned.
TENSES.
PRESENT, PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE.
2OO. 1. The PRESENT INDICATIVE expresses an ac-
tion or being which is going on now. E. g. ^aqpw, / am
writing.
The present in the dependent moods (subjunctive, optative,
imperative, and infinitive) and in the participle expresses a
continued action. Its time in this case is determined by the
context. E. g. "Hxovaa QTI JlfQi^g nollctg enutdas initial-
TO, ag enadwv rfj nofai inolti a.\)ir\v yi'ki'iv amov, I heard
that Pericles knew many enchantments, which singing to the
city he made it love him.
NOTE 1. The present is frequently used for the aorist in an
animated narration, in which the past is represented as present.
E. g. Hale i xcnix TO Giiqvov, xl itTQtoaxei dice TOV -fraga*
xoc, he strikes (him) in the breast, and wounds him through the
cuirass, where jiaiet, riTQwaxei, stand for tnuias,
209.] TENSES. 233
NOTE 2. The present of %KM has the force of the perfect, have come. The
imperfect of this verb has the force of the pluperfect, had come.
NOTES. Sometimes the present has the force of the future. E. g. JJ^i
regularly means shall go, and sometimes am going.
2. The PERFECT in all the moods and in the participle ex-
presses an action which is now completed. E. g. ysygoupa, I
have written.
NOTE 4. The perfect of some verbs has the signification of
the present. In this case the pluperfect has the signification
of the imperfect. E. g. fixw, seem, I'otxce, seem.
Verbs, of which the perfect has the signification of the
present, are a/w^i, avolyw, avwyw, ftQVx<xo[jiati, ylyvo^icti, rJlNJl,
dala) burn, AEUl, deyxopcu, eyelgw (only the 2 perf.), #w,
ElzJSl, fixw, I'ATIW, loTrjjutLt xAw, x^wfw, XTO//CU, Aaaxw, ^uw,
jUttfcVw, |U'Aa>, [j,i]xoioiicu, /j^uj^axco, /uvxao^toM, nel&cj (only the
2 perf.), QTiyvv^jLi, fy&rvjU, tglw t yvta.
NOTE 5. The perfect is sometimes used for the present to express a cus-
tomary action. E. g. *O xgotruv ?/* vrxvra. f9t${frm*t t the conqueror
takes possession of every thing.
NOTE 6. The perfect is sometimes used for thefuture to express the rapidity
or certainty of an action. E. g. "OXa;Xy, ? ft TKVT' igjo-oftai vreiXif,
thou shalt certainly perish, if I ask thee again the same question.
NOTE 7. The second person of the perfect imperative is
rarely used, except in verbs of which the perfect has the
signification of the present ( 209. N. 4). E. g. Kgd(a f
member thou.
NOTE 8. The third person of the perfect passive imperative
of any verb may be used to denote the complete termination
of an action. E. g. Tama fiev ovv nsnala&G) vfuv, now you
have had sport enough, or let there be no more joking about this.
3. The PLUPERFECT expresses an action which was com-
pleted in past time. E. g. tytppaqptiv, I had written, implying
that there was a time when I could say " I have written."
NOTE 9. In the old writers (as Homer), the pluperfect sometimes has the
force of the aorist, and sometimes of the imperfect. E. g. (II. 5, 66) s/3Xj-
xti for ?/3aAi, from j8aAA.<w, strike; (II. 9, 671) $tibi%Kro, they welcomed, from
li^ofAiti. See also above ( 209. N. 4.)
4. The FUTURE in all the moods and in the participle ex-
presses an action or event which will take place. E. g.
/ shall or will write.
20*
234 SYNTAX. [
NOTE 10. The future is often used to denote a probable
occurrence. E. g. fyrjastg vop.lfta-9-ai av Trotidbg TOITO rovyyov
thai, you will probably say, that this is considered as the busi-
ness of a child.
IMPERFECT.
& 1 0. The imperfect expresses a continued past action.
E. g. i'ygacpov, I was writing, not simply I wrote.
NOTE 1. Sometimes the imperfect expresses an attempt not brought to a
successful conclusion. E. g. (Herod. 1, 68) 'Epi<r9-ovro <rv afajv, he
tried to hire the court-yard.
NOTE 2. The imperfect frequently denotes a customary ac-
tion. E. g. Tov$ nolhag fis&' onhwv eSenspnov , they
were accustomed to send out the citizens armed.
NOTES. The imperfect is frequently used for the aorist,
especially in Homer and Herodotus. E. g. TOTS dy O[*IOTO-
xlerjg xelvov is xal TOV$ KoQiv&lovq noMd is xal xaxct eksye,
then Themistocles said many and bad things bvth about him
and about the Corinthians.
.NOTE 4. The imperfect %v (from tlftt) sometimes stands for itrrf. E. g.
olx, & rtv Sso f, Cypris then is not a goddess fas we thought).
THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE.
. The third future passive expresses a completed
action, the consequences of which will be permanent in future
time. In other words it transports that which is already com-
pleted to a future time. E. g. eyygdcpu, fyy^ygai^o^ai I shall
remain enrolled, implying that / have already been enrolled.
NOTE 1. The third future is the natural future of verbs whose perfect has the
signification of the present ( 209. N. 4). E. g. xraopoti, xixrvftett, xtxrj-
troftcti shall possess.
NOTE 2. In many instances the third future does not differ
in signification from the common future passive. E. g. din,
bind, dsdrjcropou, shall be bound.
NOTE 3. The third future in some instances expresses the rapidity or cer-
tainty of a future action. E. g. ir^oiffffu, srur^agira/ it shall immediately be
done.
AORIST.
2 1. 1. The aorist in the indicative and participle
expresses a transient past action, without any reference to
213.] MOODS. 235
another action. It simply narrates that which took place.
E. g. fygaya, I wrote, not / was writing.
2. The aorist in the dependent moods (subjunctive, optative,
imperative, and infinitive) expresses a momentary action, its
time being determined by the context. E. g. nsgl nldovog
snoi^aaio evogxelv, ^^a^/aff^at tco dfyy wxQa TO dlxaiov,
he thought more of being just than of pleasing the multitude at
the expense of justice.
REMARK. We see then that the present in the dependent moods ( 209. 1)
marks a continued action ; the aorist in these moods marks a momentary action ;
and this is all the difference between these two tenses in the dependent moods.
NOTE 1. The Greeks often use the aorist indicative and parti-
ciple where, properly speaking, the perfect or pluperfect should
be used. It must not be inferred, however, from this that the
aorist may express the time marked by the perfect or pluper-
fect. E. g. (Aristoph. Nub. 238-9) Kara^ 3 w$ *>c, Ivu p
ixdiday$, wv niQ ovvtx* ehrjhv&a. 2SIK. 'Hh&eg ds xotxa il /
Come aown to me, to teach me those things for which I have
come. Soc. What have you come for ? where ?)l&s$ is parallel
with
NOTE 2. The aorist indicative is often used for the present
to express a customary action. E. g. 3 A& an ty$$&v drj
TroMtt ptpfrawovew ol aoyol. Ilaga, fisv ovv <pttov ov fid&ois
av rov& 3 , o d* f>^6? svdvg surety xotaev, But the wise learn
many things from their enemies. Now from a friend you
might not learn this ; but the enemy (as a common thing) com-
pels you to learn it.
NOTE 3. The aorist is used for the future to denote the
rapidity or certainty of an action. E. g. 'Anwlopead* ay 3 ,
el xaxbv nQoaolaopev vsov nahaiw, then we are undone, if we
add a new evil to an old one.
NOTE 4. The aorist of the verbs araW# t despise,
and a few others, is, in conversation, often used for the present, in order to
express a decided feeling of admiration, contempt, or pleasure. E. g. "H.<rS-w
utfeikctTsy it amuses me to hear (your) threats.
MOODS.
INDICATIVE.
213. 1. The indicative is used in independent propo-
sitions. E. g. C dQcixav earl IUXXQOV, the dragon is a long
*^ *-*& , ji*tA*A/
236 SYNTAX. [ 213.
2. The indicative may be put after interrogative and relative
words ($68: 71: 73: 123), E. g. T/ 7ro*I ff/ w>7icrt r*
thou doing ? olds tl povyUia^ he knows what (it) wants.
C avriQ, og TOVT* tnolrjos, the man who made this.
3. The indicative may be put after the following particles :
d, if, whether ; ind, eneidij, after, when ; on, that, because ;
tag, that ; wars, so that.
REMARK. In a sentence containing a condition and con-
sequence or conclusion, the former is called PROTASIS, and the
latter APODOSIS. The protasis begins with the particle el, if.
4. The indicative may be used in conditional propositions.
E. g. Jsiva Ttsiaofiea&a, si oiyy aopsv, If we shall keep
silence we shall suffer terrible things, where ti oiyr^oo^v is the
protasis and dswa nsiaofiw&a the apodosis. ( 213. R.)
5. When the condition and the consequence are both past
actions, the indicative is used both in the protasis and in the
apodosis. In this case the apodosis contains the particle av.
E. g.
Ovroi el Tjaav avdgeg aya&ol, ovx av TIOTS lavxoi 7iaa%ov f
If they had been good men, they would never have suffered
these things.
OVK civ TtQoeheyer , si firj enlaTevaev ahrj&evasiv, Had
he believed that he should prove a false prophet, he would
not have predicted.
NOTE 1. Sometimes the optative is used in the apodosis, especially in the
epic writers. E. g. Kai vu xtv ev9-' at-ro^atro av| oivSguv Alvstetg, 6t p.*
eig ' o%v vovtrt A/ej S-wyoirvg 'AQgoSirv, and now jEneas, king of men, had
perished, had not Venus, daughter of Jove, quickly perceived.
NOTE 2. Sometimes av is omitted in the apodosis. E.g. "El yat,^ %v avrotffi
trgeid'/iXoi TO. pixi.ovra. 'ytvvfftirS'Ct.i, ovb % ovrug avroffrariov <rri rtfau Toureav yv,
for if those things, which were to happen, had been manifest to all, the city
ought not even then to have given these things up.
NOTE 3. The particle V may accompany all the tenses of
the indicative, without any protasis expressed. E. g. 3 E^ov-
loiiriv fisv VLV OVK tyisiv ev&dds, I could have wished not to
be contending here. Ov yag civ ^'J//T' CUVTWV, he could not
have touched them. ''Jlais i^q ilgr^vrig avdit]fi(XQT^xsi, so
that he would have missed the peace. e Ji? axijipiv civ aywv
omo? ovx eadegsTou,, for this contest cannot possibly admit
of any evasion.
NOTE 4. The particles onwg, how, in order that, ocpga, in
order that, py, lest, and the double negative ov py, not, are
214.] MOODS. 237
frequently put before the future indicative. E. g. (Herod. 2,
121, 2) ^ATioTcx^vtiv aitTov -iT}v xecpahrjv, oxwg prj ngoaano-
Ae'dfit xal exeivov, to cut off his head, lest he might bring
destruction upon him also.
NOTE 5. Sometimes the future indicative with oncog and
ov nq supplies the place of an emphatic imperative. E. g.
"Onwg ds TOVTO py diddgeig [irjdevot, but see that you do not
communicate this to anybody. Ov py lr)Qr)0i,g, you shall
not talk nonsense.
In such cases it is customary to supply the verb OQU, see, or
oxonei, consider.
NOTE 6. The historical tenses of the indicative are some-
times put after IW, w, or ^77 lest, in which case the leading
proposition also contains an historical tense. E. g. TVQIOV
oidfAa \mova* eftocVy Iv* vno deigcxoi Uagraaov xctTevaa'&r]v )
leaving the Tyrian surge, I came in order to dwell under
the summits of Parnassus.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
314. 1. The subjunctive is put after the following
particles :
lav, ai'y r\v, if. fiy, lest.
sTisiddv, Indvj enyv, when, after, onus, w?, that, in order that.
tars, until. o(pQct, synonymous with IV or
stag, until. oncag.
wot, that, in order that. nglv, before.
2. The subjunctive is put also after interrogative and rela-
tive words (<$ 68 : 71 : 73 : 123).
3. The verb of the proposition upon which the subjunctive
depends expresses time PRESENT or FUTURE. ( 209. 1, 2, 4.)
Kg.
"Avoiys -irjv vlv\v 1v elcA^eo, Open the forest, that I may
come out. ( 209. 1.)
Jedoixa os fir) Tdyywv dey, lam afraid thou wilt need
stripes. ( 209. N.^4.)
Elaons&u amwtt, av noiyawfisv ytocpov, We shall im-
mediately know, if we make a noise. ( 209. 4.)
'jBx/?//5aov amj\v, IVa &a<jMfie&a ii]V arjdova, Bring
her out, that we may see the nightingale. ( 212. 2.)
SYNTAX. [ 215.
4. The interrogative and relative words, and the particles
law, 0), wet, onwg, oqp^a, nglv, ( 214. 1, 2,) in connection
with the subjunctive, are generally accompanied by the particle
V. E. g.
Z(oa ov TttVTot xakslg, a av yvx^v %y ; Do you not call
animals those which have life ?
OnoTSp av anoxQlvqTai TO fisiQcxxiov, e^skeyx&rjos-
TCU, Whatever answer the young man may give, he will
be confuted.
Aei noLov^v rau# xaaio# , OTUV iiroc, yvwfisv novrjgwv ovx*
gayiionwv, ewg av aviov tppdhtofisv elg KV.KQV,
civ sldfj Tovg &sovg dedoixevcti, IWe always do these
things, when we find out that a person is a lover of evil
deeds, until we place him in a dreadful situation^ that he
may learn to fear the gods.
NOTE 1. The subjunctive often depends on a verb express-
ing time past, contrary to the rule ( 214. 3); in other words,
it stands for the optative (216). This substitution generally
takes place when emphasis is required ; or when the verb after
the particle denotes an action which is continued to the time
of the speaker. E. g. (Eurip. Hec. 26-7) Kravtar tg oldp*
albg f*e&rjx\ IV avibg XQVOOV ev dofioig %xy, killing (me), he
threw me into the surge, in order that he might keep the gold
in his house. 3 7ioies de apcpoTSQct rama, wg o is noTotpbg
(IfjadvTfQog BIT], xot] ol nkooi iwoi axohol eg rrjv Bapvkm'ct,
she did both these things, in order that the river might be
slower, and that the navigation up to Babylon might be
crooked. 3 JE/co qpoprj&eig ^ koiSoglot y s v r\i a i , naKiv xaTS-
ngavvov ibv Kivtvinnov, I, fearing lest abusive words should
be used, again appeased Ctesippus.
NOTE 2. M^, lest, is sometimes accompanied by otus. E. g. Ai$oi%* eras
ftoi py t.ietv (f>etvys ffoQvi, I fear lest you prove to be very artful,
NOTE 3. Instead of p*, lest, with the subjunctive, on, o*e*s, or us, with
the indicative, is sometimes used.
NOTE 4. Sometimes the verb, upon which pi, lest, depends, is omitted.
E. g. (II. 22, 123 : Plat. Grit. 9.)
NOTE 5. Sometimes the subjunctive is put after the particles /, imi t Irs^j,
ex-ors, on, unaccompanied by v, ( 214. 1, 4.)
915. 1. The first person plural of the subjunctive is
often used in exhortations. E. g. Toy Mev&wv
let us imitate Meneldus.
216.] MOODS. 239
2. The first person singular also of the subjunctive, pre-
ceded by the imperative aye or g)%, is often used in exhorta-
tions. E. g. <2>6g ccxovao), let me hear.
NOTE 1. Homer uses the first person singular of the subjunctive in exhorta-
tions without &<ys, tpigt, or any auxiliary word. E. g. (II. 22, 450) "l^ap,*
fctv' t^ya, rirvx.Ta.t) let me see what deeds have been done.
3. T he first person of the subjunctive is used also in questions
of doubt, when a person asks himself or another what he is to
do. E. g. Hug <pw e TilaTaa&ai ; how can I say that I know?
Elnw TL; may I say any thing ?
Frequently the question begins with the second person of
the present indicative of ^ovlo^ai or ^e'Aw. E. g. Bovlsi,
v; wilt thou that we place? In such cases /5oivUt or
usually precedes the subjunctive.
NOTE 2. Sometimes the interrogation disappears after S-fcAs/? or $ov\n
( 215. 3). E. g. Efrs rt fiovXii #o<rys n anp'&*.ys t whether thou
wishest to add or take away any thing.
4. The first person of the subjunctive is used also in
questions expressing indignation. E. g. (Aristoph. Ran.
1132-4) Aloxvke, THXQOdVto ooi aiwnav. AT2X. 3 Eyw aiwnoo /
^Eschylus, I advise thee to be silent. JEscn. Am I to be
silent ?
NOTE 3. The subjunctive is often used after ou pv for the future indicative.
E. g. O#rs y/yvtra/, ovrt ysyavsv, ou^l ouv fty ysv^ra/, it is not y it has not
been, it will not be.
In Homer, the subjunctive, with or without xiv, is sometimes equivalent to
the future indicative. E. g. .v<ro[tKi its 'Ai^aa, xett Iv vixviffft Qottivu, Iwill
go into Hades, and shine among the dead.
5. In prohibitions, the second person of the aorist subjunc-
tive is used after py and its compounds. E. g.
Mr] qpo/5^a9^?, Pear not.
NOTE 4. The third person of the aorist subjunctive is rarely found after py
in prohibitions.
OPTATIVE.
316* 1. The optative is put after the following parti-
cles :
si, if* OTTW?, w, that, in order that.
Inel, enstdr), when, after. OIL, that.
i'(7T, until. oyQtt, synonymous with IW or
iw, until. onwg.
Iva, that, in order that. ngiv, before.
fir), lest.
240 SYNTAX. [ 216.
2. The optative is put also after interrogative and relative
words (68: 71 : 73 : 123).
3. The verb of the proposition, upon which the optative
depends, expresses time PAST. ( 209. 3 : 210 : 212. 1.) E. g.
'jETAa OVSVS&* tva (popq&slrjv tyw, He was telling great
stories that I might fear, or in order to scare me.
HQWTOI drj snsna tig fl'ij> xwt no&sv I'A^ot, Then he
asked who he was, and whence he came.
NOTE 1. The optative often depends on a proposition
which contains a verb expressing present or future time. In
this case it generally denotes uncertainty or probability. E. g.
Kaleaov igoybv Evgvxfaiav, ofpg 3 snog ei'noipi,, call nurse
Euryclea, that I may say a word to her.
NOTE 2. When the present is used for the aorist ( 209.
N. 1), it is regularly followed by the optative. This is no ex-
ception to the rule ( 216. 3). E. g. Bovtip Intiexvarat,
onus py alia&Elev 3 A&yvcuoi, he contrives a plan which
should prevent the Athenians from assembling.
NOTE 3. Sometimes the particle v accompanies the words which precede the
optative ( 216, 1, 2). Thus the optative is sometimes found after Uv, IVs^av,
'tva. av, /u,vi civ, of us %>*> oTorctv, oretv, otpgct, eiv, us civ.
4. Particularly the optative is used when any thing that has
been said or thought by another is quoted, but not in the
words of the speaker. The action denoted by the optative
may refer to present, past, or future time. E. g.
on pav&avoisv ol [lav&dvovTeg, a OVK
, He answered that those, who learn, learn
what they do not know.
Einov OIL &uvfia(ji:a)g anovdu Jo^^sv, / said that we
were wonderfully in earnest.
*HiSri pug, on | avrwv xedof ti avaxvyono twv SQWTI]-
paTwv, For I knew that something good would come out
of these questions.
NOTE 4. Sometimes on or u$ is omitted before this optative ( 216. 4). E. g.
Xat/r* acray y s/Xav vrbffii ..... yvveiijtot vfifrriv ^' Iv oo/u-ot; tugoi, announce
these things to my husband ; and that he will find his wife faithful in the
house.
"Or/ may be omitted also when it has already been expressed. E. g. TLgurov
fji\v 9f^os TLetgiKvous vivas ihtyiv, o<ri M>j^oxoy (JL\V cLvu tin ^efitxot wfttgav
airo S-aXoia-ffvis o$6v ' 2s vS-*? $i &%uv f trot TO, and first he said to some
l*arians t that Medocus was up twelve days' Journey from the sea ; and (that )
Seuthes would be the leader.
217.] MOODS. 241
NOTE 5. Instead of the optative after i/, on, u;, the indicative is often used.
E.g. Upon* OVTUV 071 TW 'EAXa^a tX svStgovo-t, having proclaimed
that they liberate Greece, where iAu/&<g07ct> might have been used.
^ 1 T'. 1. The optative is used in the expression of a
wish. E. g.
Sol Ss &ol Toaa Solsr, oace cpQfol afjOi pfrdnac, ^7
/Ae gods give thee as many things as tlwu longest for.
NOTE 1. Frequently the particles ft, d yuQ, d'&e, w?, O
are placed before this optative. E. g. Ei */OLQ tyuv dibs
nlyioxoio ei'rjv, O that I were a son of agis- bearing Jove!
Homer sometimes adds xiv to these particles.
NOTE 2. If the wish refers to past time, the aorist indicative is used after the
abovementioned particles ( 217. N. 1). E.g. Ei'$' i%sxovw, that I
had been cut off!
NOTE 3. Frequently the aorist wfpsXov ^froni oQtfaoa) with the infinitive follows
the particles i"9i, tl ydt.fr us* E.g. Ei'S-' &<ft\iv poi Kr^tfAuv ilvou,
that he were my guardian.
Sometimes aty>cX0y with the infinitive is not accompanied by any particle.
E. g. "H <p s X ftwttts aXXa? ' A^iffTO'yiirevt %*ipn, that no other man had
delighted in Aristoglton f
2. The optative (generally with the particle V) in an in-
dependent proposition, very often implies uncertainty ', doubt,
possibility, or inclination. E. g.
Ovxovv ocv ydr] iwv dfcnaiv tiq "kiyoi, Now some one of
the spectators might (perhaps) say.
ovv sl'noisv av, They might perhaps say.
av ovv amwv nv^olfir^v, Fain would I ask them.
Ei rig 6^ Of to /i, tl vo^iC.M fieyiOTOV eivai rcof Evnyoga
niTiQttynivttv, fig 7ioH?jj> anooiav civ xaiaoj cxlrjV, should
any one ask me, which of the deeds of Evagoras I con-
sider greatest, I should find myself in great perplexity.
NOTE 4. Frequently the indicative is used in the protasis, and the optative
with civ, in the apodosis. E. g. E/ ya fy$l ravrx 7, xai <ruv v^W-
$uv (fmvXoTt^as uv s'/rjv, I should be more worthless than the slaves, if I did
not know these things.
Also the optative is used in the protasis and the indicative in the apodosis.
E. g. OSs f2(J Ttjf VVX.TOS Votget'yvifSeu <z-KV<rrgot<rtqi, I'l <rt eigec, pv\ <rgo%a-
foin roTf iffiXtjlvS-offt, who were to come in the night with the entire army, in
case success should not attend those ivho had entered. ( 213. R.)
NOTE 5. The subjunctive with lav, &v, or tjv is sometimes used in the pro-
tasis, and tiie optative in the apodosis. E. g. "Hv votg6%6>o-t ro7s faytiyfif 01
xvutyw} %Xetivets, vr)*iv(H<r.t$ bftuv ovblv* civ Xoifiot WOT'I, if the fullers furnish
the needy with gowns, pleurisy will never afflict any of us. ( 213. R.)
21
242 SYNTAX. [ 218, 219.
3. The optative with V, in an independent proposition, often
supplies the place of the indicative. E. g.
Ov% civ ns&si[Ar]v tov &QOVQV, I will not give up the throne,
where ps&tlpriv is equivalent to iiq0opixt.
Avrog jUfiWot eyjopai rot, xt ovx av ieiqp#/7?j>, JT will
however follow thee, and I will not be left behind, where
follows
4. Frequently the optative (with or without V) has the force
of the imperative. E. g. El ds fir], Xeiglaoyog fisv yyolTO,
iwv ds TiktvQtov exonegwv dvo iwv nQEo^vxaiMv aTQairiyw in^
[islola&rjv, and if not, let Ckirisophus take the lead, and let
two of the oldest generals take charge of both wings, where
yyeladw, tnin&da&wv, would be less polite. AiyQiq V, you
may speak, softer than Uye, speak thou.
IMPERATIVE.
^1 8. 1. The imperative is used to express a command,
an exhortation, or an entreaty. E. g.
(ptvys, begone ! (pevytTco, let him depart, qpaJ/m, depart ye,
qpsv/e'iaxjwj', let them depart.
2. In prohibitions the present imperative is used after ^
and its compounds. E. g. My yU/e Ta^ra, say not these things.
NOTE 1 . Sometimes p,j is followed by the aorist imperative, particularly by
the third person. E. g. M j $ i trot (jt,i\ntra.Tia, and care not.
NOTE 2. The second person of the imperative is sometimes used for the third
person, when the speaker is in great haste. E. g. Xwg/ Stvgo vcis vvvpTVis '
ro%tue KS rif let every servant come hither ; shoot, every one !
NOTE 3. The imperative in connection with a relative pro-
noun or relative adverb, is sometimes found in a dependent
proposition after ota#a (from oldu, know). E. g. OtW ovv o
; knowest thou what thou must now do ? o!a#' we
v / dost thou know how thou must do? Oia&a vvv a
; do you know what I desire to be done to me 1
INFINITIVE.
^ 319. 1. The infinitive depends on a VERB,
PARTICIPLE, Or ADJECTIVE. E. g.
* Tptt<; Povhso&s ysvEV&ai, aviov aoqpoV / Do you wish
him to become wise ?
219.] MOODS. 243
*A&riVttluvg nocvTitg {ifra TOV &flov vopl^tig dvrijaea&ni,
n o if] a a i n e 1 & e a & a I ooi ; Do you think that you will
be able to make all the Athenians, together with your uncle,
follow your advice 1 Here nd&tv&ai depends on noirjoou,
noiriGKi on dvvqaea&ai, and dvvrjaea&at on vopl&ig.
deivog vo(Ai6fAevog uvai hs'yeiv, Being considered an
eloquent speaker.
The infinitive may depend on the verbs mH^ofuu,
axotw, avayxa^w, environ, avwyco, a|toa>, unayoyeva),
threaten, unwitiv, aga> begin, povhoftai, Siv^im, diotv
didauxd), doxe'w, dvva^tcxi, ca, f^f'Aw, I'^w, il'do^KXi seem,
ayyeMofiai, Inttyopcu,
M can, ixrrcJw,
Moaopat, pay & drat,
ofivvpi, o^o^oysa), oQfidw, OTQVVW, o<pell(o,
uirso), naQnaxsva&ftai, naQcxcprj^i, nel&w, Tift^ao^at, nt(pvxa
eigpvv (from qpt;w), 7r<c7Tuo), noilta, TiQoatQsofMu,
onou, nQoaioiaaw, oivyew, ovrlijpt, totyaw,
alvofjcti, qpi?/uc, and some others.
It may depend on the adjectives ddvvaiog, aiog, deirog, 8i-
of, tnrryd*to$, tTotpog, ytivg, Ixavog, xaxog, o|uc, Trt^a-
yoc, gad tog, ^aAsTro'c, and some others.
2. The infinitive is often used after verbs, participles, and
phrases, to denote a cause or motive. E. g.
&V6OT* 'Ayctpdjivovi h el Tie yQQrjvai, Thyestes left it to
Agamemnon to carry (it).
NOTE 1. MfAXw, followed by the infinitive (present, aorist, or future) of a
verb, forms a periphrastic future. E. g. Ms A. As/ nS-'tvau, he is about to
place.
The infinitive is frequently omitted, when it can be supplied from the context.
E. g. (Aristoph. Plut. 1100-2) Wive* IftM, <rv <rvv dt/gav sxovrns ovruffi
ffQobgot ; EPM. Ma A/', aXX' s^jAXov, sc. xaVre/v, 2V// 7tt, ti^as lY ^OM
/Aa< knocked at the door so furiously ? MER. Not /, 6y Jove, I was going (to
knock).
NOTE 2. The pronominal adjectives nolog, joioade, olog or
olog Tf, and i^ly.oc, are sometimes followed by the infinitive,
in which case they imply capalleness. E. g. Ov% olog T' ei'p
anouo/Siioai TOV ytkwr, I cannot drive away my laughter.
NOTE 3. It has already been remarked ( 158. N. 3), that
the omitted subject of the infinitive is frequently different from
that of the proposition on which it depends. We remark now
that this takes place chiefly after ajdectives. E. g. nap(parjg
daTrjQ 1 8 sir, a star all bright to behold, where the subject of
Idelv would be -uva.
244 SYNTAX. [ 220.
NOTE 4. In narration the infinitive often seems to take the
place of the indicative ; in which case some part of y^pi or
may be supplied. E. g. (Herod. 1. 86) Tov ph dr]
ravia, now he was doing these things, equivalent to
NOTE 5. The infinitive of verbs signifying to go is in some
instances omitted. E. g. (Aristoph Ran. 1279) 3 Eyw ^v ovv
eg TO fitdurtiov povkopai,, sc. tivui, for my part. I wish to go to
the bath. (Id. Av. 1) ' OQ&r t v xefaveig / do you command us to
go right on ?
NOTE 6. The infinitive frequently stands for the second
person of the imperative ; in which case the imperative t'&ffa
or #'ta is usually supplied. E. g. Mynoie ov yvraixl ijniog
sir at, you must never be indulgent to your wife.
NOTE 7. The infinitive sometimes stands for the third person
of the imperative, in which case, the subject, when expressed,
is put in the accusative. It is thu used especially in com-
mands and proclamations. E. g. 7'*i^ avlyaatg tptQsiia xo/Aag
enl r/Jac, awpa de oi'xad' tpbv dufi e vn i , taking my arms, let
him carry them to the hollow ships, and let him give my body
to be carried home. 'Axovsie, taw, iov? onlliaq am even,
hear, ye people, the heavy-armed soldiers must retire.
NOTE 8. Sometimes the infinitive is put for the jirst person
plural of the subjunctive ( 215. 1), in which case ou, may
be supplied. E. g. Nvv fv TJ? c .L'A>l'<5t xara/uc/>arra$ r/^uwar av-
tdtav fnifiskri&fjvai, for the present, remaining in Greece,
let us take care of ourselves.
NOTE 9. Sometimes the infinitive expresses a wish, in which
case dog may be supplied. E. g. Ztv ndrfg, ?? Alavia lv.%*1v ,
y Tvdiog viov, Father Jove, grant that the lot may fall upon
Ajax, or upon the son of Tydeus,
22O. 1. The infinitive is frequently put after words and
phrases signifying 50 that, so as; especially when its connec-
tion with the preceding clause is not very obvious. E. g.
AvToxFiyfg Mxodofirjanv, wars -&(xv^a^siv e^is, They built
it with their own hands, so that I wondered.
Ov yuQ inndG -toi's Xlovg, WOT* Ewvry 8 ovv a i viag t For
he could not persuade the Chians to give him vessels,
The words and phrases, after which the infinitive is put, are
tqp' w, 9' MTS, on condition that, ooov, COM, <g 9 wars, so that,
so as.
221.] MOODS. 245
2. The infinitive is put also after words signifying before,
before that, (as nglv, nylv ^'.) E. g. UQIV TOP roftov
v a i , before the law was made.
NOTE 1. The infinitive with wg, ovov, oa, o TI (from
is often used in parenthetical phrases. E. g. C J2? snog sin si v ,
so to speak. c Jlg eixdaai,, as one might conjecture. c Jlg iv
nliovi Ao'/w 0*77 A wo- at, to explain more fully. c J2g avvtlovii,
si 7i el v, sc. Ao/w, to express it briefly, or to be brief. "Oaov
/ ef* 3 sidsvai, at least as far as my knowledge extends. "O
11 xcifi* eidwai, for aught 1 know.
NOTE 2. In parenthetical phrases ( 220. N. 1) dag is often
omitted, in which case the infinitive appears to stand abso-
lutely. E. g. Ov TroAAoi Ao'/w einslv, not to use many words.
3 Eg TO (xxQtfieg einelv, strictly speaking , to speak strictly.
A ox el v cpoi, as it appears to me. 'OUyov delv, almost, nearly.
dsiv, far from it.
NOTE 3. In phrases like'OUyov dsiv, ( 220. N. 2,) delv is
sometimes omitted. E. g. C 'O dr] o'klyov naaai nl TISQI TO
i}8oval txovai, which almost all the bodily pleasures have.
3. The infinitive is frequently accompanied by the particle
V, in which case it has the force of the indicative, subjunctive,
or optative, with V, ( 213. 5 : 214: 217.) E. g. *nl nol-
Jiwv av rig Id sir doxzl poi, it seems to me that one might see
on many occasions. But 'Enl noKlwv' iig Idslv doxtl poi, would
mean it seems to me that one saw on many occasions.
Frequently the infinitive has the force
of a neuter substantive ; in which case the neuter
of the article ( 141. 3) commonly precedes it. E.g.
KQUTTOV ean TO awcpyovslv TOV n ; A VTigayftovslv, To
act discreetly is better than to meddle with other men's
business.
2euvvv6iie&(x ml TM fiskTtov ytyovlvuti iwv wAAwv, W^e pride
ourselves upon being of nobler descent than others.
diet TO $svog elvixi oux av oi'et adixrj&rjvai / Do you sup-
pose that you will not be wronged, because you are a
foreigner ?
NOTE 1. Frequently the infinitive with the article TOV is
equivalent to the genitive denoting that on account of which
any thing takes place ( 187. 1). E. g. M)] /is vnoliifoq ov
TTOOC TO Ti^u/fia (pdortixovvTa Uytit', T o v xaTctcpaieg ys
246 SYNTAX. [ 222.
lest you suppose that I do not argue in order that the thing
may become evident.
NOTE 2. The infinitive with or without the article TO is sometimes used in
exclamations of surprise or indignation, in which case avo'vrov, x^av, tvn^ts,
or ftu^v IffTi, maybe supplied. E. g. (Aristoph. Nub. 268; To $1 (*n xuvinv
e*xo$iv i \9-z7v \p\ TOV xctxcdaiftov' t%ov<ra, I, a wretch, have been foolish
enough to come from home without a helmet ; literally, that X miserable should
have came from home without a helmet.
NOTE 3, The infinitive s7vi (from tlpi, am] seems to be superfluous in some
instances, particularly in connection with the adjective iuv, willing. E. g.
(Herodot, 7, 10-1) 'ExaJv rt 7va/ ovb' a.v fiovvof*.cc%ioip,i t I should not fight
even against a single man, if I had my way about it.
So in the phrases To rvptgov Tva/, to-day. To vvv tfvcti, now. T
iHvotij generally, on the whole.
NOTE 4. The infinitive is often put after the substantives
civuyxr), dtpig, wya, and a few others, in which case it has the
force of the adnorainal genitive ( 173). E. g. 'Avdynri as
wceVra enlaTaa&oti, sc. ear/, thou of necessity must know all
things. "Jlqa padl$siv,sc. toil, it is time to go,
PARTICIPLE.
1. In general, the participle is equivalent to the
indicative, subjunctive, or optative, preceded by a relative pro-
noun, or by a particle signifying if, ivhen, after, in order that,
because, that, although.
For the participle with the article, see above ( 140. 3).
2. The participle in connection with verbs signifying to
know, to hear, to see, to perceive, to show, to relate, to remem-
ber, to forget, to be ashamed, to rejoice, and a few others, is
equivalent to the indicative or optative preceded by the con-
junction on. E. g.
TOVTO fi s fi v 77 \n a i ocpw 7i//sAAo/usy o>, / remember that
you both profess this.
rvovg f}a7iTiopvov ib ptiQaxtav, Perceiving that the
stripling was overwhelmed.
Verbs of this class are aiadnvoftcxL, alaj(Vt'O^ni, axouw, yiyvw-
oxw, dnxvvni, drjlow (also dylcs wp), diauvrjfiovEvo), diaaaysM,
psQM relate, Iv&vpsopai, e|Tw prove^ endav&uvopai , eniaia-
, tvQiaxw, Idtiv, XTT?/O^W denote, xAvw, unv&dvw, filfiv^fittt t
s'w, ol8a % o^aw, nvv&avonat, (palrw, x<xlgw, and some others,
222.] PARTICIPLE. 247
NOTE 1. The participle after avvoida and avyyiyvwaxw, fol-
lowed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun, is put either in
the dative, or in the case with which these verbs agree. E. g.
E p otv TO) $vvydst,v ovdsv smaTa^svo), I was conscious to
myself that I knew nothing, nwg ovv fpavTw TOVT fyat vrel-
Go^iaiy cptvyovT dnohvaag wdga ; now how shall I endure
the thought that I have let a defendant escape? 2vyyivw-
axofier avTolat y [i"iv ov Tioirjaaai og&ojg, we are conscious
of not having done right.
3. Verbs signifying to endure, not to endure, to overlook,
to be contented with, to be satisfied, to cease, are connected
with the participle. E. g.
To dvvao&ai diywvTctdvexsa&ai,, To be able to endure
thirst.
Ilavaat, (plvagwv, Stop talking nonsense.
Verbs of this class are ayando) am contented, dvi%onoti t
QZto begin, exta/Tiw, e^nlnla^ait , t%iv otdqv,
xM^Tf^e'co, Ajf/w, navw, TiBQiogoita, TT^X and
, and some others.
4. The participle is often put after the verbs diayl
Sidyw, diuTfUw, lavddvw, rvyzdvw, cp&ctvw, and a few others, in
which case the leading idea is contained in the participle.
E. g.
Iloiwv 8 ictysydviyTon,, He has been doing,
diayovai, pav& dv OVT sg, They pass their time in learning.
A ivTtlovcu, dixa^ovxeg, They are continually deciding
cases.
a epuvjov aocpbg wv, I did not know that I was wise.
eni&vnovvTsg, We happen to be desirous,
dvafioig, He went up before.
NOTE 2. "z^w is frequently followed by a participle ; in
which case the verb, from which the participle comes, would
have been sufficient. E. g. Kyvyaa' i'jpct?, for MQvyag, thou
didst conceal. Ei%s xotTaaTQSifjdiisvog, for xTaT^^/TO,
he subjugated.
The same may be observed of ofto^uca and the Homeric fty.
E. g'"jli%STo (psvywv, he escaped. 13 rj (psvywv snl TIOVTOV,
he fled to the sea.
5. The future participle is regularly put after verbs of
motion, to express the object of the action of those verbs. E. g.
*H /, # 7i(jog lov ^AyrioL^aov do7Kxa6^fvog f he came to Age-
sildus to bid him farewell. Ji,dd$(ov ttQfirjfiai,Iam going
to show.
243 SYNTAX. [223,224.
NOTE 3. The present participle is used after verbs of motion,
when the time of the action marked by it is the same as that
of the verb. E. g. JldpTisi pe ooi cpsgovTM rcxad 1
he sends me in order to bring these directions to thee.
NOTE 4. The adverbs aviUu, Igalyvyg, ev&vg,
are frequently followed by the participle. E. g.
&vo)v, while he was sacrificing. c> Apa xccTahapovT sg , as
soon as they had overtaken (them).
6. The participle with the particle V has the force of the
indicative, subjunctive, or optative, with V, ( 213. 5 : 214 :
217.) E. g. Ta dixalwg av gy&evTa xr trig nofawg, those
things which might justly be said against the state, where
T dixatiwg oiv Qij&evia is equivalent to sxslva a dtxalfog av QijO-ilij'
but T dixalwg $r f &dvTa would mean those things which were
justly said.
ADVERB.
!j 23. Adverbs limit the meaning of VERBS,
PARTICIPLES, ADJECTIVES, and other ADVERBS.
Kg.
O v i ft) 7t o i w , / do so.
Kulug Trotwv, Doing well.
TI IT ij d s iog navv , Very convenient.
Haw xoiJiwg, Very well.
394:. 1. The Greek has two simple negative particles,
ov y no, not, and py, not. ( 15. 4.)
2. Oj; expresses a direct and independent negation. E. g.
Ov as xQvyw, I will not conceal it from thee. Ovx olda, I do
not know. oi>% olog x sipl, I am not able.
So in direct interrogations, v nuQupivEig ; wilt thou not
wait 1 oi>% TJ/OQCVOV / did not I say 1
3. Mij regularly expresses a dependant negation. Conse-
quently it is put after the particles IW, onmg, MOTS, aig, oygn,
fdv, si, imxv, eneidrxv. Also it is put after all relative words,
when they do not refer to definite antecedents. E. g. Oux av
nQOsfoys, el py sTilarsvasv o&ti&svasiv, had he not believed that
he should prove a true prophet, he would not have predicted.
*Eav de Tig Q&avvri Tovg a^fovrac, xt far] dsxyTou, and if any
one shall drive away the, magistrates, and shall not receive them*
224.] ADVERB. 249
4. Mr) is used also in propositions containing a wish, an
entreaty, or a prohibition. E. g. f/avaaviris xrjgvypu Tioirjodns-
vog, (irjdsva ajiTsa&ou rfg Irj'Cris, Pausanias proclaiming that
no one should touch the booty.
In prohibitions , the present imperative or the aorist subjunc-
tive is used with pj. ( 215. 5 : 218. 2.)
5. My, after verbs imply ing fear or anxiety, signifies lest; in
which case it is followed by the subjunctive, optative, and some-
times by the future indicative. ( 214 : 216 : 213. N. 4.)
6. My has also the force of an interrogative particle. E. g.
Mr) nr) doxovpsv aoi ; do we not seem to thee ? where the per-
son asked is commonly expected to say no. But Ov nr\ doxov-
Hbv aoi ; expects or presupposes the answer yes.
NOTE 1. The negative particles very often correspond to
each other. The following are the negative formulas :
OVTS ..... OVTS neither ..... nor
ovds ..... ovds neither . . * . . nor
ov ..... OVTS not ..... nor
OVTOI ..... ovds neither ..... nor
OVTOI ..... OVTS neither ..... nor
ov ..... ovds ..... OVTS not ..... nor ..... nor
OVTS ..... ov neither ..... nor
OVTS ..... ovds neither ..... nor even
OVTS ..... ov ..... ovds neither ..... nor ..... nor
OVTS ..... TS ov neither ..... nor
U.YITS neither ..... nor
n^ds neither ..... nor
fiy neither ..... nor
r]ds neither ..... nor
NOTE 2. The formulas ov ..... TS, OVTS ..... TS, (sometimes
TS ov ..... TS, OVTS ..... xal, OVTS ..... <$,) are equivalent to
OVTS ..... OVTS, when both clauses have the same verb. E. g.
(II. 1, 603 4) Ov fjLiv (poapiyyoc Tif^txrcAAs'o?, r t v s%' 3 AnoM.wv t
Movnnwv #', V asidov, neither of the harp of surpassing beauty,
which Apollo had, nor of the Muses, who icere singing.
But if the verb of the second clause is different from that of
the first, the second member (TS) of the formula has an affir-
mative meaning. E. g. OVTS TIQOTSQOV f^ing rj^ctftsv noli^iov
nQog vpag ' vvv -t s&slofiev anovdag noisla&iu, we never began
the war against you ; and now we are willing to make a treaty ,
where the verb of the first clause is aisv, and that of the
second
250 SYNTAX. [ 225, 226.
NOTE 3. The first negative particle of a negative formula is sometimes
omitted. E. g. T^a.; oi>' 'EAxWs, for OvVg T^waj oi'S-' 'ExXnv/f, neither
a Trojan woman nor a Grecian woman.
S*>. 1. TW or more negatives, in Greek, strengthen
the negation. E. g.
"Oiuv fir) (pfjTf xctVov ihai urjdsv, When you say that
nothing is beautiful, or When you deny that there is any
thing beautiful.
2. The double negative ov py is put either with the future
indicative or with the subjunctive. ( 213. N. 5 : 215. N. 3.)
The double negative ^ ov is commonly put with the infini-
tive. E. g. Ovx tvayjiwo&ptu TO furj ov yiywvtlv, I shall
not object to saying.
NOTE. Two negatives destroy each other in the formula
Ovdttf oaTig ov, no one icho (does) not. E. g. Ovdev o ti ovx
ijQWTa, nothing which he did not ask. Ovdtli; ov TWV nayov-
iwv vnfQfTif^Eos ibv "koyov, there was no one of those who were
present who did not much praise the discourse. In this case
both negatives belong to the same clause.
3. Verbs and expressions, which contain a negation, are
often followed by the particle ^ with the infinitive. E. g.
Tov T rOjUOV tdtixrviTji' OCVTW y.nl jolt; vsotg ansiTieTrjv pr] dia-
leyfa&ui, they showed him the law, and told him not to hold
any conversation with young men. 3 E^^QV(ja^t]v fiyojovg tov
fir} di<x(>$aie&*vtet$ tig "Aidov /noltlv, I delivered the mortal race
from being utterly destroyed and sent to Hades.
Verbs of this class are anavdctw, anayoQfvu, anfyoficu, am-
a, agvsoftau (also the expression tT-aqvog elfji), tl'gyto, ini%w,
vw, Qvoftat, and a few others.
PREPOSITION.
22G. 1. The following eighteen prepositions are called
the primitive prepositions :
>i, about, around, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative.
vvi, upon, on, in, through, with Dative or Accusative.
instead of, with Genitive.
3 An6,from, with Genitive.
did, through, for, on account of, for the sake of, with Geni-
tive or Accusative*
Elg or *Eg t to, into, with Accusative.
226.] PREPOSITION. 251
*Ev, in, at, with Dative.
!# or '.Zi'x, from, of, out of, with Genitive.
*Mnl, on, upon, to, towards, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu-
sative.
Kara, down from, against, according to, in, in respect to, with
Genitive or Accusative.
Msid, with, among, after, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu-
sative.
natqd,from, by, with, to, besides, along, with Genitive, Da-
tive, or Accusative.
i, about, around, concerning, of, with Genitive, Dative,
or Accusative.
o, before, in the presence of, in behalf of, in preference to,
with (jfenitive.
Jlgo?, to, towards, by, in addition to, with Genitive, Dative,
or Accusative.
2\)v and vv, with, together with, by means of, with Dative.
'TTISQ, over, beyond, in bthalfof, with Genitive or Accusative.
c Tn6, under, by, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative.
NOTE 1. Most of the dissyllabic prepositions throw the ac-
cent back on the penult, when they are placed after the nouns
to which they belong. This is called anastrophe. E. g.
Neuv a no, for *Ano v s tav, from the ships. *E%&Qiov vnsg,
for C T n s Q e%&Qwr, for the enemies .
NOTE 2. Some of the dissyllabic prepositions throw the
accent back on the penult also when they stand for dpi, am,
compounded with themselves. In this case, the Attics use
the old l ivi for iv ( 226. N. 6). E. g. W^ for TUXQWTI, from
7id(jst[*i,, IV* for wear i from tveiui.
NOTE 3. In the early writers (as Homer and Herodotus), the
preposition is often separated from the verb, with which it
is compounded, by other words belonging to the same propo-
sition. This is called tm.esis. E. g. 3 Ano ph e&avs o OTQM-
iriyoq, for 3 Ane&avt fiiv o aTgaiyyog, on the one hand, the gen-
eral died.
NOTE 4. In case of tmc.sis ( 226. N. 3), the preposition is
sometimes put after the verb. E. g. 'Jlas <$' onto QIVOV
U&og t and the stone knocked off the shield.
NOTE 5. In case of tmesis, when the same compound word is to be repeated
several times, after the first time the preposition alone is sometimes used. E. g.
Kara p*v tXsutrav U.UTOU rv>v fyuva.7a, xetroi $1 ra, vixvet, for Ka r i X t/-
ffxv fitlv etlfou <r}v f yvvx7tK 1 KO.T{^. i u <r ctv $1 TO, T'IKVOC,, on the one hand, they
stoned his ivife, and, on the other, they stoned his children. ( 226. N. 3.)
252 SYNTAX. [227,228.
2. The following particles very often have the force of
prepositions.
"AVKV or "Arty, without, with Genitive.
"AXQK; OT'^XQI, until, as far as, with Genitive.
e !fc>fx or'^Vfxcv, on account of, in respect to, so far as con-
cerns, with Genitive.
Mt/Qig or MixQi* until, as long as, with Genitive.
/7>Uj', except, with Genitive.
*Jlg, to, with Accusative.
NOTE 6. The old language has a feet for aura' $;/ for $<a tv/, im, /v, for
in * xarati for xa ra, only in composition ; ra^/ for ^ra^a * r^or/, trar/, for
*oy * vire/ for ysre^ * ysra/ for yiro. The Ionic has unxat or f m*v for Vv*a.
NOTE 7. A preposition without a case has the force of an
adverb. E.g. KaTaxi^w ys, Tigoq, in addition to this I will
kill (thce).
NOTE 8. In the old writers, a preposition is sometimes repeated. E. g.
'E $i xa) iv M/i*l>/, nnc/ m Memphis.
NOTE 9. Sometimes the preposition, with which a verb is compounded, is
repeated. E. g. *Av $' 'O$uff<rivi Kviffruro, and Ulysses arose.
22 7* A preposition in composition is often followed by
the same case as when it stands by itself. E. g.
'TnsQfvey xo r rfg ing vavg vov *Ia&fidv, Carrying the
ships across the Isthmus.
*Eo fjl&e fie, It came into my mind.
CONJUNCTION.
228. 1. Conjunctions signifying and, but, or,
than, connect similar words. E. g.
nole^ov xflu pdzTjc, Of war and battle.
J ix i* ing xadlxwg, Justly and unjustly.
v ^ iiaelr, To love or to hate.
Conjunctions of this class are x/, and, TS, and, AA, but,
?, or, tf, than,
NOTE 1. The conjunction jj, or, means also otherwise, else.
The formula rj ..... ^', means either ..... or. The formula
gov or noxtQa ..... 77, means whether ..... or.
NQTE 2. The conjunction ^', than, is used after compara-
tives ( 186. N. 5, 6).
223.] CONJUNCTION. 253
A comparison between two qualities of the same object is
expressed by means of two comparatives, expressive of those
qualities, with ^', than, between them. E. g. Mavixw-csgoi
y avdgsioxsQo i , more rash than brave. 'Enolriaa i a% VTEQU
I acted more quickly than wisely.
NOTE 3. The conjunction x/, in the formula xal ..... xc,
means both ..... and, as well ..... as.
After adjectives and adverbs implying resemblance, union,
approach, it may be rendered as. E. g. 'Opoltog ntnotyxaoi
xal r 'Oin)Qog, they have acted in the same manner as Homer, or
they and Homer have acted in the same manner.
Sometimes x/ means even, also. E. g. Kal *Axitevs TOVTW
i, even Achilles is afraid to meet him.
NOTE 4. Ts is always enclitic ( 22). The formula TS .....
xal means both ..... and. The formula is xcu (not separated)
means both ...... and. The formula xal T ..... rs, or ttocl
..... TS, is a little stronger than x/.
NOTE 5. Sometimes a possessive pronoun or a possessive
adjective and a genitive are connected by xal' in which case
the genitive is joined to the genitive implied in the pronoun or
adjective. ( 67 : 131. 1.) E. g. Hcudeg Ipol xal
, sons of me and an indiscreet father.
2. The following list contains most other conjunctions.
al", Doric, = si. It is used also by the epic poets, but only
in the formulas al xsv, al ydy, al'&s, O that.
ttl'xw (r, x), Doric, rz: lav.
av, a particle implying uncertainty and indcjinitencss. It may
accompany all the moods and the participle. (213-
222.)
Sometimes it is doubled. E. g. (Eupol. apud Athen.)
Ovg ovx av tl&wfy' ovd' av olvomug ngorov, whom for-
merly you would not have appointed even inspectors of
wine.
av, see sdv. It must not be confounded with the preceding.
age* (paroxytone), therefore, consequently
aya (properispomenon), an interrogative particle.
UTS (a, re), inasmuch as, because.
avnxQ or onaQ (avrf, ago), but.
ya, Doric, z= ys.
y<*g, for, never stands at the beginning of a proposition.
ys, a particle of limitation, at least. (See also 64. N. 1.)
22
254 SYNTAX. [ 228.
yovv (yi, ovv) = yi and ovv united.
dal, zz: dij.
ds, and, but, for, never begins a proposition. (See also pev.)
dy, now, indeed, in truth, prithee. Its compounds are
sdv or av or rjv (et, av), if, with the subjunctive. ( 214.
1 : 216. N. 3.)
el, if, whether, followed by the indicative or optative. ( 213.
3 : 216. 1 : 214. N. 5.)
tl ydg, for if. It expresses also a wish, O that ! (217.
N. 1, 2, 3.)
sndv or infy (snu, V), when, after, as soon as, with the sub-
junctive. ( 214. 1 : 216. N. 3.)
snedv, Ionic, zz: indv.
end (inl), since, after, inasmuch as, with the indicative or
optative. ( 213. 3 : 216. 1 : 214. N. 5.)
dv (weidy, V), zz: inuv.
ri (tnsl, dy), = ensi.
r], poetic, =. eneidrj.
enr^v, see indv.
%, truly, certainly. It is also an interrogative particle. It
is often followed by p^v, nov, TO/, ydg, or 8y.
yde, and. See also ^iv.
ys t Epic and Ionic, = ?J, or, than.
vilih ..... yde, both ..... and, as well ..... as.
yv, see lav.
rpoi (rj, TO/), used commonly in the formula rpoi ..... $, or
?/ ..... iJToi, either ..... or.
In Homer ^'TOJ is equivalent to fisv.
-d-yv, a particle of confirmation.
Ids, zz: yds.
IV, that , in order that, with the subjunctive, optative, or with
the historical tenses of the indicative. ( 214. 1 : 216.
1 : 213. N. 6.)
As an adverb it is equivalent to nov or OTTOU, where.
xu, Doric, zz: xs.
xs or xiv, Epic, =. &v (different from V, if).
per, commonly used in the formula piv ..... SK, indeed .....
but, on the one hand ..... on the other.
pqv, a particle of confirmation, really, indeed, certainly. It
is often preceded by ys, %, %al, ^, ov, and by interroga-
tive words ( 68 : 73 : 123).
fiwv (fiy, ovv), an interrogative particle. ( 224. 6.) Some-
times it is followed by ^ or ovv.
229.] INTERJECTION. 255
vv or vvv (short v) is a weak vvv, now. The form vv is found
only in the Epic language.
ofi(og, yet, still,
onto?, that, in order that, with the subjunctive, optative, or
future indicative. ( 214. 1 : 216. 1 : 213. N. 4, 5.) It
must not be confounded with the adverb onwg, as.
orotv (ore, V), when, with the subjunctive. ( 214. 4: 216.
N. 3.)
on (oang), that, because, with the indicative or optative.
($ 213. 3 : 216. 1.)
It strengthens the meaning of superlative adjectives or
adverbs. E. g. "Oil nleloTov XQOVOV, as much time
as possible.
Also, it stands before words quoted without change.
E. g. Einsv 011 Elg xaigov tjxsig, he said, " You have
come at the right time. 11
olv, now, therefore. (See also 71. N. 3 : 73. N. 3 : 123.
N. 4.)_
ovvsxot (ov, evexa), on account of which. As a conjunction it
means since, because.
oq)Q(x, poetic, = tW or onwg. (See also 123.)
TISO, very, quite, although. (See also 71. N. 3 : 124.
N. 4.)
got, Epic, in agcc.
tol (for ao/, 64. N. 2), certainly, indeed. It often corre-
sponds to the English parenthetical phrases you know,
you see.
wf, that, in order that, with the indicative, subjunctive, opta-
tive, or infinitive. ( 213. 3 : 214. 1 : 216. 1 : 220. 1.)
It strengthens the meaning of superlative adjectives and
adverbs. E. g. C JI$ idxioia, as quickly as possible.
WOTS (we, TS'), so that, with the indicative or infinitive.
( 213. 3 : 220. 1.)
INTERJECTION.
339. Interjections are particles used in exclamations,
and expressing some emotion of the mind.
The following list contains most interjections.
, ah ! of sorrow and compassion,
a, a, ha ! ha ! of laughter.
c, of wonder.
aifidi, of wonder.
256
[229.
annanal or ananal, of approbation.
TrofATTT, of joy.
ctTTaTtTiaTTaTci, of sorrow.
aiTaial, araral, or TTTCHW, of sorrow and disgust.
Papal or /Sa^aia^ of astonishment. Followed by the #ew-
tive ( 187. 2).
I' or , A / of grief.
i (sometimes #), o/i / courage !
etiv, well, be it so.
flefav, of grief or joy.
eitys (sv, ye), well done! bravo!
tvol, the cry of the bacchanals.
yv, rjvl, yvlds, = *<5ov, which see.
laxTarai or ianaiaidS, of sorrow. Followed by the genitive
^ J[$ 187. 2).
latJ, tavoT, Ao / in answer to a call. Sometimes it is equiva-
lent to Iov, Iw.
Idov (oxytone), lo ! behold! (See also JEIJJl in the cata-
logue of Anomalous Verbs.)
It], of exultation.
Iov, alas ! of sorrow. Followed by the genitive ( 187. 2).
lw, of joy or grief. Followed by the dative or vocative
( 196. 5 : 204. 2).
[iv, fiv, of pain. It is made by breathing strongly through
the nostrils.
o, woe ! alas.
ol, woe. Followed by the dative ( 196. 5).
ol'fioi or ol'^br (of, pol), woe is me! Followed by the geni-
tive ( 187. 2).
3 ^,3^,9 ^ > v f
OTTOTOl, OTOVOl, OTTOTOTOl, OY OTOTOTOTOA, OI SOrrOW.
oval, woe ! used only by the later writers. Followed by the
dative ( 196. 5).
nanal, nanaid$, of pain, sorrow, joy, wonder.
nonaZ, nonoi, or o5 nonoi, O gods! of complaint.
nvna$ or nvnnat;, of wonder or admiration.
qvTtanal, a cry used by rowers.
v v, expresses the sound made by a person smelling of any
thing.
(psv, alas! Followed by the genitive ( 187.2).
cpv, = (ptv.
w (with the acute accent), oh ! of wonder or grief. Fol-
lowed by the nominative, genitive, or dative, ( 187. 2 :
196. 5.)
w (circumflexed), O! Followed by the vocative ( 204. 2)
WO'TT, used in encouraging rowers.
230, 231.] IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTlJfcy vr T *T -Tf T^Wt H* ^J
IRREGULAR
23O. 1. Frequently a NOMINATIVE stands without a
verb. E. g. (Xen. Hier. 6, 6) "Jlaneg ol a & li\ ia\ 0!)%, ojav
ldiWT<av yevwvTtxi, xQtlnovg, IOVTO avTovg svygalvst, /i', orav
rwv avrctywvwtwv r^xxovg, Toy* 3 amovg avia, literally, as the
athletes, when they become superior to inexperienced men,
this does not gladden them; but when they prove inferior to
their opponents, this grieves them, where one might expect
ol a&krjTot} ..... TOVTCO evygalvovTcti, ..... TOVTW
2. If in the formula 6 fiev ..... o de a whole is expressed, this
is put either in the genitive ( 177), or in the same case as
o fisv ..... 8 W. E. g. s (Il. 16, 317-22) NeaTogldai, $',
o [lev omaa* ^AtVfjLViov o&'i dovql, 'Avtlhoxog ..... tov d* av-
xl&sog Ogaavfi^drjg tfqpvhg oge&psvog, nqlv ovxdaou, the sons
of Nestor, one, that is, Antilochus, pierced Atymnius with the
sharp spear ..... but godlike Thrasymedes directed his spear
against him before he struck. (Soph. Antig. 21, 22) Ov ycty
Tcccfov VMV TW KOKjiyv^TO) Kgitov, lov fjL^v TTQOjloag, tbv d*
an^iiaag *i%ti ; has not Creon given one of our brothers an
honorable burial, and left the other unburied ?
3. Instead of the nominative, the ACCUSATIVE is sometimes
found. E. g. (Odys. 1, 275) MrjjsQa d\ el ol &vpbg tyoQ-
[taTat, yotfitsa&ai,, ay ITW eg fieyagov notrgog, as to thy mother,
if she very much desires to be married, let her go back to her
father's house.
4. Instead of the infinitive, sometimes the INDICATIVE with
sl f <, or oTt is used ; in which case the subject-accusative
stands alone. E. g. (Aristoph. Av. 1268-9) Jeivov ye tbv
xyQVxa, xbv nagct tovg pgoTovg oixopevov, el fiTjdenoTe vo-
at^aet ndhv, it is a terrible thing, that the herald who was
despatched to the mortals should not return. (Ibid. 650-2)
c Jlg ev Aiawnov hoyoig earl heyopevov dy 11, ir^v ahwnez 3 , tag
y'kavQwg exoirwvrjaev asrw note, that in the fables of ^E sop
something is said about the fox, that she was once scurvily
treated by her partner the eagle.
231. Sometimes with two or more substantives only one
verb is put, which can belong only to one of them. This irregu-
larity of construction is called zeugma. E. g. (^Eschyl. Prom.
Vine. 21, 22) V ovxe cptavr^v, OVTS TOV
22*
258 SYNTAX. [$ 232.
oysi, where tliou wilt neither (hear) the voice, nor see the form,
of any mortal, where (ftav^v, properly speaking, depends on
axovaei.
232. The Greeks were fond of connecting kindred
words as closely as possible. This often occasions a confused
arrangement. E. g. (^Eschyl. Ag. 836) Tolg avrog UVTOV
nypaai PUQVVSTOU, he is oppressed by his own misfortunes.
(Id. Choeph. 87) naga (plhrjg qp/Ari) yvvaixbg civdyl, from
a dear wife to a dear husband.
PART IV.
VERSIFICATION.
FEET.
333. 1. Every Greek verse is divided into portions
called feet.
Feet are either simple or compound. A simple foot con-
sists of two or three syllables ; a compound foot, of four.
SIMPLE FEET OF TWO SYLLABLES.
Spondee, ........ . . two long ; as /?w^ov.
Pyrrhic, .......... two short ; as fiovog.
Trochee or Choree, ..... a long and a short ; as
Iambus, ........... a short and a long ; as psvto.
SIMPLE FEET OF THREE SYLLABLES.
Dactyle, .......... a long and two short ; as
Anapest, ......... two short and a long ; as
Tribrach, . ........ three short ; as dttopsv.
Molossus, ......... three long ; as avdyanoi.
Amphibrach, ..... a short, a long, and a short ; as vorjrog.
Amphimdcer or Cretic, ..... a long, a short, and a long ; as
Bacchius, ....... . . a short and two long ; as
Antibacchius, ..... two long and a short ; as
COMPOUND FEET.
Dispondee, ....... a double spondee ; as otfi
Proceleusmatic, ... a double pyrrhic ; as
Ditrochee, ........ a double trochee ; as
Diiambus, ........ a double iambus ; as
Greater Ionic, .... a spondee and a pyrrhic ; as
Smaller Ionic, ..... a pyrrhic and spondee ; as a
Choriambus, ...... a choree and an iambus ; as oiopevmv.
260 VERSIFICATION. [< 234.
Antispast, ....... an iambus and a trochee ; as 11
Epitritus I, ...... an iambus and a spondee ; as na
Epitritus II ', ..... a trochee and a spondee ; as
Epitritus III, ... a spondee and an iambus; as
Epitritus IV,.... a spondee and a trochee ; as
PCBOH I, ......... a trochee and a pyrrhic ; as
P(Bon II, ........ an iambic and a pyrrhic ; as
Pccon III, ....... a pyrrhic and a trochee ; as
Pceon IV, ....... a pyrrhic and an iambus ; as
2. ARSIS is that part of a foot on which the stress (ictus,
beat) of the voice falls. The rest of the foot is called THESIS.
The arsis is on the long syllable of a foot. For example, the
arsis of an iambus or anapest is on the last syllable ; the arsis
of a trochee or dactyle, on the first.
NOTE. The arsis of a spondee is determined by the nature
of the verse in which this foot is found. E. g. in trochaic or
dactylic verse the arsis is on the first syllable, thus ( ' -) ; in
iambic or anapestic, on the last, thus ( -- ').
The tribrach has the arsis on the first syllable, when it is
found in trochaic verse, thus (~' ~ ~) ; on the second syllable,
when it stands in an iambic verse, thus (~ ~' ~).
The dactyle in anapestic or iambic verse has the arsis on the
second syllable, thus ( ~' ~).
The anapest in trochaic verse has the arsis on the first
syllable, thus (^' ~ -).
334. 1. Verses are very often denominated from the foot
which predominates in them. For example, the verse is called
dactylic, when the dactyle predominates in it.
2. A complete verse is called acatalectic. A verse, of which
the last foot is deficient, is called catalectic.
Particularly, a trochaic, iambic, or anapestic verse is called
catalectic, when it has an odd number of feet and a syllable :
hyper catalectic, when it has an even number of feet and a
syllable : br achy catalectic, when it has only an odd number of
feet. For examples see below.
3. The trochaic, iambic, and anapestic verses are measured
by dipodies ; (a dipody is a pair of feet.) Thus, an iambic verse
of four feet is called iambic dimeter ; of six, iambic trimeter ;
of eight, iambic tetrameter.
235-237.] TROCHAIC VERSE. 201
935. C^SURA is the separation, by the ending of a
word, of syllables rhythmically or metrically connected. There
are three kinds of caesura :
1 . CcBsura of the FOOT ;
2. CcBsura of the RHYTHM ;
3. CcBsura of the VERSE.
1. The ccBsura of the foot occurs when a word ends before
a foot is completed. E. g. *ft.iov \ i&lot- \ na& no- \ hv, M- \
Qwae d* a- \ yviag, where e$odan(xs, xygwas terminate in the
middle of the foot.
2. The casura of the rhythm occurs when the arsis falls
upon the last syllable of a word ; by which means the arsis
is separated from the thesis. This can take place only in feet
which have the arsis on the first syllable. E. g. ^fc, !^- | gtq
\ loiys, fit,- \ aupors, \ Tfi%fai- \ TI^TCI, where the arsis
of the second foot falls upon the last syllable of 'Agtg.
This caesura allows a short syllable to stand instead of a
long one ( 18. 2). E. g. TQtoeg \ (JLBV xlay- \ ytj -i evo- \ ny
t HJOtV | OQVi- | &$ 05?, Wheic tho laot syllable (^^) of OQVi-
&eg is made long by arsis.
3. The casura of the verse is~ a pause in verse, so intro-
duced as to aid the recital, and render the verse more melo-
dious. It divides the verse into two parts.
In the trochaic, iambic, and anapestic, tetrameter, and in
the elegiac pentameter, its place is fixed. ( 240 : 245 : 250.
4: 255.)
Other kinds of verse have more than one place for this
caesura.
936. The last syllable of most kinds of verse is common,
that is, it can be long or short without regard to the nature of
the foot.
TROCHAIC VERSE.
937. The fundamental foot of the trochaic verse is the
trochee. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the
trochee. The spondee or the anapest can stand only in the
even places (2d, 4th, 6th, 8th).
In proper names the dactyle can stand in all the places,
except the 4th and the 7th.
262 VERSIFICATION. [ 238 - 243.
238. The TROCHAIC MONOMETER CODSlStS of tWO feet.
It is generally found among trochaic dimeters. E. g.
230. 1. The TROCHAIC DIMETER acatalectic consists of
four feet, or two dipodies. E. g.
w vgsg.
Tuv is | Tiakciot- \ wv e- \ xeivwv.
First with trembling hollow motion,
Like a scarce awakened ocean.
2. The TROCHAIC DIMETER catalectic consists of three feet
and a syllable. It is found among trochaic dimeters acatalec-
tic. E. g.
TOVTO (isv ye figoq alsl
Tov ds | #^uw- | vog not, \ tiv.
Could the stoutest overcome
Death's assault and baffle doom,
Hercules had both withstood.
The TROCHAIC TETRAMETER catdlectic consists of
seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-caesura occurs at the end
of the fourth foot. This caesura is often neglected by the
comedians, but very seldom by the tragedians. E. g.
Ela | dij <pi- | >Lot lo- | ^trat, || rovgyov \ 011% I- | xa$ to- \ ds.
Judges, jurymen, and pleaders, || ye whose soul is in your fee.
IAMBIC VERSE.
24:1* The fundamental foot of the iambic verse is the
iambus. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the
iambus. The spondee or the dactyle can stand in the odd
places (1st, 3d, 5th, 7th).
The anapest can stand in all the places except the last.
The tragedians admit an anapest in an even place only when
it is contained in a. proper name.
242. The IAMBIC MONOMETER consists of two feet. It
is found chiefly in systems of iambic dimeters. E. g.
Kai roig | xokotg.
243. 1. The IAMBIC DIMETER acatalectic consists of four
feet. E. g.
, 244.] IAMBIC VERSE. 263
r I nQoasi,- I noV) eg
Tov
a-
Trot??- I oapsvog \ tyav-
xeu
TW, TlQCt-
Trust not for freedom to the Franks,
They have a king who buys and sells.
2. The IAMBIC DIMETER catalectic consists of three feet
and a syllable. It is found among iambic dimeters acatalec-
tic. E. g.
11 -wig
2nov8(uoLV 77 dv ' xovx cot
JKsv ov- | devi> [is- \ totdco- \ osiv.
That Sylvia is excelling,
Upon this dull earth dwelling.
244. 1. The IAMBIC TRIMETER acatalectic consists of
six feet. It never has a tribrach in the last place.
Its verse-caBsura occurs after the second foot ; sometimes
after the third foot. Sometimes the verse-caesura is entirely
neglected. E. g.
e Oact 8r] | dedrj- \ ypai \\ Tt]V l^ictv- \ tov KUQ-
| ds fiou- | , || navv \ ds fiai- \ a, IST- \ it
'i- | oyag- |
NOTE. The tragedians admit a dactyle only in the jrs and
third places. E. g.
xov yis, ov
Trig OQ&ofiov- \ Aov Oegu- \ dog alnvprjioi nai.
They admit an anapest only in the first place. E. g.
adaftav- \ TIVWV dsafjuav ev agQ
But in proper names they admit an anapest in any place
except the last ; in which case the anapest is contained in the
proper name. E. g.
3 fL navrot vatfitov, Tsi- \ Qsaifll, dtdotxra is.
per ovdsig fiv&og, *Av- \ riyovij, cpdwv.
2. The scazon or choliambus is the iambic trimeter acatalectic
with a spondee or trochee in the last place. E. g.
*Eyw ftdaivlg, \\ rj 'jilfitoTog av&gwnoig,
Eviav&a
264 VERSIFICATION. 245 - 249.
24F. The IAMBIC TETRAMETER catalectic consists of
seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-caesura is at the end of
the fourth foot; but this caesura is often neglected by the
comedians.. E. g.
Ovxovv | na.l.u.1 \ drjnov \ ta/w/ || av d' av- \ rog ovx \ axov- \ eig,
*G ds- | anoxyg \ yag <prj- \ oiv v- \ fiag y- \ dewg \ anav- \ Tag.
A captain bold of Halifax, || who lived in country quarters.
DACTYLIC VERSE.
246. The fundamental foot of the dactylic verse is the
dactyle. The spondee may stand for the dactyle.
247. 1. The DACTYLIC DIMETER acatolectic consists
of two dactyles. It is found among dactylic tetrameters.
E.g.
MvaTodo- I xog dofiog.
2. The DACTYLIC DIMETER catolectic on two syllables con-
sists of a dactyle and a spondee or trochee. E. g.
848. 1. The DACTYLIC TRIMETER catalectic on one syl-
lable consists of two feet and a syllable. E. g.
| WTCt no- \ qov.
2. The DACTYLIC TRIMETER catalectic on two syllables
consists of three feet and two syllables forming a spondee or
trochee. E. g.
* | avuyvxog \ alav.
S- | moig iv k- \
. 1. The DACTYLIC TETRAMETER ttcatalectic con-
sists of four feet, the last of which is a dactyle or a cretic.
E.g.
3 Jl ft8ya | XQVOEOV \ OLOTSQO- \ nrjg cpuog,
3 Jl Jiog | a^goTOV \ tyxog \ nvgyogov.
2. The TETRAMETER catalectic on one syllable consists of
three feet and a syllable. E. g.
JIoMot PQO- I TW>> dia- | (tsipofie- \ va.
250, 251.] DACTYLIC VERSE. 265
3. The TETRAMETER catolectic on two syllables consists of
three feet and two syllables forming a spondee or trochee.
E.g.
OovQiog | oovig \ TevxgiS' in \ ctiuv.
vno- ] xAwiw^, | ov& vno-
555O. 1. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER dcdtdlectic con-
sists of five feet, the last of which is a dactyle. E. g.
i- | VLI fiotgv-
2. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER cdtdlectic on one syllable
consists of four feet and a syllable. E. g.
Ttav fisya- \ Xwv Aava.- \ wv vno- \ x
3. The DACTYLIC PENTAMETER catalectic on two syllables
consists of four feet and two syllables. E. g.
'AJQFI- | dug paxi- \ ftovg, Ida- \ ^ kayo- \ danag.
4. The ELEGIAC PENTAMETER consists of two trimeters cata-
lectic on one syllable ( 248. 1). The first hemistich almost
always ends in a long syllable. The verse-caesura occurs after
the second foot. This kind of verse is customarily subjoined
to the heroic hexameter. E. g.
Bovkso d' ivatfietav okiyoig ovv xgynaaiv olxtiv,
3 II nlov- | TSIV, adi~ \ xwg \\ XQrjpaTa \ naaups- \ vog.
2tll. 1. The DACTYLIC HEXAMETER acataUctic consists
of six feet, the last of which is a dactyle. It is used by the
tragedians in systems of tetrameters. E. g.
* ag ydo- \ Tyrog a- | (JLU^O^- \ ra
2. The DACTYLIC HEXAMETER (or heroic hexameter] cata-
lectic on two syllables, consists of six feet, the last of which is
a spondee or trochee. The fifth foot is commonly a dactyle.
The predominant verse-casura is that in the middle of the
third foot ; either directly after the arsis, or in the middle of
the thesis of a dactyle. E. g.
\ evvEns, \ [JIOVGOI, \\ no- \ hvTQonov, \ og fiaka \ nokka
i- \ net TQOI- \ yg \\le- \ QOV moh- \ e&gov e- | ntgatv.
Sometimes the verse-casura occurs immediately after the
arsis of the fourth foot. E. g.
7]v xs yv%yv, xa VOOTOV
23
266 VERSIFICATION. [< 252-255.
ANAPESTIC VERSE.
* The fundamental foot of the anapestic verse is the
anapest. The spondee, the dactyle, or the proceleusmatic, may
stand for the anapest.
A dactyle very seldom precedes an anapest in the same
dipody.
2t>3 The ANAPESTIC MONOMETER consists of two feet.
E. g.
rbov o- I vfioav.
254L* I- The ANAPESTIC DIMETER acatalectic consists
of four feet, the last of which is either an anapest, a spondee,
or a trochee.
The legitimate verse-caesura is in the second arsis. It is
often made, however, in the short syllable immediately after
the second arsis. E. g.
av ngog \ n&u&goig / || 11 ov iy- \ ds noheig,
t- | xsig av, || 11 fiag \ eregwv
tt- navwv.
Tabourgi, tabourgi, || thy larum afar
Gives nope to the valiant || and promise of war.
2. The ANAPESTIC DIMETER catdlectic consists of three feet
and a syllable. It has no caesura. E. g.
JIOf.fflOV | OTl(f)Og | 7l(XQ8%OV- \ Ttg.
NOTE. Anapestic dimeters consisting wholly of spondees
are not uncommon. E. g.
dedalov
tag ov
. The ANAPESTIC TETRAMETER catolectic (called
also Aristophanean) consists of seven feet and a syllable.
The verse-caesura comes after the fourth foot ; in some in-
stances, after the short syllable immediately following the
fourth foot. E. g.
OUTTO) | naos/Sr] \ ngogTO&s- \ UTQOV \\ As|wv, | wg de- \ &og e- \
(JTl.
AiafioLk- \ lo[ievo [ d* vno TMV \ fy&Qwv \\ \v *A&rj- \ vaioig \
v- | hoig,
[tojdsi, | trjv nohv \ yf
GREEK INDEX.
In the following indexes, the figures designate the sections () and their
divisions : N. stands for NOTE, and R. for REMARK.
A.
a, 1. 2. changes of, 2. N. 3.
quantity of, 2: 17. N. 3:
31. N. 1 : 33. N. 2 : 35.
N. 1:36. N. 5:49. N. 3.
privative, 135. 4.
- pure, nouns in, 31. 3. 2
aor. act. in, 85. N. 2.
-, voc. sing, in, 31.4. nom.
sing. masc. in, 31. N. 3.
-a, gen. sing, in, 31. N. 3.
voc. sing, of the third declen-
sion in, 38. N. 1.
ays or yeas followed by the subj.,
215. 2.
adelyog, with dat., 195. 1.
with gen., 195. N. 1.
-adrjv, see -drjv.
-adriq, patronymics in, 127. 1.
contracted into ??, 23. N. 1.
-'#w, -s#w, -v&w, verbs in, 96.
12.
a. for , 2. N. 3.
-cu permits the accent to be
on the antepenult, 20. N. 1.
elided, 25. N. 1.
alvaghrig, voc. sing, of, 31. R. 1.
-/*>, area, verbs in, 96. 7.
-ctiog, adjectives in, 62. 3 : 131.
1: 138. N. 1.
-aig, -aiaa, aor. part, in, 90. N.
i, dat. plur. in, 31. N. 3.
with ace. and gen.,
183. 1. with two accusa-
tives, 183. R. 1.
-axig, adverbs in, 120.
axovu with gen., 179. 1. with
ace., 179. N. 1. with ace.
and gen.. 179, N. %
-aUoq, adjectives in, 131. 3.
aModunog, 73. 2.
aUolog, with gen , 186. 2.
73. 2. neuter of, 33.
N. 1. with a plural verb,
157. 4. with gen., 186.2.
o-iQios with gen., 186. 2.
with dat., 186. R.
g, 36. N. 1.
with gen., 183. R. 1.
|, inflection of, 36. 2.
, 73. 2.
, 73. 2. agrees with a
plural substantive, 137. N. 8.
-j>, gen. plur. in, 31. N. 3.
-av, perf. act. 3d pers. plur. in,
85. N. 1.
c, WQOC, followed by
the inf., 221. N. 4.
Vff|, 36. N. 1. voc. sing, of,
38. N. 4.
JQ, inflection of, 40. 2. ac-
cent of, 40. N. 3. sub-
joined to certain nouns, 136.
R.
268
GREEK INDEX.
-uvog, national appellatives in,
127. 3.
urT/0T(joqpo?, see erotrilog.
G&O?, 3 /w?, with gen., 190. 2.
withdat., 190. N. 3.
|tow with ace. and gen., 190.
N.4.
do and ww changed into w, 2.
N. 3.
-ao, -aw?, gen. in, 31. N. 3.
anokavw with gen., 178. 2.
with ace., 178. N. 1.
'^TioUwv, ace. sing, of, 37. N.
2. voc. sing, of, 38. N. 2.
anoo-ceQsa), with two accusa-
tives, 165. 1. with ace.
and gen., 165. R.
-ap, accent of the contracted
forms of some nouns in, 36.
N. 3.
APIIN, inflection of, 40. 3.
-agiovy diminutives in, 127. 2.
-, neuters in, 42. adjec-
tives in, 53. 1, R. 1. nu-
merals in, 62. 1. fern, pa-
tronymics in, 127. 1.
-acrxoy, -aaxopyv, see -saxov,
^, dat. plur. of, 40. N. 2.
T6 with gen. absolute, 192.
N. 2.
-air,?, national appellatives in,
127. 3.
-avg, inflection of nouns in,
43. 2.
amog, inflection of, 65. 1.
Ionic forms of, 65. N.
neuter of, 33. N. 1. com-
parison of, 57. N. 5. how
used, 144. superfluous,
144. N. 1. subjoined to
the relative pronoun, 144.
R. 1. signifies self, very,
144. 2. has the appearance
of syw, av, f^ng, vpug, 144.
N. 2. signifies poi-cg, 144.
N. 3. used in cases of
contrast, 144. R. 2. de-
notes the principal person,
144. R. 3. - in connection
with eavTov, 144. N. 4.
with ordinal numbers, 144.
N. 5, equivalent to the
demonstrative pronoun, 144.
N. 6. with the article be-
fore it, 65. 2: 144. 3.
ouQeofiou, with two accusa-
tives, 165. 1. with ace.
and gen., 165. R.
vrj, accent of the gen. plur.
of, 31. N. 2
^ see -77.^
^oVj see ov.
u/Qig or &XQI, 15. 3. with gen.,
194.
aw, see ao.
B.
ftav, 1. N. 3.
'/#} with apart., 222. N. 2.
/Svl, a short vowel before, 17. 4.
augment of verbs begin-
ning with, 76. N. 2.
, contraction of, 32. N.
T
or &tteig with subj., 215.
3, N. 2.
fiovg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2.
ace. sing, of, 37. N. 1.
inflection of, 43. 2.
r.
ila, inflection of, 36. N. 2.
7, inflection of, 40- 1.
accent of, 30. N. 3.
, compounds of, 55. N. 3.
with ace. and gen., 179.
N. 3. with two accusa-
tives, ibid.
77 omitted after the article,
140. N. 5.
/>l, yv, a short vowel before, 17.
GREEK INDEX.
269
4. augment of verbs be-
ginning with, 76. N. 2.
,, a short vowel before, 17. 4.
omitted after the article,
140. N. 5.
>, nominative of, 36. 2.
inflection of, 43. 2.
Q, inflection of, 36. N. 2.
-de, -as, -s, adverbs in, 121. 3.
-de appended to what,
121. N. 2.
del, subject of, 159. N. 1.
with gen. and ace., or with
gen. and dat., 181. N. 1, 2.
Ssiv omitted in certain
phrases, 220. N. 3.
delva, 69. 2. with the article,
140. N. 10.
deanoTrjg, accent of the voc.
sing, of, 31. R. 2.
demagog, 61. with gen., 186.
2.
drjfniTrjQ, inflection of, 40. 1.
accent of, 40. N. 3.
-dyv, -adrjv, adverbs in, 119. 2.
diOKpeoa}, dioupeaovicog, with gen.,
186. N. 3.
didyoQog with gen., 186. 2.
with dat., 186. R.
dl/a^pa, 1. N. 3.
da, dv, a short vowel before,
17.4.
-dov, -??<5oV, adverbs in, 119. 3.
dovQs and oaae take plural ad-
jectives, 137. N. 7.
dvo, 60. 1. agrees with a plu-
ral substantive, 137, N. 8.
dva- 9 see ev.
E.
e, why called i//doV, 1. N. 1.
changes of, 2. N. 3.
-, ace. sing, in, 46. N. 3.
pluperf. act. in, 85. N. 4.
23*
-itiv, 2 aor. act. infin. in, 89.
N. 3.
i, see
for e, 2. N. 3. augment of
verbs beginning with, 80.
N. 4.
-el, see -/.
eta, aor. act. opt. in, 87. N. 3.
ipl, am, omitted, 157. N. 10.
with gen., 175. with
dat, 196. 3, N. 2. infin.
of, 221, N. 3.
eivai, apparently superfluous,
221. N. 3.
-eivog, adjectives in, 131. 2.
-eig, adjectives in, 53. 2; '
dat. plur. of adjectives in,
53. R. 2. participles in,
53. 3.
, 60. 1. omitted before the
gen., 175. N. 3. with dat,
195. N. 4.
ex in composition, 5. N. 1 : 7.
N. : 9. N. before a con-
sonant, 15. 4.
i'xaaTog, 73. 2. with the ar-
ticle, 140. N. 7. with a
plural verb, 157. 4.
exdregog, 73. 2.
sxelvog, inflection of, 70. dia-
lects of, 70. N. 1. neuter
of, 33. N. 1. how used,
149. 2. corresponds to the
English he, 149. N. 2.
epov, epol, ii*iy more emphatic
than pay, pol, fie, 143. N. 4.
after prepositions, ibid.
/, infin. in, 89. N. 2.
before Q , a, 12. N. 3.
evavxlog and nvilaTgocpog with
gen., 186. N. 2.
&o X og with gen., 183. N. 3.
' becomes ex, when, 15. 4.
leo contracted into tv, 23. N. 1.
270
GREEK INDEX.
a^w, augment of, 80. R. 2.
-0, adjectives in, 49.3: 131.2.
inlartpa, 1 N. 3.
-egos, adjectives in, 131. 3.
-s$, neuters in, 42. 2d pers.
sing, in, 85. N. 3.
-taxov, -eoxoprp't -otaxov, -aaxo-
[irir, see -axov, -axoprjv.
-sat, or -saai, dat. plur. in, 35.
N. 3.
tuQog, 73. 2. with gen., 186.
2.
eirjalai, accent of the gen. plur.
_of, 31. N. 2.
tv and 8va-, augment of verbs
beginning with, 82. 3.
fv and xaxwc with certain verbs,
165. N. 2.
-evg inflection of nouns in, 44.
ace. sing, of nouns in,
44. N. 1. nom. plur. of
nouns in, 44. N. 3. Ionic
inflection of nouns in, 44.
N. 4. appellatives in, 127.
3,6.
V w, eV WT, with infin., 220. 1.
<* with* gen., 188. N. 1.
with part., 222. N. 2.
-so), tar, gen. in, 31. N. 3.
-'w, contraction of dissyllabic
verbs in, 116. N. 1, R.
Z.
, power of, 5. 2, N, 2. at
the beginning of a word
does not always make posi-
tion, 17. N. 2.
-fg, see -de.
-, verbs in, 96. 4, N. 5, 6, 7.
H.
ri, original power of, 1. N. 1.
changes of, 2. N. 3.
-^ or -(x%r), adverbs in, 121. 4.
becomes -y t 121. N. 4.
77, tJian, 228. 1. after com-
paratives, 186. N. 5, 6.
between two comparatives,
228. N. 2.
77 for at, 3. N. 3.
-rjdov, see -<5oV.
, 152.
-iff*?, adjectives in, 131.5.
contraction of adjectives in,
53. N. 1.
vi for a, 3. N. 3.
rjxw with gen., 188. N. pres-
ent of, 209. N. 2.
/xo, 73. 1. attracted by
the antecedent, 151. R. 5.
og, adjectives in, 131. 3.
of, 73. 2.
with gen., 186. 2.
-TJV, adjectives in, 53. 4. in-
fin. in, 89. N. 2. optat. in,
87. N. 2.
-?^o / , national appellatives in,
127. 3.
-770, syncopated nouns in, 40.
1,2.
-W g en - ?> inflection of nouns
in, 42. - ace. sing, of proper
names in, 46. N. 1. ad-
jectives in, 52. 1.
-5?, nom. plur. in, 44. N. 3.
e or -yai, dat. plur. in, 31.
N. 3. '
-r\Tr\<;, national appellatives in,
127. 3.
cpi, gen. and dat. in, 31. N. 3.
-riwg, perf. act. part, in, 99. N.
0.
&CITSQOV, 14. N. 1.
, see fiovtei.
, see dvayxr].
>, adverbs in, 121. 2.
-#t, 2d pers. sing, imperat. in,
88. N. 1. becomes it, 14.
N. 4.
-&i, -ai, adverbs in, 121. 1.
&iyydvw with gen., 179. 1.
with ace., 179. N. 1.
GREEK INDEX.
271
V, 14. N. 1.
Q, inflection of, 40. 1.
accent of, 40. N. 3.
I.
-i, inflection of neuters in, 43.
-/ annexed to the demonstra-
tive pronouns, 70. N. 2.
annexed to the demonstrative
pronominal adjectives, 73.
N. 2. annexed to demon-
strative adverbs, 123. N. 2, 3.
-i y -/, adverbs in, 119. 4.
-/a, nouns in, 128. 1.
-i>ddyg, see -Idyg.
-Idyg, -iddyg, patronymics in,
127. 1.
-Idiov, diminutives in, 127. 2.
rtooff, 73. 2. with gen., 174.
N.
-Isig, adjectives in, 131. 5.
hgog with gen., 174. N.
-txoV, adjectives in, 131. 2.
-ifii, verbs in, 117. N. 14.
-ipog, adjectives in, 131. 4.
-Ivdyv, adverbs in, 119. 6.
-Ivy, -iwvy, patronymics in,
127. 1.
-ivog, adjectives in, 131. 2.
national appellatives in, 127.
3.
-tov, diminutives in, 127. 2.
-to?, adjectives in, 131. 1.
national appellatives in, 127.
3.
-ig gen. tog, sag, inflections of
nouns in, 43. 1, 3.
-ig, gen. idog or tog, 46. N. 2.
-ig, adjectives in, 52. 2. pa-
tronymics in, 127. 1. di-
minutives in, 127. 2. na-
tional appellatives in, 127. 3
?, -laxy, diminutives in
127. 2.
), verbs in, 96. 8.
I'aog with dat., 195. 1. with
gen., 195. N. 1. refers to
the limiting noun, 195. N. 2.
jTog, see -Iwv.
-hyg, -uaryg, nouns in, 127, 3,
5.
-(5, fut. in, 102. N. 1.
-low, -WTog, comparison by, 58.
, patronymics in, 127. 1.
-iwvy, see -Ivy.
OTyg, see -hyg.
K.
I 3$, 152.
xw, see sv.
XT, changes of, in composi-
tion, 10. N. 2.
:'w with gen. and ace.,
183.' 2. with two geni-
tives, 183. N. 1. with
part., 222. 2.
, inflection of, 42. N. 3.
compounds of, 55. N. 3.
-xMyg, contraction of nouns in,
42. N. 1.
ygovopito with gen., 178. 2.
with ace. of the thing, 178.
N. 1. with ace. of the
person, ibid.
xoivog with gen., 174. N.
with dat., 195. N. 1.
XOTTTTtt, 1. N. 3.
xoeag, Ttoag, inflection of, 42.
N. 3.
xvxscov, ace. sing, of, 37. N. 2.
, inflection of, 40. 3.
A.
with gen., 178. 2.
with ace., 178. N. 1.
&w, hy&dvw, with ace. and
gen., 182. N. 2.
->Uw, verbs in, 96. 6.
M.
-pa, nouns in, 129. 4.
:, vy, with ace., 171 differ-
ence between, 171. N. 1.
pd omitted, 171. N. 2.- the
272
GREEK INDEX.
name of the god omitted
after, 171. N. 3.
and id^ag y inflection of,
53. R. 1. comparison of,
57. 3.
sAst with gen. and dat., 182,
N.3.
ish, inflection of, 36. N. 2.
with infin., 219. N. I.
u, -pev, infin. in, 89. N. 1.
with gen., 178. 2.
with ace., 178. N.I.
USTSOTI and Tioocnjxet with gen.,
178. N. 2.
/iST6>w with gen., 178. 2.
with ace , 178. N. 1.
fisXQig or ^XQ L > 15. 3. with
gen., 194.
-p7, nouns in, 129. 5.
jj, 224. 3, 4, 5, 6. after
negative expressions, 225.
3.
Wdtis, plural of, 60. N. 1.
pfarjQ, inflection of, 40. 1.
accent of, 40. N. 3. com-
pounds of, 55. N. 2.
-^ut, 1st pers. ind. act. in, 84
1, N. 1. subj. in, 86. N. 2.
verbs in, 117.
liilivyaxw, with ace. and gen.,
182. N. 2. with two accu-
satives, ibid.
(JLV, augment of verbs beginning
with, 76. N. 2.
-pog, nouns in, 129 3.
pov, pot, fis, see ipoi), Ifiol, epe.
-jjiwv, adjectives in, 132. 5.
N.
v before a labial, 12. 1. before
a palatal, 12. 2. before a
liquid, 12. 3. before a or ,
12. 4, 5, N. 2, 4. in the
preposition ev. movable,
15. 1, 2.
vavg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. in-
flection of, 43. 2.
vv\, see ^u.
_J_ with ace., 164. N. 2.
with ace. and gen., 184. 2.
-vrvw, see -vvo.
u$, inflection of, 36. N. 1.
-j>uw, verbs in, 96. 9.
-|, adverbs in, 119. 5.
O.
o, why called pixgov, 1. N. 1.
-o, neuters in, 33. N. 1.
o for off, 19. R. 3.
o'5, inflection of, 70. dialects
of, 70. N. 1. how used,
149. 1. as an adverb, 149.
N. 1.
de, see o piv.
odog omitted after the article,
140. N. 5.
-oeig, adjectives in, 131. 5.
01 for o, 2, N. 3. for ov, 3.
N. 3.
-01 permits the accent to be on
the antepenult, 20. N. 1.
-o7, adverbs in, 121. 1.
ola with gen. absolute, 192.
N. 2.
V, opt. in, 87. N. 2.
-ouv, gen. and dat. dual in, 33.
N. 4 : 35. N. 3.
ol'x5s, yvyade, 121. N. 3.
txao? with gen., 174. N.
Ixot, accent of, 121. N. 1 :
20. N. 1.
-oio, gen. in, 33. N. 4.
-o), adjectives in, 131. 1 .
oloc, 73. 1. attracted by its
antecedent, 151. R. 3, 4.
with infin., 219. N. 2.
oi'ff, inflection of, 43. 2.
olcrtf' o d(To*>, 218. N. 3.
',, dat. plur. in, 33. N. 4.
GREEK INDEX.
273
, with part., 222. N. 2.
with the article, 140. N. 7.
6 tiiv 6 &', 142. 1. the
proper name subjoined to
o fiiv, 142. N. 2. are not
always opposed to each
other, 142. N. 3. o Pre-
fers to something different
from that to which 6 n&v re-
fers, 142. N. 4.
opotog with dat., 195. 1. with
gen., 195. N. 1. refers to
the limiting noun, 195. N. 2.
opov, compounds of, with gen.,
195. N. 1.
-oo?, inflection of nouns in, 34 :
49. 3. accent of the con-
tracted gen. and dat. of
polysyllabic nouns in, 34.
N. 2. comparison of ad-
jectives in, 57. R. 2.
-og, ace. pi. in, 33. N. 4.
-oc, inflection of neuters in, 42.
adjectives in, 49. ab-
stract nouns in, 128. N. 4.
og pep og de, 152.
oaov, ociw, with inf., 220. 1.
oaas, see dovoe.
oaTig, inflection of, 71. 2.
has the force of the inter-
rogative pronoun, 153. N.
o'ffw, see oaov.
ov for o, 2. N. 3.
-ov, or -axov, adverbs in, 121.
1.
ov, ovx, ovx, 15. 4. how used,
224. 1.
ov, augment of verbs beginning
with, 80. N. 4.
ovdslg, nom. plur. of, 60. N. 1.
ovStlg oaTig ov, 225. N.
-ovc, participles in, 53. 5.
ovrog, inflection of, 70. Ionic
forms of, 70. N. 1. how
used, 149. I.
, OVTW, 15. 3.
-o<pi, gen. and dat. in, 33. N. 4.
77.
ndhv in composition, 12. N. 4.
nvtvTodanog, 73. 2.
nag with the article, 140. 5.
without the article, 140. N.
6.
jo, inflection of, 40. 1.
accent of, 40. N. 3. com-
pounds of, 55. N. 2.
koog, -nhdaiog, numeral ad-
jectives in, 62. 3. with
gen., 186. 2.
nolog, 73. 1. with the article.
140. N. 9. with infin., 219.
N. 2.
nohg, Epic inflection of, 43.
N. 4. compounds of, 55.
N. 1.
, derivatives of, 73. 1 :
123.
Iloaudwv, acc. sing, of, 37.
N. 2. voc. sing, of, 38.
N. 2.
C, nom. sing, of, 36. 2.
, omitted after the arti-
cle, 140. N. 5. omitted
before the relative, 150. 5.
omitted before a verb,
157. N. 8. omitted in the
predicate, 160. N. 2.
nglv with subj., 214. 1. with
opt., 216. 1. with infin.,
220. 2.
',, see i
-TITO), verbs in, 96. 2.
P
at the beginning of a word,
4. 2. doubled, 4. 3: 13.
augment of verbs begin-
ning with, 79.
-oa, gen. sing, of feminines in,
31. 3.
for oa, 6. N.
274
GREEK INDEX.
-w, verbs in, 96. 6.
ow, reduplication of, 79. N.2,
$ final, l.N.4. movable, 15.3
-, imperat. in, 117. N. 11.
a between two consonants, 11.
ad for f, 6. N.
crav or aocfinlj 1. N. 3. '
-<j, see -
, 2d pers. sing. act. in, 84
N. 6 : 86. N. 2 : 87. N. 5.
-ai, 2d pers. sing, in, 84. N. 6.
3d pers. sing, in, 84. N.
1 : 86. N. 2.
-at, adverbs in, see -#&.
-aig, -via, nouns in, 129. 3.
ax does not always make posi-
tion, 17. N. 2.
-axov, -a%6(*T]r, imperf. and aor.
in, 85. N. 5.
-ffxw, verbs in, 96. 8, 14.
era changed into TT, see TT.
-craw, feminines in, 127. 7.
-ao-w, -TIW, verbs in, 96. 3, N. 7.
-aorwj>, -TTWV, comparatives in,
58. N. 1.
5- for en, 1. R.
avyyiyvwaxw, see ovvotda.
-avvrj, nouns in, 128. N. 3.
avvoidot and ovyyiyvwaxw with
part., 222. N. 1.
-crept, gen. and dat. in, 35. N. 3.
awTfJo, voc. sing, of, 33. N. 2.
accent of the voc. sing, of,
38. N. 3.
T.
l for , 63. N. 1.
T>la, see pslag.
li&gmnov, 14. N. 1.
-Tfiga, -TQHX, -rolg, feminines in,
129. 2.
-TS'OS, verbal adjectives in, 132.
2. neuter of verbal adjec-
tives in, 162. 2, N. 1, 2:
200. N. 2. with dat., 200. 2.
, -raws, comparison by, 57.
, 73. 1. inflection
of, 73. N. 1.
*7, -Tyg, -TWO, verbal nouns
in, 129. 2.
-T^, voc. sing, of nouns in, 31.
4. abstract nouns in, 128.
N. 2.
, inflection of, 68. dialects
of, 68. N. with the article,
140. N. 9. how used, 147.
does not always stand at
the beginning of a proposi-
tion, 147. N. 1. for nolog,
147. N. 2.
tig, inflection of, 69. 1. dia-
lects of, 69. N. 1. how
used, 148. forexaazo?, 148.
N. 1. refers to the speak-
er, or to the person addressed,
148. N. 2. with adjectives
of quality or quantity, 148.
N. 3. denotes importance,
148. N. 4. doubled, 148.
N. 4.
TO/ for ol, 63. N. 1.
roi6ade, 73. 1. with inf. 219.
N. 2.
iovrog, 73. 1. inflection of,
73. N. 1. with the article,
140. N. 8.
-Tog, verbal adjectives in, 132.
1. with dat., 200. 2.
TO2, 63. N. 2. derivatives
of, 73. 1 : 123.
roaovTog, 73. 1. inflection of,
73. N. 1.
-TO/, 866 -T61QCC-
TT for ffff, 6. N.
VW, with gen., 178. 2.
with ace., 178. N. 1.
-TWO, see -TTJQ.
T.
v, why called j//doV, 1. N. 1.
GREEK INDEX.
275
breathing of, 4. N. 1.
quantity of, 17. N. 3: 36.
N. 5.
-v, contracts in, 43. 3.
-vdgiov, diminutives in, 127. 2.
-v&w, see -&&(*)
vt, improper diphthong, 3. 1,
N. 1.
vlos, omitted after the article,
140. N. 5.
-vUiov, -vttog, diminutives in,
127. 2.
vpedanog, 73. 2.
-vfu, subj. of verbs in, 117. 4, N.
4. optat. of verbs in, 117.
5, 6, N. 7. 2 aor. of verbs
in, 117. N. 16.
vnsv&vvog, with gen., 183. N. 3.
-vg, contracts in, 43. 1,3.
adjectives in, 51. parti-
ciples in, 53. 6.
ixpiov, diminutives in, 127. 2.
see ays.
with gen., 183. R. 1.
-yi, gen. and dat. in, 31. N. 3:
33. N. 4 : 35. N. 3.
ygrtv, compounds of, 55. N. 2.
qigovdog, 14. N. 1.
f, see ol'xnds.
X.
%ovg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2.
Xodonou with dat., 198. N. 1.
Xgj, with gen. and ace. 181.
N. 1. subject of, 159.2.
XO^oirjg, accent of the gen.
plur. of, 31. N. 2.
omitted after the article,
140. N. 5.
V.
uw with gen., 179. 1. with
ace., 179. N. 1.
J2.
CD, why called /u/, 1. N. 1.
changes of, 2. N. 3. for
ov, 3. N. 3.
-w, ace. sing, in, 33. R. 1.
gen. sing, in, 33. N. 4.
inflection of nouns in, 42.
dual and plural of nouns
in, 42. N. 4. Ionic ace.
sing, of nouns in, 42. N. 6.
accent of the contracted
ace. sing, of nouns in, 42.
N. 7.
-wdrjg, adjectives in, 131. 6.
-WTJV, opt. act. in, 117. N. 6.
-tokos, adjectives in, 131. 3.
-wj>, gen. and dat. dual in, 43.
* N. 3.
-tav, -und, nouns in, 127. 4.
-w>, adjectives in, 53. 7, 8.
inflection of comparatives in,
58.2.
6g with gen., 190. 2,
, see -tov.
-wo, gen. in, 33. N. 4.
WQct, see ctvctyxr^
-cos, ace. pi. in, 33. N. 4.
fern, in, 42 gen. sing, in,
43. 3: 44. adjectives in,
50. participles in, 53. 9.
adverbs in, 119. 1.
<ag with dat., 197. N. 1.
with gen. absolute, 192. N.
2. with ace., 192. R. 2.
with inf., 220. 1.
2$ for zoic, 19. R. 3 : 123. N.
1 : 152. N. 2.
with gen. absolute, 192.
N.'2. with ace., 192. R. 2.
ware with gen. absolute, 192.
N. 2. with ace., 192. R. 2.
with indie., 213. 3.
with inf., 220. 1.
ov, diphthong, 3. 1, N. 1.
for av, 3. N. 3.
276
ENGLISH INDEX.
A.
Abstract Nouns, 128 : 129. 1,
N. 1,2. for concrete, 136.
N. 4. ace. of, after kin-
dred verbs, 164.
Acatalectic Verse, 234. 2.
Accent, 19-22. kinds of,
19. 1. place of, 19. 1, 2,
3, 4, R. 1. words without,
19. N. 1, R. 2. 3. grave,
19. N. 2. place of, in
diphthongs, 19.5. on the
antepenult, 20. 1,2, N. 1,2,
3. on the penult, 20. 3.
acute becomes grave, 20. 4.
circumflex, 21. circum-
flex on the penult, 21.2.
of contracted syllables, 23.
N. 3. of words whose last
syllable has been elided, 25.
N. 3. of the first declen-
sion, 31. N. 2. of the sec-
ond declension, 33. N. 3 :
34. N. 2. of the third de-
clension, 35. N. 2: 38. N.3:
42. N. 7: 43. N. 5. of
verbs, 93. of verbs in p,
117. N. 18.
Accusative, 30. 4. sing, of
the third declension, 37.
how used, 163. - 172. de-
notes the subject of the in-
finitive, 158. - after transi-
tive verbs, 163. denoting
the abstract of a transitive
verb, 164. after verbs sig-
nifying to look, fyc. 164. N.
1 . after verbs signifying
to conquer > 164. N. 2. two
accusatives after verbs sig-
nifying to ask, fyc. 165. 1,
N. 1. to do, to say, 165.
N. 2. to divide, 165.2.
to name, fyc. 166. synec-
dochical, 167. in paren-
thetical phrases, 167. N. 2.
subjoined to a clause, 167.
N. 4. denotes duration of
time, 168. 1,N. 1. of time
when, 168. 2. for the gen.
absolute, 168. N. 2. -de-
notes extent of space, 169.
of place whither, 170.
after pd, vt] t 171. omitted
after ^, MJ, 171. N. 3.
with prepositions, 72. af-
ter adjectives, 185. N. 1.
Active Voice, 74. 1. forma-
tion of the tenses of, 94-
105. how used, 205. as
passive, 205. N. 2, 3, R.
Acute Accent, 19. 1,2. on
the antepenult, 20. 2, 3, N.
1, 2, 3. becomes grave,
20.4.
Adjective, 30. 1. inflection
of, 48-59. of three end-
ings, 48. 1. of two endings,
48. 2. of one ending, 48.
3:54. in og, 49. in &??
gen. ft>, 50. in vg gen. 8og,
51. in r\g, ig, 52. in ag, e'tg,
ovg, tig, (ov, wg gen. OTO?, 53.
compound, 55. anomalous
and defective, 56. com-
parison of, 57-59. deriva-
tion of, 130-133. derived
from other adjectives, 130.
ENGLISH INDEX.
277
from subst., 131. from
verbs, 132. from adverbs,
133. agreement of, 137.
mas. adj. with fern, subst.,
137. N. 1. referring to two
or more substantives, 137. 2,
N. 5. agrees with one of
the substantives to which it
refers, 137. N. 4. referring
to a collective noun, 137. 3.
plural agrees with a dual
subst., and vice versa, 137.
N. 6. used substantively,
138. 1. neuter, 138.2.
used adverbially, 138. N. 1.
Admiration, Mark of, 27. N.2.
Adverb, 29. 2. of manner,
119. of quantity, 120.
of place, 121. of time, 122.
derived from IIO2, 123.
comparison of, 125. an-
omalous comparison of, 125.
N.3. with the article, 141.
1,2, N.I. with gen., 177:
181 : 186: 188.2, N. 1.
with dat., 195. 1. limits
what, 223. negative, 224 :
225.
Alphabet, 1. 1. division of
the letters of, 1. 2.
Alpha Privative, 135. 4.
Anapestic Verse, 252 - 255.
Anastrophe, 226. N. 1.
Antecedent, 150. 1.
Antepenult, 16. 3.
Aorist, 74. 3. augment of, 78.
reduplication of, 78. N. 2.
1st pers. sing, of 1 aor.
act., 84. N. 2. in erxov, axo-
fjHjv, 85. N. 5. inflection
of aor. pass., 92. 2 aor.
mid. syncopated, 92. N. 4.
formation of, 104: 105:
109: 110: 115. 2 aor. act.
of verbs in p, 117. 12.
24
how used, 212. for the
perfect or pluperfect, 212. N.
|._for the present, 212. N.
2, 4. for the future, 212.
N. 3.
Aphaeresis, 26. 3.
Apodosis, 213. R.
Apostrophe, 27.
Arsis, 233. 2.
Article, 29. 1. inflection of,
63. quantity, accent, and
dialects of, 63. N. ]. old
form of, 63. N. 2. how
used, 139 - 142. with
proper names, 139. 3. ac-
companies the leading char-
acter of a story, 139. N. 1.
with the second accusative
after verbs signifying to call,
139. N. 2. separated from
its noun, 140. 1, N. 1, R. 2.
two or three articles stand-
ing together, 140. R. 1. re-
peated, 140. 2. with the
part., 140. '3, N. 3. adjec-
tive standing before or after
the substantive and its article,
140. N. 4. alone, 140.5.
without a noun, 140. N. 5.
with pronouns, 140. 5. with
o'Aoc and X(JTOC, 140. N. 7. -
with Toiovxog, 140, N. 8.
with ilg and THHOC, 140. N.
9. with del, 140. N. 10.
before adverbs, 141. 1,
2, N. 1 . before a proposi-
tion, 141. 3. before any
word, 141. 4, N. 2, 3. as
demonstrative, 142. 1. be-
fore oc, ooog, olo?, 142. N. 1.
as relative, 142. 2. neu-
ter with gen., 176.
Atona, 19. N. 1.
Attraction with the Relative,
151.
278
ENGLISH INDEX.
Augment, 75. kinds of, 75.
2. syllabic, 75.2: 76-79.
of theperf, 76. of the
pluperf., 77. of the imperf.
and aor., 78, of verbs be-
ginning with Q, 79. tern
poral, 80 : 81. of compound
verbs, 8*2. omitted, 78. N.
3 : 80. N. 4, 5.
B.
Barytone, 19. 4.
Breathings, 4. of v y 4. N. 1.
of Q, 4. 2, 3. place of, 4.
4. _ power of, 4. 5, N. 2.
rough changed into smooth,
14. N. 5.
C.
Caesura, 235.
Cases, 30. 4. how used, 162
-204.
Catalectic verse, 234. 2.
Causative, see Verbs.
Circumflex, 19. 1, 3: 21. on
the penult, 21.. 2.
Collective Nouns, 137.3: 157.
4.
Colon, 27.
Comma, 27.
Comparison by ifgog, jctto?, 57
of substantives, 57. N. 4.
of pronouns, 57. N. 5.
by lav, taxog, 58. anoma-
lous and defective, 59. of
adverbs, 125.
Composition of Words, 135.
Concrete, see Abstract.
Conjunction, 29. 2. how
used, 228.
Connecting Vowel, 85. 1.
Consonants, 1.2. division of,
5: 6. final, 5. N. 3. eu-
phonic changes of, 7 - 14.
movable, 15.
Contraction, 23. accent in,
23. N. 3.
Copula, 160. 1.
Coronis, 27.
Crasis, 24. left to pronun-
ciation, 24. N. 2.
D.
Dactylic Verse, 246-251.
Dative, 30. 4. plural of the
third declension, 39. how
used, 195-203. after
words implying resemblance,
fyc. 195. after adjectives,
198. 1. after verbs, 192.2.
after impersonal verbs,
ibid. after verbs signify-
ing to be, 196. 3, N. 2.
with interjections, 196. 5.
denotes with regard to,
197. 1. preceded by ug t
197. N. 1. apparently su-
perfluous, 197. N.2. limits
words, 197. 2. with com-
paratives, 197. N 3. with
substantives, 197. N. 4. of
cause, 4*c. 198. with /oo-
juat, 198..N. 1. of accom-
paniment, 199 of tturo'c,
199. N. 1," denotes the sub-
ject, 200 : 206. 2. with
verbal adjectives in TO? and
Tto?, 200. 2. of time, 201.
for the gen. absolute, 201 .
N. 2. of place, 202. with
prepositions, 203.
Declensions, 30. 3.
Defective, see Noun, Adjective,
Comparison.
Demonstrative Pronoun, 70.
dialects of, 70. N. 1. with
/, 70. N.2. pronominal ad-
jectives, 73. 1. how used,
149. _ as adverb, 1 49. N.I.
subjoined to a noun in the
same proposition, 149. N. 3.
subjoined to a relative,
149. N. 4.
ENGLISH INDEX.
279
Deponent Verbs, 208. perf.
and pluperf. of, 208. N. 2.
aor. pass, of, 208. N. 3.
Derivation of Words, 126-134.
Desideratives, 134. N. 2.
Diaeresis, 27. N. 1.
Digamma, 1. N. 3.
Diminutives, 127. 2.
Diphthongs, 3. improper, 3.
N. 2. commutation of, 3.
N. 3. improper, in capitals,
4. 4.
Dipody, 234. 3.
Dissyllables, 16. 2.
Dual, 29. 3 : 30. N.2: 137. N.
1,5,6,7,8: 150. N.I: 157.
N. 1, 4, R. 1.
E.
Elision, 25. before a conso-
nant, 25. N. 2.
Enclitics, 22. retain their ac-
cent, 22. 4, N. 1. suc-
ceeding each other, 22. N. 2.
Euphonic Changes, see Conso-
nants.
F.
Feet, 233. 1.
Final, see Consonants, Syllable.
First Declension, endings of,
31. 1. gender of, 31.2.
voc. sing, of, 31. 4. quan-
tity of, 31. N. 1. accent
of, 31. N. 2. dialects of,
31. N. 3. contracts of, 32.
Future, 74. 3. augment of
the third, 75. 1. formation
of, 102:103:111: 112: 114.
how used, 209. 4, N. 10 :
211. periphrastic, 209. N.
1.
G.
Gender, 30. 2. how distin-
guished in grammar, ibid.
masc. for fern., 137. N. 1.
implied, 137. N. 2, 3 :
150. N. 2.
Genitive, 30. 4. of the third
declension, 36. 1. how
used , 1 73 1 94. adnomin-
al, 173. relations denoted
by the adnominal, 173. N. 1.
subjective and objective,
173. N. 2. two adnominal
genitives, 173. N. 3. sub-
joined to possessive words,
174. with i'dioc, &c. 178.
N. with verbs signifying
to be, fyc. 175. after the
neuter article, 176. denot-
ing a whole, 177. after a
participle with the article,
177. N. 1. after dcti{i6viog,
&c. 177. N. 3. after neu-
ter adjectives, 177. 2, N. 4.
of the reflexive pronoun,
177. N. 5. after verbs re-
ferring to a part., 178. 1.
after verbs signifying to par-
take, fyc. 178. 2. to take
liold of, fyc. 179. to let
go, fyc. 180. after words
denoting fulness, fyc. 181.
after verbs signifying to
remember, fyc. 182. to
accuse, fyc. 183. to be-
gin fyc. 184. after verbal
adjectives, 185. after com-
paratives, 186. denoting
on account of, 187. 1.
after exclamations, 187. 2.
after verbs signifying to
entreat, 187. 3. denoting
the subject, 187. 4. of in-
strument, 187. 5. denot-
ing in respect of. 188. af-
ter adverbs, 188. 2. after
verbs signifying to take aim
at, $c. 188. 3. of mate-
280
ENGLISH INDEX.
rial, 189. of price, 190.
of time, 191. absolute,
192. of place, 193. with
prepositions, 194.
Grave Accent, 19. 1, N. 2.
for the acute, 20. 4.
H.
Historical, see Secondary Tens-
es.
I.
Iambic Verse, 241 - 245.
Imperative, 74. 2. termina-
tions and connecting vowels,
88. how used, 218. in
prohibitions, 218. 2. se-
cond person of, for the third,
218. N. 2. in connection
with the relative, 218. N. 3.
perf. of, 209. N. 7, 8.
Imperfect, 74. 3. - augment
of, 78. in axov, axo^uj?*', 85.
N. 5. formation of, 97 :
100. 2: 113. how used,
210. denotes an attempt,
210. N. 1. denotes a cus-
tomary action, 210. N. 2.
for aor., 210. N. 3. for
pres., 210. N. 4.
Impersonal Verbs, 159. N. 1,
2. with dat., 192. 2.
Indefinite, Pronoun, 69. pro-
nominal adjectives, 73. 1.
adverbs, 123. how used,
148.
Indicative, 74. 2. termina-
tions and connecting vowels
of, 84 : 85. of verbs in pi,
117. 2, 3. how used, 213.
in independent proposi-
tions, 213. 1. after inter-
rogative and relative words,
213. 2. - after particles,
213, 3, N 4,5, 6. in con-
ditional propositions, 213. 4,
5. with V, 213. N. 3.
Infinitive. 74. 2. termina-
tions and connecting vowels
of, 89. of verbs in p, 117.
8, 9. subject of, 158.
after verbs, participles, and
adjectives, 119. 1 . denotes
a cause, 119. 2. for the
indie., 1 19. N. 4. omitted,
119. N. 5. for the im-
perat., 119. N. 6, 7. for
the subj., 119. N. 8. ex-
presses a wish, 119. N. 9.
with wW, &c. 220. 1.
with TIQIV, &,c. 220. 1. in
parenthetical phrases, 220.
N. 1 , 2, 3. with Zv, 220.
3. as a neuter substantive,
221. for the gen. of cause,
221. N. 1. in exclama-
tions of surprise, 221. N. 2.
superfluous, 221. N. 3.
after avdyxr}, &c. 221. N. 4.
Inflection of words, 29-135.
Interjection, 29. 2. how used,
229.
Interrogation, 27.
Interrogative, Pronoun, 68.
dialects of, 68. N. pro-
nominal adjectives, 73. 1.
adverbs, 123. how used,
147.
Intransitive, see Verbs.
Iota Subscript, 3. 1.
Irregular Construction, 230.
K.
Koppa, 1. N. 3.
L.
Labials, 6. before linguals,
7. before ^ and a, 8.
Leading, see Primary Tenses.
Letters and Syllables, 1 - 28.
Linguals, 6. before ^u, a, and
before palatals and other
linguals, 10.
Liquids, 5. 1.
ENGLISH INDEX.
281
M.
Metathesis, 26. 2.
Middle Mutes, 5. 3.
Middle Voice, 74. 1. tenses
of, 113-115. how used,
207. as active, 207. N. 4,
5. as passive, 207. N. 6. 7.
Moods, 74. 2. terminations
and connecting vowels of,
84 - 90. how used,
213-221.
Movable, see Consonants.
Monosyllables, 16. 2.
N.
National Appellatives, 127. 3.
Negative, Particles, 224.
formulas, 224. N. 1, 2, 3.
two negatives, 225.
Neuter, 30. 2. has three
cases alike, 30. N. 1. ad-
jectives with the article, 138.
2. plural with a sing, verb,
157. 2. adjective in the
predicate, 160. N. 1, 2.
Nominative, 30. 4. sing, of
the third declension, 36.
how used, 157. for the
voc., 157. N. 11. without
a verb, 230. 1 .
Noun, 30. indeclinable, 45.-*-
anomalous, 46.- defective, 47.
Numbers, 29. 3. commuta-
tion of, 137. N. 6, 7, 8:
157. N. 4.
Numerals, Marks of, 1. N. 3,
5, 6. cardinal, 60. or-
dinal, 61. substantives,
adjectives, and adverbs, 62.
O.
Object, 162. immediate, 163.
Optative, 74. 2. terminations
and connecting vowels of,
87. periphrastic perf., 87.
N. 1. perf. pass., 91. 3, 5.
of verbs in pi, 117. 5, 6.
of verbs in vju, 1 17. N. 7.
how used, 216: 217.
after particles, 216. 1.
after interrogative and rela-
tive words, 216. 2. after
the past tenses, 216. 3, 4.
after the present or future,
216. N. 1,2. expresses a
wish, 217. 1, N. 1. in in-
dependent propositions, 217.
2. for the ind., 217. 3.
for the imperat., 217. 4.
Oxytone, 19. 2.
P.
Palatals, 6. before linguals,
7. before ^ and a, 9.
Parenthesis, Marks of, 27.
Participle, formation of, 90.
of verbs in /ui, 117. 10, 11.
with the article, 140. 3,
N. 3. followed by the case
of its verb, 162. 2. how
used, 222. with verbs sig-
nifying to know, fyc. 222. 2,
N. 1. to endure, fyc. 222.
3. with dtccylyvofiai, x. i. A.
222. 4. with %o>, x. t. L
222. N. 2. fut., 222. 5.
pres., 222. N. 3. with ad-
verbs, 222. N. 4. with V,
222. 6.
Parts of Speech, declinable,
29. 1. indeclinable, 29. 2.
Passive Voice, 74. 1. tenses
of, 106-112. how used,
206. subject of, 206. 1, 2.
N. 1. retains the latter
case, 206. 3. as middle,
206. N. 2.
Patronymics, 127. 1.
Penult, 16. 3.
Perfect, 74. 3. augment of,
76. syncopated, 91. N. 6,
7, 8, 9. formation of, 98 :
99: 107: 113. how used,
282
ENGLISH INDEX.
209. 2. aspres., 209. N.
4. expresses a customary
action, 209. N. 5. - for the
fut, 209. N. 6. imperat.,
209. N. 7, 8.
Period, 27.
Perispomenon, 19. 3.
Person, 74. 4.
Personal Pronoun, 64. dia-
lects of, 64. N. 2 . how
used, 143 : 144. of the
third person, 143. N. 1, 2.
repeated, 143. N. 3.
tyov and pou, 143. N. 4.
Pluperfect, 74. 3. augment
of, 77. in , 85. N. 4.
passive, 91. 1. syncopated,
91. N. 6, 7, 8. formation
of, 100: 101: 108: 113.
how used, 209. 4. as im-
perf. 209. N. 4, 9. as aor.,
209. N. 9.
Polysyllables, 16. 2.
Possessive Pronoun, 67. dia-
lects of, 67. N. 1. how
used, 146. used objective-
ly, 146. N. 1. third pers.
of, 146. N. 2, 3.
Predicate, 156: 160. noun
in, 160. 2, 3.
Preposition, 29. 2. how used,
226 : 227. primitive, 226.
1. after the noun, 226. N.
1. for dpi, 226. N. 2.
separated by tmesis, 226.
N. 3, 4, 5. in composition,
135. 3, N. 6, 7, 8. with
ace., 172. with gen., 194.
with dat., 203.
Present, 74. 3. formation of,
94 - 96. simple or original,
96. how used, 209. 1.
for the aor., 209. N. 1. for
the peril, 209. N. 2. for
the fut., 209. N. 3.
Primary or Leading Tenses,
74. 3 terminations of,
84. 1.
Privative , 135. 4.
Pronominal Adjectives, 73.
Pronoun, 64-72. how used,
143 - 155.
Pronunciation, 28. Modern
Greek, 28. 2.
Proparoxytone, 19. 2.
Protasis, 213. R.
Punctuation Marks, 27.
Pure Syllable, 16. 4.
a.
Quantity, 17 : 18. of , *, v,
17. N. 3. Marks of, 2:27:
of the first declension, 31.
N. 1 . of the second de-
clension, 33. N. 2. of the
third declension, 35. N. 1 :
36. N. 5.
R.
Reciprocal Pronoun, 72.
how used, 155. for the re-
flexive, 155. N.
Reduplication, 76. 1. of the
2 aor., 78. N. 2. Attic, 81.
Reflexive Pronoun, 66. dia-
lects of, 66. N. 4, 5. how
used, 145. of the third
person, 145. N. 1. for the
reciprocal, 145. N. 2.
Relative Pronoun, 71. dia-
lects of, 71. N. 1. how
used, 150 - 154. referring
to two or more nouns, 150.
2. - referring to a collective
noun, 150. 3. before its
antecedent, 150. 4 : 151. 3.
refers to an omitted ante-
cedent, 150. 5. refers to a
possessive pronoun, 150. N.
7. attracted, 151. 1.
attracts its antecedent, 151.
2. as demonstrative, 152.
ENGLISH INDEX.
283
as interrogative, 153.
for IW, 154. verb of, 157.
N. 6.
Relative Adverb, 123. be-
fore its antecedent, 150. N.
6. attracted, 151. N. 2.
attracts its antecedent, 151.
N. 3. as demonstrative,
152. N. 2.
Root, of nouns of the third
declension, 36. R. 1. of
verbs and tenses, 83.
tive words, 214. 2, 4. afte*
pres. or fut., 214. 3. aftei
past tenses, 214. N. 1. in
exhortations, 215. for the
fut. ind. , 215. N. 3. in pro-
hibitions, 215. 5.
Substantive, 30. 1. deriva-
tion of, 127- 129. in ap-
position, 136. as an adjec-
tive, 136. N. 3.
Syllables, 16.
Syncope, 26. 1.
Rough Consonants, 5. 3. in.Synecdochical, see Accusative,
two successive syllables, 14. Synecphonesis or Synizesis,
3, N. 2, 3, 4. not doubled, | 23. N. 2.
14. 4. Syntax, 136-232.
S. T.
Tenses, 74. 3. root of, 83. 2.
terminations of, 84.
how used, 209 -212.
| Thesis, 233.2.
San or Sampi, 1. N. 3.
Secondary or Historical Tens-
es, 74. 3. terminations of,
84.2.
Second Declension, endings of,
33. 1. gender of, 33. 2.
quantity of, 33. N. 2 ac-
cent of, 33. N. 3. dialects
of, 33. N . 4. contracts of,
34.
Smooth Breathing, see Breath-
ings.
Smooth Consonants, 5. 3. be-
Third Declension, endings of,
35. 1. gender of, 35. 2.
quantity of, 35. N. 1. ac-
cent of, 35. N. 2. dialects
of, 35. N. 3. formation of
the cases of, 36-39. syn-
copated nouns of, 40. con-
tracts of, 42 - 44.
Tmesis, 226. N. 3, 4, 5.
fore the rough breathing, 14. Trochaic Verse, 237-239.
1,2. V.
Subject, 156-159. of a fi- Vau, 1. N. 3.
nite verb, 157. omitted, Verbal Roots and Termina-
157. N. 8. of the inf., 158. | tions, 83-92.
of impersonal verbs, 159.1 Verb, 74- 118. accent of,
N. 1, 2.
Subjunctive, 74. 2. termina-
tions and connecting vowels
of, 86. periphrastic perf,
86. N.I. perf. pass., 91.
3,4. of verbs in p, 117. 4,
N. 4. how used, 214 : 215.
after particles, 214. 2.
after interroative and rela-
93. division of, 94. 2.
penult of pure, 95. con-
tract, 116. in pi, 117.
anomalous, 118. subject
of a finite, 157. transitive
and intransitive, ^05. 1.
causative, 205 2. passive,
206. middle, 207. de-
. ponent, 203.
284
ENGLISH INDEX.
Verse, final syllable of, 236.
Versification, 233. -255.
Vocative, 30. 4. of the first
declension, 31. 4. of the
third declension, 38. how
used, 204.
Voices, 74. 1 . how used,
205-208.
Vowels, 1. 2: 2. doubtful, 2.
N. 1, R. commutation of,
2. N. 3. short, before a
mute and liquid, 17. 3. ,
long made short and vice ver-
sa, 18. connecting, 85. 1.
Z.
Zeugma, 231.
cu
CUJ
X
D
et
4
Q4C
ABBREVIATIONS
ai
3? Ini
&
djto
<&> *i-
%>
av
dj V
or
7*9
Zw v\v
g
77
yv
** \ KCUl
<fe I
D
79
M. AA
^>
Se
A^; jttfv
r
SL
(^ o?
^
Sia
^ ov
TP
1
<5&f T^ 6 ?'
8T
r
Ix
ex e^
^
Ir
e? t
e
15SJ
rat
rav
TlfV
tijs
TO
TOV
1&V
vv
VTtO
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
BERKELEY
Return to desk from which borrowed.
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.
. LD 21-100m-ll,'49(B7146sl6)476
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY